M 3425A INSTRUCTION BOOK

Transcript

1 Instruction Book M-3425A Generator Protection

2 PROTECTION Generator Protection M‑3425A ® for Generators of All Sizes Integrated Protection System Unit shown with optional M‑3925A Target Module and M‑3931 HMI (Human‑Machine Interface) Module IEEE C37.102 and Standard 242 requirements for generator Exceeds • protection Protects generators of any prime mover, grounding and connection type • • Provides all major protective functions for generator protection including Out-of-Step (78), Split-Phase Differential (50DT), (81A), Time Accumulation Inadvertent Under Frequency (50/27) and Turn-to-Turn Fault Energizing (59X) ® Expanded IPScom Communications • provides simple and Software logical setting and programming, including logic schemes • application with Base and Comprehensive protection packages Simple • encroachment blinders and power swing blocking for Load security protection (21) to enhance system during backup system abnormal conditions • Options: Ethernet Connection, Field Ground/Brush Lift-Off Protection (64F/B), Check (25), 100% Stator Sync Ground Fault Protection by low frequency injection (64S) and Expanded I/O (15 additional Output Contacts and 8 additional Control/Status Inputs)

3 M‑3425A Generator Protection Relay Protective Functions Optional Protective Functions Check with Phase Angle, ∆ V and • Sync F ∆ Base Package dead line/dead bus (25) with options (V/Hz) • Overexcitation (24) Brush Off (64B) and (64F) Ground • Field Lift (27) Undervoltage • Phase Ground Field M-3921 (Includes Coupler) • Directional point set - ple tri sitive sen er pow by low • 100% Stator Ground protection Low Pow er, Reverse or er Pow Forward injection frequency following The (64S). detection, one of which can be Overpower option: with the 64S equipment is required (32) tripping sequential for used signal – Hz 00426) generator (430 - 20 Loss • Dual - zone, offset - mho of Field (40), 00427) applied which with undervoltage (430 Filter Band-pass may be – - tripping accelerated controlled CT 20 A 400/5 – Hz 00428) - (430 Overcurrent Sequence Negative • Sensitive Standard Features (46) alarm and protection and outputs le six • Eight programmab Overcurrent Phase • Instantaneous (50) programmable inputs Energizing • Inadvertent (50/27) COMTRADE • Oscillographic recording with Failure Breaker • Generator (50BF) or format BECO (50N) • Instantaneous Neutral Overcurrent target • Time-stamped storage events 32 for Neutral Time • Inverse Overcurrent (51N) parameters • Metering of all measured and Time • Three-phase vercurrent O Inverse calculated values and control voltage with re - voltage (51V) ports communications • Three RS-232 (two straint. and RS-485) one • Phase (59) Overvoltage ® 3820D - • M Communications Software IPScom • Neutral Overvoltage (59N) BECO 2200 protocols MODBUS and • Includes Overvoltage (59X) • Multi-purpose k-mount (ve ign des 19" rac rtical • Standard and F use - Loss Detection blocking • VT mounting available) (60FL) circuit board and • Removable printed power supply (67N) Overcurrent Directional • Residual available 60 Hz and • 50 models (81) Over/Underfrequency step - • Four • Both 1A and 5 rated CT inputs available A ifferential D Current (87) hase P • • Additional connected inputs for externally trip • Ground (zero sequence) Differential devices Current (87GD) synchronization • IRIG-B time the contact input status • IPSlogic takes and C • Operating Temperature: – 20° C to +70° and by outputs generates status function • Sequence of Events Log AND, (OR, employing boolean NOT) and • Trip Circuit Monitoring and logic timer. a Monitoring • Breaker Protective Functions • Four Setpoint Groups Comprehensive Package Optional Features Base Pack - Comprehensive The Package includes all • Redundant following: the as well as functions, age power supply • M - 3925A Target Module - for protection Distance Phase zone • Three phase (HMI) Interface • M - 3931 fault backup protection (21). Zone Human-Machine Module Blocking. Out-of-Step for used be can three Load blinders can be applied. encroachment utilizing over MODBUS port Ethernet • RJ45 TCP/IP over BECO2200 and TCP/IP Fault • 100% Stator Ground - protection using pro Neutral (27TN) oltage Underv Harmonic Third tocols Differential Voltage Harmonic Third or (59D) Pro - • RJ45 Ethernet port utilizing IEC 61850 (ratio) tocol ® (Positive (49) Overload • Stator Sequence 3801D - IPSplot • M PLUS Oscillograph Overcurrent) Analysis Software Time Overcurrent • Definite (50DT) can be (15 additional outputs and I/O • Expanded used phase differential split for additional 8 inputs) of - • Out (78) Step - ava and Expanded • Standard I/O Models ilable in mount panel vertical • UnderFrequency Accumulation (81A) (81R) • Rate of Change of Frequency –2–

4 M‑3425A Generator Protection Relay PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS Setpoint Device † Function Increment Accuracy Number Ranges zone mho characteristic) ‑ Phase Distance (three #1,#2,#3 0.1 to Ω 0.1 Circle Ω  0.1 Ω or 5% Diameter 100.0 (0.5 to 500.0 Ω ) (  0.5 Ω or 5%) Offset #1,#2,#3 – 100.0 to 100.0 Ω 0.1 Ω  0.1 Ω or 5% 5%) or 500.0 to 500.0 Ω ) (  0.5 Ω – ( 21 #1,#2,#3 0° to 90° 1°  1° Angle Impedance #1,#2,#3 Load Encroachment Blinder 1° to 90° 1°  1° Angle 100 Reach to 0.1 Ω R Delay #1,#2,#3 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle  1 Cycle or  1% Time Out-of-Step Delay 1 to 8160 Cycles 1  1 Cycle or  1% Cycle Overcurrent Supervision 0.1 to 20 A 0.1 A  0.1 A or  2% A to 4 A) 0.01 A  0.02 or  2% (0.02 When out-of-step blocking on Zone 1 or Zone 2 is enabled, Zone 3 will not trip and it will be used to detect the out- of-step condition for blocking Function 21 #1 and/or 21 #2. Volts / Hz Definite Time Pickup #1, #2 100 to 200% 1%  1% Time #1, #2 30 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle  25 Cycles Delay Inverse Time 24 to 200% 1%  1% 100 Pickup – Time #1 es Inverse #4 — — Characteristic Curv Dial: Curve #1 1 to 100 1  1% Time to Curves #2 – #4 0.0 9.0 0.1  1% Time Dial: Rate 1 to 999 Sec. 1 Sec.  1 Second or  1% Reset (from threshold of trip) The percent pickup is based on nominal VT secondary voltage and nominal system frequency settings. The pickup accuracy stated is only applicable from 10 to 80 Hz, 0 to 180 V, 100 to 150% V/Hz and a nominal voltage setting of 120 V. Phase Undervoltage #1, #2, #3 5 to 180 V 1 V  V or  0.5% Pickup 0.5  0.8 V or  0.75%* 27 #1, #2, #3 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle  1 Cycle or  0.5%** Time Delay Ground to Line Line VT connection is selected. * When both RMS and Line - -  20 cycles or O **When RMS (total waveform) is selected, timing accuracy is 1%. † greater of these accuracy values. Select Values in parentheses apply to 1 A CT secondary rating. the –3–

5 M‑3425A Generator Protection Relay PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS ( cont .) Setpoint Device † Increment Function Accuracy Ranges Number Harmonic Undervoltage, Neutral ‑ Third #1, #2 0.10 to 14.00 V 0.01 V  0.1 or  1% Pickup V Positive Sequence V 5 to 180 Voltage 1 Block  0.5 V or  0.5% V Forward Under Po wer Block 0.01 to 1.00 PU 0.01 PU  0.01 PU or  2% 0.01 Reverse Po wer Block –1.00 to –0.01 PU Under PU  0.01 PU or  2% Lead Under VAr Block –1.00 to –0.01 PU 0.01 PU  0.01 PU or  2% 27 TN Lag Under VAr Block 0.01 to 1.00 PU 0.01 PU  0.01 PU or  2%  Factor Block 0.01 to 1.00 0.01 wer 0.03 PU or  3% Lead Po Po wer Factor Block 0.01 to 1.00 0.01  0.03 PU or  3% Lag Forw ard High Band Block 0.01 to 1.00 PU 0.01 PU  0.01 PU or  2% Power Low Forw ard Band PU 0.01 to 1.00 Power PU 0.01 Block  0.01 PU or  2% Time Delay #1, #2 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle –1 to +5 Cycles or  1% Directional Power #2, #3 – 3.000 to +3.000 PU 0.001 PU  0.002 PU or  2% Pickup #1, 32 #1, #3 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle +16 Cycles or  1% Delay Time #2, The minimum Pickup limits are – .002 and +.002 respectively. The per-unit pickup is based on nominal VT secondary voltage and nominal CT secondary current settings. This function can be selected as either overpower or underpower in the forward direction (positive setting) or reverse direction (negative setting). Element #3 can be set as real power or reactive power. This function includes a pro- grammable target LED that may be disabled. ‑ zone offset mho characteristic) Loss of Field (dual ‑ #1, #2 0.1 to 100.0 Ω 0.1 Ω  0.1 Ω or  5% Circle Diameter Ω 500.0 Ω ) (  0.5 or  5%) to (0.5 #2 – 50.0 to 50.0 Ω 0.1 Ω  0.1 Ω or  5% Offset #1, 40 – 250.0 to 250.0 Ω ) (  0.5 Ω or  5%) ( Delay #2 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle  1 Cycle or  1% Time #1, Delay Time with  #2 1 to 8160 Control 1 Cycle #1, 1 Cycle or  1% Voltage Cycles Control 5 to 180 V 1 V  0.5 V or  0.5% Voltage sequence) (positive 0° to 20° 1° Directional — Element Time delay with voltage control for each zone can be individually enabled. † of these accuracy values. Select Values in parentheses apply to 1 A CT secondary rating. the greater –4–

6 M‑3425A Generator Protection Relay PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS ( cont .) Setpoint Device † Increment Accuracy Number Ranges Function Negative Sequence Overcurrent Definite Time to 100% 1%  0.5% 5 A Pickup 3 of A) 0.5% of 1  ( Delay 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle  1 C ycle or  1% Time Inverse Time 3 to 100% 1%  0.5 % of 5 Pickup A of A) 1 0.5%  ( 46 Dial Setting 1 to 95 1  3 Cycles or  3% Time 2 I t) (K= 2 Maximum Definite to Trip 600 to 65,500 Cycles 1 Cycle  1 Cycle or  1% Time Time 12 Cycles — fixed Definite Minimum Time (Linear) 1 to 600 Seconds 1 Second  1 Second or  Reset 1% threshold of trip) (from Pickup is based on the generator nominal current setting. Stator Overload Protection Constant #1, #2 1.0 to Time 999.9 minutes 0.1 minutes 49 or Current 1.00 to 10.00 A 0.01 A  0.1 A load  2% Over Maximum (0.20 to 2.00 A) Instantaneous Phase Overcurrent #1, #2 0.1 to 240.0 A 0.1 A  0.1 A or  3% Pickup 0.02 (0.1 to 48.0 A) (  A or  3%) 50 Delay #1, #2 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle  1 Cycle or  1% Time . –5 ) Hz add an additional time of (1.5/f + 0.033) sec to the time delay accuracy When frequency f is < (f nom Breaker Failure Pickup 50 BF-Ph to 10.00 A 0.01 A  0.1 A or  2% Current 0.10 Phase 50  A) (  0.02 A or 2%) to 2.00 (0.02 50 BF BF-N A 0.01 A  0.1 A or  2% Neutral Current 0.10 to 10.00 A) (  0.02 A or  2%) (0.02 to 2.00 1% 1 8160 Cycle  1 Cycle or  Cycles Time Delay to 1 3425A output contacts or programmable control/status inputs. - 50BF can be initiated from designated M Definite Time Overcurrent #2 0.20 A to 240.00 A 0.01 A  0.1 A or  3% Pickup Phase A #1, 3%) 48.00 (  0.02 A or  to A (0.04 A) 50 DT abov #2 (same e) Pickup Phase B #1, as as abov e) #2 (same #1, C Phase Pickup to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle  1 Cycle or  1% Time Delay #1, #2 1 This function uses generator line-side currents. When 50DT function is used for split-phase differential protection, 50BF, 87, and 87GD functions should not be inputs must be connected to the split phase differential currents. I and I , used, and the I C A B † values. Select Values in parentheses apply to 1 A CT secondary rating. the greater of these accuracy –5–

7 M‑3425A Generator Protection Relay PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS ( cont .) Setpoint Device † Number Accuracy Ranges Function Increment Instantaneous Neutral Overcurrent 240.0 A 0.1 A  0.1 A or  Pickup 0.1 to 3% 50N A) (  0.02 to or  3%) (0.1 48.0 A 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle  1 Cycle or  1% Time Delay . –5) Hz add an additional time of (1.5/f + 0.033) sec to the time delay accuracy When the frequency f is < (f nom Inadvertent Energizing Overcurrent 50 15.00 A 0.01 A  A or  2% Pickup 0.5 to 0.1 3.00 A) A (  0.02 or  2%) (0.1 to 50/ 27 Undervoltage 27 Pickup V 1 V  0.5 V to 130 5 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle  1 Cycle or  1% 1 Pick-up Time Delay to to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle  1 Cycle or  1% Drop-out Time Delay 1 When RMS (total Waveform) is selected, timing accuracy is O 20 cycles or  1%. Inverse Time Neutral Overcurrent Pickup 0.01 A  0.1 A or  1% to 0.25 12.00 A (  0.02 A or A)  1%) 2.40 to (0.05 51N Curv Inv erse/Extremely Inv erse/IEC ery es Definite e Curv Characteristic Time/Inverse/V Inv erse/Extremely Inv erse/IEEE Curv es Moderately Inv erse/Very 0.5 11.0 0.1  3 Cycles or  3%* Time Dial to (IEC es) 0.01 curv 0.05 to 1.10 (IEEE curv es) 0.01 0.5 to 15.0 5%.  * For IEC Curves the timing accuracy is . –5 )Hz add an additional time of (1.5/f + 0.033) sec to the time delay accuracy When the frequency f is < (f nom Inverse Time Phase Overcurrent, with Voltage Control or Voltage Restraint A 0.01 A  0.1 A or  1% Pickup 0.50 to 12.00  (  0.02 A or 1%) (0.10 to A) 2.40 51V es ery Inv erse/Extremely Inv erse/IEC Curv Time/Inverse/V Definite e Curv Characteristic Inv erse/Extremely Inv erse/IEEE Curv es Moderately Inv erse/Very 0.5 11.0 0.1  3 Cycles or  3%* Dial Time to (IEC curv es) 0.01 0.05 to 1.10 curv es) 0.01 15.0 to 0.5 (IEEE to 180 V 1 V  0.5 V or  0.5% Voltage Control (VC) 5 or — — Voltage (VR) Linear Restraint Restraint  5%. * For IEC Curves the timing accuracy is † the greater of these accuracy values. rating. Select Values in parentheses apply to 1 A CT secondary –6–

8 M‑3425A Generator Protection Relay PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS ( cont .) Setpoint Device † Increment Accuracy Function Ranges Number Phase Overvoltage #1, #2, #3 5 to 180 V 1 V  0.5 V or  0.5% Pickup  0.8 V or  0.75%* 59 Delay #1, #2, #3 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle  1 Cycle or 1%** Time  Select Phase , Positiv e or Voltage Sequence*** Input Negative Ground to Line - Line is selected. - * When both RMS and Line 20 cycles or  1%. ** When RMS (total waveform) is selected, timing accuracy is O *** When positive or negative sequence voltage is selected, the 59 Function uses the discrete Fourier transform  (DFT) for magnitude calculation, irrespective of the RMS/DFT selection, and timing accuracy is 1 Cycle or 1%. Positive and negative sequence voltages are calculated in terms of line-to-line voltage when Line to Line is  selected for V.T. Configuration. ‑ Third Harmonic Voltage Differential Ratio 0.1 ) (V to /V 5.0 0.1 Ratio N x Delay 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle  1 Cycle or  1% Time 59D Seq Voltage Block 5 to 180 V 1 V  0.5 V or  0.5% Positive Side (calculated) Voltage V or 3V Line X 0 rd voltage. If the 180 Hz component of V harmonic V is exp- The 59D function has a cutoff voltage of 0.5 V for 3 N X tected to be less than 0.5 V the 59D function can not be used. The 59D function with V cannot be enabled if the 25 function is enabled. The line side voltage can be selected as X the third harmonic of 3V + V (equivalent to V . + V ) or V C A 0 X B selection for line side voltage can only be used with line-ground VT configuration. 3V 0 Neutral Overvoltage  #3 5.0 to 180.0 V 0.1 Pickup V #2, 0.5 V or  0.5% #1, 59N #1, #2, #3 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle  1 Cycle or  1% Time Delay When 64S is purchased, the 59N Time Delay Accuracy is –1 to +5 cycles. purpose Overvoltage Multi ‑ 0.5 5.0 to 180.0 V 0.1 V  #2 V or  0.5% #1, Pickup 59X #1, #2 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle  1 Cycle or  1% Time Delay Multi-purpose input that may be used for turn-to-turn stator ground protection, bus ground protection, or as an extra Phase-Phase, or Phase-Ground voltage input. When 64S is purchased, the 59N Time Delay accuracy is –1 to +5 cycles. ‑ VT Fuse Loss Detection loss condition is detected by using the positive and negative sequence components ‑ A VT fuse ‑ of the voltages and currents. VT fuse loss output can be initiated from internally generated logic, and/or from input contacts. 60 Delay 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle  1 Cycle or  1% Alarm Time FL VT Phase Three le/Disable Fuse Loss Detection Enab † the greater of these accuracy values. rating. Select Values in parentheses apply to 1 A CT secondary –7–

9 M‑3425A Generator Protection Relay PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS ( .) cont Setpoint Device † Function Increment Accuracy Number Ranges Residual Directional Overcurrent * Definite Time 0.5 to 240.0 A 0.1 A  0.1 A or  3% Pickup (0.1 to 48.0 A) (  0.02 A or  3%) Delay 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle –1 Time to +3 Cycles or  1% Inverse Time * 67N  Pickup to 12.00 A 0.01 A 0.1 A or  3% 0.25 (0.05 to 2.40 A) (  0.02 A or  3%) Characteristic e Definite Time/Inverse/V ery Inv erse/Extremely Inv erse/IEC Curv es Curv Moderately Inv erse/Very Inv erse/Extremely Inv erse/IEEE Curv es Time Dial 0.5 to 11.0 0.1  3 Cycles or  5% 0.01 to 1.10 (IEC Curv es) 0.05 to 15.0 (IEEE curv es) 0.01 0.5 Directional Element Max Sensitivity Angle (MSA) 0 to 359° 1° V Polarizing (calculated), Quantity 3V or V N X o *Directional control for 67NDT or 67NIT may be disabled. V polarization cannot be used if 25 function is enabled. X 3V polarization can only be used with line-ground VT configuration. o Operating current for 67N can be selected as 3 I (calculated) or I (Residual CT). o N (Residual CT) operating current will not be available. If 87GD is enabled, 67N with I N Out of Step (mho characteristic) Circle Diameter 0.1 to 100.0 Ω 0.1 Ω  0.1 Ω or 5% to 500.0 Ω ) (  0.5 Ω or 5%) (0.5 –100.0 to 100.0 Ω 0.1 Ω Offset  0.1 Ω or 5%  (–500.0 to 500.0 Ω ) ( 0.5 Ω or 5%) Impedance Angle 0° to 90° 1°  1° 78 Blinder to 50.0 Ω 0.1 Ω  0.1 Ω or 5% 0.1 (0.5 ( to 250.0 Ω )  0.5 Ω or 5%) Cycle 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Time  1 Cycle or  1% Delay Trip on mho Exit Enable/Disab le Pole Counter 1 to 20 1 Slip Slip Reset 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle  1 Cycle or  1% Pole Frequency #1,#2,#3,#4 50.00 to 67.00 Hz 0.01 Hz  0.02 Hz Pickup 40.00 to 57.00 Hz* 81 Delay #1–#4 3 to 65,500 Cycles 1 Cycle  2 Cycles or  1% Time The pickup accuracy applies to 60 Hz models at a range of 57 to 63 Hz, and to 50 Hz models at a range of 47 to  0.1 Hz. 53 Hz. Beyond these ranges, the accuracy is * This range applies to 50 Hz nominal frequency models. † greater of these accuracy values. Select Values in parentheses apply to 1 A CT secondary rating. the –8–

10 M‑3425A Generator Protection Relay PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS ( .) cont Setpoint Device † Ranges Increment Accuracy Function Number Frequency Accumulation Bands #1, #2, #3, #4, #5, #6 Band #1 50.00 to High Hz 0.01 Hz  0.02 Hz 67.00 81A 40.00 to 57.00 Hz*  #1–#6 50.00 to 67.00 Low 0.01 Hz Band 0.02 Hz Hz 40.00 to 57.00 Hz* Delay #1–#6 3 to 360,000 Cycles 1 Cycle  2 Cycles or  1% When using multiple frequency bands, the lower limit of the previous band becomes the upper limit for the next band, i.e., Low Band #2 is the upper limit for Band #3, and so forth. Frequency bands must be used in sequential order, 1 to 6. Band #1 must be enabled to use Bands #2–#6. If any band is disabled, all following bands are disabled. When frequency is within an enabled band limit, accumulation time starts (there is an internal ten cycle delay prior to accumulation) and allows the underfrequency blade resonance to be established to avoid unnecessary accumulation of time. When duration is greater than set delay, the alarm asserts and a target log entry is made. The pickup accuracy applies to 60 Hz models at a range of 57 to 63 Hz, and 50 Hz models at a range of 47 to 53 Hz.  0.1 Hz. Beyond these ranges, the accuracy is * This range applies to 50 Hz nominal frequency models. Rate of Change of Frequency #1, #2 0.10 to 20.00 Hz/Sec. 0.01 Hz/Sec.  0.05 Hz/Sec. or  5% Pickup 81R Delay #1, #2 3 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle + 20 Cycles Time Negative Sequence 99% 0 Voltage to Inhibit 1%  0.5% Phase Differential Current Pickup 0.20 A to 3.00 A 0.01 A  0.1 A or  5% #2 #1, to 0.60 A) (0.04 (  A or  5%) 0.02 87 Slope #1, #2 1 to 100% 1%  2% Percent Delay* 1 #1, #2 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle  Cycle or  1% Time Correction** to 2.00 0.01 CT 0.50 *When a time delay of 1 cycle is selected, the response time is less than 1–1/2 cycles. I I , , I **The CT Correction factor is multiplied by C. B A Ground (zero sequence) Differential Current 0.20 to 10.00 A 0.01 A  0.1 A or  5% Pickup 87 (0.04 2.00 A) (  0.02 A or  5%) to GD -2 Delay 8160 Cycles* 1 Cycle +1 to Cycles or  1% Time 1 to Correction (R 0.01 ) 0.10 to 7.99 CT Ratio C *The Time Delay Setting should not be less than 2 Cycles. The 87GD function is provided primarily for low-impedance grounded generator applications. This function oper- I ates as a directional differential. If 3 I is extremely small (less than 0.2 secondary Amps), the element be- or 0 n comes non-directional. I If 67N function with (Residual) operating current is enabled, 87GD will not be available. Also, if 50DT is used for N split-phase differential, 87GD function will not be available. † of these accuracy values. greater Values in parentheses apply to 1 A CT secondary rating. the Select –9–

11 M‑3425A Generator Protection Relay cont PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS ( .) Setpoint Device † Ranges Increment Number Accuracy Function TM IPSlogic IPSlogic uses element pickups, element trip commands, control/status input state changes, IPS output contact close signals to develop 6 programmable logic schemes. Time Delay #1–#6 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle  1 Cycle or  1% Breaker Monitoring kA to 50,000 kA Cycles 1 0 Cycles  1 kACycles Pickup 2 2 2 kA Cycles or kA Cycles or kA or Cycles BM 0.1 to 4095.9 Cycles 0.1 Cycles  1 Cycle or Delay  1% Time 2 I T or Method I T Timing Accumulators 0 to 50,000 kA Cycles 1 kA Cycle Preset B, C Phase A, The Breaker Monitor feature calculates an estimate of the per-phase wear on the breaker contacts by measuring and integrating the current (or current squared) through the breaker contacts as an arc. The per-phase values are added to an accumulated total for each phase, and then compared to a user-pro- grammed threshold value. When the threshold is exceeded in any phase, the relay can set a programmable output contact. The accumulated value for each phase can be displayed. The Breaker Monitoring feature requires an initiating contact to begin accumulation, and the accumulation begins after the set time delay. Trip Circuit Monitoring TC Time to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle  1 Cycle or  1% Delay 1 The AUX input is provided for monitoring the integrity of the trip circuit. This input can be used for nominal trip coil voltages of 24 V dc, 48 V dc, 125 V dc and 250 V dc. Nominal Settings 50.0 to 140.0 V 0.1 V — Voltage Nominal Current A to 6.00 0.01 A — Nominal 0.50 Configuration Line-Line/Line-Ground/ VT Line-Line* Line-Ground to Unit Delta/Wye Disable/Delta AB/Delta AC Transformer Cycle to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle  1 2 or  1% Seal-In Delay *When Line-Ground to Line-Line is selected, the relay internally calculates the line-line voltages from the line- ground voltages for all voltage-sensitive functions. This Line-Ground to Line-Line selection should only be used for a VT connected Line-Ground with a secondary voltage of 69 V (not 120 V). † greater of these accuracy values. Select Values in parentheses apply to 1 A CT secondary rating. the –10–

12 M‑3425A Generator Protection Relay OPTIONAL PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS Device Setpoint † Number Function Ranges Increment Accuracy Sync Check Dead Check 25D Dead Voltage Limit 0 to 60 V 1 V  0.5 V or ±0.5% Time Delay 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Dead Cycle –1 to +3 Cycles or 1% Sync Check 25S Angle Limit 0° Phase to 90° 1°  1° Upper Voltage Limit 60 to 140 V 1 V  0.5 V ±0.5% or 25 Voltage Limit 40 to 120 V 1 V  0.5 V or ±0.5% Lower 0.1 Delta Voltage Limit 1.0 to 50.0 V V  0.5 V or ±0.5% Delta Frequency Limit 0.001 to 0.500 Hz 0.001 Hz  0.0007 Hz or ±5% Cycle –1 Check Time Delay 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Sync to +3 Cycles or ±1% Various combinations of input supervised hot/dead closing schemes may be selected. The 25 function cannot be enabled if the 59D function with V or 67N function with V is enabled. X X Field Ground Protection ±1K Ω Pickup #1, #2 5 to 100 K Ω 1 K Ω  10% or 2 64F 1 #1, #2 1 to 8160 Cycles Cycle  ( Time Delay +1) Sec. IF Frequency (IF) 0.10 to Injection 1.00 Hz 0.01 Hz 64B Brush Lift ‑ Off Detection (measuring control circuit) mV to 5000 0 1 mV Pickup 2 Delay 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle  ( Time Sec. +1) IF When 64F is purchased, an external Coupler Module (M - 3921) is provided for isolation from dc field voltages. Figure 10, Field Ground Protection Block Diagram, illustrates a typical connection utilizing the M - 3921 Field - Ground Coupler. Hardware dimensional and mounting information is shown in Figure 11, M 3921 Field Ground Coupler Mounting Dimensions. 100% Stator Ground Protection by low frequency injection Total Current Pickup 2 to 75 mA 0.1 mA  2 mA or  10% 64S Real Component of Total Current Pickup 2 to 75 mA 0.1 mA  2 mA or  10% 1 Delay 1 to 8160 Cycles 1 Cycle  Time Cycle* or  1% An external Low Frequency Generator, Band Pass Filter and Current Transformer are required for this function. Figure 13, 64S Function Component Connection Diagram, illustrates a typical 100% Stator Ground Protection by Low Frequency Injection application. Hardware dimensional and mounting information is illustrated in Figures 14 and 15. 59D and 27TN function should be disabled when the 64S function is enabled. 59N may be applied when this func- tion is enabled. * Time Delay accuracy in cycles is based on 20 Hz frequency. † the greater of these accuracy values. rating. Select Values in parentheses apply to 1 A CT secondary –11–

13 M‑3425A Generator Protection Relay Description M The Generator Protection Relay is suitable for all generator ratings and prime movers . Typical con - - 3425A illustrated in Figure diagrams M - 3425A One-Line Functional Diagram (configured for phase are nection 4, and Figure 5, One-Line Functional Diagram for split-phase differential). differential), (configured Configuration Options M - 3425A Generator Protection Relay is availab le in either a Base or The Comprehensive package of protec - This provides the user with flexibility in selecting a protective system to best suit the application. tive functions. Optional the Protective Functions may be added at time of purchase at per-function pricing. Additional supply Human-Machine Interface (HMI) Module, Target Module, or redundant power can be selected at The of purchase. time the Field Ground (64F) Premium Protective Function is purchased, an external coupler module (M - 3921) When is for isolation from the dc field voltages. provided is 100% Ground (64S) protection using low-frequency injection Stator purchased, an external band pass When and frequency generator is filter provided. Multiple Setpoint Profiles (Groups) relay supports four setpoint profiles. This feature allows setpoint profiles to be defined for different The multiple system configurations or generator operating modes. Profiles can be switched either manually using the power Human-Machine (HMI), by communications, programmable logic or by control/status inputs. Interface NOTE profile switching, relay operation is : During disabled for approximately 1 second.  Metering relay provides metering of voltages (phase, neutral and sequence quantities), currents (phase, neutral and The factor real power, reactive power, power sequence quantities), and impedance measurements. Metering accuracies are: Voltage:  0.5 V or  0.5%, whichever is greater  V or  0.75%, whichever is greater (when both RMS and Line - Ground to Line - Line are 0.8 selected) A rating,  0.1 A or  3%, whichever is greater Current: 5 rating,  0.02 A or 1  3%, whichever is greater A VA  PU or  2% of applied, whichev er is greater Power: 0.01  0.02 Hz (from 57 to 63 Hz for 60 Hz Frequency: models; from 47 to 53 Hz for 50 Hz models) 0.1 Hz beyond 63 Hz for 60 Hz models, and beyond 53 Hz for 50 Hz  models Volts/Hz: 1%  Oscillographic Recorder of oscillographic recorder provides comprehensive data The all monitored waveforms, storing up to recording 416 cycles of data. The total record length is user-configurable from 1 to 16 partitions. The sampling rate is 16 the power system nominal frequency (50 or 60 Hz). The recorder may be triggered using either the times or inputs, trip outputs, designated using serial communications. When untriggered, the recorder control/status continuously wav eform data, thereby keeping the most stores recent data in memory. When triggered, the recorder stores pre-trigger data, then continues to store data in memory for a user-defined, post-trigger delay period. data records can be stored in either The Beckwith Electric for mat or C OMTRADE format. Target Storage associated with the last 32 trips is stored. The information includes the function(s) operated, the Information trip. functions picked up, input/output status, time stamp, and phase and neutral currents at the time of –12–

14 M‑3425A Generator Protection Relay Sequence of Events Log Sequence The Events Log records relay element status, I/O status, measured values and calculated values of 1 ms resolution at user-defined events . The Sequence of Events Log includes 512 of the stamped with time recorded relay events . The events and the most data is availab le for viewing utilizing the recently associated 3820D IPScom Communications Software. M - Calculations on Discrete Fourier : orm algorithm Uses sampled voltage and current Current and Voltage RMS Values Transf to signals fundamental frequency phasors for relay calculations. RMS calculation for the 50, 51N, 59 extract functions, and the 24 function are obtained using the time domain approach to obtain accuracy over a and 27 frequency band. When the RMS option is selected, the magnitude calculation for 59 and 27 functions is wide over a wide frequency range (10 to 80 Hz). When the DFT option is selected, the magnitude calcula - accurate is accurate near nominal frequency (50 Hz/60 Hz) but will degrade outside the nominal frequency. For 50 tion and functions the DFT is used when the frequency is 55 Hz to 65 Hz for 60 Hz (nominal) and 45 Hz to 51N for (nominal), 50 Hz outside of this range RMS calculation is used. 55Hz Power Input Options V V Nominal 50/60 Hz, or nominal 110/125/220/250 110/120/230/240 dc. Operates properly from 85 V ac ac, 265 V ac and from 80 V dc to 312.5 V dc. Withstands 300 V ac or 315 V dc for 1 second. Nominal burden to at 120 V ac/125 V dc. VA 40 24/48 V dc, operates properly from 18 V dc to 56 V dc, withstands 65 V dc for 1 second. Burden 25 Nominal 24 V dc and 30 VA at 48 V dc. at VA optional redundant power supply is available for units that are purchased without the expanded I/O. An the those units purchased with the expanded I/O, unit includes two power supplies which are required For to power relay. Burden (nominal) 46 VA @120 V ac. the Sensing Inputs Five Voltage Inputs Rated for a nominal voltage of 50 V ac to 140 V ac at 60 Hz or 50 Hz. Will withstand 240 V : voltage 10 and 360 V for seconds. Source voltages may be line-to-ground or line-to-line connected. continuous burden sequence ABC or ACB is software selectable. Voltage transfor mer less than 0.2 VA at 120 V ac. Phase : Rated nominal current ( I ) of 5.0 A or 1.0 A at 60 Hz or 50 Hz. Will Seven Current Inputs 3 I withstand R R and 100 I continuous for 1 second. Current transfor mer burden is less than 0.5 VA at 5 A, or 0.3 VA current R at 1 A. Control/Status Inputs control/status inputs, INPUT1 through INPUT6, can be programmed to block any relay The function, protective to trigger the oscillograph recorder, to operate one or more outputs or can be an input into IPSlogic. provide To breaker status LED indication on the front panel, INPUT1 control/status input contact must be connected the to the 52b breaker status contact. The minimum current value to initiate/pickup an Input is > 25 mA. The expanded I/O includes an additional 8 programmab le control/status inputs (INPUT7 through INPUT14). optional are The control/status inputs should be connected to dry contacts only, and : internally connected ▲ CAUTION a 24 V with pow er supply. (wetted) dc Output Contacts of the functions can be individually programmed to activate Any any one or more of the eight programmab le output contacts OUTPUT1 through OUTPUT8. Any output contact can also be selected as or latched. pulsed IPSlogic can also be used activate an output contact. to The optional expanded I/O includes an additional 15 programmab le output contacts (OUTPUT9 through OUT - PUT23). contacts are configurab le only using IPScom software . These output contacts (six form The and two form ‘c’), eight the power supply alarm output contact (form ‘b’), the ‘a’ self-test alarm output contact (form ‘c’) and the optional 15 expanded I/O output contacts (form 'a') are all rated per ANSI/IEEE C37.90 - 1989 for tripping. Make 30 A for 0.2 seconds, carry 8 A, break 6 A at 120 V ac, break mSec. 0.5 A at 48 V dc; 0.3 A, 125 V dc; 0.2 A, 250 V dc with L/R=40 –13–

15 M‑3425A Generator Protection Relay IPSlogic ® be programmed utilizing the IPScom Communications Software. IPSlogic takes the contact This can feature and function status, and by (OR, AND, and NOT) boolean logic and a timer, can activate input status employing change setting or profiles. an output Target/Status Indicators and Controls LED reveals proper cycling of the The microcomputer. The BRKR CLOSED LED will illuminate when RELAY OK breaker is closed (when the 52b contact input is open). The OSC TRIG LED indicates that oscillographic the will recorded in the unit's memory. The TARGET LED has illuminate when any of the relay functions data been Pressing and releasing the TARGET RESET button resets target LED if the conditions operate. causing the the been removed. Holding the TARGET RESET push button displays the present pickup status of operation have long relay The PS1 and PS2 LEDs will remain illuminated as functions. as power is applied to the unit and the power supply is operating properly. TIME SYNC LED illuminates when valid IRIG - B signal is applied and the synchronization time has been established. Communication include rear panel RS - 232 and RS-485 ports, a front panel RS-232 Communications a rear-panel ports port, - port and an Ethernet port (optional). B communications protocol implements serial, byte-oriented, IRIG The ™ communication, providing the following functions when used with the Windows asynchronous -compatible ® - 3820D IPScom M Communications Software. MODBUS and BECO 2200 protocols are supported providing: • Interrogation modification of setpoints and information for the 32 most recent trips • Time-stamped metering measured of all quantities • Real-time Sequence of recorded oscillographic data and of Events Recorder data. • Downloading optional Ethernet port can be purchased with MODBUS over TCP/IP and BECO2200 over TCP/IP protocols The or the IEC 61850 protocol. with IRIG-B The M - 3425A Generator Protection Relay can accept either modulated or demodulated IRIG - B time clock syn - to The IRIG - B time synchronization information is used chronization correct the hour, minutes, seconds, signal. and milliseconds information. HMI Module (optional) Local access to the relay is provided through an optional M-3931 HMI (Human-Machine Interface) Mod - ule, for easy-to-use, menu-driv en access to all functions utilizing six pushbuttons and a 2-line by allowing alphanumeric vacuum florescent 24 display. Features of the HMI Module include : character of • User-definable codes that allow three levels access security • Interrogation and modification of setpoints • Time-stamped information for the 32 most recent trips • Real-time of all metering quantities measured Target Module (optional) An optional M-3925A Target Module provides 24 target and 8 output LEDs. Appropriate target LEDs will illumi - nate when the corresponding function operates. The targets can be reset with the TARGET RESET pushbutton. relays. The OUTPUT LEDs indicate the status of the programmable output –14–

16 M‑3425A Generator Protection Relay Temperature Controller Monitoring Temperature equipped with a contact output may be Controller connected to the M-3425A and controlled Any the relay's programmab le IPSlogic function. Figure 1 by an example of a typical Temperature Controller is The Omron E5C2 Temperature Controller is application. DIN rail mounted RTD interface to Monitoring a M-3425A Generator Protection relay. The E5C2 accepts type J or K thermocouples, platinum RTDs the 110/120 as its input. Supply voltage for the E5C2 accepts V ac, 50/60 Hz, or 220/240 V ac thermistors or Hz or 24 V dc. 50/60 Temperature M-3425A Controller IN X R1 Alarm/Trip C IN RTN R2 IPSlogic Omron E5C2 P.D. 750 or equivalent Figure 1 Typical Temperature Controller Monitoring Application I/O Expansion (optional) I/O Expansion provides an additional 15 form 'a' output contacts and an additional 8 control/status Optional status Output LEDs indicate the the of inputs. output relays . Tests and Standards The relay complies with the following type tests and standards: Voltage Withstand Dielectric Withstand 60255-5 3,500 V dc for 1 minute applied to each independent circuit to earth IEC 3,500 V dc for 1 minute applied between each independent circuit applied 1,500 V dc for 1 minute to IRIG-B circuit to earth 1,500 V dc for 1 minute applied between IRIG-B to each independent circuit V dc for 1 minute applied between RS-485 to each independent circuit 1,500 Impulse Voltage IEC 60255-5 5,000 V pk, +/- polarity applied to each independent circuit to earth applied V pk, +/- polarity between each independent circuit 5,000 1.2 by 50 μ s, 500 ohms impedance, three surges at 1 every 5 seconds Insulation Resistance Megaohms IEC 60255-5 > 100 –15–

17 M‑3425A Generator Protection Relay Electrical Environment Electrostatic Discharge Test Class 4 (8 kV)—point contact discharge 60255-22-2 EN Class 4 60255-22-2 (15kV)–air discharge EN Fast Transient Disturbance Test kV, A (4 2.5 kHz) EN 60255-22-4 Class Surge Withstand Capability earth V pk-pk oscillatory applied to each independent circuit to 2,500 ANSI/IEEE pk-pk oscillatory applied between V each independent circuit C37.90.1- 2,500 5,000 V pk Fast Transient applied to each independent circuit to earth 1989 5,000 pk Fast Transient applied between each independent circuit V each pk-pk oscillatory applied to independent circuit to earth ANSI/IEEE 2,500 V V pk-pk oscillatory applied between each independent circuit C37.90.1- 2,500 earth 2002 4,000 V pk Fast Transient burst applied to each independent circuit to applied 4,000 V pk Fast Transient burst between each independent circuit  NOTE : The signal is applied to the digital data circuits (RS-232, RS - 485, IRIG-B, Ethernet communication port field ground coupling port) through capacitive coupling clamp. and Radiated Susceptibility 25-1000 Mhz @ 35 V/m ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2 Output Contacts Make 30 A for 0.2 seconds, off for 15 ANSI/IEEE for 2,000 operations, per Section 6.7.1, Tripping seconds C37.90.0 Output Performance Requirements Atmospheric Environment Temperature 60068-2-1 Cold, IEC – 20° C IEC 60068-2-2 Dry Heat, +70° C IEC Damp Heat, +40° C @ 93% RH 60068-2-3 Mechanical Environment Vibration Vibration response IEC 60255-21-1 1, 0.5 g Class Vibration endurance Class 1, 1.0 g IEC Response Class 60255-21-2 Shock 1, 5.0 g Shock Withstand Class 1, 15.0 g 1, Endurance Class Bump 10.0 g Compliance Equipment UL-Listed per 508 – Industrial Control –16–

18 M‑3425A Generator Protection Relay UL-Listed per 508A Table SA1.1 Industrial Control Panels Component per No. 14-95 – C22.2 Industrial Control Equipment CSA-Certified Safety Directive – EN61010-1:2001, CAT II, Pollution Degree 2 CE Physical Without Optional Expanded I/O 19.00" wide x 5.21" high x 10.20" deep : (48.3 cm x 13.2 cm x 25.9 cm) Size : The unit is a stan dard 19", semi flush, thre e-unit high , rack- mount panel desi gn, conf orming to ANSI / Mounting and DIN 41494 Part 5 specifications. Vertical or horiz ontal panel-mount options are av ailable. RS-310C EIA : 17 lbs (7.7 kg) Approximate Weight 25 lbs (11.3 kg) Approximate Shipping Weight: With Optional Expanded I/O 19.00" wide x 6.96" high x 10.2" deep : (48.3 cm x 17.7 cm x 25.9 cm) Size : The unit is a standard 19", design, semiflush, four-unit high, rack-mount panel Mounting conforming to ANSI/ EIA and DIN 41494 Part 5 specifications. Vertical or horiz ontal panel-mount options are av ailable. RS-310C : 19 lbs (8.6 kg) Approximate Weight 26 lbs (11.8 kg) Approximate Shipping Weight: Recommended Storage Parameters C to 5° 40° C Temperature: Maximum relative humidity 80% for Humidity: temperatures up to 31° C, decreasing to 31° C lin - early to 50% relative humidity at 40° C. Environment: area to be free of dust, corrosive gases, flammable Storage materials, dew, percolating water, rain and solar radiation. See M-3425A Instruction Book, Appendix E, Layup and Storage for additional information. Patent & Warranty The M - 3425A Generator Protection Relay is covered by U.S. Patents 5,592,393 and 5,224,011. The M - 3425A Generator Protection Relay is covered by a five year warranty from date of shipment. Specification subject to change without notice. External Connections 3. M - 3425A external connection points are illustrated in Figures 2 and –17–

19 M‑3425A Generator Protection Relay Jumpers, configured   is and         unit        the       Switches that     Board   ­      Protection.  voltage    ­  ‡    Circuit the   ­     ­    5.5,  Ground  ‡ than  €    ‰ Field  other €  Section     Š†­††††††††††††††††††††††††††††††††††††††††††††Š†­    „ 64B/F  Book voltage     for  a     ˆ             Instruction          subsection        Connecting        ­ ƒ  3425A   -       M          Settings, voltage.  …    see      unit.     input Time    input, the    † † †††† and    ‚   to     „    ‚     Monitoring        Monitoring  damage    Setpoints   External Connections (Without Optional Expanded I/O)       Circuit 2.3,     Circuit    Trip   ­  Trip  ­ permanent   ‡  Figure 2   Section       or the €      ­ setting    to  …   ‡     Book          ­                    ­       regarding      ‚  mis-operation   ONLY DRY CONTACTS must be connected to inputs (terminals 5 through 10 with 11 common) because these contact connections … The protective grounding terminal must be connected to an earthed ground any time external connections have been : Instruction    in                ‹  result 3425A  making information    -           ­  M      WARNING the    WARNING:  may ‚ to 8 made to the unit. 8 for inputs are internally wetted. Application of external voltage on these inputs may result in damage to the units. : 4. NOTES 1. See  2. Before 3.  –18–

20 M‑3425A Generator Protection Relay Jumpers, configured  is ‡ ‡ and       … …  unit              the      Switches    that          Board       Protection. voltage       „„    Circuit the       5.5,     Ground Š   than          Field ‰  other  Š  Section      ­ ‹€  €€€€€€€€€€€€€€€€€€€€€€€ ‹€­      64B/F   †  Book voltage     for  a         ˆ               Instruction             subsection       Connecting  ­             3425A    -        M           Settings, voltage.      ‚ see        unit.    input Time        €€ €€  €€      input, the    and    to        ‡       †   Monitoring …         Monitoring External Connections (With Optional Expanded I/O) damage Setpoints      ƒ       Circuit   2.3, Circuit    Trip     Trip Figure 3 permanent     Section   „  or  the      setting   Š       to    Book  ‚     „          ƒ      ­                 regarding              mis-operation    ONLY DRY CONTACTS must be connected to inputs (terminals 5 through 10 with 11 common and terminals 68 through connections The protective grounding terminal must be connected to an earthed ground any time external connections have been : Instruction       in                 ­      result    3425A      making ­ information -   ­      M     WARNING  the WARNING: may   ­    8 made to the unit. to for 8 result in damage to the units. 75 with 66 and 67 common) because these contact inputs are internally wetted. Application of external voltage on these inputs may   :  4.    NOTES 3. 1. See  2. Before –19–

21 M‑3425A Generator Protection Relay These functions are available in Utility System the Comprehensive Package. A subset of these functions are also M-3425A Typical available in a Base Package. Connection Diagram 52 This function is available as a Unit optional protective function. This function provides control for the function to which it points. M-3425A Targets CT 50 50 (Optional) BFPh DT Integral HMI VT (Note 1) (Optional) CT (Residual) Metering (Note 4) 87 Waveform Capture 25 52 VT Gen IRIG-B Front RS232 Communication M 81A 24 27 59 81R 81 Rear RS232 Communication (Metering) VT (Note 1) Rear Ethernet Port (Optional) Rear RS-485 (Note 3) M-3921 Communication 59X + Multiple Setting Groups - Programmable I/O 64F 64B 27 Self Diagnostics CT 60 Dual Power Supply M 46 50/27 51V 78 50 40 32 21 49 FL (Optional) (Metering) Breaker Monitoring 3V (Calculated) 67N Operating Current O (Software Select) V X Trip Circuit I N 50 V 67N Polarization N 51N 50N Monitoring BFN 67N (Software Select) 3 I O Event Log (Note 5) (Calculated) 3V V O X CT (Neutral) 59D Line Side 50 87 (Notes 2 & 5) 51N 50N 27 Voltage BFN GD 27 (Software Select) R 59N 59D 64S TN 32 R High-impedance Grounding with Third Low-impedance Grounding with Ground Differential Harmonic 100% Ground Fault Protection and Overcurrent Stator Ground Fault Protection  NOTES : and 25 function is enabled, 59X, 59D with V versa. and 67N with V are not available, 1. When vice X X enabled, function with I 2. When (Residual) operating current is 87GD is not availab le, and vice 67N N versa. VT source 3. When is used as a turn-to-turn fault protection device (See M-3425A Instruction Book, Chapter 2, Application, for additional 59X applications.) 4. The current input I current. can be connected either from neutral current or residual N unavailab 50BFN, 50N, 51N, 59D, 67N (with I or V 64S ) and 87GD functions are 5. The le when the N N function has been purchased. See details. M-3425A Instruction Book for connection the One‑Line Functional Diagram (Configured with Phase Differential) Figure 4 –20–

22 M‑3425A Generator Protection Relay These functions are available in Utility System the Comprehensive Package. A subset of these functions are also M-3425A Typical available in a Base Package. Connection Diagram 52 (Configured for Split-Phase Differential) This function is available as a Unit optional protective function. This function provides control for the function to which it points. M-3425A VT (Note 1) Targets CT (Residual) (Note 5) (Optional) Integral HMI (Optional) 52 25 VT Gen Metering Waveform Capture 81R 81 59 27 24 81A M IRIG-B (Metering) CT (Note 3) 50 Front RS232 DT Communication Rear RS232 VT (Note 1) Communication Rear Ethernet Port (Optional) (Note 2) Rear RS-485 M-3921 59X Communication + Multiple Setting Groups - 64F 64B Programmable I/O 27 Self Diagnostics CT 46 49 21 32 50 40 78 60FL 51V 50/27 M Dual Power Supply (Optional) (Metering) Breaker Monitoring Trip Circuit 3V (Calculated) O Monitoring (Note 4) V X 67N Event Log V 67N Polarization N (Software Select) V (Calculated) 3V O X CT 59D Line Side CT (Neutral) 50N 51N 27 Voltage (Note 5) 27 64S 59N (Software Select) R 59D TN 32 R High-impedance Grounding with Third Low-impedance Grounding with Overcurrent Stator Ground Fault Protection Harmonic 100% Ground Fault Protection NOTES :  25 function is enabled, 59X, 59D with V versa. and 67N with V are not available, 1. When and vice X X as a turn-turn fault protection device. 2. When used are connected for split-phase differential current. 3. CTs to current can only be selected operating I configuration. (Residual) for this 4. 67N N 5. The current input (I current. ) can be connected either from neutral current or residual N unavailab 50BFN, 50N, 51N, 59D, 67N (with I or V 64S ) and 87GD functions are 6. The le when the N N function has been purchased. See details. M-3425A Instruction Book for connection the phase differential) Figure 5 One‑Line Functional Diagram (configured for split ‑ –21–

23 M‑3425A Generator Protection Relay 17.50 [44.45] ACTUAL 5.21 [13.23] ACTUAL 17.50 [44.45] 10.20 [25.91] 19.00 [48.26] 19.00 [48.26] 18.31 0.35 [46.51] [0.89] 0.40 [1.02] X 0.27 [0.68] Slot (4X) 2.25 [5.72] 1.48 [3.76] Standard 19" Horizontal Mount Chassis NOTE : Dimensions in brackets are in centimeters. Dimensions NOTES : 1.  in brac kets are in centimeters. 5 2. See Instruction Book Chapter for Mounting and Cutout infor mation. Horizontal Unit Dimensions Without Expanded I/O (H1) Figure 6 –22–

24 M‑3425A Generator Protection Relay 5.65 [14.40] 5.59 0.03 [14.20] [0.076] Actual 2.25 1.67 2.25 1.67 0.35 [5.72] [4.24] [5.72] [4.24] [0.89] 0.28 [0.71] Dia. (4X) TARGETS 19.00 [48.26] OUTPUTS OUT 7 OUT 3 OUT 5 OUT 1 OUT 8 OUT 6 OUT 4 OUT 2 18.31 [46.51] 17.5 [44.45] ACTUAL 17.68 [44.91] ENTER EXIT TARGET RESET PS 2 PS 1 DIAG TARGET OSC. BRKR TRIG CLOSED TIME RELAY SYNC OK COM 1 Recommended cutout when relay is not used as standard rack mount and is panel cut out mounted. 17.50 [44.45] 10.20 [25.91] 19.00 [48.26] NOTE : Dimensions in brackets are in centimeters.  NOTES : 1. Dimensions in brac kets are in centimeters. 5 2. See Instruction Book Chapter for Mounting and Cutout infor mation. Vertical Unit Dimensions Without Expanded I/O (H2) Figure 7 –23–

25 M‑3425A Generator Protection Relay IR IG - B C O M 2 E T H E R N E T ! 35 6 4 F 36 FIELD GROUND TARGETS COUPLER C O M 2 R 37 RS 2 3 2 NRTL /C LR 89464 38 B EC K W IT H E L EC T R IC C O . INC . 6 19 0 118 t h AV E NO . L A R G O , F L 3 3 7 7 3 VV A ! 6 0 - 14 0 V A C ,5 0 / 6 0 H z V A B R A T E D V O L T A G E 39 24 48 125 250 40 1 - V A UX B V B C 41 2 3 - 42 7 2 7 - 5 4 4 - 2 3 2 6 V RS 4 8 5 C V C O M 3 ++ C A 4 43 OUTPUTS 5 IN6 OUT 7 OUT 5 OUT 3 OUT 1 44 6 OUT 8 OUT 6 OUT 4 OUT 2 64 IN5 7 IN4 V V X N W A R N IN G ! C O N T A C T W IT H T E R M IN A L S M A Y C A U S E E L E C T R IC S H O C K 8 IN3 INPUT S 65 IN2 9 F O R C O N T A C T R A T IN G S S E E IN S T R U C T IO N M A N U A L 45 IN1 10 46 ( 5 2 b) I A U.S. PATENT 5,592,393, 5,224,011 ! 47 IN 48 11 RT N I B 49 12 1A ,N O M P/ S 13 50 I A LA RMS C 14 51 RAT E D C UR R E NT SELF- 15 0 .0 1A NO M T EST 52 6 4 S I 16 N 53 17 ENTER EXIT 54 18 8 I a 5 A ,N O M 55 19 20 56 I b MODEL: M-3425A FIRMWARE: D-0150 21 7 57 5 0 H z 22 58 TARGET OUT PUT S RESET I 23 c 6 59 6 0 H z 24 PS 1 PS 2 + 18 60 - 25 65- PS 2 5 55 2 68 TARGET DIAG 61 - 26 + 8 5 2 1 -8 5 6 OSC. BRKR 27 62 - TRIG CLOSED S E R IA L N O . 4 6 PS 1 5 28 63 - TIME RELAY SYNC OK 29 3 30 F 3 F1 31 2 PS 2 COM 1 32 M-3425A MP, 3 A 33 250V, F 4 F2 GENERATOR 1 B) (3A 34 PROTECTION PS 1 R Figure 8 M-3425A Vertical Unit Layout –24–

26 M‑3425A Generator Protection Relay 0.35 18.31 [0.89] [46.51] NOTES : 1. Dimensions in brac kets are in centimeters.  2. See Instruction Book Chapter 5 for Mounting and Cutout infor mation. Horizontal and Vertical Unit Dimensions With Expanded I/O (H5 and H6) Figure 9 –25–

27 M‑3425A Generator Protection Relay ! IRIG-B B E C K W IT H E L E C T R IC C O . I N C . F 35 C I 66 O E IN 64F U L RTN 36 COM 2 P D 67 TARGETS ETHERNET L 72 7 - 5 4 4 - 2 3 2 6 E G COM 2 IN 14 68 37 R N 23 RS232 D US C R LIST ED IN 13 69 38 IND. CONT . EQ . V 83F4 A IN 12 70 V I 22 BA 24 39 N ! 48 125 IN 11 71 P 250 RATED U 40 VOLTAGE AUX - 1 IN 10 V T 72 21 B 60-140VAC V S B C 50/60Hz 41 2 + IN 9 73 U.S. PATENT 5,592,393 3 - 42 5,224,011 IN 8 8 R S4 5 74 20 V M 3 C O C 6 19 0 118 t h AVE NO. LA RGO, FL 3 3 77 3 V 4 + C A IN 7 75 43 OUTPUTS IN 6 5 76 19 44 OUT 7 OUT 5 OUT 3 OUT 1 23 IN 5 6 OUT 8 OUT 6 OUT 4 77 64 OUT 2 IN 4 7 78 18 V V N X 22 I IN 3 8 79 N P 65 IN 2 9 80 U 17 45 21 T IN 1 10 S 81 (52b) WARNING! CONTACT WITH TERMINALS MAY CAUSE ELECTRIC SHOCK 46 I 82 A ! 20 FOR CONTACT RATINGS SEE INSTRUCTIONAL MANUAL 47 83 I N 48 R T N 84 11 I B O 19 49 85 U 12 P/S T A 86 13 50 L P 18 I A C U 87 14 R S 51 T T M E E 88 15 S S L S 52 17 F 6 4 S T I 89 0.01A NOM 16 O N 53 U 17 T P 54 8 U 18 I a T ENTER EXIT RATED 55 S 19 CURRENT 90 16 16 A , O M 1 N 20 56 , A 91 N O M 5 I b 7 21 57 15 15 MODEL: M-3425A 22 93 58 92 TARGET I c 23 50Hz RESET 94 6 14 59 14 24 95 PS 1 PS 2 60 + O 25 - 8 1 65 60Hz 96 PS2 U 8 6 5 2 5 - 5 13 13 T 61 - 26 DIAG TARGET 97 P U 62 27 + 98 T 4 5 1 -8 6 12 OSC. BRKR PS1 - 5 2 SERIAL NO. 6 12 8 5 S TRIG CLOSED 28 63 - 99 FIRMWARE: D-0150 29 TIME RELAY 100 3 11 SYNC OK 11 30 101 F 1 F 3 31 102 2 10 P S 2 10 32 M-3425A 103 3AMP COM 1 33 GENERATOR 250V F 2 F 4 104 1 . (3AB) 9 9 34 PROTECTION 105 P S 1 R EB C HIWK T CNI.CO C IC RTE LE Made in U.S.A. : NOTES 1. The M-3425A Expanded I/O vertical panel is the same physical size as the M-3425A Expanded I/O horizontal panel. See Figure 7 for dimennsions. 2. See Instruction Book Section 5 for Mounting and Cutout information. M-3425A Expanded I/O Vertical Unit Layout Figure 10 –26–

28 M‑3425A Generator Protection Relay M - 3921 Field Ground Coupler     Œ   Ž  ­  ‹ ‰        ‘     €  ‚ƒ    ­    „…†‡ ‰Š  ‹ ‰ ˆ‰   ­ Figure 11 Field Ground Protection Block Diagram NOTES :  between above circuit measures insulation resistance (R 1. The ) rotor field winding and ground (64F). f injects  15 V squarew ave (V 2. Relay ) and measures return signal (V . ) to calculate R f f out injection frequency can be set (0.1 to 1.0 Hz) based on the 3. The rotor capacitance, in order to improve accuracy. 4. The signal rise time is analyzed to determine if shaft brushes are lifting or open (64B). a 5. May be applied on generators with brushless excitation with also grounding brush and pilot ground fault detection brush. Function Specification Field/Exciter Supply Voltage Rating (Terminal (3) to (2)): V • 60 1200 to dc, continuous • 1500 V dc, 1 minute Operating Temperature –20° to : +70°, Centigr ade Patent & Warranty shipment. The M - 3921 Field Ground Coupler is covered by a five-year warranty from date of –27–

29 M‑3425A Generator Protection Relay Tests and Standards 3921 M Ground Coupler complies with the following tests and standards: - Field Voltage Withstand Isolation all ac for 1 minute, kV terminals to case 5 Impulse Voltage 60255–5, IEC 5,000 V pk, 1.2 by 50 μ s, 0.5 J, 3 positive and 3 negative impulses at 5 second intervals per minute Electrical Interference Electrostatic Discharge Test EN Class 4 (8 kV) — point contact 60255-22-2 discharge Class 4 (15 kV) air discharge — Fast Transient Disturbance Tests 61000-4-4 Class 4 (4 kV, 2.5 kHz) IEC Surge Withstand Capability to 2,500 V pk-pk oscillatory applied to each independent circuit earth ANSI/IEEE pk-pk applied between V each independent circuit C37.90.1- 2,500 circuit 5,000 V pk Fast Transient applied to each independent to 1989 earth 5,000 pk Fast Transient applied between each independent circuit V earth 2,500 V pk-pk oscillatory applied to each independent circuit to ANSI/IEEE pk-pk applied between C37.90.1- 2,500 each independent circuit V to 4,000 V 2002 Fast Transient applied each independent circuit to earth pk 4,000 V pk Fast Transient applied between each independent circuit  : The signal is applied to the digital data circuits (RS-232, RS-485, IRIG-B, NOTE Ethernet communication port and field ground coupling through capacitive coupling clamp. port) Radiated Susceptibility ANSI/IEEE Mhz @ 35 V/m 25-1000 C37.90.2 Atmospheric Environment 60068–2–1 Cold, IEC 20° C – IEC 60068–2–2 Dry Heat, +70° C C IEC 60068–2–3 Damp Heat, +40° @ 93% RH Enclosure Protection IPC-65 NEMA 1, IEC –28–

30 M‑3425A Generator Protection Relay 2.96 REF [7.52] WITHOUT TABS 7.40 [18.79] MOUNTING PATTERN .18 DIA [0.46] 4 HOLES     7.87 [19.99]          Coupler M-3921     9.06 [23.01] Field Ground : Dimensions in brackets are in centimeters. NOTE  3.54 [9.0] .18 DIA [0.46] 4 X 3.54 [9.0] 4.72 [11.99] 3921 Field Ground Coupler Mounting Dimensions Figure 12 M - –29–

31 M‑3425A Generator Protection Relay 64S 100% Stator Ground Protection by Low Frequency Signal Injection NOTE  Stator Ground Protection function (64S) must be selected when the M - 3425A is initially ordered. : The external ground fault protection is provided by injecting an 100% 20 Hz signal into the neutral of The stator generator. the protection is provided when the machine is on-line as well as off-line (provided that the 20 The and relay are powered on.) This scheme requires the generator following external components in addition Hz M-3425A protection system: to Hz Signal-generator (BECO Surface Mount/Flush Part No. 430 - 00426)(Siemens 7XT33) • 20 • Band-pass (BECO Surface Mount/Flush Part No. 430 - 00427)(Siemens 7XT34) filter Hz Measuring Current Transf ormer, 400/5 A CT (BECO Part No. 430 - 00428) • 20 (ITI-CTW3-60-T50-401) voltage signal generated by the 20 Hz signal-generator is injected into the secondary of the generator neu - The filter transfor mer through a band-pass filter. The band-pass passes the 20 Hz signal and rejects grounding tral - of - signals. The output of the 20 Hz band-pass filter is out connected to the V M- input of the band N 3425A relay through a suitable voltage divider, that limits the M - 3425A to O 200 V ac (the voltage generator may bypassed if the expected 50/60 Hz voltage during a phase-to-ground fault of the generator is O 200 be 20Hz current is also connected to the I The transformer. input V.) of the M - 3425A, through the 20Hz current N the generator is operating normally (no ground fault) only When small amount of 20 Hz current will flow as a a result of the stator capacitance to ground. When a ground fault occurs anywhere on the generator stator issue windings 20 Hz current will increase. The 64S function will the a trip signal after a set time delay when the measured 20 Hz current exceeds the pickup current. For cases where the Load Resistor (R - ) is small, the Undervoltage Inhibit should not be enabled, as the volt N age will be small. backup. The 59N function (90 to 95%) should also be used in conjunction with 64S protection to provide –30–

32 M‑3425A Generator Protection Relay 100-230 VAC** L1 L2 Supply Voltage UH+ DC UH- Device Block External L3 Operative 1 6 3 2 8 9 7 5 N N I V 20 Hz 45 53 Generator Bl 52 44 M-3425A Connection terminals for Model A00/EE shown. 12 11 * Wiring 1B4 Max. 200 V Shielded 1A4 High Voltage 59N 1A3 Filter 20 Hz Band Pass 1A2 1A1 1B1 N R 400/5 A 20 Hz CT 5A 400A l k L K Neutral Grounding Transformer ** If 20 Hz Signal Generator is prior to Model EE a step down transformer is necessary for voltages >120 VAC. >200 V ac, use the "High Voltage" connection for the 59N Function. * For applications with a transformer secondary rating that will result in 50/60 Hz phase ground fault voltages 64S Function Component Connection Diagram (Model A00/EE 20 Hz Signal Generator) Figure 13 –31–

33 M‑3425A Generator Protection Relay 20 Hz Signal Generator Function Specifications Auxiliary Voltage voltage U Rated ac 3x (100/120 V ac), 50/60 Hz 1x (100 to 120 V ac), 50/60 Hz auxiliary H ac 88 to variations V ac Permissible 230 OR auxiliary voltage U dc 110 to Rated V dc 220 H Variations dc 88 to 250 V dc Permissible consumption VA at 8 Ohm impendance O 100 Permissible only, NOTE VAC permissib le for commissioning : 230 which is limited in time.  is 20 Hz Output Voltage (11 and 12) Connections Output 26 V ±10 %, rectangular; 20 Hz  0.1 Hz Voltage approx. Output, er permanently 100 VA ov all ranges Power short-circuits. NOTE is not resistant to : Output  Binary Input for Blocking Connections (6 and 8) Threshold Adjustable voltage range with jumper Switching V – control voltages 24 For 48 V 60 V DC 19 V: U V, P DC 19 U V O DC 10 low high – For control voltages 110 V 125 V 220 V U 250 V DC 88 V: V P DC 88 V, U O DC 44 low high voltage, continuous 300 V dc Permissible Life Contact 7 and 9) (5, Connections MAKE 30W/VA capacity Switching BREAK 20 VA 30 resistance load W O 25 L/R W 50 ms @ voltage Switching 24 V to DC 250 V DC 24 to AC 230 V AC 1 A permanent Permissible current Permissible Ambient Temperatures at describes the R load resistance the Band Pass output. L 0 0 < Ohm O 55 5 R C or O 131 with F L 0 0 > 5 Ohm O 70 R C or O 158 with F L  NOTE : With maximum power output, the device has a power loss of approximately 24 W. To ensure unhin - to dered dissipation through the vent holes, the distance heat other devices located at the top and bottom must be at least 100 mm. This device must therefore always be mounted in the bottom part cabinet. of the –32–

34 M‑3425A Generator Protection Relay Dimensions in mm  NOTE : Detailed Mounting information is contained in the M-3425A Instruction Book Chapter 5, Installation Section 5.6. Figure 14 20Hz Signal Generator Dimensions –33–

35 M‑3425A Generator Protection Relay Band-pass Filter Specifications Load Capacity of the 20 Hz Band-pass Filter (1B1-1B4) Connections continuous 55 V ac Permissible voltage, for Permissible 30 s 550 V ac voltage O superimposed Frequency ac voltage P 45 Hz of capability, continuous 3.25 A ac Overload kV dc Test Voltage 2.8 Load Capability of the Voltage Divider Circuit (1A1-1A4): Connections voltage, Permissible continuous 55 V ac ac voltage O 30 s 50 V for Permissible Voltage 2.8 kV dc Test Permissible Ambient Temperatures 0 0 5 Ω burden O 40 R C or O 104 < F with L 0 0 burden > 5 Ω O with 55 R C or O 131 F L  NOTE : The device may produce up to 75 W power losses during service. In order to prevent heat pockets , the dissipation of the losses must not be restricted. The minimum clearance above and below the device to other units or walls is 100 mm or 4 inches. In cubicles, the device shall be installed in the area. bottom –34–

36 M‑3425A Generator Protection Relay  NOTE : Detailed Mounting information is contained in the M-3425A Instruction Book Chapter 5, Installation 5. Section Band Figure 15 pass Filter Dimensions ‑ 5 A CT ‑ 20 Hz Measuring Current Transformer 400 Figure 16 –35–

37 800-3425A-SP-10MC1 09/11 © 2001 Beckwith Electric Co. All Rights Reserv ed. Printed in U.S.A. (#01-67) (04.25.03)

38 WARNING DANGEROUS VOLTAGES, capable of causing death or serious injury, are present on the external terminals and inside the equip- ment. Use extreme caution and follow all safety rules when han- dling, testing or adjusting the equipment. However, these internal voltage levels are no greater than the voltages applied to the exter- nal terminals. DANGER! HIGH VOLTAGE – This sign warns that the area is connected to a dangerous high voltage, and you must never touch it. PERSONNEL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS The following general rules and other specific warnings throughout the manual must be followed during application, test or repair of this equipment. Failure to do so will violate standards for safety in the design, manufacture, and intended use of the product. Qualified personnel should be the only ones who operate and maintain this equipment. Beckwith Electric Co., Inc. assumes no liability for the customer ’ s failure to comply with these requirements. – This sign means that you should refer to the corresponding section of the operation manual for important information before proceeding. Always Ground the Equipment To avoid possible shock hazard, the chassis must be connected to an electrical ground. When servicing equipment in a test area, the Protective Earth Terminal must be attached to a separate ground securely by use of a tool, since it is not grounded by external connectors. Do NOT operate in an explosive environment Do not operate this equipment in the presence of flammable or explosive gases or fumes. To do so would risk a possible fire or explosion. Keep away from live circuits Operating personnel must not remove the cover or expose the printed circuit board while power is ap- plied. In no case may components be replaced with power applied. In some instances, dangerous volt- ages may exist even when power is disconnected. To avoid electrical shock, always disconnect power and discharge circuits before working on the unit . Exercise care during installation, operation, & maintenance procedures The equipment described in this manual contains voltages high enough to cause serious injury or death. Only qualified personnel should install, operate, test, and maintain this equipment. Be sure that all per- sonnel safety procedures are carefully followed. Exercise due care when operating or servicing alone. Do not modify equipment Do not perform any unauthorized modifications on this instrument. Return of the unit to a Beckwith Electric repair facility is preferred. If authorized modifications are to be attempted, be sure to follow replacement procedures carefully to assure that safety features are maintained.

39 PRODUCT CAUTIONS Before attempting any test, calibration, or maintenance procedure, personnel must be completely familiar with the particular circuitry of this unit, and have an adequate understanding of field effect devices. If a component is found to be defective, always follow replacement procedures carefully to that assure safety features are maintained. Always replace components with those of equal or better quality as shown in the Parts List of the Instruction Book. Avoid static charge This unit contains MOS circuitry, which can be damaged by improper test or rework procedures. Care should be taken to avoid static charge on work surfaces and service personnel. Use caution when measuring resistances Any attempt to measure resistances between points on the printed circuit board, unless otherwise noted in the Instruction Book, is likely to cause damage to the unit.

40 NOTE The following features, described in this Instruction Book, are only available for firmware version D-0150-V01.00.34 and later: 59N 20 Hz Injection Mode (Page 2-58) IEEE curves for 51N, 51V, and 67N functions (Appendix D) Sequence of Events Recorder (Page 4-18) Dropout/Reset Time Delay added to IPSlogic (Page 2-91) Response Time Delay for Communications (Page 4-3) 25 Function (does not produce a target) (Page 2-21)

41 This Page Left Intentionally Blank

42 Table of Contents TABLE OF CONTENTS M-3425A Generator Protection Instruction Book Introduction Chapter 1 1.1 1–1 ... Instruction Book Contents M-3425A Generator Protection Rela ... 1.2 y 1–2 ies ... 1.3 Accessor 1–4 Application Chapter 2 ... 2–2 2.1 Configur ation 2–3 Profiles ... 2–3 Functions ... 2–3 Special Considerations ... 2–3 ... Relay System Setup ams ... 2–8 2.2 System Diagr Setpoints and Time Settings ... 2–14 2.3 ... 21 Phase Distance 2–14 2–18 erexcitation Volts/Hz 24 Ov ... 3425A Fir mware Versions D - 0114VXX.XX.XX and Ear lier ... 2–19 M - - M ... 2–19 - 3425A Firmware Version D 0150V 01.00.34 ... 3425A Fir - 0150V 01.04.00 - 2–19 M mware Version D 2–21 25 Sync Check ... Phase Angle Check ... 2–21 Delta V ... oltage and Delta Frequency Check 2–21 2–25 ... 27 Phase Undervoltage ... 2–28 27TN #2 Screens are identical to 27TN #1. ... 2–29 32 Directional Po wer ... Protection from Generator Motor ing 2–29 2–29 Protection from Generator Overload ... 2–29 ... Protection from Excessive Reactiv e Power 2–33 40 Loss of Field ... 2–37 ... 46 Negative Sequence Overcurrent ... 2–39 49 Stator Overload Protection ... 50/50N Instantaneous Overcurrent, Phase and Neutral Circuits 2–42 2–44 50BF Generator Breaker Failure/HV Breaker Flashover ... 50DT Definite Time Overcurrent (for split-phase differential) ... 2–46 2–47 50/27 Inadvertent Energizing ... 2–49 ... 51N Inverse Time Neutral Overcurrent 51V Inverse Time Phase Overcurrent with Voltage Control/Restraint ... 2–50 ... 2–52 59 Phase Overvoltage ... 59D Third Harmonic Voltage Differential (Ratio) 2–53 2–55 ... 59N Overvoltage, Neutral Circuit or Zero Sequence 59X Multipurpose Overvoltage (Turn-to-Turn Stator Fault Protection ... 2–56 or Bus Ground Protection) i

43 M-3425A Instruction Book Chapter 2 Application (Cont.'d) ... 60FL VT Fuse Loss 2–58 ... Internal Fuse Loss Detection Logic 2–58 2–58 External Fuse-Loss Function ... ... 2–58 60FL VT Fuse Loss Alar m Function ... 2–61 64B/F Field Ground Protection 64F Field Ground Detection 2–61 ... ecting 64F Performance ... 2–61 Factors Aff 2–63 64B Brush Lift-Off Detection ... ... 2–65 64S 100% Stator Ground Protection by Low Frequency Signal Injection 67N Residual Directional Overcurrent ... 2–71 78 Out-of-Step ... 2–74 81 Frequency ... 2–77 81A Frequency Accumulator 2–79 ... 2–81 81R Rate of Change of Frequency ... 87 Phase Differential ... 2–82 ... 87GD Ground (Zero Sequence) Differential 2–84 Breaker Monitoring ... 2–85 ... 2–86 Trip Circuit Monitoring IPSlogic™ ... 2–87 Settings and Logic Applicable when IPSlogic™ Function(s) progr ammed using IPScom® ... 2–89 DO/RST (Dropout/Reset) Timer Feature ... 2–91 Reset Delay Timer ... 2–91 Dropout Delay Timer ... 2–91 Chapter 3 Operation 3.1 Front P anel Controls ... 3–1 Alphanumer ... 3–1 ic Display Screen Blanking 3–1 ... uttons ... 3–1 Arrow Pushb Exit Pushbutton ... 3–1 ... 3–1 Enter Pushbutton ... 3–1 Target & Status Indicators and Controls Po wer Supply #1 (#2) LED ... 3–2 Relay OK LED ... 3–2 Oscillogr aph Recorded LED ... 3–2 ... 3–2 Breaker Closed LED Target Reset ... 3–2 Target Indicators and Time Sync LED ... 3–2 Diagnostic LED ... 3–2 Accessing Screens ... 3–2 ... 3–2 Default Message Screens Initial Setup Procedure/Settings ... 3–5 3.2 3.3 Setup Unit Data ... 3–5 Setup Unit Data Entry ... 3–5 3–6 Setup Unit Features That Do Not Require Data Entry ... ii

44 Table of Contents Chapter 3 Operation (Cont.'d) ... 3–6 Setup System Data 3.4 ... Configure Relay Data 3–7 3–7 Setpoints and Time Settings ... ... 3–8 Oscillogr aph Recorder Data Communications Settings ... 3–8 ing ... 3–9 3.5 Status/Meter 3.6 Target Histor y ... 3–10 Remote Operation Chapter 4 Remote Operation ... 4–1 4.1 Serial P orts (RS - 232) ... 4–1 Serial P ort (RS - 485) ... 4–1 ... 4–1 Optional Ethernet P ort Direct Connection ... 4–2 Setting up the M - 3425A Gener ator Protection Relay f or Communication ... 4–3 Serial Comm unication Settings ... 4–3 ... 4–3 Com Por t Security ort ... 4–3 Disabling Com P Ethernet Comm unication Settings ... 4–4 DHCP Protocol 4–4 ... Ethernet Protocols ... 4–4 ort Setup ... 4–4 Ethernet P HMI Ethernet P ... 4–4 ort Setup Manual Configur ... 4–5 ation of Ethernet Board ort Setup with DHCP ... 4–6 IPSutil™ Ethernet P IPSutil Ethernet P ort Setup without DHCP 4–6 ... Installing the Modems ... 4–6 ® 4.2 Installation and Setup (IPScom ) ... 4–9 4.3 Oper ation ... 4–9 Activating Comm unications ... 4–9 ... 4–9 Overview ... 4–10 File Menu Comm Menu ... 4–10 u ... 4–11 Relay Men Sequence of Events ... 4–19 Oscillograph ... 4–21 ... 4–21 Profile Window Men u/Help Menu ... 4–22 4.4 Check out Status/Metering ... 4–23 4.5 Cautions ... 4–28 4–29 4.6 Ke yboard Shortcuts ... iii

45 M-3425A Instruction Book Chapter 4 Remote Operation (Cont.'d) ... 4–30 IPSutil Communications Softw 4.7 are - ... 4–30 M 3890 IPSutil ... Installation and Setup 4–30 Installation ... 4–31 System Setup ... 4–31 Overview ... 4–31 Comm Menu ... 4–31 Relay Comm Command ... 4–31 Ethernet Command ... 4–31 ... 4–31 Clock Command Security Men u ... 4–32 ... 4–32 Miscellaneous Menu Help Menu ... 4–33 Chapter 5 Installation General Inf ... 5–1 5.1 ormation 5.2 Mechanical/Physical Dimensions ... 5–2 5.3 External Connections ... 5–8 5.4 Commissioning Check out ... 5–14 5.5 Circuit Board Switches and Jumpers ... 5 –19 5.6 Low Frequency Signal Injection Equipment ... 5 –23 Testing Chapter 6 Equipment/Test Setup 6.1 6–2 ... ... 6–2 Equipment Required Setup ... 6–2 Procedures ... 6–6 6.2 Functional Test Po wer On Self Tests 6–7 ... 21 Phase Distance (#1, #2 or #3) ... 6–8 24 V olts/Hz Definite Time (#1 or #2) ... 6–9 24 Volts/Hz Inverse Time ... 6–10 ... 6–12 25D Dead Check 25S Sync Check 6–14 ... 27 Phase Underv oltage, 3 Phase (#1, #2, #3) ... 6–16 27TN Third-Har monic Undervoltage, Neutral (#1 or #2) ... 6–17 wer, 3 Phase (#1, #2, #3) ... 6–21 32 Directional Po ... 6–24 40 Loss of Field (#1 or #2, VC #1 or #2) 46 Negative Sequence Ov ercurrent Definite Time ... 6–26 ercurrent Inverse Time ... 6–27 46 Negative Sequence Ov 49 Stator Over load Protection (#1, #2) ... 6–28 50 Instantaneous Phase Overcurrent (#1, #2) ... 6–30 ailure ... 6–31 50BF/50BF-N Breaker F 50/27 Inadver tent Energizing ... 6–33 50DT Definite Time Ov ercurrent (for split-phase differential), #1 or #2 ... 6–34 50N Instantaneous Neutral Ov ercurrent ... 6–35 6–36 51N Inv erse Time Neutral Overcurrent ... iv

46 Table of Contents Chapter 6 Testing (Cont.'d) 51V Inv ... 6–37 erse Time Phase Overcurrent with Voltage Control/Restraint voltage, 3-Phase (#1, #2, #3) ... 6–39 59 Phase Over oltage Differential ... 59D Third-Harmonic V 6–40 59N Over voltage, Neutral Circuit or Zero Sequence (#1, #2, #3) ... 6–41 59X Multi-purpose Ov ervoltage (#1 or #2) ... 6–42 60FL VT Fuse Loss Detection ... 6–43 64F Field Ground Protection (#1 or #2) 6–44 ... ... 6–46 64B Brush Lift-Off Detection 64S 100% Stator Ground Protection by lo ... 6–47 w frequency injection 67N Residual Directional Overcurrent, Definite Time ... 6–50 67N Residual Directional Overcurrent, In verse Time ... 6–52 ... 6–54 78 Out of Step 81 Frequency (#1, #2, #3, #4) 6–56 ... 81A Frequency Accum ... 6–57 ulator (Band #1, #2, #3, #4, #5, #6) 81R Rate of Change of Frequency (#1, #2) 6–58 ... ... 6–60 87 Phase Differential (#1 or #2) 87GD Ground Differential ... 6–62 BM Breaker Monitor ing ... 6–64 ... 6–66 Tr ip Circuit Monitoring IPSlogicTM (#1, #2, #3, #4, #5, #6) ... 6–67 6.3 Diagnostic Test Procedures ... 6–68 Overview ... 6–68 Entering Rela ... y Diagnostic Mode 6–68 Test (Output Relays 1–23 and 25) ... 6–69 Output Relay Output Relay ... 6–70 Test (Power Supply Relay 24) Input Test ... 6–70 (Control/Status) ... 6–71 Status LED Test ... 6–72 Target LED Test Button Test ... 6–72 Display Test ... 6–73 k Test ... 6–73 COM1/COM2 Loopbac COM3 Test (2 Wire) ... 6–74 - Clock ON/OFF ... 6–75 ... 6–76 Relay OK LED Flash/Illuminated Auto Calibr ation ... 6–76 Factor y Use Only ... 6–76 6.4 Auto Calibr ation ... 6–77 ation ... 6–77 Phase and Neutral Fundamental Calibr Third Harmonic Calibr ation ... 6–78 64S 100% Stator Ground by Lo w Frequency Injection Calibration ... 6–78 Field Ground Calibration ... 6–79 Appendices Appendix A: Configur ation Record Forms ... A–1 Appendix B: Comm unications ... B–1 Appendix C: Self - T est Error Codes ... C–1 Appendix D: In verse Time Curves ... D–1 E–1 Appendix E: Declar ation of Conformity ... v

47 M-3425A Instruction Book Figures Pa ge Chapter 1 - 1 M - 3925A Target Module ... 1–4 1 - 1–4 M - 3931 Human - Machine Interface (HMI) Module ... 1 2 Chapter 2 2 1 Setup System Dialog Box ... 2–6 - - 2 Selection Screen for Expanded Input ... 2–7 2 2 - 3 ... 2–7 Pulse Relay Expanded Output Screen - 4 Latch Relay Expanded Output Screen ... 2–7 2 2-5 One-Line Functional Diagr am ... 2–8 2 - 6 Alternativ e One-Line Functional Diagram erential) ... 2–9 (configured for split-phase diff am 2 7 Three-Line Connection Diagr ... 2–10 - 2 - 8 Function 25 Sync Check Three-Line Connection Diagram ... 2–11 9 Function 59X Turn to Turn Fault Protection Three-Line Connection Diagram ... 2–12 2 - 2 Function 67N, 59D, 59X (Bus Ground) Three-Line Connection Diagram 10 ... 2–13 - 2 - 11 Selection Screen for Expanded I/O Initiate ... 2–14 2-12 Phase Distance (21) Cov erage ... 2–16 kup 2 13 Phase Distance (21) Function Applied for System Bac ... 2–16 - 2-14 Phase Distance (21) Setpoint Ranges ... 2–17 15 Example of Capability and Protection Curv es (24) ... 2–19 2 - er-Hertz (24) Setpoint Ranges 16 Volts-P - ... 2–20 2 2 - 17 Sync Check Logic Diag rams ... 2–23 - 18 Sync Check (25) Setpoint Ranges ... 2–24 2 2-19 Phase Underv oltage (27) Setpoint Ranges ... 2–25 2 - 20 Third Harmonic Under voltage (27TN) Protection Characteristics ... 2–26 - 21 27TN Blocking Regions ... 2–27 2 2 22 Third Harmonic Under voltage, Neutral Circuit (27TN) Setpoint Ranges .. 2–27 - 2 Tr 23 ipping on Reverse Power Flow (Over Power with Negative Pickup) ... 2–29 - ipping on Low Forward Power (Under Power with Positive Pickup) 2 24 Tr ... 2–31 - 2 - 25 Tr ipping on Overpower (Over Power with Positive Pickup) ... 2–31 26 - Tr ipping on Over Reactive Power with Element #3 (Over Power, 2 Positiv e Pickup and Directional Power Sensing Set to Reactive) ... 2–32 2 - 27 Directional Po wer, 3-Phase (32) Setpoint Ranges ... 2–32 - 28 Loss of Field (40)—Protective Approach 1 ... 2–35 2 2 - 29 Loss of Field (40)—Protective Approach 2 ... 2–35 2 - 30 Loss-of-Field (40) Setpoint Ranges ... 2–36 - 31 Negative Sequence Ov ercurrent Inverse Time Curves ... 2–38 2 ercurrent (46) Setpoint Ranges 32 Negative Sequence Ov - ... 2–38 2 2 - 33 ... 2–39 Time Constant, Function 49 2 - 34 load Curves ... 2–40 49 Function Over 2 - 35 Stator Ther mal Protection (49) Setpoint Ranges ... 2–41 Instantaneous Overcurrent (50) Setpoint Ranges ... 2–43 2-36 Instantaneous Neutral Ov - 37 ercurrent (50N) Setpoint Ranges ... 2–43 2 2-38 Breaker F ailure Logic Diagram ... 2–44 Breaker F - 39 2 ailure (50BF) Setpoint Ranges ... 2–45 2–46 2 - 40 Definite Time Ov ercurrent (50DT) Setpoint Ranges ... 2–48 2 - 41 Inadver tent Energizing Function Logic Diagram ... vi

48 Table of Contents Figures (Cont.'d) ge Pa Chapter 2 (Cont.'d) 42 Inadver tent Energizing (50/27) Setpoint Ranges ... 2–48 2 - erse Time Neutral Overcurrent (51N) Setpoint Ranges ... 2–49 2-43 Inv Voltage Restr aint (51VR) Characteristic ... 2–51 2-44 - 2 Inv erse Time Overcurrent with Voltage ... 2–51 45 2 Phase Over voltage (59) Setpoint Ranges 46 ... 2–52 - 2 47 Third Harmonic Voltage Differential (Ratio) Scheme ... 2–54 - - 48 Third Harmonic Voltage Differential (59D) Setpoint Ranges ... 2–54 2 2 Over voltage, Neutral Circuit or Zero Sequence (59N) Setpoint Ranges 49 .. 2–55 - 2 - 50 Tur ... 2–57 n-to-Turn Stator Winding Fault Protection - 51 (59X) Multi-purpose Ov 2 ... 2–57 ervoltage Setpoint Ranges 2 - 52 Fuse Loss (60FL) Function Logic ... 2–59 53 Fuse Loss (60FL) Setpoint Ranges ... 2–60 2 - 2 M - 3921 Field Ground Coupler 54 ... 2–62 - 2 - 55 Field Ground Protection (64B/F) Setpoint Ranges ... 2–63 2-56 64S Function Component Connection Diagr am (Model A00/CC 20 Hz Signal Generator) ... 2–66 2-57 64S Function Component Connection Diagr am (Model A00DE 20 Hz Signal Generator) ... 2–67 2-58 64S Networ k ... 2–68 Primar y Transferred To Transformer Secondary ... 2–68 2-59 64S Function Time Dela y Pickup Current Correlation ... 2–70 2-60 2 - 61 100% Stator Ground Protection (64S) Setpoint Ranges ... 2–70 - 62 Residual Directional Overcurrent (67N) Trip Characteristics ... 2–71 2 2–73 2 - 63 Residual Directional Overcurrent (67N) Setpoint Ranges ... 2 - 64 Out-of-Step Relay Char acteristics ... 2–75 - 65 Out-of-Step Protection Settings ... 2–75 2 2 66 Out-of-Step (78) Setpoint Ranges ... 2–76 - 2 Example of Frequency (81) Trip Characteristics 67 ... 2–78 - 2 - 68 Frequency (81) Setpoint Ranges ... 2–78 - 69 Frequency Accum 2 ... 2–80 ulator (81A) Example Bands 2 - 70 ulator (81A) Setpoint Ranges ... 2–80 Frequency Accum 2 - 71 Rate of Change of Frequency (81R) Setpoint Ranges ... 2–81 y (87) Operating Characteristics 72 Differential Rela - ... 2–83 2 2 - 73 Phase Differential (87) Setpoint Ranges ... 2–83 2 - 74 Ground Differential (87GD) Setpoint Ranges ... 2–84 2 - 75 Breaker Monitor (BM) Setpoint Ranges ... 2–85 - 76 Tr ip Circuit Monitoring Input ... 2–86 2 ip Circuit Monitor (TC) Setpoint Ranges 77 Tr - ... 2–86 2 ™ 2 78 IPSlogic Function Setup ... 2–88 - IPSlogic Function Progr - 79 2 aming ... 2–89 2 - 80 Selection Screen for Initiating Function Timeout ... 2–90 - 81 Selection Screen for Initiating Function Pic kup ... 2–90 2 2-82 Dropout Delay Timer Logic Diagram ... 2–91 2-83 Reset Delay Timer Logic Diagram ... 2–91 Chapter 3 ... 3 - 1 M - 3425A Front Panel 3–3 3 - 2 Screen Message Menu Flow ... 3–3 3–4 3 - 3 Main Menu Flow ... vii

49 M-3425A Instruction Book Figures (Cont.'d) ge Pa Chapter 4 1 Multiple System Addressing Using Communications Line Splitter ... 4–2 4 - ® ... IPScom - Menu Selections 4–8 4 2 - 3 IPScom Program Icon ... 4–9 4 - 4 System Type Dialog Box ... 4–10 4 4 5 Communication Dialog Box ... 4–11 - 4 - 6 Setup System Dialog Box ... 4–12 - 7 Expanded Input Active State ... 4–13 4 4 8 Pulse Relay Expanded Output Screen ... 4–13 - 4 - 9 Latch Relay Expanded Output Screen ... 4–13 4 10 Relay Setpoints Dialog Box ... 4–14 - - 11 Typical Setpoint Dialog Box ... 4–14 4 4 - 12 Expanded I/O Initiate ... 4–14 13 All Setpoints Table Dialog Box (Partial) ... 4–15 4 - 4 14 Configure Dialog Box (Partial) ... 4–16 - 4 - 15 Configure Dialog Box Partial (shown with Expanded Input/Outputs) .. 4–17 4 16 Unit Date/Time Dialog Box ... 4–18 - - 17 Target Dialog Box ... 4–19 4 4 - 18 Trigger Events Screen with Expanded I/O ... 4–20 19 Event Log Viewer ... 4–20 4 - - 20 Event Download Screen ... 4–21 4 4 - 21 Setup Oscillograph Recorder ... 4–21 - 22 Retrieve Oscillograph Record Dialog ... 4–21 4 Profile Switching Method Dialog 4 - 23 ... 4–21 4 - 24 Select Active Profile ... 4–22 - 25 Copy Active Profile ... 4–22 4 ® 26 About IPScom 4 Dialog Box ... 4–22 - 4 Primary Status Dialog Box 27 ... 4–23 - - 28 Secondary Status Dialog Box ... 4–23 4 4 - 29 Accumulator Status Screen ... 4–24 Phase Distance Dialog Box ... 4–24 4-30 - 31 Loss of Field Dialog Box ... 4–25 4 4 - 32 Out of Step Dialog Box ... 4–25 - 33 Phasor Dialog Box ... 4–26 4 4 - 34 Sync Scope Screen ... 4–26 4 - 35 Function Status Screen ... 4–27 - 36 IPSutil™ Main Menu Flow ... 4–30 4 - 37 Warning Message ... 4–31 4 4 - 38 IPSutility Reset Relay Message ... 4–31 - 39 Monitor Status Screen ... 4–32 4 4 - 40 Calibration Dialog Box ... 4–32 4 - 41 Communication Dialog Box ... 4–33 - 42 Relay Comm Port Settings ... 4–33 4 4 - 43 Ethernet Settings ... 4–33 4 - 44 Set Unit Date/Time Dialog Box ... 4–33 4 - 45 Change Communication Access Code Dialog Box ... 4–34 4–34 4 - 46 Change User Access Code Dialog Box ... 4–34 4 - 47 Setup Dialog Box ... viii

50 Table of Contents Figures (Cont.'d) ge Pa Chapter 5 1 M-3425A Horizontal Chassis Mounting Dimensions Without Expanded I/O (H1) . 5–2 5 - - M-3425A Vertical Chassis Mounting Dimensions Without Expanded I/O (H2) ... 5–3 5 2 - 3 M-3425A Mounting Dimensions Horizontal and Vertical Chassis With Expanded I/O .. 5–4 5 5 4 M-3425A Panel Mount Cutout Dimensions - ... 5–5 5 - 5 ... 5–6 Mounting Dimensions for GE L-2 Cabinet (H3 and H4) - 6 (H5) Mounting Dimensions ... 5–7 5 5 Optional Dual Po wer Supply 7 ... 5–8 - 5 - 8 Expanded I/O Po ... 5–8 wer Supply - 9 5 ... 5–9 External Connections 5 - 10 Three-Line Connection Diagr am ... 5–10 11 Function 25 Sync Check Three-Line Connection Diagram ... 5–11 5 - 5 12 Function 59X Turn to Turn Fault Protection Three-Line Connection Diagram . 5–12 - 5 - 13 Function 67N, 59D, 59X (Bus Ground) Three-Line Connection Diagram .. 5–13 5-14 M-3425A Circuit Board ... 5–21 M-3425A Circuit Board (Expanded I/O) ... 5–22 5-15 5-16 Low F requency Signal Injection Equipment Typical Connections ... 5–23 20 Hz Frequency Gener ator Housing Panel Surface Mount ... 5–24 5-17 20 Hz Frequency Gener ator Housing Panel Flush Mount ... 5–25 5-18 5-19 20 Hz Band Pass Filter Housing P anel Surface Mount ... 5–26 5-20 20 Hz Band Pass Filter Housing P anel Flush Mount ... 5–27 20 Hz Measuring Current 5-21 ... Transformer 400-5 A CT 5–28 M-0331 2:1 Control T ransformer ... 5–28 5-22 Chapter 6 Voltage Inputs: Configuration V1 ... 6–3 6-1 6-2 Voltage Inputs: Configuration V2 ... 6–3 Current Inputs: Configur ation C2 ... 6–4 6-4 6 - 5 Current Configuration C3 ... 6–5 6 - 64S Test Configuration ... 6–5 6 - 7 Field Ground Coupler ... 6–45 6 6 - 8 Status LED Panel ... 6–71 6 - 9 M 3925A Target Module Panel ... 6–72 - 6-10 M - 3931 Human-Machine Interf ace Module ... 6–72 - 11 COM1/COM2 Loopback Plug ... 6–73 6 - 12 RS - 485 2 - Wire T esting ... 6–75 6 6 - 13 Current Input Configuration ... 6–80 6-14 Voltage Input Configur ation ... 6–80 6 - 15 Voltage Input Configur ation ... 6–80 ation - 16 Voltage Input Configur 6 ... 6–81 Appendix A A - 1 Human - Machine Interface (HMI) Module ... A–6 A - 2 Communication Data & Unit Setup Record Form ... A–7 A–10 A - 3 Functional Configuration Record Form ... A–28 A-4 Setpoint & Timing Record Form ... ix

51 M-3425A Instruction Book Figures (Cont.'d) ge Pa Appendix B 1 Null Modem Cable: M - 0423 ... B–2 B - - - RS B 232 Fiber Optic Network ... B–3 2 - 3 RS-485 Network ... B–4 B B - 4 COM2 Pinout for Demodulated TTL Level Signal ... B–4 Appendix D D - 1 Volts/Hz (24) Inverse Time Curve Family #1 (Inverse Square) ... D–2 D Volts/Hz (24) Inverse Time Family Curve #2 2 ... D–3 - - 3 Volts/Hz (24IT) Inverse Time Curve Family #3 ... D–4 D D - 4 Volts/Hz (24IT) Inverse Time Curve Family #4 ... D–5 5 BECO Definite Time Overcurrent Curve ... D–8 D - D 6 BECO Inverse Time Overcurrent Curve ... D–9 - - 7 BECO Very Inverse Time Overcurrent Curve ... D–10 D D - 8 BECO Extremely Inverse Time Overcurrent Curve ... D–11 9 IEC Curve #1 – - Inv erse ... D–12 D Ver D - 10 IEC Curve #2 – y Inverse ... D–13 D - 11 IEC Curve #3 – Extremely Inv erse ... D–14 - 12 IEC Curve #4 – Long Time In verse ... D–15 D - 13 IEEE Inverse Time Overcurrent Curves ... D–16 D D - 14 IEEE Very Inverse Time Overcurrent Curves ... D–17 - 15 IEEE Extremely Inverse Time Overcurrent Curves ... D–18 D ge Tables Pa Chapter 1 1 - 1 M - 3425A Device Functions ... 1–3 Chapter 2 2 - 1 Input Activated Profile ... 2–3 - 2 Impedance Calculation ... 2–17 2 Voltage Control - 3 Time Settings ... 2–34 2 2 - 4 Delta/Wy e Transformer Voltage-Current Pairs ... 2–51 2 - 5 Typical F requency Settings ... 2–63 2–64 2 - 6 Typical Br ush Lift-Off Pickup Setting ... 2- 7 Low Frequency Signal Injection Equipment Part Number Cross Reference .. 2–69 Chapter 3 3–8 3 - 1 Recorder Partitions ... x

52 Table of Contents Tables (Cont.'d) ge Pa Chapter 4 1 Dead-Sync Time - ... 4–3 4 4-2 Protective System Firmware Association 4–10 ... - 3 Microsoft Windows Keyboard Shortcuts 4 ... 4–29 Chapter 5 5 - 1 J umpers ... 5–19 - 2 Dip Switch SW-1 ... 5–20 5 5 - 3 Tr ip Circuit Monitor Input Voltage Select Jumper Configuration ... 5–20 Chapter 6 6 - 1 ... 6–69 Output Contacts 6 - 2 Input Contacts ... 6–70 Appendix A A - 1 Relay Configuration Table ... A–2 Appendix B B - 1 ... B–2 Communication Port Signals Appendix C C - 1 Self-Test Error Codes ... C–1 ® - 2 IPScom C Error Messages ... C–2 Appendix D D - 1A M - 3425A Inverse Time Overcurrent Relay Characteristic Curves ... D–6 Appendix E E–2 E - 1 Declaration of Conformity ... xi

53 M-3425A Instruction Book IB - 3425A - 800 - 08MC2 10/11 ©1998 Beckwith Electric Co. All Rights Reserved. (9.21.01) Printed in U.S.A. xii

54 Introduction – 1 Introduction 1 Instruction Book Contents 1.1 ... 1–1 M-3425A Generator Protection Relay ... 1.2 ... 1–2 1.3 ... 1–4 Accessories Chapter 4: Remote Operation Instruction Book Contents 1.1 Chapter Four is designed for the person or group responsible for the remote operation and setting ® This instruction book includes six chapters and of the relay using the M-3820D IPScom seven Appendices. Communications Software or other means. Chapter 1: Introduction Chapter 5: Installation Chapter One summarizes relay capabilities, The person or group responsible for the installation introduces the instruction book contents, and of the relay will find herein all mechanical information describes accessories. required for physical installation, equipment ratings, and all external connections in this chapter. For reference, the Three-Line Connection Diagrams are Chapter 2: Application Chapter 2 repeated from . Further, a , Application Chapter Two is designed for the person or group commissioning checkout procedure is outlined using responsible for the application of the M-3425A the HMI option to check the external CT and VT Generator Protection Relay. It includes functional connections. Additional tests which may be desirable and connection diagrams for a typical application of at the time of installation are described in the relay; and describes the configuration process . Testing , Chapter 6 for the unit (choosing active functions), output contact assignment and input blocking designation. It also Chapter 6: Testing illustrates the definition of system quantities and equipment characteristics required by the protective This Chapter provides step-by-step test procedures relay, and describes the individual function settings. for each function, as well as diagnostic mode and autocalibration procedures for HMI-equipped units. Chapter 3: Operation Appendix A: Configuration Record Forms Chapter Three is designed for the person(s) responsible for the operation, direct setting, and This Appendix supplies a set of forms to record and configuration of the relay. Chapter Three provides document the settings required for the proper information regarding the operation and interpretation operation of the relay. of the unit's front panel controls and indicators, including operation of the optional M-3931, Human Appendix B: Communications Machine Interface (HMI) and M-3925A Target This Appendix describes port signals, protocols, Modules. It further describes the procedures for and various topologies, and equipment required for entering all required data to the relay. Included in this remote communication. chapter is a description of the process necessary for review of setpoints and timing, monitoring function status and metering quantities, viewing the target history, and setup of the oscillograph recorder. 1–1

55 M-3425A Instruction Book Appendix C: Self-Test Error Codes The control/status inputs can be programmed to block any relay function and/or to trigger the This Appendix lists all the error codes and their oscillograph recorder. Any of the functions or the definitions. control/status inputs can be individually programmed to activate any one or more of the programmable Appendix D: Inverse Time Curves outputs, each with a contact. This Appendix contains a graph of the four families With the optional M-3931 HMI Module, all functions of Inverse Time Curves for V/Hz applications, the can be set or examined using a local, menu-driven, Inverse Time Overcurrent Curves, and the IEC 2 line by 24 character alphanumeric display. OUT curves. 9–23 and IN 7–14 for units purchased with expanded ® I/O can only be set utilizing M-3820D IPScom Appendix E: Layup and Storage Communications Software. The module allows local This Appendix includes the recommended storage metering of various quantities, including phase, parameters, periodic surveillance activities and neutral, and sequence voltages and currents, real layup configuration for the M-3425A Generator and reactive power, power factor, and positive Protection Relay. sequence impedance measurements. The relay stores time-tagged target information for Appendix F: Index the thirty-two most recent trips. For units equipped This Appendix includes the index for the M-3425A with the optional M-3925A Target Module, LEDs are Instruction Book. used to provide a detailed visual indication of function operation for the most recent event. Appendix G: Declaration of Conformity The unit retains up to 472 cycles of oscillograph This Appendix contains the Beckwith Electric Co.’s waveform data. This data can be downloaded and Declaration of Conformity required by ISO/IEC ® analyzed using the M-3801D IPSplot PLUS 17050–1:2004. Oscillograph Analysis Software. The unit is powered from a wide input range switch 1.2 M-3425A Generator mode power supply. An optional redundant power supply is available for units without the Expanded Protection Relay I/O. When expanded I/O option is selected, the unit includes the second power supply. The M-3425A Generator Protection Relay is a microprocessor-based unit that uses digital signal The relay includes self-test, auto calibration, and processing technology to provide up to thirty-four diagnostic capabilities, in addition to IRIG-B time- protective relaying functions for generator protection. sync capability for accurate time-tagging of events. The relay can protect a generator from internal winding faults, system faults, and other abnormal conditions. The available internal functions of the relay are listed in Table 1-1. The nomenclature follows the standards of ANSI/IEEE Std. C37.2, Standard Electric Power Systems Device Function Numbers. 1–2

56 Introduction – 1 Communication Ports NOITCNUF NOITPIRCSED There are three physical communication ports snoitcnuFevitcetorP provided on the M-3425A. If the optional RJ45 2o 1 hmenoz-eerht(ecnatsiDesahP Ethernet port is purchased, then the relay includes )citsiretcarahc four physical communication ports: emiTetinifeD&esrevnI(zH/stloV 2) 4 • COM1, located on the relay front panel, is 2e 7 gatlovrednUesahP a standard 9-pin RS-232 DTE-configured port. COM1 is used to locally set and artueN,egatlovrednUcinomraHdrihT 2l NT7 interrogate the relay using a portable ewoPlanoitceriD 3r 2 computer. 0 4o hm-tesffoenoz-laud(dleiFfossoL • COM2, located on the rear of the relay, is )citsiretcarahc a standard 9-pin RS-232 DTE-configured 6 4t nerrucrevOecneuqeSevitageN port. When the optional RJ45 Ethernet Port is enabled, COM2 port is disabled for 9 vitisoP(noitcetorPdaolrevOrotatS 4e communications. The demodulated S )tnerrucrevOecneuqe IRIG-B may still be used via the COM2 0 nerrucrevOesahPsuoenatnatsnI 5t Port when ethernet is enabled. ruliaFrekaerB FB0 5e The RJ45 Ethernet port uses a 10Base-T type connection that accepts an RJ45 nerrucrevOemiTetinifeD 5t TD0 connector using CAT5 twisted pair cable. nerrucrevOlartueNsuoenatnatsnI 5t N0 The Ethernet port can support MODBUS 72/0 5g nizigrenEtnatrevdanI over TCP/IP and BECO2200 over TCP/IP or IEC 61850. The IP address can be N1 nerrucrevOlartueNemiTesrevnI 5t obtained automatically when using the V1 gatloVhtiw,tnerrucrevOemiTesrevnI 5e DHCP protocol if enabled, or a static IP artseRrolortnoC tni address can be manually entered, using gatlovrevOesahP 5e 9 the HMI. D9 5l aitnereffiDegatloVcinomraH-drihT • COM3, located on the rear terminal block of the relay, is a RS-485 communications port. gatlovrevOlartueN N9 5e gatlovrevOesoprup-itluM 5e X9 ■ COM1, COM2 and COM3 can be disabled NOTE: LF0 6n oitceteDssoL-esuFTV for security purposes from the Communications HMI menu. A Level 2 N7 6t nerrucrevOlanoitceriDlaudiseR Access Code is required. 8 citsiretcarahcohm(petSfotuO 7) cneuqerF 1 8y The relay may be remotely set and interrogated oitalumuccAycneuqerF A1 8n utilizing either a hard-wired RS-232 serial connection or modem (COM2 when activated as RS-232, or 8y cneuqerFfoegnahCfoetaR R1 COM3), or when purchased, the ethernet connection 7 8t nerruClaitnereffiDesahP (RJ45 activated). DG7 8l aitnereffiD)ecneuqesorez(dnuorG ® Ic SP igolSPI M-3820D IPScom Communications Software IPScom is shipped standard with every relay. This otinoMrekaerB M Br software runs on a PC-compatible computer operating Tg nirotinoMtiucriCpirT C ® 98 or later. When properly under Microsoft Windows snoitcnuFevitcetorPlanoitpO connected using either a direct serial connection, modem or ethernet network connection. IPScom cehCcnyS 2k 5 can provide the following functions: 6/ noitcetorPdnuorGdleiF B46/F 4 noitceteDffO-tfiLhsurB • Setpoint interrogation and modification bnoitcetorPdnuorGrotatS%001 S4 6y • Line status real-time monitoring noitcejnI • Recorded oscillograph data downloading Table 1-1 M-3425A Device Functions 1–3

57 M-3425A Instruction Book M-3931 HMI (Human-Machine Interface) Module 1.3 Accessories The optional HMI module provides the means to interrogate the relay and to input settings, access M-3925A Target Module data, etc. directly from the front of the relay. Its operation is described in detail in Section 3.1, Front The optional target module, shown below, includes 24 Panel Controls. individually labelled TARGET LEDs to indicate operation of the functions on the front panel. Eight LEDs will be lit as long OUTPUT individually labelled as the corresponding output contact is picked up.                                         !!             %      ! "  !!"   ! ! !% &         !   !!     "! "# !   !!     '             ! $$ !                 Figure 1-2 M-3931 Human-Machine            Interface (HMI) Module Figure 1-1 M-3925A Target Module ® PLUS M-3801D IPSplot Oscillograph Analysis Software Package M-3933/M-0423 Serial Communication Cables The IPSplot Oscillograph Analysis Software PLUS The M-3933 cable is a 10-foot RS-232 cable for use ® runs in conjunction with the IPScom between the relay’s rear panel (COM2) port and a Communications Software on any IBM modem. This cable has a DB25 (25-pin) connector PC-compatible computer, enabling the plotting, (modem) and a DB9 (9-pin) at the relay end. printing, and analysis of waveform data downloaded from the M-3425A Generator Protection Relay. The M-0423 cable is a 10-foot null-modem RS-232 cable for direct connection between a PC and the relay’s front panel COM1 port, or the rear COM2 port. This cable has a DB9 (9-pin) connector at each end. 1–4

58 Application – 2 Application 2 2.1 Configur ation ... 2–2 2.2 System Diagr ams ... 2–8 2–14 2.3 Setpoints and Time Settings ... Chapter Two is designed for the person or group Menu screens in the following examples are as ‑ responsible for the application of the M‑3425A Gen they would appear on units equipped with the erator Protection Relay. It includes functional and M‑3931 Human Machine Interface (HMI) Module. connection diagrams for a typical application of the The same setting may be entered remotely using ® relay; and describes the configuration process for Communications Software M‑3820D IPScom Chapter 4 , Remote Operation ). (see the unit (enabling functions), output contact assign ‑ ment and input blocking designation. It also illustrates the definition of system quantities and equipment characteristics required by the protective relay, and describes the individual function settings. 2–1

59 M‑3425A Instruction Book Control/status input IN1 is preassigned to be the 52b Configuration 2.1 breaker status contact. If a multiple breaker scheme is used, the control/status input IN1 must be the series Configuration of the relay consists of enabling the combination of the “52b” breaker contacts. Additional ‑ functions for use in a particular application, designat chosen control/status inputs may initiate actions user ‑ ing the output contacts each function will operate, and such as breaker failure, initiate external fuse loss which control/status inputs will block the function. The detection, or trigger the oscillograph recorder. choices include eight programmable output contacts The relay allows the user to designate up to six logic (OUT1–OUT8) and six control/status inputs (IN1– functions which perform similarly to internal relay IN6), or OUT9–23 and IN7–14 for units purchased TM . These external functions functions, using IPSlogic with expanded I/O, plus a block choice for fuse loss may be enabled or disabled, and output contacts and logic operation (see Section 2.3, Setpoint and Time blocking control/status inputs are chosen the same Settings, 60FL Fuse Loss subsection for details). as for the internal functions. The external functions The blocking control/status inputs and output contact are described in further detail in Section 2.3, Setpoint assignments must be chosen before entering the and Time Settings, IPSlogic subsection. ‑ settings for the individual functions. Both may be re Appendix corded on the Relay Configuration Table in , . Configuration Record Forms A  : Uppercase text indicates selection. NOTE 27#1 PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE This menu designation is required for each relay function. After disable ENABLE enabling the function, the user is presented with the two following screens: This submenu item assigns the blocking designations (up to six, plus 27#1 BLOCK INPUT fuse ‑ loss logic) for the enabled function. “OR” logic is used if more than fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 I1 one input is selected. ‑ This submenu item assigns the output contacts (up to eight) for the par 27#1 RELAY OUTPUT ticular relay function. If no output contacts are assigned, the function will O1 o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 not generate any output or targets even though the function is enabled. ®  NOTE : Units with expanded I/O can only set OUT9–OUT23 and IN7–IN14 using IPScom . 2–2

60 Application – 2 Profiles Control/status inputs may also initiate actions, such ‑ as Breaker Failure Initiate, Trigger Oscillograph Re Up to four setpoint profiles may be used. Each profile corder, Switch Setpoint Profile, or initiate an IPSlogic contains a complete set of function configuration and function. The control/status inputs and output contacts settings. One of the four profiles may be designated need to be chosen before configuring the individual as the Active Profile, which will contain the settings functions. Both can be recorded on the Relay Con ‑ that the relay will actively use. . figuration Table in Appendix A, Forms Active Profile The may be chosen manually or by contact input. When the profile Switching Method is Special Considerations set to Manual, the HMI, remote communications or one of the IPSlogic elements will select the Active Control/status input IN1 is preassigned to be the 52b Profile. When the Switching Method is set to Input breaker contact. IN5 and IN6 may be used to select Contact, the profile is selected by the input contacts. setpoint profiles. When Input Contact is selected, only the input con ‑ Outputs 1–6 and 9–23 are form “a” contacts (normally tacts can switch the relay’s profile, and none of the open), and outputs 7 and 8 are form “c” contacts Manual methods will switch the profile. (center tapped “a” and “b” normally closed) contacts. A Copy Profile feature is available. This feature ‑ Output contacts 1–4 contain special circuitry for high copies an image of the Active Profile to any one of speed operation and pick up 4 ms faster than outputs the other three profiles. This feature can speed up 5–8. Function 87 outputs are recommended to be the configuration process. Consider, for example, a directed to OUT1 through OUT4 contacts. situation where a breaker will be removed from ser ‑ vice. Two profiles will be used: an “In Service” profile Relay System Setup (Profile 1), and an “Out of Service” profile (Profile 2). The system setup consists of defining all pertinent Profile 2 will be identical to the “In Service” profile, information regarding the system quantities. Setup with the exception of the overcurrent settings. screens shown here may be accessed through the SYSTEM SETUP menu. Regardless of the functions ‑ Profile 1 is set to be the Active Profile, and all set that are enabled or disabled, all System Setup values points entered. An image of Profile 1 will then be are required to be input. Several functions require com ‑ Copy Active Profile copied to Profile 2 with the proper setting of these values for correct operation. mand. Profile 2 is then selected as the Active Profile, The Nominal Voltage and Nominal Current settings and the overcurrent setpoints modified. ‑ are needed for proper normalization of per unit quan tities. CT and VT ratios are used only in monitoring : During profile switching, relay operation CAUTION  and displaying system primary quantities. is disabled for approximately 1 second. Functions Selection Input 5 Input 6 Configuration of the relay consists of enabling the Profile 1 Open Open ‑ functions for use in a particular application, designat Closed Open Profile 2 ing the output contacts each function will operate, and Profile 3 Closed Open which control/status inputs will block the function. The choices include eight programmable output contacts Profile 4 Closed Closed (OUT1–OUT8) and six control/status inputs (IN1– IN6)/(OUT1–OUT23 and IN1–IN14 for expanded I/O ofile Input Activated Pr Table 2‑1 units) plus a block choice for fuse loss logic operation (see Section 2.3, Setpoint and Time Settings, 60FL Fuse Loss subsection for details.) 2–3

61 M‑3425A Instruction Book ACTIVATED PROFILES INPUT When Input Activated Profiles is disabled, the Active Profile can be enable disable selected using HMI or remote communication. When enabled, the Active Profile is selected by the state of Input 5 and 6 (see Table 2‑1). SETPOINT PROFILE ACTIVE This screen sets the active setpoint profile. _________________ COPY ACTIVE PROFILE This screen initiates a copy of the Active Profile to any one of the TO_PROFILE_1  other profiles. NOMINAL VOLTAGE The secondary VT voltage when primary voltage is equal to the Volts ______________ gen rated I VT ratio) for L‑L rated =( V voltage. V generator nominal VT connections. V =( V gen rated I (S3 VT ratio)) for L‑G VT nominal connections. NOMINAL CURRENT generator The secondary CT current of the phase CT’s with rated Amps _______________ current. I nom = (VA I (Vgen rated(S3) )(CT ratio) ) VT CONFIGURATION ‑ ‑ Line Connection 7, Three Indicates VT connection. (See Figure 2  line-line line-ground Diagram.) When line‑ground voltages are used, functions 24, 27, and 59 may operate for line‑ground faults. If this is not desired, the line-gnd_to_line-line  line‑gnd ‑ to ‑ line‑line selection should be used to prevent operation line‑line of these functions for line‑ground faults. When line‑gnd ‑ to ‑ is selected, the relay internally calculates line‑line voltages nsitive functions. se from line‑ground voltages for all voltage ‑ This line‑gnd ‑ to ‑ line‑line selection should be used only for a VT line‑to‑ground nominal secondary voltage of 69V (not for 120 V). For this selection, the nominal voltage setting entered should be line‑line nominal voltage, which is S3 times line‑ground nominal voltage, and voltage function pickup setpoints calculation should be made using line‑to‑line voltage. DELTA-Y TRANSFORM dis delta_ab delta_ac When the generator is connected through a Delta‑Y (delta ab or delta ac) unit transformer, the relay will internally consider the 30° phase shift for 51V and 21 functions. It defines the connection of the Delta windings of the Delta /Y transformer. If the polarity of the A winding ‑ polarity of the C winding, it is defined as is connected to the non Delta ‑ AC and if the polarity of the A winding is connected to the non ‑ polarity of the B winding, then it is defined as Delta ‑ AB. In the ABC phase rotation, delta lags Y by 30 degrees in Delta ‑ AC and delta ‑ AB. leads Y by 30 degrees in Delta PHASE ROTATION a-b-c a-c-b This screen allows the user to select the phase rotation of the M‑3425A to match the generator. 2–4

62 Application – 2 59/27 MAGNITUDE SELECT This screen allows the selection of RMS or DFT for the 59 and 27 dft rms functions. The magnitude can be selected as the RMS of the total waveform (including harmonics) or the RMS of the 60/50 Hz fundamental component of the waveform using the Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT). When the RMS option is selected, the magnitude calculation is accurate over a wide frequency range (10 to 80 Hz) and the accuracy of the time delay is +20 cycles. When the DFT option is selected, the magnitude calculation is accurate near 50 or 60 Hz and the timer +1 cycle. When a wider frequency response is needed, accuracy is select RMS. For generator protection applications, it is recommended to use the RMS selection. RMS is the default when shipped from the factory. For 59 function when positive sequence voltage is selected, the calculation uses DFT irrespective of DFT/RMS selection. NOTE: If neither pulsed or latched output is enabled, then the output  contact will default to the Normal Mode. Normal Mode maintains the output contact energized as long as the condition that caused it to operate exists. After the actuating condition is cleared, the contact 50DT DIFF SPLIT-PHASE will reset after the programmed seal ‑ in time has elapsed. disable enable If the 50DT function is to be used for split ‑ p hase differential protection, this selection should be enabled. If the 50DT function is to be used as a definite time overcurrent function, or if 50DT is not enabled, this PULSE RELAY selection should be disabled. o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 If pulse relay operation is selected, output will dropout after the seal ‑ in delay expires, even if the condition which caused the relay to pick up is still out of band. When selected, latching outputs are not available. * LATCHED OUTPUTS o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 If any of the outputs are selected as latched, then after tripping, this output will stay activated, even when the tripping condition is removed. The Latched Output can be reset using the TARGET RESET pushbutton. When selected, Pulse Relay is not available. * RELAY SEAL-IN TIME OUT1 Minimum time the output contact will remain picked up to ensure ______________ Cycles in, regardless of the subsequent state of the initiating ‑ proper seal * ‑ function. Individual Seal In settings are available for all outputs. INPUT ACTIVE close OPEN/ This designates the “active” state for the individual status input. I6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 Programming uppercase (see I6) causes the “active” or “operated” condition to be initiated by the external contact opening. Otherwise, external contact closure will activate the input. * ® * . Settings for expanded I/O must be made through IPScom NOTE:  V.T. PHASE RATIO _______________ : 1 Ratio of the phase VTs. Example: 13,800 V : 120 V =13,800/120=115:1 V.T. NEUTRAL RATIO ________________ :1 Ratio of the neutral VT. Example: 13,800 V : 120 V =13,800/120=115:1 V.T. VX RATIO ________________ :1 Ratio of auxiliary VT. Example: 13,800 V : 120 V =13,800/120=115:1 C.T. PHASE RATIO _______________ : 1 Ratio of phase CTs. Example: 3,000:5 = 3000/5=600:1 C.T. NEUTRAL RATIO _______________ : 1 Ratio of neutral CT. Example: 3,000:5 = 3000/5=600:1 2–5

63 M‑3425A Instruction Book Setup System Dialog Box Figure 2‑1 Path: Relay menu / Setup submenu / Setup System command COMMAND BUTTONS Input Active When the unit is equipped with expanded I/O, this command opens the Expanded Input Active State screen (Figure 2‑2), to allow the selection of Expanded Inputs 7 through 14. State Expanded Pulse/Latch When the unit is equipped with expanded I/O, this command opens the Pulse/Latch Relay screen (Figures 2‑3 and 2‑4) to allow the selection of expanded outputs 9 through 23. Expanded Outputs When connected to a protection system, sends the currently display ed information to the unit. Otherwise, Save saves the currently displayed information. ® main window; any changes to the displayed information are lost. ou to the IPScom Returns y Cancel NOTE: Checking the inputs for the Active Input Open parameter designates the “operated” state established by an  rather than a closing external contact. opening 2–6

64 Application – 2 Figure 2‑2 Selection Screen for Expanded Input  NOTE: If neither pulsed or latched output is enabled, then the output contact will default to the Normal Mode. Normal Mode maintains the output contact energized as long as the condition that caused it to operate exists. After the actuating condition is cleared, the contact will reset after the programmed seal ‑ in time has elapsed. Figure 2‑3 Pulse Relay Expanded Output Screen Figure 2‑4 Latch Relay Expanded Output Screen 2–7

65 M‑3425A Instruction Book 2.2 System Diagrams These functions are available in Utility System the Comprehensive Package. A subset of these functions are also M-3425A Typical available in a Base Package. Connection Diagram 52 This function is available as a Unit optional protective function. This function provides control for the function to which it points. M-3425A Targets CT 50 50 (Optional) BFPh DT Integral HMI VT (Note 1) (Optional) CT (Residual) Metering (Note 4) 87 Waveform Capture 25 52 VT Gen IRIG-B Front RS232 Communication M 81A 59 27 24 81 81R Rear RS232 Communication (Metering) VT (Note 1) Rear Ethernet Port (Optional) Rear RS-485 (Note 3) M-3921 Communication 59X + Multiple Setting Groups - Programmable I/O 64B 64F 27 Self Diagnostics CT 60 Dual Power Supply M 46 50/27 51V 78 50 40 32 21 49 FL (Optional) (Metering) Breaker Monitoring (Calculated) 3V 67N Operating Current O (Software Select) V X Trip Circuit I N 50 V 67N Polarization N 51N 50N Monitoring BFN 67N (Software Select) 3 I O Event Log (Note 5) (Calculated) 3V V O X CT (Neutral) 59D Line Side 87 50 (Notes 2 & 5) 51N 50N 27 Voltage BFN GD 27 (Software Select) R 59N 59D 64S TN 32 R Low-impedance Grounding with Ground Differential High-impedance Grounding with Third and Overcurrent Stator Ground Fault Protection Harmonic 100% Ground Fault Protection  NOTES : and 67N with V 1. When 25 function is enabled, 59X, 59D with V are not available, and vice versa. X X 2. When 67N function with I (Residual) operating current is enabled, 87GD is not available, and vice N versa. 3. The 50BFN, 50N, and 51N may utiliz e either the neutral current or the residual current. ‑ 4. When used as a turn ‑ to n fault protection device. tur The current input I can be either from neutral current or residual current. 5. N 6. The 50BFN, 50N, 51N, 59D, 67N (with I ) and 87GD functions are unavailable when the 64S or V N N function has been purchased. See the M ‑ 3425A Instruction Book for connection details. Line Functional Diagram Figure 2‑5 One ‑ 2–8

66 Application – 2 These functions are available in Utility System the Comprehensive Package. A subset of these functions are also M-3425A Typical available in a Base Package. Connection Diagram 52 (Configured for Split-Phase This function is available as a Differential) Unit optional protective function. This function provides control for the function to which it points. M-3425A VT (Note 1) Targets CT (Residual) (Note 5) (Optional) Integral HMI (Optional) 52 25 VT Gen Metering Waveform Capture M 81A 24 27 59 81 81R IRIG-B (Metering) CT (Note 3) 50 Front RS232 DT Communication Rear RS232 VT (Note 1) Communication Rear Ethernet Port (Optional) (Note 2) Rear RS-485 M-3921 59X Communication + Multiple Setting Groups - 64B 64F Programmable I/O 27 Self Diagnostics CT M 50/27 51V 60FL 78 50 40 21 32 46 49 Dual Power Supply (Optional) (Metering) Breaker Monitoring Trip Circuit (Calculated) 3V O Monitoring (Note 4) V X 67N Event Log V 67N Polarization N (Software Select) 3V (Calculated) V O X CT 59D Line Side CT (Neutral) 51N 50N 27 Voltage (Note 5) 27 59N 64S (Software Select) R 59D TN 32 R Low-impedance Grounding with Overcurrent High-impedance Grounding with Third Harmonic 100% Ground Fault Protection Stator Ground Fault Protection  NOTES : 1. When 25 function is enabled, 59, 59X, 59D with V are not available, and vice and 67N with V X X versa. n fault protection device. 2. When used as a turn ‑ to ‑ tur CTs are connected as split ‑ phase diff erential current. 3. 4. 67N operating current can only be selected to I (Residual) for this configuration. N 5. The current input (I ) can be either from neutral current or residual current. N 6. The 50BFN, 50N, 51N, 59D, 67N (with I ) and 87GD functions are unavailable when the 64S or V N N function has been purchased. See the M ‑ 3425A Instruction Book for connection details. ential) Figure 2‑6 Alternative One ‑ Line Functional Diagram (configur ed for split ‑ phase differ 2–9

67 M‑3425A Instruction Book 1 Alarm output can be grouped to a single Wire to split phase differential CTs for 4 alarm at the discretion of user. use with 50DT split phase function. A B C 2 Available control output to service other relays Required generator breaker status input 5 (52b). Contact is closed when generator for VT Fuse Loss can be designated. Other M-3425A Relays Input contact number is designated by user. breaker is open. Use unit breaker 6 1 50 51 contact if no generator breaker present. 3 Output contact pairs designated by user. 1 49 48 WARNING: ONLY dry contact inputs must M-3425A be connected because these contact inputs 1 are internally wetted. Application of external 47 46 voltage on these inputs may result in 38 40 42 39 41 43 damage to the units. NOTE: M-3425A current terminal polarity marks ( . ) indicate "entering" current direction when M-3425A C A B primary current is "from" the generator to the Three VT Wye-Wye 10 52 system. If CT connections differ from those Alternate Connection 52b shown, adjust input terminals. Gen 11 A A B B C C 38 39 41 43 42 40 43 42 39 40 41 38 Two Vt Open-Delta Three VT Wye-Wye Connection Connection M-3425A M-3425A Generator M-3921 a b c a b c Field Ground Other Other Coupler Module M-3425A M-3425A Relays Relays Other M-3425A 59 58 58 59 Relays a b c 58 59 57 56 57 56 OR OR 56 57 55 54 54 55 54 55 M-3425A M-3425A 45 44 52 53 OR R R Low Impedance Grounding High Impedance Grounding Example of Control/Output Connections + M-3425A DC: 24V + 6 3 3 3 12 16 60 62 48V Power 61 63 11 10 Supply - 15 13 OR 2 DC: 110V 5 125V 52G 220V TRIP 60FL VT POWER SELF- 52b ALARM FUSE OK TEST 250V BREAKER OSCILLOGRAPH LOSS STATUS FAILURE AC: 110V RECORDER FAILURE 52Ga ALARM ALARM INITIATE INITIATE 120V - 230V 240V EXTERNAL CONTROL TRIP ALARM 4 OUTPUTS OUTPUTS INPUTS OUTPUT Figure 2‑7 Three ‑ Line Connection Diagram 2–10

68 Application – 2 M-3425A 65 Used when Generator Side VTs are connected V X Line-Ground. 64 OR Used for Sync Check (25) V X M-3425A 65 V Used when Generator Side VTs X are connected Line-Line 64 M-3425A C A B 10 52 52b Gen 11 A B C M-3425A 39 Three VT Wye-Wye 38 Connection 41 40 43 42 OR M-3425A 42 A B C Two VT Open-Delta 43 Connection 40 41 38 39 Generator  NOTE ‑ When V turn fault protection (59X) is not avail is connected for Sync Check function (25), turn ‑ to ‑ : X able. Figure 2‑8 Function 25 Sync Check Three ‑ Line Connection Diagram 2–11

69 M‑3425A Instruction Book M-3425A A B C 10 52 52b Gen 11 C A B M-3425A V X 65 R 64 used for turn-to-turn V X fault protection (59X) Generator a b c Line to Neutral Voltage Rated Cable M-3425A M-3425A 53 52 44 45 OR R R Low Impedance Grounding High Impedance Grounding When V  NOTE : for the line side voltage (i.e., setting turn faults 59X must use 3V is connected for turn ‑ to ‑ 0 X selection) and the V.T. configuration must be Line to Ground. The 25 function is not available. Figure 2‑9 Function 59X Turn to T urn Fault Protection Three ‑ Line Connection Diagram 2–12

70 Application – 2 Bus Section A B C M-3425A 53 I input can be connected N R Residual CT either at Neutral or as Residual. 52 M-3425A 67N Connection 65 64 A B C M-3425A 59X Bus Ground 10 52 52b Gen 11 A B C M-3425A V X 65 R 64 67N, 59D Connection V can be used for both 67N and X Generator 59D if connected in this manner. a b c M-3425A input can be connected I N 53 52 either at Neutral or as Residual. R Low Impedance Grounding OR M-3425A 45 44 R High Impedance Grounding is connected for bus ground protection (59X, 67N, or 59D) , 25 function is not available.  NOTE : When V X Figure 2‑10 Function 67N, 59D, 59X (Bus Ground) Thr ee ‑ Line Connection Diagram 2–13

71 M‑3425A Instruction Book If Zone 1 is not set to see the transmission system, Setpoints and Time Settings 2.3 step blocking is not recommended. ‑ of ‑ out The individual protective functions, along with their When Zone 3 is used for Out of ‑ step blocking, the ‑ magnitude and timing settings are described in the out of step delay is used for the detection of the following pages. Settings for disabled functions do not transit time of the swing between Zone 3 and Zone apply. Some menu and setting screens do not appear 2 impedances. for functions that are disabled or not purchased. Menu screens are as they would appear on units equipped The load encroachment blinder function can be set with the M‑3931 HMI Module. The same setting may with a reach and an angle as shown in Figure 2‑13. be entered using M‑3820D IPScom Communications When enabled, this feature will block the 21 Function Software. from misoperating during high load conditions. For those units equipped with Expanded I/O, setting When the generator is connected to the system through of Expanded Inputs and Outputs is accomplished by a delta/wye transformer, proper voltages and currents selecting “Expanded I/O” from the individual function (equivalent to the high side of the transformer) must be ® will display the Expanded I/O Initiate screen. IPScom used in order for the relay to see correct impedances dialog screen (Figure 2‑11). for system faults. By enabling the Delta Y Transform ‑ feature (see Section 2.1, Configuration, Relay System 21 Phase Distance Setup), the relay can internally consider the 30° phase The Phase Distance function (21) is designed for sys ‑ ‑ shift (30° lead delta ‑ ab or 30° lag delta ac) through the tem phase fault backup protection and is implemented delta/wye transformer, saving auxiliary VTs. Impedance ‑ as a three zone mho characteristic. calculations for various VT connections are shown in Table 2‑2. All impedance settings are secondary relay Three separate distance elements are used to detect quantities and can be derived from the following formula: AB, BC, and CA fault types. The ranges and incre ‑ ments are shown in Figure 2‑14. The diameter, offset, Z = Z x (R ) ÷ R SEC C V PRI system impedance angle (relay characteristic angle), = secondary reflected impedance, Z = where Z and definite time delay need to be selected for each SEC PRI , R primary impedance = current transformer ratio, zone for coordination with the system relaying in the C and R = voltage transformer ratio. specific application. V The minimum current sensitivity depends on the pro‑ Zone 1, Zone 2 and Zone 3 may be used for backup grammed reach (diameter and offset). If the current is protection for unit transformer and transmission below the minimum sensitivity current, the impedance faults. Zone 3 in conjunction with Zone 2 can be calculated will saturate, and not be accurate. This will used to detect an Out of Step condition and it can not cause any relay misoperation. be programmed to block Function 21 #1 and/or 21 #2. If Zone 3 is being used for out ‑ of ‑ step blocking, An overcurrent supervision feature can be enabled, it does not trip. which will block the 21 function when all three phase currents are below the pickup value. Figure 2‑11 Selection Screen for Expanded I/O Initiate 2–14

72 Application – 2 Typically the first zone of protection is set to an impedance value 21 #1 DIAMETER enough in excess of the first external protective section (typically the _______________ Ohms unit transformer) to assure operation for faults within that protective zone. See Figure 2‑12, Phase Distance (21) Coverage. A negative or positive offset can be specified to offset the mho circle 21 #1 OFFSET ‑ from the origin. This offset is usually set at zero. See Figure 2 13, Ohms _______________ Phase Distance (21) Function Applied For System Backup. The impedance angle should be set as closely as possible to the actual 21 #1 IMPEDANCE ANGLE impedance angle of the zone being protected. Degrees _____________ When enabled the 21 Function is blocked when the impedance falls 21#1 LOAD ENCROACHMENT ‑ within the zone but above the R Reach and below the Load Encroach disable ENABLE ment angle. : The 21 #2 and #3 zone settings can be set for an additional  NOTE 21 #1 LOAD ENCR ANGLE external section of protection on the system (typically transmission Degrees _____________ Zone 1 distance relays) plus adequate overreach. #2 and #3 screens of ‑ are identical to those in #1. Element #3 also includes out step ‑ 21 #1 LOAD ENCR R REACH of time delay when out step blocking is enabled for Zone #1 and/ ‑ ‑ Ohms _______________ or Zone #2. When enabled, the overcurrent supervision blocks the 21 Function 21 #1 OC SUPERVISION when all three phase currents are below the pickup. enable disable 21 #1 OC SUPERVISION _______________ Amps ‑ When enabled the 21 Function is blocked on the detection of an out step condition. ‑ of 21 #1 OUT OF STEP BLOCK enable disable The time delays are set to coordinate with the primary protection of those overreached zones and, when applicable, with the breaker failure 21 #1 DELAY schemes associated with those protective zones. ______________ Cycles In Zone #3 when out ‑ of ‑ step blocking is enabled for Zone #1 or #2. 21 #3 OUT OF STEP DELAY Cycles ______________ 2–15

73 M‑3425A Instruction Book Protected Range Zone 3 +X Protected Range Zone 2 Protected Range Zone 1 +R R X 3 52 52 52 Bus M-3425A 21 Figure 2 ‑ 12 Phase Distance (21) Coverage  NOTE : The reach settings of the distance elements (21) should not include generator impedance since the distance measurement starts at the VT location. However, since the neutral side CTs are used for this function, backup protection for generator Phase ‑ to ‑ Phase faults is also provided                   R1 Zone 1 Load Encroachment Blinder R Reach R2 Zone 2 Load Encroachment Blinder R Reach Zone 1 Load Encroachment Blinder Angle δ 1 2 Zone 2 Load Encroachment Blinder Angle δ Impedance Angle Setting Θ  NOTE : Zone #3 is used for po wer swing detection in this example. Phase Distance (21) Function Applied for System Backup Figure 2‑13 2–16

74 Application – 2 Phase Distance (21) Setpoint Ranges Figure 2‑14                                                                                                                                                          Table 2‑2 Impedance Calculation 2–17

75 M‑3425A Instruction Book Overexcitation Volts/Hz 24 Setting this relay function involves determining the desired protection levels and operating times. The first ‑ ‑ ‑ Per Hertz function (24) provides overexcita The Volts step is to plot the combined generator and associ‑ connected ‑ tion protection for the generator and unit ated unit transformer overexcitation capability limits. transformers. This function incorporates two definite This data is typically available from the manufacturer time elements which can be used to realize traditional and should be plotted on the same voltage base. step overexcitation protection. In addition, the ‑ two Depending on the resulting characteristic, one of the relay includes an inverse time element that provides ‑ four families of inverse time curves (as shown in Ap superior protection by closely approximating the pendix D, ) can be matched to Inverse Time Curves combined generator/unit transformer overexcitation provide the protection. The two definite time elements curve. Industry standard inverse time curves may can be used to further shape the protection curve or be selected along with a linear reset rate which may provide an alarm. be programmed to match specific machine cooling characteristics. The percent pickup is based on the Figure 2‑15 illustrates a composite graph of generator Nominal Voltage setting and the nominal frequency. and transformer limits, a chosen inverse time curve The V/Hz function provides reliable measurements and pickup, and a definite time pickup and delay. of V/Hz up to 200% for a frequency range of 2–80 Hz. The ranges and increments are presented in Figure 2‑16. 24DT #1 PICKUP Definite time setpoint #1 establishes the V/Hz level above which the protection operating time will be fixed at the definite time delay #1. _________________ % 24DT #1 DELAY Delay time #1 establishes the operation time of the protection for all V/Hz values above the level set by definite time setpoint #1. ______________ Cycles 24DT #2 PICKUP Definite time setpoint #2 could be programmed to alarm, alerting % _________________ the operator to take proper control action to possibly avoid tripping. 24DT #2 DELAY Time to operation at any V/Hz value exceeding Definite time setting #2. ______________ Cycles The pickup value is the V/Hz value at which the chosen inverse curve begins protective operation. Typical value is 105%. 24IT PICKUP _________________ % Allows the user to designate the appropriate curve family for this 24IT CURVE protection application. These curves are shown in Appendix D , Inverse Time Curves . crv#1 crv#2 crv#3 crv#4 The appropriate curve in the family is designated by the associated 24IT TIME DIAL “K” value of the curve. _________________ The value entered here should be the time needed for the unit to 24IT RESET RATE cool to normal operating temperature if the V/Hz excursion time was ______________ Seconds just under the trip time. 2–18

76 Application – 2 M‑3425A Firmware Versions D‑0114VXX.XX.XX After any V/Hz excursion, cooling time must also be and Earlier taken into account. If the unit should again be sub ‑ jected to high V/Hz before it has cooled to normal When the inverse time element is en - NOTE  : operating levels, damage could be caused before the abled, the definite time element #1 must V/Hz trip point is reached. For this reason, a linear be enabled which will provide definite reset characteristic, adjustable to take into account minimum time setting for the inverse the cooling rate of the unit, is provided. If a subsequent time curve. V/Hz excursion occurs before the reset characteristic has timed out, the time delay will pick up from the The following steps must be followed when setting the equivalent point (as a %) on the curve. The Reset inverse time element and definite time element #1: Rate setting entered should be time needed for the 1. The pic kup of the inverse time element unit to cool to normal operating temperature if the V/ must be less than the pickup of the definite Hz excursion time was just under the trip point. time element #1 2. The operating time of the in verse time M‑3425A Firmware Version D‑0150V 01.00.34 element at the definite time element #1 The inverse time element has a definite minimum time pickup should be greater than the definite of 30 cycles. Definite Time Element #1 is independent, time element #1 time delay setting (A2>A1 in Figure 2 ‑ 15). and has no effect on inverse time elements. When the inv 3. erse time element is enabled, M‑3425A Firmware Version D‑0150V 01.04.00 definite time element #1 should not be The inverse time element has a definite minimum time used for alarm. Only definite time element of 60 cycles. Definite Time Element #1 is independent, #2 can be used for alarm. and has no effect on inverse time elements.        ­ €‚   …†…  ƒ„ Š‡ˆ ‰       … …†‡ˆ‰   …                  Example of Capability and Protection Curves (24) Figure 2‑15 2–19

77 M‑3425A Instruction Book Figure 2‑16 Volts ‑ Per ‑ Hertz (24) Setpoint Ranges 2–20

78 Application – 2 Dead Line/Dead Bus Check 25 Sync Check NOTE  : The 25 function cannot be enabled under The Dead Volt Limit defines the Hot/Dead voltage any one of the following conditions: level used in Deadline/Dead Bus closing schemes. voltage is equal to or below When the measured V (Residual • 67N Overcurrent) is Directional X the Dead Volt Limit, V is considered dead. When enabled and the polarizing quantity has X the measured V is above the Dead Volt Limit, V is been set to V . X X X considered hot. The opposite side of the breaker uses is voltage the and enabled side • 59D line the positive sequence voltage measurement (V1) for . is set to V X ‑ 3 phase consideration in determining hot/dead detec ‑ n fault • 59X connected for turn-to-tur is tion. Different combinations of hot line/dead bus clos ‑ protection or bus ground protection. ings may be selected, depending on how the buses are referenced. A logic diagram of the Deadline/Dead The Synchronism (Sync) Check function (25) is used Bus scheme is presented in Figure 2‑17. to ensure that the voltage magnitude, phase angle , and Dead V1 & V The Dead V1, Dead V enable are and frequency of the generator (V1) and the utility X X system (V ) are within acceptable limits before the software switches used to enable the dead line/dead X generator is synchronized with the system. Gen‑ bus logic. Further conditioning can be performed on the dead detection logic by selecting one or more erator voltage (V1) can be selected as A, B, or C ‑ ‑ input contacts (Dead Input Enable) to control the en (line‑to‑ground and line line) or AB, ground to line ‑ ‑ abled dead detection element. For example, if INPUT2 BC, or CA (line ‑ to line). (I2) is selected under the Dead Input Enable screen, The sync check function includes phase angle, delta elements are and both the Dead V1 and Dead V X frequency, and delta voltage checks. enabled, the dead check timer will start when INPUT2 hot or V1 hot/V is activated, and either V1 dead/V X X dead. This allows for external control of the desired Phase Angle Check dead closing scheme. Dead Input Enable selections The phase angle is considered acceptable when the are common to all dead detection elements. If no selected sync phase voltage (V1) and system volt ‑ inputs are selected under the Dead Input Enable age (V ) are within the Upper Volt Limit and Lower X screen, and any dead element is enabled, the dead Volt Limit window and the measured phase angle is check timer will start immediately when the dead within the phase angle window. condition exists. Phase Angle Window is defined as twice the Phase The 25S and 25D can be programmed to be sent to Angle Limit setting. For example, if the Phase Angle two different contacts, if desired. Limit is set at 10 degrees, a phase angle window of 20 degrees exists between –10 degrees and +10  : NOTE The 25 function does not produce a target degrees. The logic diagram of the phase angle check or LED and is accompanied by the HMI is shown in Figure 2‑17. message “F25 Function Operated”. Delta Voltage and Delta Frequency Check Delta Voltage and Delta Frequency elements may be individually enabled or disabled, as desired. The Delta Voltage check will compare the absolute difference between the selected sync phase voltage (V1) and the ) with the Delta Voltage measured system voltage (V X Limit setting. Likewise, the Delta Frequency measures the frequency difference between V1 and V volt‑ X age signals. The Phase Angle Check, Delta Voltage and Delta Frequency Check all combine through an appropriate timer with the output directed to the programmed 25S output contact. A logic diagram representing this logic is presented in Figure 2‑17. 2–21

79 M‑3425A Instruction Book If this function is enabled, the following settings are applicable: Phase angle setting. 25S PHASE LIMIT Degrees Upper voltage limit for voltage acceptance. 25S UPPER VOLT LIMIT Volts Lower voltage limit for voltage acceptance. 25S LOWER VOLT LIMIT Volts 25S SYNC CHECK DELAY Sync check time delay. Cycles 25S DELTA VOLT Delta voltage element. disable ENABLE 25S DELTA VOLT LIMIT Delta voltage setting. Volts 25S DELTA FREQUENCY Delta frequency element. disable ENABLE 25S DELTA FREQ LIMIT Delta frequency setting. Hz Selects the phase voltage on the generator side for Sync Check 25S SYNC-CHECK PHASE b c a functions (A, B, or C ‑ for line ‑ ground and line ‑ to ‑ line, ground to line ‑ to ‑ line) and AB, BC, CA for line 25D DEAD VOLT LIMIT Voltage less than this setting is defined as “DEAD”; above this set‑ Volts ting as “HOT”. 25D DEAD V1 HOT VX setting. Enables Dead V1/Hot V X ENABLE disable 25D DEAD VX HOT V1 Enables Hot V1/Dead V setting. X disable ENABLE 25D DEAD V1 & VX Enables Dead V1/Dead V closing. X DISABLE enable 25D DEAD INPUT ENABLE Externally controlled dead closing. Inputs IN7–IN14 must be set i6 i5 i4 I3 i2 i1 using IPScom. Dead delay timer setting. 25D DEAD DELAY Cycles 2–22

80 Application – 2 Delta V and Delta F Check Logic With Delta V Delta F Enabled AND | < Delta V Limit - V |V one Only Delta V and 1 X AND Delta F Check Scheme Delta V Is Enabled may be active at a time. Phase Angle Check Logic | < - F |F Delta F Limit X 1 > V1 Lower Voltage Limit AND AND AND AND Delta F Is Enabled < V1 Upper Voltage Limit > V Lower Voltage Limit Sync Check Timer X Output Seal-in Timer AND AND Phase Angle OK < V Upper Voltage Limit X 25S 0 Output Sync Check Delta V and Delta F Check Logic Relay Contact < Phase Angle Phase Limit Delta F Enabled OR With Delta V |V | < Delta V Limit - V 1 X AND AND OR Delta V Is Enabled Only Delta V and one Delta F Limit - F |F | < 1 X Delta F Check Scheme AND may be active at a time. Delta F Is Enabled Dead Line/ Dead Bus Check Logic V1 < Dead Limit pos AND > Dead Limit V X Dead V1 Hot V Enabled X V1 Dead Limit > pos OR V < Dead Limit AND X Hot V1 Enabled Dead V X V1 < Dead Limit pos Dead Check Timer AND V < Dead Limit X Output Seal-in Timer Dead V1 V Enabled X OR 0 25D Dead Time Output Relay Dead Line/ Dead Bus Check Input Initiate Logic Contact V1 < Dead Limit pos AND V > Dead Limit X Enabled Dead V1 Hot V X AND OR Dead Input Enable V1 Dead Limit > pos Selected INPUT Is Activated AND < Dead Limit V X AND Hot V1 Enabled Dead V X User Software Setting Measured Variable Figure 2‑17 Sync Check Logic Diagrams 2–23

81 M‑3425A Instruction Book Figure 2‑18 Sync Check (25) Setpoint Ranges 2–24

82 Application – 2 27 Phase Undervoltage The Phase Undervoltage function (27) may be used to detect any condition causing long ‑ or short ‑ term un ‑ dervoltage. This is a true three ‑ phase function in that each phase has an independent timing element. The ranges and increments are presented in Figure 2‑19. Magnitude measurement depends on the 59/27 Mag‑ nitude Select setting. (See Section 2.1, Configuration, Relay System Setup.) When the RMS calculation is selected, the magnitude calculation is accurate over a wide frequency range (10 to 80 Hz) and the accuracy of the time delay is +20 cycles. If DFT calculation is selected, the magnitude calculation is accurate near 50 or 60 Hz, and the timer accuracy is +1 cycle. 27TN Third Harmonic Undervoltage, Neutral For ground faults near the stator neutral, the Third 27 #1 PICKUP 27 #2 and 27 #3 Screens are identical to 27 #1. _______________ Volts 27 #1 DELAY Cycles ______________ ‑ 19 Phase Undervoltage (27) Setpoint Ranges Figure 2 2–25

83 M‑3425A Instruction Book power to fluctuate (typically <0.2%.) This may result ‑ Harmonic (180/150 Hz) Neutral undervoltage func ‑ tion (27TN) provides stator ground in a measured power value that is negative (i.e., fault protection ‑ ‑ –0.001 pu.) If the reverse power blocking is not impedance ‑ grounded generator applica for high enabled, the 27TN may be momentarily unblocked, tions (See Figure 2‑20). When used in conjunction with the fundamental neutral overvoltage (60/50Hz) resulting in a relay operation and nuisance generator trip. It is highly recommended that if the Forward fault protection function (59N), 100% stator ground ‑ Power Blocking is used, both the Forward Power can be provided. This is illustrated in Figure 2‑20. Blocking and Reverse Power Blocking be enabled The 27TN function can be supervised by the and set. ‑ positive ‑ sequence undervoltage element. Under voltage supervision can prevent tripping when the ‑ In the majority of the cases, these blocking func tions will be disabled, except for those operating generator field is not energized or the unit is not cases where the third harmonic neutral voltage yet synchronized. magnitude is less than 0.5 V. The settings for the In some generators, the third harmonic voltage can blocking functions should be set based on field be very low, especially during light load conditions. measurements. Blocking regions are illustrated in It is also observed in some generator installations Figure 2‑21. that the third harmonic voltage is considerably re ‑ ‑ The 27TN setting depends on the actual third duced for a specific range of power output (band). To ‑ prevent mis harmonic neutral voltage level seen during normal operation during these conditions, the 27TN function can be programmed to be supervised operation of the generator. The setting should be harmonic voltage ‑ about 50% of the minimum third (blocked) by low forward power, low reverse power, low Vars (lead and lag), low power factor (lead/lag), observed during various loading conditions. This can be most conveniently measured during and when the forward power is inside a band. commissioning of the relay. Since the relay measures To properly handle pump storage operations, the the third harmonic voltage levels and will display M‑3425A forward power blocking algorithm is those values directly, no additional equipment is enable from “zero per unit” to the forward power required. The undervoltage inhibit setting should setpoint. During plant startup, after the field is be about 80% to 90% of the nominal voltage. The flashed and before the unit synchronized, small ranges and increments are presented in Figure 2‑22. current measurement errors cause the measured     ­€‚         ƒ€ „­€‚         ƒƒ          …† ‡           ˆ ‡                              otection Characteristics Figure 2‑20 Third Harmonic Undervoltage (27TN) Pr 2–26

84 Application – 2 + Q Low Band Forward Lag VAr Block Power Block P + - P Forward Reverse Block Block High Band Power Power Forward Block Block Power Block Lead VAr Block - Q Figure 2‑21 27TN Blocking Regions Figure 2‑22 Third Harmonic Undervoltage, Neutral Cir cuit (27TN) Setpoint Ranges 2–27

85 M‑3425A Instruction Book 27TN #2 Screens are identical to 27TN #1. Relay volts are equal to the primary neutral voltage divided by the grounding transformer ratio. Gener ‑ ally set for approximately 50% of the minimum third harmonic voltage observed during various loading conditions. 27TN #1 LAG VAR BLK 27TN #1 PICKUP ______________ Volts PU 27TN #1 LEAD PF BLK 27TN #1 POS SEQ VOLT BLK enable disable disable ENABLE 27TN #1 POS SEQ VOLT BLK 27TN #1 LEAD PF BLK LEAD Volts 27TN #1 FWD POWER BLK 27TN #1 LAG PF BLK disable disable enable ENABLE 27TN #1 LAG PF BLK 27TN #1 FWD POWER BLK LAG PU 27TH #1 REV POWER BLK 27TN #1 BAND FWD PWR BLK disable enable disable ENABLE 27TN #1 REV POWER BLK 27TN#1 LO B FWD PWR BLK PU PU 27TN#1 HI B FWD PWR BLK 27TN #1 LEAD VAR BLK disable PU ENABLE 27TN #1 LEAD VAR BLK 27TN #1 DELAY PU Cycles 27TN #1 LAG VAR BLK ENABLE disable 2–28

86 Application – 2 wer 32 Directional Po is set to Under and a positive pickup setting is chosen. The relay will trip when the measured forward power The Directional Power function (32) can provide is less than the pickup value. The function should be protection against both generator motoring and blocked when the generator breaker is open (using overload. It provides three power setpoints, each with contact input blocking) otherwise the function will trip a magnitude setting and a time delay. The Forward and prevent the generator from being brought online. ‑ Power direction (power flow to system) is automati cally chosen when the pickup setting is positive and the Reverse Power direction (power flow to generator) Protection from Generator Overload is automatically chosen when the pickup setting is Protection from generator overload is provided by negative. The range, as shown is from –3.000 to PU selecting a positive pickup setting with Over/Under is equal to the generator MVA PU where 1.0 PU 3.000 Power setting set to Over. The relay will operate when rating. Normalized PU power flow measurements are the measured real power is greater than the pickup based on Nominal Voltage and Nominal Current set ‑ setting. ting, as shown in Section 2.1, Configuration, Relay System Setup. Protection from Excessive Reactive Power The directional power element #3 can be set to op ‑ Protection from Generator Motoring erate on either real power or reactive power. When Protection against motoring is provided by selecting protection from excessive reactive power is required a negative pickup with Over/Under power set to Over. the element #3 can be set to operate on reactive The relay will operate when the measured real power power. The relay will operate when the measured is greater (more negative) than the pickup setting in reactive power exceeds the pickup setting. the reverse direction. Figures 2‑23 through 2‑26 show reverse power, low In some steam generator applications it is desirable forward power, over power, and over reactive power to trip the generator when the forward power is less applications. than a small value. This is due to the fact that the trapped steam will cause the generator to supply a small amount of power even though the steam valves are closed. In this case the Over/Under power setting          Figure 2‑23 Tripping on Reverse Power Flow (Over Power with Negative Pickup) 2–29

87 M‑3425A Instruction Book 32 #1 PICKUP The reverse power pickup setting should be based on the type of PU ________________ prime mover and the losses when the generator is motoring. 32 #1 DELAY Reverse power relays should always be applied with a time delay Cycles ______________ ‑ operation during power swing conditions. in order to prevent mis Typical time delay settings are 20 to 30 seconds. 32 #1 TARGET LED Target LED for the 32 Function elements can be individually enabled or disabled. enable disable 32#1 UNDER/OVER POWER When Low Forward Power protection is desired, set this to Under with a positive pickup setting. The relay will trip when the real power over under measurement is less than or equal to the pickup setpoint. 32 #2 PICKUP If used, positive direction power settings can be used for overload protection, providing either alarm or tripping or both, when power ________________ PU equals or exceeds the setting. The pickup and time delay settings should be based on the capability limit of the generator. 32 #2 DELAY A second reverse power setting can be used for sequential tripping of the generator in which case the associated time delay will be in ______________ Cycles the range of 2 to 3 seconds. 32 #2 TARGET LED enable disable 32#2 UNDER/OVER POWER over under 32 #3 PICKUP PU ________________ 32 #3 DELAY Cycles ______________ 32 #3 TARGET LED enable disable 32#3 UNDER/OVER POWER over under 32 #3 DIR POWER SENSING Directional Power Sensing for Element #3 can be selected as Real or Reactive. real reactive 2–30

88 Application – 2          Tripping on Low Forwar Figure 2‑24 d Power (Under Power with Positive Pickup)          Tripping on Overpower (Over Power with Positive Pickup) Figure 2‑25 2–31

89 M‑3425A Instruction Book Figure 2‑26 Tripping on Over Reactive Power with Element #3 (Over Power, Positive Pickup and Directional Power Sensing Set to Reactive) Figure 2‑27 Directional Power , 3 ‑ Phase (32) Setpoint Ranges 2–32

90 Application – 2 The first approach is shown in Figure 2‑28, Loss 40 Loss of Field of Field (40) — Protective Approach I. Here, both of Field function (40) provides protection The Loss ‑ of ‑ the offset mho elements (#1 and #2) are set with an ‑ for a partial or complete loss of field. A variety of pos l l offset of –X is the (saturated) direct axis ÷2, where X sible settings make the M‑3425A Generator Protec ‑ d d transient reactance of the generator. The diameter of ‑ of ‑ tion Relay very flexible when applied to loss field the smaller circle (#1) is set at 1.0 pu impedance on protection. Ranges and increments are presented in of ‑ the machine base. This mho element detects loss ‑ Figure 2‑30. field from full load to about 30% load. A small time ‑ field function is implemented with two of The loss ‑ delay provides fast protection. offset mho elements, an undervoltage element, and The diameter of the larger circle (#2) is set equal to a directional element. The setting for each mho ele‑ X is the (unsaturated) direct axis synchro ‑ , where X ment, diameter, offset, and time delay, are adjusted d d nous reactance of the machine. This mho element individually. Each element has two time delay settings. of ‑ ‑ can detect a loss field condition from almost no VC) is applicable The second time delay (delay with load to full load. A time delay of 30 to 60 cycles (#2) with voltage control, and the timer only starts if the should be used in order to prevent possible incorrect positive sequence voltage is below the voltage control operation on stable swings. setting. The function with voltage control and without voltage control can be programmed to send to two The time delay with voltage control is typically set different output contacts, if desired. The delay with shorter than the other time delay. voltage control may be enabled on each element but the voltage level setting is common. The voltage is shown in Figure 2‑29, The second approach control allows for faster tripping when low voltage may Loss of Field (40) – Protective Approach II. In this ap ‑ be caused by the VAr intake by the machine with loss proach, one of the mho elements is set with an offset l l of excitation. A common directional unit is provided to X ÷ 2), and a time ‑(X of –X ÷ 2, a diameter of 1.1 d d d block the relay operation during slightly underexcited delay of 10 to 30 cycles. The second element is set conditions (since approach #1 with negative offset is to coordinate with the generator minimum excitation inherently directional, the directional element is not state stability limit. ‑ limit and steady ) can required). The directional unit’s angle setting (Q D In order to obtain proper coordination, the offset of this be set from 0° to 20°. element must be adjusted to be positive. Typically, the The settings of the offset mho elements should be offset is set equal to the unit transformer reactance field condition ‑ of ‑ such that the relay detects the loss ). The diameter is approximately equal to (1.1 X (X d T for any loading while not mis ‑ operating during power + X ). A time delay of 30 to 60 cycles would prevent T swings and fault conditions. Two approaches are operation on stable swings. ‑ mis widely used in the industry, both of which are sup ‑ The following table provides suggested time settings ported by the M‑3425A relay. Both approaches require when time delay with VC is used in addition to stan ‑ knowledge of the reactances and other parameters dard time delay. of the generator. They are described in Figure 2‑28, Loss of Field (40) — Protective Approach I and Figure Typical setting is 13° (0.974 power factor). This setting 2‑29, Loss of Field (40) — Protective Approach II. is common to both element #1 and #2. Positive sequence impedance measurements are ‑ Approach #1 can also be used for Zone #1, and ap used for the loss of field functions. All impedance proach #2 for Zone #2, where better coordination with settings are secondary relay quantities and can be AVR limiters, machine capability limits, and steady derived from the following formula: state stability limits can be obtained. x (R ÷ R ) = Z Z PRI SEC C V = secondary reflected impedance, where Z SEC Z = primary impedance , R = current transformer PRI C ratio, and R = voltage transformer ratio. V 2–33

91 M‑3425A Instruction Book 40 #1 DIAMETER 40 #2 OFFSET Ohms Ohms 40 #1 OFFSET 40 #2 DELAY Ohms Cycles 40 #1 DELAY 40VC #2 DELAY WITH VC Cycles Cycles 40VC #1 DELAY WITH VC 40 VOLTAGE CONTROL Cycles Volts 40 #2 DIAMETER 40 DIRECTIONAL ELEMENT Ohms Degrees Zone 1 Zone 2 80 to 90% of Nominal Voltage Voltage Control Setting N/A 15 Cycles 3,600 Cycles Delay Disable Delay with VC 60 Cycles ol Time Settings Table 2‑3 Voltage Contr 2–34

92 Application – 2                                       Loss of Field (40)—Protective Figure 2‑28 Approach 1                                                  Loss of Field (40)—Protective Approach 2 Figure 2‑29 2–35

93 M‑3425A Instruction Book Figure 2‑30 Loss ‑ of ‑ Field (40) Setpoint Ranges y. out in displa NOTE : Out of Step Block Enab le is not available for this release, and will appear greyed ‑  2–36

94 Application – 2 level. Figure 2‑31, Negative Sequence Overcurrent 46 Negative Sequence Overcurrent Inverse Time Curves, illustrates the inverse time The Negative Sequence Overcurrent function characteristic of the negative sequence overcurrent (46) provides protection against possible ro ‑ function. tor overheating and damage due to unbalanced faults or other system conditions which can cause Operating times are slower than shown in ‑ unbalanced three phase currents in the gen Figure 2‑31 when measured current values are erator. Ranges and increments are presented in greater than 15 A (3 A for 1 A rated circuit). Figure 2‑32. The first task of setting this function is to determine This function has a definite time element and an the capabilities of the associated machine. As es ‑ inverse time element. The definite time pickup value tablished by ANSI standards, the machine limits are ‑ and definite operating time are normally associ 2 expressed as (I ) t = K. The value of K is established 2 ated with an alarm function. The inverse time ele‑ by the machine design and is generally provided on ment is usually associated with a trip function and ‑ test sheets of the machine. The relay can accommo has a pickup and an operating time defined by an date any generator size because of the wide range of 2 ) is (I t = K, where K is the Time Dial Setting and I 2 2 K settings from 1 to 95. Typical values can be found the per unit negative sequence current. in ANSI C50.13‑1977. The minimum delay for the inverse time function is The negative sequence pickup range is from 3% to factory set at 12 cycles to avoid nuisance tripping. A 100% of the Nominal Current value input during sys ‑ maximum time to trip can be set to reduce the operat ‑ tem setup (see Section 2.1, Configuration). ing times for modest imbalances. An important feature that helps protect the generator from damage due to This protection must operate for system faults not recurring imbalances is a linear reset characteristic. that will be cleared by system relaying. This requires When I decreases below the pickup value, the trip consideration of line protection, bus differential and 2 timer takes the reset time setting from its 100% trip breaker failure backup protections. The pickup setting is usually quite low (3–5%) and the output of 46DT PICKUP this function is usually connected to alarm only. % ________________ Time delay should be set high enough to avoid alarms on 46DT DELAY transients. Cycles ______________ ‑ The 46 Inverse Time pickup setting should coincide with the continu 46IT PICKUP ous negative sequence current capability of the generator operating ________________ % at full output. The maximum trip time is used to reduce the longer trip times 46IT MAX DELAY associated with low to moderate imbalances to a preset time. ______________ Cycles Emulates generator cool down time. 46IT RESET TIME _____________ Seconds The time dial setting corresponds to the K provided by the generator 46IT TIME DIAL manufacturer for the specific unit being protected. See Figure 2‑31 _________________ for the negative sequence overcurrent inverse time curves. 2–37

95 M‑3425A Instruction Book     ƒ „     … †‡                ˆ ‰€    € ‚         …  †              ­ ­        NOTE : When the phase current exceeds 3X I nominal, the operating times will be greater than those shown. * 0.24 seconds for 50 Hz units. Figure 2‑31 Negative Sequence Overcurr ent Inverse Time Curves Figure 2‑32 Negative Sequence Overcurr ent (46) Setpoint Ranges 2–38

96 Application – 2 49 Stator Overload Protection Example : If we consider that the generator was loaded with 80% of its rating power prior to overload, then The Stator Thermal Overload function (49) provides the current goes up to 2.0 times the maximum current protection against possible damage during overload I )=2.0). Selecting the curve P=0.8 (see Figure / ( (I conditions. The characteristic curves are based on L max τ 2‑34), we have t/ =30 minutes, then the τ =0.1133. If 8 standard, and represent both cold and hot IEC ‑ 255 ‑ time delay for this condition would be: t = 0.1133 x curves. The function uses the thermal time constant 3.3999 minutes. = 30 ‑ of the generator and stator maximum allowable con tinuous overload current ( I ) in implementing the max The 49 function has two elements, one of which can inverse time characteristic. be used for trip and the other for alarm.                        Where: t = time to trip τ = thermal time constant = load current I L ‑ I = pre load current PL = maximum allowed continuous overload current I max Current-Square 2 I L 2 I PL 2 I max 2 I L 2 I L 2 I PL t t Tripped Not Tripped Figure 2‑33 Time Constant, Function 49 49 #1 TIME CONSTANT τ Selects the time constant, ‘ ’ Min Selects the maximum allowed continuous overload current. 49#1 MAX OVERLOAD CURR Amps 49#2 Screens are identical to those for 49#1. 2–39

97 M‑3425A Instruction Book                          Figure 2‑34 49 Function Overload Curves 2–40

98 Application – 2 Figure 2‑35 Stator Thermal Protection (49) Setpoint Ranges 2–41

99 M‑3425A Instruction Book 50/50N Instantaneous Overcurrent, Phase and Neutral Circuits The Instantaneous Phase (50) and Instantaneous Neutral (50N) overcurrent functions provide fast trip ‑ ping for high fault currents. The settings of both func ‑ tions must be set such that they will not pickup for fault or conditions outside the immediate protective zone. If the neutral current input is connected to a step ‑ up transformer’s neutral CT, the 50N function can be used as a breaker flashover protection when used in conjunction with external breaker failure protection. Ranges and Increments are presented in Figures 2‑36 and 2‑37. The function automatically selects fundamental RMS or total RMS calculation based on the input frequency. When the generator frequency is within  5 Hz from the nominal frequency, it uses fundamental RMS calculation. Outside of this range, it uses total RMS calculation, which will provide pro‑ tection during offline down to a frequency of 8 Hz. For providing off ‑ line protection, one of the elements can be supervised by a breaker ‘b’ contact, and the element blocked when the breaker is closed. This allows the function to be set sensitively (below full load current). 50#1 PICKUP ) divided ) is equal to the primary current (I The relay current (I p R Amps by the appropriate CT ratio. These screens are repeated for 50#2 element. 50#1 DELAY Cycles 50N PICKUP Amps 50N DELAY Cycles 2–42

100 Application – 2 Instantaneous Overcurr Figure 2 ‑ 36 ent (50) Setpoint Ranges Figure 2‑37 Instantaneous Neutral Overcurr ent (50N) Setpoint Ranges 2–43

101 M‑3425A Instruction Book 50BF Generator Breaker Failure/HV Breaker ‑ Implementation of the generator breaker failure func Flashover tion is illustrated in Figure 2‑38. The breaker failure timer will be started whenever any one of the desig ‑ The Generator Breaker Failure/HV Breaker Flash ‑ nated output contacts or the external programmed over function (50BF) is applicable when a generator breaker failure initiate status input are operated. breaker is present and line side generator CTs are The timer continues to time if any one of the phase being used. The 50BF‑Ph phase detector element (if ‑ Ph pickup setting or if currents are above the 50BF enabled) is used for breaker failure and the 50BF ‑N the 52b contact indicates the breaker is still closed; (if enabled) provides breaker flashover protection by otherwise, the timer is reset. providing an additional breaker failure initiate which ‑ is only active when the breaker is open. For high im Since current in the generator high side CT which pedance grounded applications, the 50BF‑N function ) might not , I , I energizes the 50BF protection (I A B C is inapplicable and must be disabled. Ranges and extinguish concurrently with the breaker opening increments are presented in Figure 2‑39. for faults between the CT location and the genera ‑ operation exists. tor breaker, a possible area of mis ‑ : When the Ph Generator Breaker Failure ‑ 50BF Usually the risk of faults in this limited area is small M‑3425A Generator Protection Relay detects an enough to be ignored but should be considered. internal fault or an abnormal operating condition, it closes an output contact to trip the generator breaker : This instantaneous overcur 50BF ‑ Neutral Element ‑ or the unit HV breaker. When a generator breaker is rent relay is energized from the generator neutral used, protection is available for the instance where CT (See Figure 2‑5, One ‑ Line Functional Diagram). it fails to clear the fault or abnormal condition. Such This function is internally in series with a breaker “b” generator breaker failure protection output contacts contact (IN1) to provide logic for the breaker flashover must be connected to trip the additional necessary protection (see Figure 2‑38). breakers to isolate the generator from the system. HV Breaker Failure (limited) The breaker failure ‑ The breaker failure condition is usually detected function may be used for a unit breaker rather than by the continued presence of current in any one or a generator breaker. It is limited in that it has no fault more of the phases after a trip has been sent to the detector associated with the unit breaker. Output breaker. However, the current detector (50BF‑Ph) contact operation would occur if any of the initiate may not always give the correct status of the breaker, contacts close and the 52b contact indicated a closed especially for generator breakers. This is because breaker after the set time delay. faults and abnormal operating conditions such as ground faults, overexcitation, over/under frequency, ‑ This operation is chosen by disabling the neutral ele and reverse power may not produce enough current ment, disabling the phase element, and designating to operate the current detectors. For this reason, the initiating inputs and outputs and a time delay setting. breaker status input 52b contact must be used, in addition to the 50BF‑Ph, to provide adequate breaker status indication.                                       Figure 2 ‑ 38 Breaker Failur e Logic Diagram 2–44

102 Application – 2 50BF PHASE ELEMENT If generator breaker failure function is used in this application, disable enable here. ENABLE 50BF PICKUP PHASE Set phase pickup amps. Amps 50BF NEUTRAL ELEMENT If the breaker flashover protection is to be used with the generator disable enable (enable phase breaker failure function of the relay, set ENABLE element also for this application.) 50BF PICKUP NEUTRAL Set the neutral pickup amps. Amps 50BF INPUT INITIATE Designate the status inputs which will initiate the breaker failure ® i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 timer. Inputs IN7–IN14 must be set using IPScom . 50BF OUTPUT INITIATE Designate the outputs that will initiate the breaker failure timer. o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 Outputs OUT9–OUT23 must be set using IPScom. 50BF DELAY For generator breaker failure protection, the time delay should be Cycles set to allow for breaker operating time plus margin. Figure 2‑39 Breaker Failur e (50BF) Setpoint Ranges 2–45

103 M‑3425A Instruction Book phase ‑ 50DT Definite Time Overcurrent (for split NOTE When 50DT function is used for split ‑ phase  : differential) differential, 50BF, 87 and 87GD functions must be disabled. The Definite Time Overcurrent (50DT) function can be applied in two different configurations based on Refer to Section 2.1, Configuration, Relay System the CT connections. When CT configuration shown ‑ Phase Setup for a description of the 50DT Split in Figure 2‑5, One Line Functional Diagram is used, Operate setting, and Section 2.2, System Diagrams. the 50DT function is used as a definite time phase overcurrent function to provide protection for external In some cases, the generators may be run with and internal faults in the generator. When the CTs a faulted turn shorted until the generator winding are connected to measure the split phase differential is repaired. To prevent mis operation under these ‑ current (shown in Figure 2‑6, Alternative One Line conditions, the pickup setting of the faulted phase Functional Diagram), the 50DT function can be used should be set higher than the other phases. To ac ‑ phase differential relay. as a split ‑ commodate this function, individual pickup settings are available for each phase. Ranges and increments are presented in Figure 2‑40 50DT #1 PICKUP PHASE A _______________ Amps 50DT #1 PICKUP PHASE B _______________ Amps 50DT #1 PICKUP PHASE C _______________ Amps 50DT #1 DELAY 50DT #2 screens are identical to 50DT #1. ______________ Cycles Figure 2‑40 Definite Time Over current (50DT) Setpoint Ranges 2–46

104 Application – 2 induced into the rotor can cause significant damage 50/27 Inadvertent Energizing ‑ in a matter of seconds. Voltage supervised overcur The Inadvertent Energizing function (50/27) of the re ‑ rent logic is designed to provide this protection. (See lay is an overcurrent function supervised by generator Figure 2‑41, Inadvertent Energizing Function Logic terminal bus voltage. Inadvertent or accidental ener‑ Diagram) line generators has occurred frequently ‑ gizing of off enough to warrant the use of dedicated protection An undervoltage element (all three phase volt ‑ logic to detect this condition. Operating errors, breaker ages must be below pickup) with adjustable pickup flashovers, control circuit malfunctions or a combina ‑ and dropout time delay supervises instantaneous tion of these causes have resulted in generators being overcurrent tripping. The undervoltage detectors line. The problem is ‑ accidentally energized while off automatically arm the overcurrent tripping when the particularly prevalent on large generators connected generator is taken off line. This undervoltage detector ‑ through a high voltage disconnect switch to either will disable or disarm the overcurrent operation when a ring bus or breaker ‑ half bus configuration. ‑ and ‑ a the machine is put back in service. Ranges and incre ‑ When a generator is accidentally energized from the ments are presented in Figure 2‑42. ‑ power system, it will accelerate like an induction mo tor. While the machine is accelerating, high currents 50/27 PICKUP Typical pickup setting is 0.5 amps. No coordination is required with other protection since this function is only operational when the _______________ Amps generator is off ‑ line. 50/27 VOLTAGE CONTROL The purpose of the undervoltage detector is to determine whether ______________ Volts the unit is connected to the system. The voltage level during this accidental energization depends on the system strength. Typical setting is 50%–70% of rated voltage (in some cases, it may be set as low as 20%.) 50/27 PICKUP DELAY ‑ The pickup time delay is the time for the undervoltage unit to oper the protection. It must coordinate with other protection arm ate to Cycles ______________ for conditions which cause low voltages (typically longer than 21 and 51V time delay settings.) 50/27 DROPOUT DELAY disarm The dropout time delay is the time for the unit to operate to the protection when the voltage is increased above the pickup value Cycles ______________ ‑ or the generator is brought on line. 2–47

105 M‑3425A Instruction Book                          Figure 2‑41 Inadvertent Energizing Function Logic Diagram Figure 2‑42 Inadvertent Energizing (50/27) Setpoint Ranges 2–48

106 Application – 2 1.5 to 20 times the pickup setting. An additional one 51N Inverse Time Neutral Overcurrent cycle time delay should be added to these curves in The Inverse Time Neutral Overcurrent function (51N) order to obtain the relay operating time. Inverse time provides protection against ground faults. Since no curves saturate beyond 20 times pickup. For currents zero sequence or ground current is usually present in excess of 20 times pickup, operating times are fixed during normal operation, this function can be set for at the 20 times pickup level. ‑ greater sensitivity than the phase overcurrent pro tection. If the 51N and 50N functions are not used The function automatically selects fundamental RMS at the generator neutral, they can be used to detect or total RMS calculation based on the input frequency. ‑ system ground faults by being energized by the step 5 Hz from  When the generator frequency is within up transformer neutral CTs. Ranges and increments the nominal frequency, it uses fundamental RMS are presented in Figure 2‑43. calculation. Outside of this range, it uses total RMS calculation, which will provide protection during offline The curves available for use are shown in Appendix down to a frequency of 8 Hz. D, Inverse Time Curves . They cover a range from 51N PICKUP The relay current (I ) is equal to the primary current (I ) divided by R P the appropriate CT ratio. ÷ CT ratio I = I Amps _______________ R P 51N CURVE Select one of the time curves shown in Appendix D, Inverse Time . The appropriate curve in the selected family is designated Curves  bedef beinv bevinv here. 51N TIME DIAL Appropriate Time Dial for coordination with “downstream” relay _________________ protection chosen from the time curve above. ‑ Figure 2 Inverse Time Neutral Over current (51N) Setpoint Ranges 43 2–49

107 M‑3425A Instruction Book 51V Inverse Time Phase Overcurrent with Volt‑ The inverse time overcurrent function can be voltage age Control/Restraint controlled (VC), voltage restrained (VR), or neither. For voltage‑controlled operation, the function is not overcurrent relays, one per phase, are used ‑ Time active unless the voltage is below the voltage control ‑ coordinate with to trip circuits selectively and to time setpoint. This philosophy is used to confirm that the other up ‑ or downstream relays. For this function, eight overcurrent is due to system fault. When applied, most complete series of inverse time tripping characteristics users will set voltage control limits in the range of 0.7 are included. The same descriptions and nomenclature to 0.9 per unit RMS voltage. When voltage restraint is which are traditionally used with electromechanical selected (See Figure 2‑44, Voltage Restraint (51VR) relays are used in the relay. Thus, user may choose Characteristic), the pickup setting is continuously from four BECO curves (BEDEF, BEINV, BEVINV, ‑ modified in proportion to the collapsing terminal volt and BEEINV), four IEC curves (IECI, IECVI, IECEI, suited to age. The voltage restraint function is well ‑ and IECLT), and three IEEE curves (MINV, VINV, small generators with relatively short time constants. EINV.) Within each family, the operator selects time dial setting and pickup (tap) setting, just as with elec ‑ The 51V function should be blocked by : NOTE  tromechanical relays. Ranges and increments are fuse loss if in the voltage control mode presented in Figure 2‑45. only. Fuse loss blocking is not desirable for voltage restraint mode because the pickup The curves available for use are shown in Appendix is automatically held at 100% pickup dur - Inverse Time Curves D, . They cover a range from ing fuse loss conditions, and operation will 1.5 to 20 times the pickup setting. An additional one continue as normal. cycle time delay should be added to these curves in order to obtain the relay operating time. Inverse time The internally derived voltage used to realize the curves saturate beyond 20 times pickup. For currents voltage control or restraint feature depends on the in excess of 20 times pickup, operating times are fixed configured VT configuration and the Delta‑Y Trans ‑ at the 20 time pickup level. The particular settings will form setting (see Section 2.1, Configuration, Relay circuit fault stud ‑ be made by information from short ‑ System Setup). Table 2‑4, Delta/Wye Transformer ies and knowledge of the coordination requirements Voltage ‑ Current Pairs describes the calculation for with other devices in the system that respond to time the various system VT configurations. overcurrent. 51V is a true three ‑ phase function, in that the relay in ‑ corporates separate integrating timers on each phase. 51V PICKUP The pickup of the 51V is set in relay amps. (Relay amps = primary amps ÷ CT ratio) Amps 51V CURVE Inverse Selects one of the time curves as shown in Appendix D, bevinv beinv bedef  . The appropriate curve in the selected family of curves Time Curves is designated here. 51V TIME DIAL _________________ 51V VOLTAGE CONTROL Disable if neither voltage control nor voltage restraint is desired. If voltage restraint is designated, the tap setting is modified as shown v_rstrnt V_CNTL disable in Figure 2 ‑ 43. If voltage control is designated, the 51V will only operate when the voltage is less than the 51V voltage control set ‑ 51V VOLTAGE CONTROL ting specified below. When applied, the voltage control is usually Volts set in the range of 70% to 90% of the nominal voltage. 2–50

108 Application – 2 100 75 Tap Setting as % of Tap Setting at 50 Rated Voltage 25 0 100 75 50 25 Input Voltage (% of rated voltage) ‑ 44 Figure 2 Voltage Restraint (51VR) Characteristic Ge ne rator Conne cte d Through Generator Directly Connected Delta AB/Wye or Delta AC/Wye Transformer Voltage Control or Restraint Voltage Control or Restraint C urrent C urrent L- G L- L or L- G to L- L L- G L- L or L- G to L- L I I (V 3  V S )/ S 3 V )/ V  V (V AB A a a CA AB C A I  3 (V S )/ V V )/ S 3 V  I V (V B BC A AB B b b BC I (V  V 3 S 3 V I V S (V  V )/ )/ B CA CA c c BC C C T Curr 2‑4 Delta/Wye T ransformer Voltage ‑ able ent Pairs F igure 2‑45 Inverse Time Over current with Voltage Control/Voltage Restraint (51VC/VR) Setpoint Ranges 2–51

109 M‑3425A Instruction Book 2  ) = 1/3 V (V +aV + a 59 Phase Overvoltage V bc 1 ab ca 2  (V = 1/3 ) + aV +a V V The Phase Overvoltage function (59) may be used to 2 bc ab ca provide overvoltage protection for the generator. The Magnitude measurement depends on the 59/27 relay provides overvoltage protection functions with ‑ Magnitude Select setting (See Section 2.1, Configura three voltage levels and three definite ‑ time setpoints, tion, Relay System Setup). When the RMS option is any one or more of which can be programmed to selected, the magnitude calculation is accurate over trip the unit or send an alarm. This is a true 3‑phase ‑ a wide frequency range (10 to 80 Hz) and the accu function in that each phase has an independent tim ‑ racy of the time delay is +20 cycles. If DFT option is ing element. selected, the magnitude calculation is accurate near 50 or 60 Hz, and the timer accuracy is +1 cycle. When The 59 function can be programmed to use phase the input voltage select is set to positive sequence voltage (any one of the three phases) or positive voltage, the 59 functions uses DFT to measure the sequence voltage as input. positive sequence voltage, irrespective of DFT/RMS ‑ Positive and negative sequence voltages are calcu selection. Ranges and increments are presented in ‑ lated in terms of line ‑ to line voltage when Line to Line Figure 2‑46. is selected for V.T. Configuration. 59 #1 INPUT VOLTAGE SEL. Generator capability is generally 105% of rated voltage. 59 #2 and 59 #3 screens are identical to 59 #1. phase_volt pos_seq_volt 59 #1 PICKUP Volts ______________ 59 #1 DELAY ______________ Cycles Figure 2‑46 Phase Overvoltage (59) Setpoint Ranges 2–52

110 Application – 2 59D Third Harmonic Voltage Differential (Ratio) ‑ Figure 2‑47 illustrates a third harmonic voltage dif ferential scheme. This scheme compares the third This scheme, when used in conjunction with 59N harmonic voltage appearing at the neutral to that function may provide 100% Stator Ground fault which appears at the generator terminals. The ratio protection. of these third harmonic voltages is relatively constant : The 59D function has a cutoff voltage of 0.5  NOTE ground fault ‑ to ‑ for all load conditions. A stator phase rd V for 3 voltage. If the 180 Hz harmonic V will disrupt this balance, causing operation of the X component of V is exptected to be less than differential relay (see Figure 2‑20). The generator N 0.5 V the 59D function can not be used. terminal voltage (Line Side Voltage) can be selected ) or as 3V , V and V (Calculated by the relay from V 0 B C A V (broken delta VT input connected at the V input.) X X Positive sequence undervoltage blocking will prevent the function from misoperating when the generator is offline (the terminal voltage is below the set value). The ratio (or third harmonic) voltage measured at the generator ter‑ 59D RATIO minals to the third harmonic voltage measured at neutral. ______________ ‑ The 59D Ratio Pickup Setting can be calculated using field measure ment of Third Harmonic Voltages as follows: V 3V 3XM OM OR 59D Ratio Pickup = 1.5 x ( ( ) ) V V 3NM 3NM 3V V OM 3XM Where: OR ( ( ) ) V V 59D LINE SIDE VOLTAGE 3NM 3NM VX 3v0 is the maximum measured Ratio of the Third Harmonic Voltages at various loading conditions of the generator. Selection of V will give better accuracy and sensitivity than 3V . If 0 X ‑ Ground. If the 3V is selected, VT configuration must be set to Line 0 nominal third harmonic voltage is <1 V, 3V line side voltage selection 0 can cause is not recommended, because noise in the 3V and V 0 N 59D misoperation. This setting is typically enabled. 59D POS SEQ VOLT BLK disable ENABLE 59D POS SEQ VOLT BLK Volts ____________ 59D DELAY ____________ Cycles 2–53

111 M‑3425A Instruction Book M-3425A V V 3X 3N 3 V Vo 3X OR The ratio Pickup > ( ( ) ) V V 3N 3N is the Third Harmonic Triple Zero Sequence voltage measured at the generator Where: V 3x terminals. V is the Third Harmonic voltage measure at the neutral. 3N oltage Differential (Ratio) Scheme Figure 2‑47 Third Harmonic V for Generator Ground Fault Protection oltage Differential (59D) Setpoint Ranges Third Harmonic V Figure 2‑48 2–54

112 Application – 2 59N Overvoltage, Neutral Circuit or Zero Se‑ The 59N function provides three setpoints, and re‑ quence sponds only to the fundamental frequency component, rejecting all other harmonic components. Ranges and The Neutral Overvoltage function (59N) provides increments are presented in Figure 2‑50. stator ground fault protection for high impedance grounded generators. The 59N function can provide ‑ ground fault protection for 90–95% of the stator wind ing (measured from the terminal end). With typical grounding transformer ratios and a typical minimum setting of 5 59N #1 PICKUP volts, this protection is capable of detecting ground faults in about 95% of the Volts generator stator winding from the terminal end. 59N #1 DELAY If grounded‑wye/grounded‑wye VTs are connected at the machine terminals, the voltage relay must be time coordinated with VT fuses for faults on the transformer Cycles ‑ secondary winding. If relay time delay for coordination is not acceptable, the co ordination problem can be alleviated by grounding one of the secondary phase ‑ conductors instead of the secondary neutral. When this technique is used, the co ordination problem still exists for ground faults on the secondary neutral conductor. Thus, its usefulness is limited to those applications where the exposure to ground faults on the secondary neutral is small. Since system ground faults can induce zero sequence voltages at the gen‑ 59N 20HZ INJECTION MODE erator due to transformer capacitance coupling, this relay must coordinate disable ENABLE with the system ground fault relaying. It is possible to set 59N#1, 59N#2, and 59N#3 to coordinate with the PT secondary fuses, and also coordinate with 59N #2 and 59N #3 screens worst case capacitive coupling interference voltage from system ground faults are identical to 59N #1. (high side of the GSU). For applications where the M‑3425A relay (where the 64S function is pur ‑ chased or not) is used with 100% Stator Ground protection with 20 Hz injection schemes, the 59N 20 Hz injection mode must be enabled in order to calculate the voltage magnitude accurately for the 59N function, due to the 20 Hz injec ‑ tion voltage. The time delay accuracy of the function is –1 to +5 cycles when the 20 Hz injection mode is enabled. Overvoltage, Neutral Circuit or Zer Figure 2‑49 o Sequence (59N) Setpoint Ranges 2–55

113 M‑3425A Instruction Book 59X Multipurpose Overvoltage (Turn to ‑ Turn ‑ Stator Fault Protection or Bus Ground Protec‑ tion) For generators where the stator winding configura ‑ ‑ tion does not allow the application of split ‑ phase differential, a neutral voltage method can be used to detect turn ‑ to ‑ turn stator winding faults. Figure 2‑50 illustrates this method. Three VTs are connected in ‑ wye and the primary ground lead is tied to the genera tor neutral. The secondary is connected in a “broken delta” with an overvoltage relay connected across its open delta to measure 3V voltage. In High Imped ‑ 0 ance grounded generators, connecting the primary ground lead to the generator neutral, makes this element insensitive to stator ground faults. The relay will, however, operate for turn ‑ to ‑ turn faults, which increase the 3V voltage above low normal levels. 0 Installation requires the cable from the neutral of the VT to generator neutral be insulated for the system to ‑ ground voltage and the relay to be tuned to ‑ line fundamental (60/50 Hz) frequency components of ‑ harmonic frequency the voltage since some third component of the voltage will be present across the broken delta VT input. Alternatively, this function can be used to detect bus ground faults, when connected as shown in Figure 2‑10. 59X #1 PICKUP ‑ to ‑ Turn fault protection the pickup should be When used for Turn set above the normal zero sequence voltage level. Typically the ______________ Volts pickup is set to 5 V. When used for Bus Ground protection it is again set above the normal zero sequence voltage seen at the bus. Typical setting is between 10 and 20 Volts to provide sensitive protection. 59X #1 DELAY The Time Delay for Turn ‑ to Turn faults should be set to approxi ‑ ‑ Cycles ______________ mately 5 cycles. For bus ground fault protection application the time delay should coordinate with other ground fault relaying and VT fuses. 59X #2 screens are identical to 59X #1. 2–56

114 Application – 2 GENERATOR See Note Below VT R 3V R 0 59X  al of the VT to generator neutral be insulated for the NOTE : Installation requires the cable from the neutr system line ground voltage. ‑ to ‑ T Turn ‑ to ‑ Figure 2‑50 urn Stator Winding Fault Protection purpose Overvoltage Setpoint Ranges Figure 2‑51 (59X) Multi ‑ 2–57

115 M‑3425A Instruction Book 60FL VT Fuse Loss A frequency check element is included in the fuse loss detection logic to avoid erroneous alarms when the Some functions may operate inadvertently when a generator is in a start up condition. For a 50Hz sys ‑ VT fuse is blown or an event causes a loss of one, tem, the 60FL alarm will be inhibited if the measured two, or all three potentials to the relay. Provisions are frequency is greater than 55.12 Hz F or less than incorporated for both internal and external potential U . For a 60 Hz system, the 60FL alarm will 44.88 Hz F loss detection and blocking of user defined func ‑ L be inhibited if the measured frequency is greater than tions. The logic scheme and options are illustrated 52. ‑ in Figure 2 or less than 54.88 Hz F 65.12 Hz F . The Frequency L U phase Band Detector does not inhibit the 60FL three ‑ Internal Fuse Loss Detection Logic loss of potential logic. The internal logic scheme available will detect a loss of one, two, and all three potentials. External Fuse Loss Function ‑ ‑ For the loss of one or two potentials, positive and nega For the specific application where the preceding logic tive sequence quantities are compared. The presence cannot be considered reliable (such as when current of negative sequence voltage in the absence of nega ‑ inputs to the relay are not connected, or sustained tive sequence current is considered to be a fuse loss positive sequence current during fault conditions is condition. An additional supervising condition includes minimal), an external fuse failure function can be used ‑ a minimum positive sequence voltage to assure volt as an input to the relay. The external 60 FL Function age is being applied to the relay. contact is connected across any control/status input. The relay protection functions are then blocked by For the loss of all three phase potentials, a compari‑ an assertion of the control/status input (INx), as a son of the three phase voltages is made to the three blocking function in each function’s respective set ‑ phase currents. If all three potentials are under 0.05 ting screen. V com‑ , and all three currents are below 1.25 I nom nom > 0.33A, a three phase potential loss bined with I 1 60FL VT Fuse Loss Alarm Function is declared. A seal in circuit is provided to ensure a three phase fuse loss condition is not declared during The 60FL alarm function is enabled by the internal a three phase fault if the fault current decays below logic by selecting the “FL” option in the 60 FL func ‑ pickup setting. the 1.25 I tion setup screen. It is enable by the external logic by nom selecting the appropriate control/status input (INx) in Protection functions in the relay may be blocked by an the 60FL function setup screen. assertion of the fuse failure logic (FL), in each func ‑ tion’s respective setting screen. Typical functions to A timer associated with the fuse loss alarm logic is block on a loss of potential event are 21, 27, 32, 40, available. This timer is to assure proper coordination 51V (for Voltage Control only), 67, 67N, 78 and 81. for conditions that may appear as a fuse loss, such as secondary VT circuit faults that will be cleared by local The 60FL function does not have to be enabled in low voltage circuit action (fuses or circuit breakers). order to use the FL as a blocking input in the relay Ranges and increments are presented in Figure 2‑53. configuration menu. 60FL INPUT INITIATE i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 FL ‑ The initiating control/status inputs are user designated. The closing of any of the externally connected contacts (across these inputs) will start the associated time delay to the 60FL function operation. 60FL 3 PHASE DETECT In order to use internal fuse loss logic for 60FL function, “FL” must disable enable be checked. Externally initiated fuse loss detection may be input to ® Inputs IN7–IN14 must be set using IPScom . other status inputs. The time delay is set to coordinate for conditions which may 60FL DELAY appear as a fuse loss but will be corrected by other protection Cycles ‑ (such as a secondary VT circuit fault which will be cleared by lo cal low voltage circuit action). This delay does not affect internal FL blocking option. 2–58

116 Application – 2 N Signal by Internal FL Logic Protection Function Block 60FL Alarm Signal Protection Function Block Signal by INx from External FL Prevents operation during faults Verifies On-Line condition Indication of 3-phase loss of potential Delay T A,B,C A,B,C 1 Seal-in circuit ensures logic doesn't produce decays below 1.25 I an output during 3-phase fault when current V I I FL OR to a 1 A CT secondary rating. * Values in parentheses apply Prevents operation during phase-phase faults. a fuse blows during no load operation. Provides indication of blown fuse. Prevents output contacts from chattering where Verifies VT voltage is applied. Enable/Disable 3 Phase Fuse Software Select Loss Detection 1 2 1 2 V V I I Enable Status Input Contact INx initiate by internal "FL" or 60FL Alarm Function AND Disable External Fuse Loss Function AND INx OR Function AND External "FL" AND Internal 60FL Logic: 3 Phase Loss of Potential OR OR AND AND AND N 1 N N 1 N N N L U > 12.8 V F > F F < F > 1.25 I < 0.05 V > 0.33 V > 0.33 A < 0.05 V > 1.25 I > 1.25 I < 0.05 V > 0.167 I 1 2 1 (.067 A)* A B B A C C 2 I I I I V I V V V V Frequency Checking Internal 60FL Logic: 1 & 2 Phase Loss of Potential Figure 2‑52 Fuse Loss (60FL) Function Logic 2–59

117 M‑3425A Instruction Book Figure 2‑53 Fuse Loss (60FL) Setpoint Ranges 2–60

118 Application – 2 64B/F Field Ground Protection ‑ 5 gives typical frequency settings based on Table 2 the rotor capacitance. The rotor capacitance can be 64F Field Ground Detection measured with a capacitance meter by connecting Typical connections for Field Ground Protection the meter across the field winding to ground. generator and ‑ applications (including hydro turbine brushless generators) is given in Figure 2‑54. This Factors Affecting 64F Performance ‑ function requires the connection of an external cou ‑ Some excitation systems include shaft voltage sup pler (M‑3921). To improve accuracy and minimize the pressors which include capacitors that are installed effects of stray capacitance, the M‑3921 Field Ground between the +/ field and ground. The effect of these ‑ ‑ Coupler should be mounted close to the exciter. Con capacitors is given by the following equation: nections from the coupler to the relay should use low capacitance shielded cable, and be as short as J R ___1___ possible. Cable shield should be terminated at the π IF C) (2 relay end to the Relay Ground Stud (See Figure 5‑9, External Connections). If cabling between the coupler where: and relay exceeds 100 feet, provisions should be round resistance R = Par allel winding ‑ g made for in circuit calibration to nullify the effects of cabling capacitance. See Section 6.4, Auto Calibra ‑ IF = Injection frequency setting tion, for calibration procedure. C = Capacitance value ‑ The Field Ground function provides detection of insula tion breakdown between the excitation field winding ‑ To minimize this effect the following my be imple and the ground. There are two pickup and time delay mented: settings, and one adjustable injection frequency set ‑ frequency injection setting can be • The ting for the 64F function. The adjustable frequency is reduced, however accuracy decreases as provided to compensate for the amount of capacitance a result. across the field winding and the ground so that the function accuracy is improved. The minimum time manu exciter the ‑ of concurrence the • With delay should be set greater than (2/IF + 1) seconds. facturer, surge capacitors rated at a lower Where IF = Injection frequency. Ranges and incre ‑ value may be installed. ments are presented in Figure 2‑55. 64F #1 PICKUP This setting should not exceed 80% of the ungrounded resitance value ‑ to prevent nuisance tripping. Typical setting for the 64F #1 pickup ele kOhm ment for alarming is 20 Kohms. 64F #1 DELAY Typical delay setting for tripping is 800 cycles. Cycles 64F #2 PICKUP Typical setting for 64F #2 pickup element for tripping is 5 Kohms. kOhm 64F #2 DELAY Typical delay setting for alarming is 180 cycles. Cycles 2–61

119 M‑3425A Instruction Book Shielded Cable Belden 3104A or equivalent is recommended for connection between PROTECTION RELAY M-3425A and M-3921 Detail A M-3425A Typical Field Ground Protection Rear Terminal PROCESSOR Block Pin No. Excitation Field Ground System Detection Brushes V Squarewave TB3 out TB5 37 Generator Gen. Rotor Coupling TB4 35 TB2 Network Signal M-3921 V Measurement and Rf.Cf f Processing Shaft Ground TB1 TB1 Brush 36 Relay Ground Stud Ground/Generator Frame Shield Detail B Francis or Kaplan Turbine-Generator 64F Application for Hydro Turbine-Generators Application The application of the 64F Function requires a ground return path, either through a shaft ground brush (Figure Excitation 2-54 Detail A) or though an alternate ground path (i.e. System water for some hydro machines.) Brushes Hydro Turbine-Generator unit shafts that extend into the TB3 water with no electrical isolation between the turbine shaft Gen. and the generator shaft can use the water as the alternate Rotor ground path (see Figure 2-54 Detail B). In this application, TB2 the water provides the alternate ground path and a shaft grounding brush is not required. Francis and Kaplan Rf.Cf Turbine Generators usually meet this application requirement. If the unit can experience a low water Water provides TB1 condition, the low water may not provide a reliable ground alternate ground path. return. For this condition, a shaft ground brush may be required. Ground/Generator Frame A shaft ground brush must be utilized for the 64F Function on Pelton Hydro Turbine-Generator applications. Detail C 64F Application for Brushless Generators Brushless Generator Application The 64F Function can be implemented on brushless Jumper TB2 to TB3 if generators that employ a "measurement" brush (see Measurement only one brush is used Figure 2-54 Detail C) to verify the integrity of field. In this Brush configuration generally only one field polarity is available. TB3 Therefore, a suitably sized jumper must be installed from Gen. TB2 to TB3 (Coupling Network box M-2931) and then to Rotor the positive or negative field lead. TB2 In some configurations the measurement brush is continuously applied. In others the measurement brush is Rf.Cf applied periodically. In configurations that automatically lift Shaft Ground the measurement brush, the 64B Function must be TB1 Brush blocked by an input to the relay to prevent an alarm when the measurement brush is lifted. If the 64B Function is not Ground/Generator Frame desired, then the 64B Function should be disabled. The 64F Function can not be used on brushless generators utilizing LED coupling. Figure 2‑54 M‑3921 Field Ground Coupler 2–62

120 Application – 2 64B Brush Lift Off Detection ‑ line and ‑ 8 WARNING : Machine should be off ‑ Off Detection (64B) provides detection of Brush Lift ‑ field excitation should be off during the capaci open brushes of the rotor shaft. This function works in tance measurement. conjunction with the 64F Field Ground Detection func ‑ tion, and requires the M‑3921 Field Ground Coupler.  NOTE : Field breaker should be closed f or the capacitance measurements. Field Winding to Typical Frequency Ground Capacitance Setting 0.52 Hz 1 to 2 m F 0.49 Hz 2 to 3 m F 0.46 Hz 3 to 4 F m 0.43 Hz m F 4 to 5 0.39 Hz m F 5 to 6 0.35 Hz 6 to 7 m F 0.32 Hz 7 to 8 m F 0.30 Hz F m 8 to 9 0.28 Hz 9 to 10 m F 0.26 Hz >10 F m Table 2‑5 Typical Fr equency Settings otection (64B/F) Setpoint Ranges Figure 2‑55 Field Ground Pr 2–63

121 M‑3425A Instruction Book When 64B operates, indicating open brush condi ‑ ‑ After installation has been completed, de 1. termine the rotor capacitance, as outlined tions, the 64F Function cannot detect a field ground. for the 64F function. For most generators, when the brushes of the rotor ‑ shaft are lifted, the capacitance across the field wind ‑ With the machine still off 2. , apply power line ing and the ground significantly reduces to less than to the relay and set the 64B/F operating F. The 64B Function analyzes this capacitance ‑ 0.15 m frequency in accordance with the value related signal, and initiates an output contact when it listed in Table 2‑5, Typical Frequency Set‑ detects an open brush condition. Typically, this output tings. is used to alert operating personnel of an open brush 3. Introduce a brush ‑ open condition b y dis ‑ condition. Ranges and increments are presented in connecting the rotor brushes or lifting the Figure 2‑58. The typical pickup setting is listed in Table brushes from their ground. Observe the 2‑6, Typical Brush Lift ‑ Off Pickup Settings. 64B voltage value displayed by IPScom or the relay. The displayed value is the In order to assure correct setting, it is recommended actual measured operating value of the that the actual operating value be predetermined 64B function. during the final stage of the relay installation. By introducing a brush open condition, the actual value ‑ 4. To ensure correct oper ation and prevent can be easily obtained from the relay. The following erroneous trips, the Pickup Setting for procedure can be used to obtain the actual operat‑ the 64B Lift off condition should be set at ‑ ing value of the 64B during an open brush condition: 80–90% of the actual operating value. 8 WARNING : Machine should be off ‑ line and ‑ field excitation should be off during the capaci tance measurement. NOTE  or the : Field breaker should be closed f capacitance measurements. 64B PICKUP The 64B/F Frequency is a shared setting common to both the 64B and 64F Functions. If either function is enabled, this setpoint mV ________________ is available, and should be set to compensate for the amount of ‑ capacitance across the field winding and ground, so that the mea 64B DELAY surement accuracy is improved. ______________ cycles To minimize measurement errors, the 64B/F frequency should be set according to the amount of capacitance across the field 64B/F FREQUENCY winding and the ground. Table 2‑5 includes typical settings of the ________________ Hz F. m F to 10 m frequency for capacitance, ranging from 1 Equivalent Brush Lift-Off Capactiance Typical Brush Lift-Off Pickup Setting 2500 mV 0.05~0.25 m F Off Pickup Setting Table 2‑6 Typical Brush Lift ‑ 2–64

122 Application – 2 64S 100% Stator Ground Protection by Low ‑ The voltage signal generated by the 20 Hz signal Frequency Signal Injection generator is injected into the secondary of the generator neutral grounding transformer through a  NOTE : The Stator Ground Protection function pass filter passes the 20 ‑ pass filter. The band ‑ band (64S) must be selected when the M‑3425A Hz signal and rejects out‑of‑band signals. The output is initially ordered. of the 20 Hz band pass filter is connected to the V ‑ N input of the M 25A relay through a suitable voltage 34 ‑ The 100% stator ground fault protection is provided O divider, that limits the M‑3425A to 200 V ac (the by injecting an external 20 Hz signal into the neutral voltage generator may be bypassed if the expected of the generator. The protection is provided when the ‑ to ‑ 50/60 Hz voltage during a phase ground fault of ‑ line as well as off ‑ line (provided that the machine is on O the generator is 200 V). The 20Hz current is also 20 Hz generator and relay are powered on). The injected connected to the I input of the M‑3425A, through the 20 Hz signal will produce a voltage that appears on N 20Hz current transformer. the prinmary side of the grounding transformer when the machine is online as well as offline. This scheme The expected 20 Hz current during no fault condition requires the following external components in addition is given by: to M ‑ 3425A protection system: X V (Primary) No. Signal-generator t Par (BECO Hz • 20 20 C I = = X 430‑00426) (Siemens 7XT33) CS NF 2 X N CS 00427) - 430 No. t Par • Band-pass filter. (BECO (Siemens 7XT34) Where V is the 20 Hz voltage measured across 20 Tr Current • 20 ansformer, Hz Measuring is the capacitive and X the neutral resistor R CS N 400/5 A CT (BECO Part No. 430‑00428) reactance of the generator stator winding and unit 60 T50 401) ‑‑ ‑ (ITI CTW3 ‑ transformer referred to the grounding transformer ‑ secondary. N is the turn ratio of the grounding trans ‑ Chapter 5, Installation contains low fre  NOTE : former. There are two overcurrent pickup settings. quency signal injection equipment instal‑ One operates on the magnitude of total 20 Hz neu‑ lation information. 64S TOTAL CURRENT disable ENABLE Pickup setting for the overcurrent element that operates on the 64S TOTAL CURR PU ). This setting ranges 20 Hz neutral current measured by the relay (I N mAmps from 2 to 75 mA and is for the total current, which includes both the real and imaginary components. 64S REAL COMP CURRENT disable ENABLE This is the pickup setting for the overcurrent element that operates on 64S REAL COMP CURR PU the real component of the 20 Hz neutral current measured by the relay mAmps ‑ )). The 20 Hz neutral voltage measured by the relay is the refer (Re(I N ‑ ence used to calculate the real component. This setting is in milli amps and ranges from 2 to 75 mA. This is the time delay on pickup for both overcurrent elements described 64S DELAY above. Cycles If voltage restraint is enabled the overcurrent pickup settings described 64S VOLT RESTRAINT above are varied depending on the magnitude of 20 Hz neutral volt ‑ disable ENABLE age measured by the relay. The pickup settings are more sensitive for neutral voltage less than or equal to 25 volts. The pickup settings are de ‑ sensitized for neutral voltage greater than 25 volts. Refer to Figure 2 ‑ 60. Voltage restraint is typically disabled. Enable this setting to block F64S when the system voltage measured 64S UNDERFREQ INHIBIT by the relay is 40 Hz or less such as during startup. This can prevent disable ENABLE nuisance tripping during startup and shutdown when the generator is transitioning through the lower frequencies. 2–65

123 M‑3425A Instruction Book tral current measured by the relay. The other pickup The magnitude of 20 Hz current increases when setting operates on the real component of the 20 Hz there is a ground fault anywhere along the stator neutral current where V is the reference. V is the windings. The 64S function issues a trip signal after 20 20 20 Hz voltage measured across the neutral resis ‑ a set time delay when the measured 20 Hz current of the 20 Hz current exceeds a pickup as illustrated in Figure 2 60. tor R ‑ . The real component N increases in magnitude during a ground fault on the The 59N Function (90 to 95%) should also be used ‑ generator stator since the insulation resistance de in conjunction with 64S protection to provide backup. creases. The real component of current pickup is . Set is less than 0.1 V @ 20 Hz disabled when V N CAUTION: Dangerous high voltages may be pres ‑ ▲ the two pickups utilizing the equations illustrated in ent at the generator terminals if the 20 Hz injection 58. Figure 2 ‑ voltage is not removed when the generator is taken out of service. The 20 Hz signal generator has an output of 25 volts and the band pass filter is eight ohms purely If the 20 Hz injection voltage generator receives resistive. power from the generator terminal voltage, then the 20 Hz injection voltage generator will be automatically Only a small amount of 20 Hz current flows when the switched off whenever the generator terminal voltage generator is operating normally (that is, no ground is not present. fault) as a result of the stator capacitance to ground. 2–66

124 Application – 2 100-230 VAC** L1 L2 Supply Voltage DC UH+ UH- External Operative Device Block L3 1 3 6 2 8 9 7 5 N N I V 20 Hz 45 53 Generator Bl 52 44 M-3425A Connection terminals for Model A00/EE shown. 12 11 * Wiring 1B4 Max. 200 V Shielded 1A4 High Voltage 59N 1A3 Filter 20 Hz Band Pass 1A2 1B1 1A1 N R 400/5 A 20 Hz CT 5A 400A L K l k Neutral Grounding Transformer >200 V ac, use the "High Voltage" connection for the 59N Function. * For applications with a transformer secondary rating that will result in 50/60 Hz phase ground fault voltages ** If 20 Hz Signal Generator is prior to Model EE a step down transformer is necessary for voltages >120 VAC. ‑ 56 64S Function Component Connection Diagram Figure 2 (Model A00/EE 20 Hz Signal Generator) 2–67

125 M‑3425A Instruction Book R = 8 Ohms Filter N 25 V X R V CP N R 20 Hz Stator CT = 400:5 Figure 2 57 ‑ 64S Network 8 Ohms 25 V R X V CS N R 20 Hz S I t CT = 80:1 X CP Capacitive reactance of stator windings X = CS 2 and unit transformer (secondary) N R Stator = R Insulation resistance (secondary) S 2 N Where: = Capacitive reactance of stator windings and unit transformer (primary) X CP = Insulation resistance (primary) R Stator N = Turns ratio of grounding transformer = Neutral grounding resistance (secondary) R N Figure 2 ‑ 58 Primary Transferred To Transformer Secondary 2–68

126 Application – 2 I as follows: Calculate the total current measured by the current input N 25 I = T 8 8 + 1 + Z S R N R X CS S Z = θ S 2 2 + X R e CS S -X 0 -1 CS = -90 θ - tan R = I I T N 80 Calculate the real component of the current measured by with respect to the neutral voltage input the current input I N as follows: COS( ) ) = I φ Re(I T T ) = φ I ) COS( Re(I T N 80 Where: 8 1 + (Z ) sin θ S R N φ = ArcTAN 8 8 + 1 + ) cos θ (Z S R N ) is the real component of Z and Im(Z ) is the imaginary component. Re(Z S S S Calculate the total current when the system is faulted and unfaulted to determine if there is adequate sensitivity for this pickup setting. Use the following two assumptions for the insulation resistance to calculate the current during normal operating conditions and a ground fault: R Ohms (normal operating conditions) ‑ = 100 kilo Stator R = 5 kilo ‑ Ohms (ground fault) Stator amps or less in difference for the total current when the system is faulted There maybe only 2 to 3 milli ‑ and unfaulted for applications that have a large value of capacitive coupling to ground (C greater than O 1.5 micro‑Farads) when combined with a low value for the grounding resistor (R less than 0.3 Ohms). Use the N real component of the total current for these applications as there will be a larger margin in difference when the system is faulted and unfaulted. 2–69

127 M‑3425A Instruction Book Surface/Flush Mount OEM Part No. Equipment Description Beco. Part No. Siemens 20 Hz Signal-Generator 430-00426 7XT33 Siemens 430-00427 20 Hz Band-pass Filter 7XT34 20 Hz Measuring Current ITI 430-00428 Transformer 400-5 A CT CTWS-60-T50-401 7 ‑ oss Reference Low Frequency Signal Injection Equipment Part Number Cr Table 2 140 % 64S Pickup TRIP Current I 20 60 % 15 V 25 V 30 V 20 V 5 V 10 V 0 V 45 V 35 V 40 V 20 Hz Injection Voltage ent Correlation ‑ 64S Function Time Delay Pickup Curr 59 Figure 2 100% Stator Ground Pr Figure 2‑60 otection (64S) Setpoint Ranges 2–70

128 Application – 2 67N Residual Directional Overcurrent , V using V and V inputs. The function provides both C A B definite time and inverse time elements. The inverse The Residual Directional Overcurrent function (67N) time element provides several curves. The curves ‑ provides protection from ground faults. The 67N func , Inverse available for use are shown in Appendix D tion can provide generator ground fault protection. It Time Curves . They cover a range from 1.5 to 20 times can also provide directional discrimination when mul ‑ the pickup setting. An additional one cycle time delay tiple generators are bused together. The 67N Function should be added to these curves in order to obtain is subject to the following configuration limitations: the relay operating time. Inverse time curves saturate • V polarization cannot be selected if 25 beyond 20 times pickup. For currents in excess of 20 X (Sync) function is enabled. times pickup, operating times are fixed at the 20 time pickup level. • 3V polarization can only be used with Line ‑ 0 Ground VT configuration. To obtain maximum sensitivity for fault currents, the ailable 87GD if av not is • 67N Function is directional element is provided with a maximum enabled. sensitivity angle adjustment (MSA). This setting is common to both the 67NDT and 67NIT elements. The pickup sensitivity of the relay remains constant for 90° The 67N Function operates on the residual current either side of the so ‑ called Maximum Sensitivity Angle and I , I either from internal calculation (3I ) using I C 0 A B (MSA). At angles over 90° from MSA, the relay opera ‑ or using a residual current input from I input of the N tion is blocked. Typical MSA setting for a generator ). The relay relay (this is preferred compared to 3I 0 internal ground fault protector is approximately 150°. ), broken can be polarized with the neutral voltage (V N input or 3V delta voltage connected at V calculated X 0 current (67N) Trip Characteristics Figure 2‑61 Residual Directional Over 2–71

129 M‑3425A Instruction Book 67NDT PICKUP Pickup value for the 67N element. Amps _______________ 67NDT DIR ELEMENT Directional discrimination enable. When disabled, this function disable ENABLE will work like a 50N. 67NDT DELAY Time Delay setting. Cycles ______________ 67NIT PICKUP Inverse Time Pickup Amps _______________ 67NIT DIR ELEMENT Directional discrimination enabled. When disabled, this function disable ENABLE will operate like 51N. 67NIT CURVE Select the inverse time curve.  bdef binv bvinv beinv 67NIT TIME DIAL Time dial setting _________________ SENSITIVITY MAX 67N ANGLE See Figure 2‑60 for Max Sensitivity Angle (MSA) settings. _____________ Degrees 67N OPERATING CURRENT Select the operating current. 3I0 in 67N POLARIZING QUANTITY is selected, VT configura ‑ Select the polarization voltage. If 3V 0 3V0 vn vx Ground. ‑ tion must be set to Line 2–72

130 Application – 2 Figure 2‑62 Residual Directional Over current (67N) Setpoint Ranges 2–73

131 M‑3425A Instruction Book Consider, for example, Figure 2‑64. If the Out ‑ of ‑ Step ‑ of ‑ step 78 Out swing progresses to impedance Z ), the MHO ele ‑ (t The Out ‑ of ‑ Step function (78) is used to protect the 0 0 ment and the blinder A element will both pick up. As of ‑ step or pole slip conditions. ‑ generator from out ), (t the swing proceeds and crosses blinder B at Z This function uses one set of blinders, along with a 1 1 blinder B will pick up. When the swing reaches Z (t ), supervisory MHO element. Ranges and increments 2 2 blinder A will drop out. If TRIP ON MHO EXIT op‑ are presented in Figure 2‑65. tion is disabled and the timer has expired (t –t >time 2 1 The pickup area is restricted to the shaded area in Fig ‑ delay), then the trip circuit is complete. If the TRIP ‑ of ‑ ure 2‑63, Out Step Relay Characteristics, defined ON MHO EXIT option is enabled and the timer has by the inner region of the MHO circle, the region to expired, then for the trip to occur the swing must the right of the blinder A and the region to the left of ) where progress and cross the MHO circle at Z (t 3 3 blinder B. For operation of the blinder scheme, the the MHO element drops out. Note the timer is active operating point (positive sequence impedance) must only in the pickup region (shaded area). If the TRIP originate outside either blinder A or B, and swing ON MHO EXIT option is enabled, a more favorable through the pickup area for a time greater than or tripping angle is achieved, which reduces the breaker equal to the time delay setting and progress to the tripping duty. The relay can also be set with a Pole Slip opposite blinder from where the swing had originated. Counter. The relay will operate when the number of When this scenario happens, the tripping logic is com ‑ pole slips are equal to the setting, provided the Pole plete. The contact will remain closed for the amount Slip Reset Time was not expired. Typically, the Pole in timer delay. of time set by the seal ‑ Slip Counter is set to 1, in which case the Pole Slip Reset Time is not applicable. = T X ransformer Reactance T = X System Reactance S Transient Reactance of the Generator ’ = X d 78 DIAMETER Typical setting is (1.5X +2X ’ ) T d _______________ Ohms ’ . Typical setting is –2X 78 OFFSET d _______________ Ohms 78 BLINDER IMPEDANCE Θ –( δ + X ) tan( ’ + X Typical setting is (1/2) (X /2)). Typical S T d Ohms _______________ value for δ is 120°. is 90°. Typical setting for Θ 78 IMPEDANCE ANGLE Degrees _____________ The time delay should be set based on the stability study. In 78 DELAY ______________ Cycles the absence of such a study, it can be set between 3 and 6 cycles. 78 TRIP ON MHO EXIT This setting is typically enabled. disable enable Typical setting is 1 pole slip. 78 POLE SLIP COUNT ______________ slips 78 POLE SLIP RESET TIME Typical setting is 120 cycles. Cycles ______________ 2–74

132 Application – 2 B A (t ) Z 3 3 (t ) Z 0 0 (t ) Z 1 1 Z ) (t 2 2 ‑ of ‑ Out Figure 2‑63 Step Relay Characteristics X D B A SYSTEM X S O 1.5 X T TRANS X T P G N F R M H SWING d LOCUS GEN ' ) (X MHO d ELEMENT ' 2X d C BLINDER ELEMENTS Step Pr ‑ of otection Settings Out Figure 2‑64 ‑ 2–75

133 M‑3425A Instruction Book Figure 2‑65 Out ‑ of ‑ Step (78) Setpoint Ranges 2–76

134 Application – 2 81 Frequency disabled when the input voltage (positive sequence) is very low (typically between 2.5 V and 15 V, based ‑ The Frequency function (81) provides either overfre on the frequency.) quency or underfrequency protection of the genera ‑ tor. It has four independent pickup and time delay The 81 function should be disabled using breaker settings. The overfrequency mode is automatically contact when the unit is offline. selected when the frequency setpoint is programmed higher than the base frequency (50 or 60 Hz), and the These magnitude and time settings describe a curve underfrequency mode selected when the setpoint is (as shown in Figure 2‑66, Example of Frequency (81) programmed below the base frequency. Ranges and Trip Characteristics) which is to be coordinated with increments are presented in Figure 2‑68. the capability curves of the turbine and generator as well as the system underfrequency load ‑ shedding The steam turbine is usually considered to be more ‑ program. These capabilities are given by a descrip restrictive than the generator at reduced frequencies tion of areas of prohibited operation, restricted time because of possible natural mechanical resonance operation, and continuous allowable operation. in the many stages of the turbine blades. If the gen ‑ erator speed is close to the natural frequency of any The underfrequency function is usually connected to of the blades, there will be an increase in vibration. trip the machine whereas the overfrequency function Cumulative damage due to this vibration can lead to is generally connected to an alarm. cracking of the blade structure. In order to prevent mis–operation during switching Sample settings of the 81 function are shown in Fig ‑ transients, the time delay should be set to greater ure 2‑66. The frequency functions are automatically than five (5) cycles. 81 #1 PICKUP ________________ Hz 81 #1 DELAY ______________ Cycles 81 #2 PICKUP ________________ Hz 81 #2 DELAY Cycles ______________ 81 #3 PICKUP ________________ Hz 81 #3 DELAY ______________ Cycles 81 #4 PICKUP Hz ________________ 81 #4 DELAY Cycles ______________ 2–77

135 M‑3425A Instruction Book Over Frequency Magnitude #1 Trip 61.0 60.8 60.6 81 60.4 Over Frequency Magnitude #2 60.2 Over Frequency (Hz) Over Frequency Over Frequency Time Delay #1 Time Delay #2 Time (cycles) 60.0 Under Frequency Under Frequency Time Delay #3 Time Delay #4 59.8 Under Frequency Magnitude #3 59.6 81 59.4 59.2 Under Frequency Magnitude #4 Trip Under Frequency (Hz) 59.0 Figure 2‑66 Example of Frequency (81) T rip Characteristics Figure 2‑67 Frequency (81) Setpoint Ranges 2–78

136 Application – 2 81A Frequency Accumulator next band, i.e., Low Band #2 is the upper limit for Band #3, and so forth. Frequency bands must be used in Frequency Accumulation feature (81A) provides an sequential order, 1 to 6. Band #1 must be enabled to indication of the amount of off frequency operation use Bands #2–#6. If any band is disabled, all following accumulated. bands are disabled. Turbine blades are designed and tuned to operate at When frequency is within an enabled band limit, rated frequencies, operating at frequencies different accumulation time starts (there is an internal ten than rated can result in blade resonance and fatigue cycle delay prior to accumulation), this allows the damage. In 60 Hz machines, the typical operating underfrequency blade resonance to be established frequency range for 18 to 25 inch blades is 58.5 to to avoid unnecessary accumulation of time. When 61.5 Hz and for 25 to 44 inch blades is between 59.5 accumulated duration is greater than set delay, then and 60.5 Hz. Accumulated operation, for the life of the the 81A function operated the programmed output machine, of not more than 10 minutes for frequen ‑ contact. The contact can be used to alert the operator cies between 56 and 58.5 Hz and not more than 60 or trip the machine. minutes for frequencies between 58.5 and 59.5 Hz is acceptable on typical machines. The accumulator status can be set to preserve the accumulated information from previous devices. This The 81A function can be configured to track off nomi ‑ allows the relay to begin accumulating information nal frequency operation by either set point or when at a pre defined value. This setpoint is only available ‑ the frequency is within a frequency band . ® Communications Software. through IPScom When using multiple frequency bands, the lower limit of the previous band becomes the upper limit for the 81A #4 LOW BAND PICKUP HIGH BAND PICKUP 81A #1 Hz ________________ Hz ________________ 81A #1 LOW BAND PICKUP 81A #4 DELAY ________________ Hz ______________ Cycles 81A #5 LOW BAND PICKUP 81A #1 DELAY ________________ Hz ______________ Cycles 81A #5 DELAY 81A #2 LOW BAND PICKUP Cycles ________________ Hz ______________ 81A #2 DELAY 81A #6 LOW BAND PICKUP ______________ Hz Cycles ________________ 81A #3 LOW BAND PICKUP 81A #6 DELAY ________________ ______________ Cycles Hz 81A #3 DELAY ______________ Cycles 2–79

137 M‑3425A Instruction Book Example-Band Fn 81-1 HB #1 Band 81-1 LB #2 Band 81-2 LB #3 Band 81-3 LB #4 Band 81-4 LB #5 Band 0 5 15 10 Time (mins) Frequency Figure 2‑68 Accumulator (81A) Example Bands Accumulator (81A) Setpoint Ranges Figure 2‑69 Frequency 2–80

138 Application – 2 81R Rate of Change of Frequency The Rate of Change of Frequency function (81R) can be used for load shedding or tripping applications. 81R #1 PICKUP _______________ Hz/s The function also has an automatic disable feature which disables 81R function during unbalanced faults and other system disturbances. This feature uses nega ‑ 81R #1 DELAY tive sequence voltage to block the 81R function. When Cycles ______________ the measured negative sequence voltage exceeds the inhibit setting, the function 81R and metering are 81R #2 PICKUP blocked. The time delay and magnitude settings of 81R _______________ Hz/s should be based on simulation studies. The ranges and increments are shown in Figure 2‑70. 81R #2 DELAY ______________ Cycles INHIBIT 81R NEG SEQ VOLT % ________________ Figure 2‑70 Rate of Change of Frequency (81R) Setpoint Ranges 2–81

139 M‑3425A Instruction Book To provide restraint for CT saturation at high offset 87 Phase Differential currents, the slope is automatically adjusted (at a The Phase Differential function (87) is a percentage ‑ restraining current equal to two times nominal cur ‑ differential with an adjustable slope of 1–100%. Al rent) to four times the slope setting, see Figure 2‑71. though this protection is used to protect the machine from all internal winding faults, single phase to ground ‑ ‑ For very high currents in large generators, the prox faults in machines with high impedance grounding imity of CTs and leads in different phases can cause may have currents less than the sensitivity of the unbalanced currents to flow in the secondaries. These differential relay (typically between 3 and 30 primary currents must be less than the minimum sensitivity amps). Ranges and increments are presented in of the relay. Figure 2‑72. There are two elements in this function. Element #2 ‑ ‑ to Turn turn faults are not detected by differential is intended to provide phase differential protection relays because the current into the generator equals for SFC (Static Frequency Converter) starting gas the current out (see functions 50DT and 59X for turn ‑ turbine generator applications. Element #1 should turn fault protection.) Even though the percentage to ‑ be disabled with a contact blocking input during a differential relay is more tolerant of CT errors, all CTs converter start operation (generator off line), since ‑ should have the same characteristics and accuracies. the current is carried by only neutral side CTs and the resulting differential current may mis operate ‑ 87#1 function. The 87#2 element, which is set with a higher current pickup, will still provide protection for this condition. A typical setting is 0.3 amps. 87 #1 PICKUP Amps _______________ A typical setting is 10%. 87 #1 SLOPE % ________________ A typical setting is one cycle. Typical settings given above assume 87 #1 DELAY matched current transformer performance, and that transformer ______________ Cycles inrush of the unit transformer does not cause dc saturation of the generator CTs. If there is a significant difference in current transformer ratings (C800 vs C200, for example), or if saturation 87 #2 PICKUP of the generator CTs is expected during energizing of the step up Amps _______________ transformer, more appropriate settings might be 0.5 A pick up, 20% slope, and a delay of 5 to 8 cycles. 87 #2 SLOPE % ________________ If line side and neutral side CTs do not have the same ratio, the ratio 87 #2 DELAY error can be corrected (the line side measured current is multiplied ______________ Cycles by the phase CT correction settings.) 87 PHASE CT CORRECTION Line Side CTR _________________ Phase CT Correction = Neutral Side CTR 2–82

140 Application – 2 Where I and I are generator high side and neutral side currents respectively, and CTC is the A a CT Phase correction. Figure 2‑71 Differential Relay (87) Operating Characteristics Figure 2‑72 Phase Differential (87) Setpoint Ranges 2–83

141 M‑3425A Instruction Book 87GD Ground (Zero Sequence) Differential The advantage of directional supervision is the se ‑ curity against ratio errors and CT saturation during The Zero Sequence Differential function (87GD) faults external to the protected generator. provides ground fault protection for low impedance grounded generator applications. High sensitivity and The directional element is inoperative if the residual fast operation can be obtained using this function. current (3I ) is approximately less than 0.2 A, in 0 Ranges and increments are presented in Figure 2‑73. which case the algorithm automatically disables the directional element and the 87GD function becomes ) The relay provides a CT Ratio Correction Factor (R C ‑ non directional differential. The pickup quantity is then which removes the need for auxiliary CTs when the calculated as the difference between the corrected phase and neutral CT ratios are different. ) and the neutral triple zero 3I ‑ sequence current (R C 0 When the system can supply zero sequence current ). The magnitude of the difference (R 3I –I ) current (I N C 0 N to the ground fault (such as when several generators is compared to the relay pickup. are bussed together), the 87GD function operates ‑ For security purposes during external high phase directionally. The directional element calculates the fault currents causing CT saturation, this function product (–3I CosØ) for directional indication. The I 0 N is disabled any time the value of I is less than ap ‑ (Zero sequence current relay will operate only if I N 0 proximately 0.20 amps. derived from phase CTs) and I (Neutral current from N Neutral CT) have the opposite polarity, which is the case for internal generator faults. : NOTE  When 87GD is enabled, 67N function is not available. A typical setting is 0.2 amps. (Relay amps = primary amps ÷ CT 87GD PICKUP ratio.) For higher values of R , noise may create substantial differ ‑ Amps _______________ C ential current making higher pickup settings desirable. ▲ CAUTION : Do NOT set the Delay to less than 2 Cycles. 87GD DELAY ______________ Cycles In order to prevent mis ‑ operation during external faults with CT ‑ saturation conditions, a time delay of 6 cycles or higher is recom mended. 87GD C.T. RATIO CORRECT CT Ratio Correction Factor = (Phase CT Ratio)/(Neutral CT Ratio) _________ Figure 2‑73 Ground Differ ential (87GD) Setpoint Ranges 2–84

142 Application – 2 Breaker Monitoring played as an actual value. The accumulation starts after a set time delay from the trip initiate command The Breaker Monitoring feature calculates an estimate to account for the time it takes for the breaker to start of the per ‑ phase wear on the breaker contacts by opening its contacts. The accumulation continues until measuring and integrating the current ( ) or current IT 2 the current drops below 10% of the nominal current T I squared ( ) passing through the breaker contacts setting or 10 cycles, whichever occurs first. phase values ‑ during the interruption period. The per are added to an accumulated total for each phase, ‑ and then compared to a user programmed threshold  : NOTE Preset Accumulator Setpoints are only ® value. When the threshold is exceeded in any phase, . available through IPScom the relay can operate a programmable output contact. The accumulated value for each phase can be dis ‑ BM PICKUP Expanded Inputs IN7–IN14 (if equipped) must be set using IPScom. kA-cycles _____________ Outputs OUT9–OUT23 (if equipped) must be set us ‑ Expanded BM INPUT INITIATE i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 ing IPScom. BM OUTPUT INITIATE 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 BM DELAY _____________ Cycles BM TIMING METHOD it i2t Breaker Monitor (BM) Setpoint Ranges Figure 2‑74 2–85

143 M‑3425A Instruction Book Trip Circuit Monitoring open, and the output contact is open, no current flows and the Trip Circuit Monitoring Input is deactivated. External connections for the Trip Circuit Monitoring An Output Contact that is welded closed would also function are shown in Figure 2‑75. The default Trip cause the Trip Circuit Monitoring Input to deactivate, Circuit Monitor input voltage is 250 V dc. See Section indicating failure of the Output Contact. 5.5, Circuit Board Switches and Jumpers, Table 5‑3 for other available trip circuit input voltage selections. When the Output Contact is closed, no current flows in the Trip Circuit Monitoring Input. If the M‑3425A has This function should be programmed to block when issued a trip command to close the Output Contact and the breaker is open, as indicated by 52b contact input Trip Circuit Monitoring Input remains activated, this is (IN1). If the TCM is monitoring a lockout relay, a 86 an indication that the Output Contact failed to close. contact input (INx) should be used to block when the lockout relay is tripped. The output of the Trip Circuit Monitoring function can be programmed as an alarm to alert maintenance When the Output Contact is open, and continuity exists personnel. in the Trip Circuit, a small current flows that activates the Trip Circuit Monitoring Input. If the Trip Circuit is TCM DELAY Cycles ______________ M-3425A 86or 52b Station Battery 2 + Tr ip Circuit Aux Input 1 Monitoring Input Output Other Contact Contacts 52a 52 or 86 Tr ip Coil - Trip Cir cuit Monitoring Input Figure 2‑75 cuit Monitor (TC) Setpoint Ranges Figure 2‑76 Trip Cir 2–86

144 Application – 2 IPSlogic™ The relay provides six logic functions and associated IPSlogic. The logic functions can be used to allow external devices to trip through the relay, providing additional target information for the external device. More importantly, these functions can be used in conjunction with IPSlogic to expand the capability of the relay by allowing the user to define customized operating logic. Programming the IPSlogic can only be implement ‑ ® ed through IPScom Communications Software. The IPSlogic cannot be programmed using the Human ‑ Machine Interface (HMI). IPS LOGIC USE CONFIGURE IPSCOM TO 2–87

145 M‑3425A Instruction Book IPSlogic Activated Group 1-4 Log Target Log Pickup Outputs 1-8 Programmed Programmed *Outputs 1-23 Profile Setting to activate the desired Output (1091 sec) Time Delay Programmed This section of the IPSlogic is used 1- 65,500 Cycles Selectable And/Or This section of the IPSlogic initiates the Function Output Selectable And/Or used to Block the Function Output This section of the IPSlogic is Initiating Intputs Selectable And/Or Selectable And/Or Selectable And/Or Initiating Function Trip Selectable And/Or/Nor/Nand Blocking Intputs Initiating Outputs (includes external elements) Picked Up Timed Out Point Point Inputs 1-6 Inputs 1-6 Initiate Via Outputs 1-8 Initiate Via *Inputs 7-14 *Inputs 7-14 Function(s) *Outputs 9-23 Programmable Programmable Programmable * For units with Expanded I/O Programmable Communication Communication IPSlogic™ Function Setup Figure 2‑77 2–88

146 Application – 2 Settings and Logic Applicable when IPSlogic™ The IPSlogic Function can be programmed to perform ® Function(s) programmed using IPScom any or all of the following tasks: There are four initiating input sources: Initiating Out ‑ Setting Active the • Change Profile puts, Initiating Function Trips, Function Pickup (in ‑ Output an Contact • Close cluding the IPSlogic Functions themselves), Initiating Inputs, and initiation using the Communication Port. another to input • Be as use for activated an The only limitation is that an IPSlogic Function may External Function not be used to initiate itself. There are two blocking input sources: Blocking Inputs and blocking using the Since there are six IPSlogic Functions per set ‑ Communication Port. ting profile, depending on the number of different relay settings defined, the scheme may provide The activation state of the input function selected in up to 24 different logic schemes. The IPScom IP ‑ the Initiating Function can be either timeout (Trip) or Slogic Function programming screen is shown in ‑ pickup. The desired time delay for security consider Figure 2‑78. ations can be obtained in the IPSlogic Function time delay setting. Notes: This logic gate may be selected as either AND or OR. 1. 2. This logic gate may be selected as AND , OR, NOR, or NAND. IPSlogic Function Programing Figure 2‑78 2–89

147 M‑3425A Instruction Book Figure 2‑79 Selection Screen for Initiating Function T imeout Figure 2‑80 Selection Screen for Initiating Function Pickup 2–90

148 Application – 2 Dropout Delay Timer DO/RST (Dropout/Reset) Timer Feature The DO/RST timer can be set as either Dropout or The Dropout Delay Timer logic is presented in Figure Reset mode. The operation of the Dropout Delay 81. The Dropout Delay Timer feature allows the ‑ 2 Timer and the Reset Delay Timer are described below. user to affect an output time delay that starts when the IPSlogic PU Status drops out (A) and can hold the Output (D) status true beyond the Output Seal In Delay value (C). However, the Seal In Delay (E) may hold the Output (B) true if the time after IPSlogic PU Status dropout (A) and Dropout Delay Timer value (D) are less than the Seal In Delay time (E). Dropout Delay Timer 25 35 Cycles IPSlogic Functions (1 - 6) PU Status PU Time Delay Seal in Delay Setting (30) E Seal in Delay PU Time Delay Timing Dropout Delay B Output D C A 81 Figure 2 ‑ Dropout Delay Timer Logic Diagram Reset Delay Timer If the IPSlogic PU Status remains dropped out (D) after the reset delay has timed out, then the IPSlogic The Reset Delay Timer logic is presented in Figure PU timer value will be reset to zero (E). ‑ 82. The Reset Delay Timer feature allows the user 2 to delay the reset of the PU Time Delay Timer and If the IPSlogic PU Status reasserts (F) while the Reset hold the accumulated timer value (A) for the duration Delay Timer is still timing, then the PU Timer Delay of the Reset Time Delay time period (B). The Reset begins timing from the accumulated value (G). Delay Timer starts when the IPSlogic PU Status drops out (C). Reset Delay Timer 12 25 25 8 5 10 Cycles D IPSlogic Functions (1 - 6) F C PU Status Reset Delay Reset Reset B 10 Cycles Delay Delay PU Time Delay Setting (30) G A Seal In PU Time Delay Timing Timer E Output 82 ‑ Figure 2 Reset Delay Timer Logic Diagram 2–91

149 M‑3425A Instruction Book This Page Left Intentionally Blank 2–92

150 Operation – 3 3 Operation Front Panel Controls 3.1 ... 3–1 3.2 Initial Setup Procedure/Settings ... 3–5 3.3 Setup Unit Data ... 3–5 Setup System Data 3.4 ... 3–6 3.5 Status/Metering ... 3–9 3.6 Target History ... 3–10 Arrow Pushbuttons This chapter contains information that describes the operation of the M-3931 Human Machine Interface The left and right arrow pushbuttons are used to Module (HMI) and the M-3925A Target module. It choose among the displayed menu selections. When further describes the direct setting and configuration entering values, the left and right arrow pushbuttons procedures for entering all required data to the relay. are used to select the digit (by moving the cursor) of Included in this chapter is a description of the process the displayed setpoint that will be increased or necessary for review of setpoints and timing, monitoring decreased by the use of the up and down pushbuttons. function status and metering quantities, viewing the The up and down arrow pushbuttons increase or target history, and setup of the oscillograph recorder. decrease input values or change between upper and lower case inputs. If the up or down pushbutton is pressed when adjusting numerical values, the Front Panel Controls 3.1 speed of increment or decrement is increased. The relay has been designed to be set and EXIT Pushbutton interrogated locally with the optional HMI panel. An integral part of this design is the layout and function The EXIT pushbutton is used to exit from a displayed of the front panel indicators and controls, illustrated screen and move up the menu tree. Any changed in Figure 3-1. setpoint in the displayed screen will be saved if not the selection is aborted using the EXIT pushbutton. Alphanumeric Display ENTER Pushbutton To assist the operator in setting and interrogating the relay locally, the HMI displays menus which ENTER The pushbutton is used to choose a guide the operator to the desired function or setpoint highlighted menu selection, to replace a setpoint or value. These menus consist of two lines. The bottom other programmable value with the currently displayed line lists lower case abbreviations of each menu value, or to move down within the menu tree. selection with the chosen menu selection shown in uppercase. The top menu line provides a description Target & Status Indicators and Controls of the chosen menu selection. The target/status indicators and controls consist of Screen Blanking LED, (2) LEDs, the POWER SUPPLY RELAY OK the OSCILLOGRAPH TRIG LED, BREAKER The display will automatically blank after exiting from CLOSED LED TARGET LED, DIAGNOSTIC LED, the Main Menu, or from any screen after five (5) LED. and TIME SYNC minutes of unattended operation. To wake up the display, the user must press any key except EXIT . 3–1

151 M-3425A Instruction Book Power Supply #1 (#2) LED will flash 3 times, followed by a short pause, and then flash 2 times, followed by a long pause, then LED indicator will remain illuminated The green PS repeat LED flash sequence. For units equipped with for the appropriate power supply whenever power is the HMI, the Error Code number is also displayed applied to the unit and the power supply is operating on the screen. correctly. A second power supply is available as an option, for units without expanded I/O. Accessing Screens Relay OK LED To prevent unauthorized access to relay functions, the unit includes a provision for assigning access LED is controlled by the RELAY OK The green codes. If access codes have been assigned, the LED RELAY OK relay's microprocessor. A flashing access code entry screen will be displayed after indicates proper program cycling. The LED can also ENTER is pressed from the default message screen. be programmed to be continuously illuminated. Default Message Screens Oscillograph Triggered LED When power is applied to the unit, the relay performs OSC TRIG The red LED will illuminate to indicate a number of self-tests to ensure that it is operating that oscillographic data has been recorded in the correctly. During the self-tests, the screen displays unit’s memory and is available for download. an “ ” for each test successfully executed. X Breaker Closed LED If all self-tests are executed successfully, the relay will briefly display the word PASS and then a series LED will illuminate to indicate BRKR CLOSED The red of status screens that include: when the breaker status input IN1 (52b) is open. • Model Number Target Indicators and Target Reset • Software Version Number When a condition exists that causes the operation • Serial Number of outputs 1 through 8 (1 through 23 for units with expanded I/O), the TARGET LED will illuminate, • Date and time as set in the system clock indicating a relay operation. The TARGET LED will • User Logo Screen remain illuminated until the condition causing the trip is cleared, and the operator presses the TARGET If a test fails, an error code will be displayed and the RESET pushbutton. For units equipped with the relay will not allow operation to proceed. In such a optional M-3925A Target Module, additional targeting case, the error code should be noted and the factory information is available. The Target module includes contacted. A list of error codes and their descriptions an additional 24 target LEDs, and 8 output status Error Codes . are provided in Appendix C, LEDs. LEDs corresponding to the particular operated function as well as the present state of the outputs When the relay has power applied and is unattended, are available. Pressing and holding the TARGET the user logo lines are blanked. RESET pushbutton will display the present pickup status of all functions available on the target module. If a function has operated and the targets have not This is a valuable diagnostic tool which may be been reset, the screen will display the time and date used during commissioning and testing. of the operation and automatically cycle through screens for each applicable target (see Figure 3-2). ENTER Pressing the pushbutton will enter local Time Sync LED mode operation, displaying the access code entry The green TIME SYNC LED will illuminate to indicate screen or, if access codes have been disabled, the that the IRIG-B time signal is received and the first level menu. internal clock is synchronized with the IRIG-B time signal. IRIG-B time information is used to accurately Figure 3-3 presents the software menu flow map tag target and oscillograph events. for HMI-equipped units. This map can be used as a quick reference guide to aid in navigating the relay's menus. Diagnostic LED The diagnostic DIAG LED will flash when a self-test error is detected. The LED will flash the Error Code number; for example, for Error Code 32, the LED 3–2

152 Operation – 3 Figure 3-1 M-3425A Front Panel    6#!<!!  ;;;;;;;; 5)*6( )()) '78247/'9.9  ./0!, ! 1 ,2,34   / '       6#!<!!  !! &'2 "40 ,2:   5 ?3, ,3)     =7/>.   5 ?3, ,3)     #))!!)$ ))!!$#($-  5 ?3, ,3)   !(#"=5'/ '))!!#$-    5 ?3, ,3) '78247/'.9>9/       5 ?3, ,3) ./0!, ! 1 ,2,34                  !"#$  !%"#$   4 ,% 40 2 %  &'()*" '+,        Figure 3-2 Screen Message Menu Flow 3–3

153 M-3425A Instruction Book STATUS VOLTAGE RELAY SYNC CHECK RELAY J config sys STAT I field stator SYNC J J VOLT curr freq v/hz I Voltage Status • 27 Phase Undervoltage • 25S Sync Check • • Current Status • 59 Phase Overvoltage 25D Dead Volt • 27TN Neutrl Undervolt • Frequency Status • 59X Overvoltage • • V/Hz Status BREAKER MONITOR • 59N Neutral Overvoltage Power Status • I BRKR trpckt ipslog J • Impedance Status 59D Volt. Diff. 3rd Har. • • Set Breaker Monitoring Sync Check Status • • Preset Accumulators CURRENT RELAY • Breaker Mon Acc Status • Clear Accumulators 81A Accumulators Status • volt CURR freq v/Hz J In/Out Status • • 46 Neg Seq Overcurrent TRIP CIRCUIT MONITOR • Timer Status 50 Inst Overcurrent • Relay Temperature • brkr TRPCKT ipslog J I • 50/27 Inadvertent Energing • Counters 50BF Breaker Failure • Trip Circuit Monitor • Time of Last Power Up • • 50DT Def. Time Overcurr • Error Codes • 50N Inst Overcurrent Checksums • IPS LOGIC • 51N Inv Time Overcurrent J brkr trpckt IPSLOG I • 49 Stator Overload VIEW TARGET HISTORY • 51V Inv Time Overcurrent • IPS Logic J I TARGETS osc_rec comm 87 Differential Overcurr • 87GD Gnd Diff Overcurr • • View Target History CONFIGURE RELAY • Clear Target History 67N Res Dir Overcurr • J I CONFIG sys stat FREQUENCY RELAY OSCILLOGRAPH RECORDER • Voltage Relay J volt curr FREQ v/hz • Current Relay I J targets OSC_REC comm Frequency Relay • 81 Frequency • • View Record Status • Volts per Hertz Relay 81R Rate of Change Freq • • Clear Records • Power Relay • 81A Frequency Accum. • Recorder Setup Loss of Field Relay • V.T. Fuse Loss Relay • VOLTS PER HERTZ RELAY COMMUNICATION • Phase Distance Relay J volt curr freq V/HZ targets osc_rec COMM I J • Field Gnd Relay • Stator Gnd Relay • 24 Def Time Volts/Hertz • COM1 Setup • Sync Check Relay COM2 Setup • • 24 Inv Time Volts/Hertz • Breaker Mon Relay • COM3 Setup Trip Ckt Mon Relay • • Communication Address POWER RELAY • IPSLogic Relay • Response Time Delay I PWR lof fuse dist J Comm Access Code • SETUP SYSTEM 32 Directional Power • Ethernet Setup • I config SYS stat J • Ethernet IP Address LOSS OF FIELD RELAY • Input Activated Profiles pwr LOF fuse dist J I • Active Setpoint Profile SETUP UNIT • Copy Active Profile I SETUP exit 40 Loss of Field • Nominal Voltage • • Software Version Nominal Current • V. T. FUSE LOSS RELAY • Serial Number • V. T. Configuration J I pwr los FUSE dist Alter Access Codes • Delta-Y Transform • • User Control Number Phase Rotation • 60FL V. T. Fuse Loss • • User Logo Line 1 • 59/27 Magnitude Select User Logo Line 2 • • 50DT Split-phase Diff. PHASE DISTANCE RELAY • Clear Output Counters • Pulse Relay J I pwr lof fuse DIST Clear Alarm Counter • Latched Outputs • • Date & Time Relay Seal-in Time • 21 Phase Distance • • Clear Error Codes • Active Input State • 78 Out of Step • Ethernet Firmware Ver. • V.T. Phase Ratio • Diagnostic Mode V.T. Neutral Ratio • FIELD GROUND RELAY V.T. VX Ratio • FIELD stator sync I J EXIT LOCAL MODE C.T. Phase Ratio • C.T. Neutral Ratio • setup EXIT I 64B/F Field Ground • STATOR GROUND RELAY ■ NOTE: Depending on which functions are purchased, some field STATOR sync J I menus may not appear. • 64S Stator Ground Main Menu Flow Figure 3-3 3–4

154 Operation – 3 3.2 Initial Setup Procedure/ Setup Unit Data 3.3 Settings : Please see Figure 3-3, Main Menu Flow, NOTE ■ for a list of submenus associated with The M-3425A Generator Protection Relay is shipped menu. the SETUP UNIT from the factory with all functions disabled (user will only be able to enable purchased functions). menu proceed as To access the SETUP UNIT The Setup Procedure provided below is a suggested follows: setup procedure for initially entering settings into pushbutton to display 1. Press the ENTER the relay. While it is written for HMI-equipped units, the main menu. the same procedure is applicable when setting the 2. Press the right arrow pushbutton until relay through remote communication utilizing ® is displayed on the top SETUP UNIT M-3820D IPScom Communications Software. line of the screen. Following the Setup Procedure are several sections pushbutton to access Press the 3. ENTER which provide additional detail concerning the menu. SETUP UNIT the settings required for proper commissioning. SETUP UNIT Setup Procedure SETUP exit I : Configuration Record forms are available NOTE ■ in Appendix A, Configuration Record Forms , to record settings for future ENTER Press the pushbutton to move 4. reference. down within the menu to SETUP UNIT the desired category. To exit a specific Enter the Setup Unit data. This is general 1. category and continue to the next menu information required including altering category, press the EXIT pushbutton. access codes, setting date and time, defining user logos, and other Setup Unit Data Entry adjustments. See Section 3.3, Setup Unit Data. The general information required to complete the entry of Setup Unit Data includes: 2. Configure the Setup System data. This is the general system and equipment Access Codes : The relay includes three levels of information required for operation, access codes. Depending on their assigned code, including such items as CT and VT ratios, users have varying levels of access to the installed VT configuration, and Nominal values. functions. See Section 3.4, Setup System Data subsection. Level 1 Access 1. = Read setpoints, monitor status, view target history. 3. Enable the desired functions and elements. See Section 3.4, Configure = All of level 1 privileges, Level 2 Access 2. Relay Data subsection. plus read & change setpoints, target history, set time clock. 4. Enter the desired setpoints for the enabled functions. See Section 3.4, Level 3 Access = All of level 2 privileges, 3. Setpoints and Time Settings subsection. plus access to all configuration functions and settings. Enter configuration information for the 5. oscillograph recorder. See Section 3.4, Each access code is a user-defined one- to four- Oscillograph Recorder Data subsection. digit number. Access codes can only be altered by If remote communication is used, set 6. a level 3 user. the parameters as needed. See Section 3.4, Communications Settings If the level 3 access code is set to 9999, the subsection, or in Chapter 4, Remote access code feature is disabled. When access Operation . codes are disabled, the access screens are bypassed, and all users have full access to all the relay menus. The relay is shipped from the factory with the access code feature disabled. 3–5

155 M-3425A Instruction Book User Control Number : This is a user-defined value Setup System Data 3.4 which can be used for inventory or identification. The relay does not use this value, but it can be accessed through the HMI or the communications NOTE ■ : Please see Figure 3-3, Main Menu Flow, for a list of submenus associated with interface, and can be read remotely. the SETUP SYSTEM menu. User Logo : The user logo is a programmable, two- line by 24-character string, which can be used to menu proceed as To access the SETUP SYSTEM identify the relay, and which is displayed locally follows: when the relay is idle. This information is also 1. Press the ENTER pushbutton to display available remotely. the main menu. : This screen is used to view and set Date and Time 2. Press the right arrow pushbutton until the relay's internal clock. The clock is used to time SETUP SYSTEM is displayed on the stamp system events such as trip and oscillograph top line of the screen. operations. 3. Press the ENTER pushbutton to access menu. the SETUP SYSTEM The clock is disabled when shipped from the factory (indicated by “80” seconds appearing on the clock) to preserve battery life. If the relay is to be SETUP SYSTEM unpowered for an extended length of time, the clock I config SYS stat J should be stopped (see Diagnostic Mode). If the IRIG-B interface is used, the hours, minutes, and To input the data, access the menu as follows: seconds information in the clock will be pushbutton to display ENTER Press the 1. synchronized with IRIG-B time information every the main menu. hour. Press the right arrow pushbutton until 2. The relay can accept a modulated IRIG-B signal is displayed on the SETUP SYSTEM using the rear panel BNC connector, or a top line of the screen. demodulated TTL level signal using extra pins on the rear panel COM2 RS-232 interface connector pushbutton to access 3. ENTER Press the (see Figure B-4 for COM2 pinout.) If the TTL signal SETUP SYSTEM menu and begin the is to be used, then Jumper 5 will be required to be the data input. positioned (see Section 5.5, Circuit Board Switches System setup data is required for proper operation and Jumpers). of the relay. Information needed to complete this section includes: Nominal Voltage, Nominal Current, Setup Unit Features That Do Not Require Data VT Configuration, and other system-related Entry information. See Section 2.1, Configuration, Relay System Setup subsection for a more detailed The Setup Unit menu categories that provide the description of the settings required. user with read only information are Software Version, Serial Number and Ethernet Firmware Ver. . The Setup Unit menu also contains features that provide the user with the ability to Clear Output Counters, Clear Alarm Counter, Clear Error Codes and access the Diagnostic Mode . The error codes are described in Appendix C , Self Test Error Codes . Note that while the relay is in Diagnostic Mode, all protective functions are inoperative. 3–6

156 Operation – 3 Configure Relay Data Setpoints and Time Settings ■ : Please see Figure 3-3, Main Menu Flow, NOTE ■ NOTE : Please see Figure 3-3, Main Menu Flow, for a list of submenus associated with for a list of submenus and specific CONFIGURE RELAY menu. the elements associated with the Setpoints and Time Setting menus. CONFIGURE RELAY To input the data, access the To input the data, access these menus as follows: menu as follows: 1. Press the to display pushbutton ENTER 1. Press the ENTER pushbutton to display the main menu. the main menu. Press the right arrow pushbutton until 2. Press the right arrow pushbutton until 2. , the first of the VOLTAGE RELAY CONFIGURE RELAY is displayed on setpoint and time setting menus, is the top line of the screen. displayed on the top line of the screen. Press to access the ENTER 3. ■ : Some menus are dynamic, and do not NOTE menu and begin CONFIGURE RELAY appear if the function is not purchased the data input. or is unavailable. CONFIGURE RELAY to begin the data input for Press 3. ENTER I CONFIG sys stat J this menu, or continue pressing the right arrow pushbutton until the desired The general information required to complete the setpoint and time setting menu is input data in this section includes: displayed, then press ENTER to begin the data input. • enable/disable • output choices (OUT1–OUT8; for units The general information required to complete the with expanded I/O, OUT9–OUT23 may input data in this section includes individual relay ® only be set through IPScom ) function: • input blocking choices (IN1–IN6; for units with expanded I/O, IN7–IN14 may only be • pickup settings (converted to relay set through IPScom), plus fuse loss quantities) blocking • time delay settings • frequency settings Each of the purchased functions within the relay • time dials may be individually enabled or disabled. In addition, many functions have more than one element which • power level settings (in percent rated) may also be enabled or disabled. Unused functions • impedance diameter in relay ohms for and elements should be disabled to avoid nuisance distance and offset settings tripping and speed up HMI response time. After enabling a function/element, the user is Settings should be programmed based on system presented with two additional screens for selection . A Application analysis as described in Chapter 2, of input blocking and output contact designations. complete description of the individual function as Any combination of the control/status inputs or the well as guidelines for settings are explained therein. internally generated VT fuse loss logic can be selected to dynamically block the enabled function. “OR” logic is used if more than one input is selected. Outputs 1–6 (OUT9–OUT23 for units with expanded I/O, set through IPScom only) are form “a” contacts (normally open) and outputs 7 and 8 are form “c” contacts (center tapped “a” and “b” contacts). Output contacts 1–4 contain special circuitry for high-speed operation and pick up approximately 4 ms faster than other contacts. See Section 2.1, Configuration, for more information. 3–7

157 M-3425A Instruction Book Oscillograph Recorder Data • Post-Trigger Delay : A post-trigger delay of 5% to 95% must be specified. After NOTE Q : Please see Figure 3-3, Main Menu Flow, triggering, the recorder will continue to for a list of submenus associated with store data for the programmed portion of OSCILLOGRAPH RECORDER the the total record before re-arming for the menu. next record. For example, a setting of 80% will result in a record with 20% To input the data, access the OSCILLOGRAPH pretrigger data, and 80% post-trigger data. menu as follows: RECORDER Press the 1. pushbutton to display ENTER the main menu. forebmuN selcyCforebmuN 2. Press the right arrow pushbutton until snoititraP noititraPhcaErep OSCILLOGRAPH RECORDER is elcyC614 1s displayed on the top line of the screen. Press the 3. ENTER pushbutton to access elcyC082 2s the OSCILLOGRAPH RECORDER menu and begin the data input. 3s elcyC802 OSCILLOGRAPH RECORDER 4s elcyC861 J I targets OSC_REC comm elcyC631 5s The Oscillograph Recorder provides comprehensive elcyC021 6s data recording (voltage, current, and status input/ output signals) for all monitored waveforms (at 16 7s elcyC401 samples per cycle). Oscillograph data can be downloaded using the communications ports to any 8s elcyC88 IBM compatible personal computer running the ® M-3820D IPScom Communications Software. Once elcyC08 9s downloaded, the waveform data can be examined ® elcyC27 1s 0 and printed using the optional M-3801D IPSplot PLUS Oscillograph Data Analysis Software. elcyC46 1 1s Oscillograph records are not retained ▲ CAUTION: elcyC46 2 1s if power to the relay is interrupted. 3 elcyC65 1s The general information required to complete the input data of this section includes: elcyC65 1s 4 : When untriggered, Recorder Partitions • 5 1s elcyC84 the recorder continuously records waveform data, keeping the data in a 6 elcyC84 1s buffer memory. The recorder's memory may be partitioned into 1 to 16 partitions. Table 3-1 Recorder Partitions When triggered, the time stamp is recorded, and the recorder continues recording for a Communications Settings user-defined period. The snapshot of the To enter the communications settings, access the waveform is stored in memory for later menu as follows: COMMUNICATION retrieval using IPScom Communications Software. The OSC TRIG LED on the front COM1, COM2 and COM3 can be disabled ■ NOTE: panel will indicate a recorder operation (data for security purposes from the is available for downloading). Communications HMI menu. A Level 2 Access Code is required. : The recorder • Trigger Inputs and Outputs can be triggered remotely through serial Press the ENTER pushbutton to access 1. communications using IPScom, or the main menu. automatically using programmed status inputs or outputs. 2. Press the right arrow pushbutton until COMMUNICATION is displayed on the top line of the screen. 3–8

158 Operation – 3 Press the ENTER pushbutton to access 3. Press the 3. ENTER pushbutton to access menu and begin the COMMUNICATION menu. the STATUS the data entry. STATUS COMMUNICATION I J config sys STAT J targets osc_rec COMM I NOTE : Some menus are dynamic, and do not Q appear if the function is not purchased The general information required to complete the or is unavailable. communications settings entry of this section include: 4. Press the ENTER pushbutton to move • Baud rate for COM1 and COM2 STATUS down within the menu to the communication ports. The COM3 port does desired category. To exit a specific not have a separate baud rate setting but category and continue to the next menu uses the setting of COM2 (or COM1: see category, press the pushbutton. EXIT Section 5.5 Circuit Board Switches and Jumpers). The menu categories for monitored values are: • Communications address is used to • Voltage Status : phase voltages, neutral access multiple relays using a multidrop voltage, positive sequence voltage, or network communication line. negative sequence voltage, zero sequence • Communications access code is used for voltage, third harmonic neutral voltage, communication system security (entering field ground measurement circuit, stator an access code of 9999 disables the low frequency injection voltage communication security). phase currents (A–B–C/ • Current Status: • Communication protocol and dead sync a-b-c), differential current, neutral current, time for COM2 and COM3. ground differential current, positive • Parity for COM2 or COM3 if MODBUS or sequence current, negative sequence MODBUS over TCP/IP protocol is used. current, zero sequence current, stator low frequency injection current • Response Time Delay • Frequency Status : frequency, rate of • IP Address, Net Mask and Gateway change of frequency Address are required if the ethernet port is utilized and the network does not support volts per hertz • Volts/Hz Status: the DHCP protocol. • Power Status : real power, reactive power, apparent power, power factor Detailed information concerning setup and operation : impedance (Zab, Zbc, • Impedance Status of the communication ports is described in Zca), positive sequence impedance, field . Remote Operation , Chapter 4 ground resistance : 25S Sync Check • Sync Check Status and 25D Dead Volt 3.5 Status/Metering BRKR Monitor • Monitor Status/Metering • 81A Accum. Status Q NOTE : Please see Figure 3-3, Main Menu Flow, : Status of input and output • IN/OUT Status for a list of submenus associated with contacts STATUS the menu. • Timer: 51V Delay Timer, 51N Delay Timer, 46IT Delay Timer, 24IT Delay Timer STATUS To access the menu and begin monitoring, proceed as follows: Relay Temperature • : output, alarm counter • Counters ENTER 1. Press the pushbutton to display the main menu. • Time of Last Power up Press the right arrow pushbutton until 2. • Error Codes STATUS is displayed on the top line of setpoints, calibration, ROM • Checksums: the screen. 3–9

159 M-3425A Instruction Book When a target is triggered, the front panel TARGET Target History 3.6 LED will light, indicating a recent event. If the optional M-3925A Target Module is present, the corresponding function LED will be lit. If the optional The M-3425A Generator Protection Relay includes M-3931 HMI module is available, a series of screens the ability to store the last 32 target conditions in a will be presented, describing the most recent nonvolatile memory. A target is triggered whenever operation. This information is also available remotely an output is operated. A second function attempting ® by using the IPScom Communication Software. to operate an output (which is already operated) will not trigger a new target, since no new output has menu perform To access the TARGET HISTORY been operated or closed. If the second function the following: operation closes a different, unoperated output, a new target will be triggered. A target includes: pushbutton to access 1. Press the ENTER the main menu. • An indication of which function(s) have operated, and timers expired (operated) 2. Press the right arrow pushbutton until TARGET HISTORY is displayed on the • Status information which indentifies any top line of the screen. function that is timing (picked up) • Individual phase element information at To view Target History records proceed as follows: the time of the trigger, if the operating function was a three phase function 1. Ensure that the View Target History • Phase currents at the time of operation Menu is selected to TRGT (upper case). • Neutral current at the time of operation VIEW TARGET HISTORY TRGT clear • Input and output status, and a date/time tag If TRGT is not selected (Upper Case), then use the Right/Left arrow pushbuttons to select TRGT. 2. Press ENTER , the following will be displayed: VIEW TARGET HISTORY 1 Target number Detailed descriptions for each View Target History screen are presented on the following page. 3–10

160 Operation – 3 VIEW TARGET HISTORY This screen gives access to the target history, and also allows TRGT clear the user to clear the target history record from memory. Using up and down buttons, user may select which particular VIEW TARGET HISTORY target to view from the last 24 recorded triggers. 1 Target number This screen gives the date and time tag of the selected target. TARGET 1 01-JAN-2001 12:27:35.125 TARGET 1 This screen displays operated outputs. 08 05 01 This screen displays operated inputs at time of trip. TARGET 1 I3 I1 The following screens display the timed out or “operate” func- TARGET 1 tions. -OPERATE TARGETS- TARGET 1 This screen displays the specific function which timed out and 27#1 PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE triggered the target. TARGET 1 This screen displays the phase information for the displayed PHASE A=X B= C= function at time out. The following screens display the timing on “picked up” func- TARGET 1 tions when the target was recorded. -PICKUP TARGETS- TARGET 1 27#1 PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE This display gives the phase pickup information for the specific TARGET 1 function. PHASE A=X B=X C=X TARGET 1 -CURRENT STATUS- This screen displays the phase current at the time the target TARGET 1 operated. a=0.02 b=0.03 c=0.04 This screen displays the neutral current at the time the target TARGET 1 operated. N=0.50 AMPS 3–11

161 M-3425A Instruction Book This Page Left Intentionally Blank 3–12

162 Remote Operation – 4 4 Remote Operation 1 4.1 Remote Operation ... 4–1 ® Installation and Setup (IPScom ) ... 4–9 4.2 4.3 Operation ... 4–9 4.4 Checkout Status/Metering (Windows) ... 4–23 4.5 Cautions ... 4–28 4–29 ... Keyboard Shortcuts 4.6 ™ 4–30 Communications Software ... ... 4.7 IPSutil 3 Serial Port (RS-485) This chapter is designed for the person or group responsible for the remote operation and setting COM3 located on the rear terminal block of the of the relay using the M-3820D IPScom M-3425A is an RS-485, 2-wire connection. Appendix Communications Software or other means. B, Figure B-3 illustrates a 2-wire RS-485 network. Individual remote addressing also allows for 4.1 Remote Operation communications through a serial multidrop network. Up to 32 relays can be connected using the same The M-3425A Generator Protection Relay provides 2-wire RS-485 communications line. A three serial communication ports and one ethernet port. Optional Ethernet Port NOTE: COM1, COM2 and COM3 can be disabled ■ for security purposes from the The M-3425A when equipped with the optional Communications HMI menu. A Level 2 Ethernet Port can be accessed from a local network. Access Code is required. When the ethernet port is enabled the COM2 serial port (RS-232) is unavailable for communications. Serial Ports (RS-232) Although the ethernet connection speed is faster Two serial interface ports, COM1 and COM2, are than the RS-232 port (can be up to 10 Mbps), the standard 9-pin, RS-232, DTE-configured ports. The ethernet module connects internally through the B front-panel port, COM1, can be used to locally set COM2 serial connection and is therefore limited to and interrogate the relay using a temporary connection speeds up to 9600 bps. connection to a PC or laptop computer. The second Either COM2, COM3 or Ethernet port may be used to RS-232 port, COM2, is provided at the rear of the remotely set and interrogate the relay using a local unit. COM2 is unavailable for communications when area network, modem or other direct serial connection. the optional ethernet port is enabled. The Equipment such as RTU’s, data concentrators, demodulated IRIG-B may still be used via the COM2 modems, or computers can be interfaced for direct, Port when ethernet is enabled. on-line, real time data acquisition and control. The individual addressing capability of IPScom and C Generally, all data available to the operator through the relay allows multiple systems to share a direct the front panel of the relay with the optional M-3931 or modem connection when connected through HMI module is accessible remotely through the BECO COM2 using a communications-line splitter (see 2200, MODBUS, BECO 2200 over TCP/IP, MODBUS Figure 4-1). One such device enables 2 to 6 units to data exchange protocols. or IEC 61850 over TCP/IP share one communications line. Appendix B, Figure B-2 illustrates a setup of RS-232 Fiber Optic network. 4–1

163 M-3425A Instruction Book When fabricating communication cables, every effort The communication protocols are used to fulfill the should be made to keep cabling as short as possible. following communications functions: Low capacitance cable is recommended. The RS-232 • Real-time monitoring of line status standard specifies a maximum cable length of 50 • Interrogation and modification of setpoints feet for RS-232 connections. If over 50 feet of cable length is required, other technologies should be • Downloading of recorded oscillograph data 1 investigated. • Reconfiguration of all relay functions Protocol documents are available directly from Other communication topologies are possible using Beckwith Electric or from our website the M-3425A Generator Protection Relay. An www.beckwithelectric.com. Application Note, “ Serial Communication with Beckwith Electric’s Integrated Protection System Direct Connection Relays ” is available from the factory or from our In order for IPScom to communicate with the relay website at www.beckwithelectric.com. using direct serial connection, a serial “null modem” cable is required, with a 9-pin connector (DB9P) for the system, and an applicable connector for the computer (usually DB9S or DB25S). Pin-outs for a null modem adapter are provided in Appendix B, Communications . An optional 10 foot null modem cable (M-0423) is available from the factory, for direct connection between a PC and the relay’s front panel COM port, or the rear COM2 port. 3 Null Modem Cable for Direct RS-232 Connection A IBM-Compatible PC Master Port Communications-Line Splitter B Address 6 Address 5 Address 4 Address 1 Address 3 Up to six controls Integrated Protection can be used with a C Address 2 System communications-line splitter. Figure 4-1 Multiple Systems Addressing Using Communications-Line Splitter 4–2

164 Remote Operation – 4 : If additional link Communication Access Code Setting Up the M-3425A Generator Protection security is desired, a communication access code Relay for Communication can be programmed. Like the user access codes, if The initial setup of the relay for communication the communication access code is set to 9999 must be completed by utilizing the optional M-3931 (default), communication security is disabled. HMI Module or using direct serial connection. 1 Individual relay communication addresses should For units shipped without the optional HMI Module, be between 1 and 200. The dead sync time, while the communication parameters may be altered by not critical for most communication networks, should first establishing communication using the default be programmed to match the communications parameters and the IPSutil™ program. channels baud rate (see Table 4-1, below). IPSutil is an auxiliary program shipped on the same ® program. It is used exclusively disk with the IPScom for altering communication and setup parameters on emiTcnyS-daeD etaRduaB units shipped without the M-3931 HMI Module. m4 9s 006 Serial Communication Settings The following parameters must be set for proper 008 m8 4s serial communication: 004 m61 2s COM1 Baud Rate : Standard baud rates from 300 to 9600 are available. 002 1s m23 COM2 Baud Rate : Standard baud rates from 300 to 9600 are available. COM2 and COM3 share the Table 4-1 Dead-Sync Time 3 same baud rate (see Section 5.5, Circuit Board Switches and Jumpers). COM Port Security COM1, COM2 and COM3 may be disabled for : This delay establishes COM2 Dead Sync Time security purposes from the unit HMI. A Level 2 the line idle time to re-sync packet communication. Access Code is required. Dead sync time should be programmed based on the channel’s baud rate. Disabling COM Ports : BECO 2200 or MODBUS protocol COM2 Protocol ENTER Press the 1. pushbutton. is supported on COM2. A 2. If Level Access is active, the following is COM2 Parity : None, odd or even parity is available displayed: if MODBUS protocol is selected. ENTER ACCESS CODE 0 COM2 Stop Bits : One or two stop bits available if MODBUS protocol is selected. Input the required Access Code, then a. COM3 Dead Sync Time : This delay establishes . ENTER press the line idle time to re-sync packet communication. Dead sync time should be programmed based on If the proper Access Code has been b. B the channel’s baud rate. entered, the HMI will return: LEVEL #(1,2 or 3) : BECO 2200 or MODBUS protocol COM3 Protocol is supported on COM3. Access Granted! : None, odd or even parity is available COM3 Parity if MODBUS protocol is selected. INIT TRANSFER rmte_lcal INIT COM3 Stop Bits : One or two stop bits available if MODBUS protocol is selected. Go to step 4. c. C : For multidrop networks, Communications Address If Level Access is not active, then the 3. each device must have a unique address. following is displayed: Response Time Delay: The extra time delay may INIT TRANSFER be added while the relay is sending the response. If rmte_lcal INIT set to 0, the response of the relay will be equal to the time required to process the incoming packet (usually 20–80 ms.) 4–3

165 M-3425A Instruction Book ETHERNET Protocols 4. Press the Right arrow pushbutton until the following is displayed: SERCONV :To utilize the BECO2200 protocol over a TCP/IP connection select the SERCONV Communication (BECO2200 TCP/IP) protocol. The IP Address of stat COMM setup the relay must be entered in the IPScom 1 Communication screen. Also, ensure that the COM2 protocol is selected to BECO2200 and the baud 5. Press ENTER, the following will be rate is set to 9600 bps. displayed: COM1 SETUP The Standard Port Number for the BECO2200 over COM1 com2 com3 com_adr TCP/IP protocol is 8800. The master device may require the entry of the Standard Port Number. 6. Press and the following is ENTER : To utilize the MODBUS protocol over a MODBUS displayed: TCP/IP connection select the MODBUS (MODBUS over TCP/IP) protocol. The IP Address of the relay PORT ACCESS ® must be entered in the IPScom Communication enable DISABLE screen. Also, ensure that the COM2 protocol is selected to MODBUS, baud rate is set to 9600 bps, 1 stop bit and no parity selected. 7. Press the Left or Right Arrow pushbutton as necessary to enable or disable the COM The Standard Port Number for the MODBUS over port. TCP/IP protocol is 502. The master device may Press 8. ENTER and the following is require the entry of the Standard Port Number. displayed: 3 IEC61850 : When the Ethernet option is purchased COM1 BAUD RATE with the IEC61850 protocol, no other protocol may baud_4800 BAUD_9600 be selected. Ethernet Port Setup 9. Repeat Steps 5 through 8 as necessary for Enabling the ethernet port and selecting the required additional COM Ports. support settings can be accomplished using either the HMI or IPSutil™. Both methods are presented below. Ethernet Communication Settings A The RJ45 ethernet port can be enabled utilizing HMI Ethernet Port Setup either IPSutil™ from the Ethernet Settings menu or Ensure that the Communication Menu is 1. from the HMI Communication menu. When the selected to COMM (upper case). ethernet port is enabled the COM2 Serial Port is not available for communications. The demodulated COMMUNICATION IRIG-B may still be used via the COM2 Port when I targets osc_rec COMM J ethernet is enabled. If COMM is not selected (Upper Case), The following parameters must be set for proper then use the Right/Left arrow pushbuttons ethernet communication: to select COMM. B Press , the following will be 2. ENTER DHCP Protocol displayed: : If the network server supports the DHCP ENABLE COM1 SETUP protocol the network server will assign the IP J COM1 com2 com3 com_adr Address, Net Mask and Gateway Address. DISABLE : If the network server does not support Use the Right arrow pushbutton to select 3. the DHCP protocol or the user chooses to manually ETH (Upper Case). input ethernet settings, then obtain the IP Address, C ETHERNET SETUP Net Mask and Gateway address from the Network I access ETH eth_ip Administrator and enter the settings. 4–4

166 Remote Operation – 4 ENTER Press 4. , the following will be 13. EXIT , the ethernet board will Press displayed: reconfigure and the following will be displayed: ETHERNET CONFIGURING ETH... DISABLE enable 1 Use the Right arrow pushbutton to select 5. ENTER , ENABLE (Upper Case), then press If the ethernet board successfully obtains the following will be displayed: an IP Address the following will be displayed for approximately 2 seconds: TCP/IP SETTINGS ETHERNET IP ADDRESS TCP prot XX.XX.XX.XX Ensure that TCP is selected (Upper Case). 6. The ethernet board is now configured for If TCP is not selected (Upper Case), then use and may be accessed through a use the Right/Left arrow pushbuttons to network. select TCP. Then the display will return to the following: , the following will be Press ENTER 7. displayed: ETHERNET SETUP DHCP PROTOCOL access ETH eth_ip I DISABLE enable If the ethernet board fails to obtain an IP Address within 15 seconds the following 8. If the network does not support the DHCP 3 will be displayed (for approximately protocol, then go to Manual Configuration 2 seconds): of Ethernet Board (following page) to manually configure the ethernet board. CONFIGURING ETH... 9. If the DHCP Protocol is to be enabled, then ETH BOARD ERROR use the Right/Left arrow pushbutton to select ENABLE (Upper Case), then press ENTER , Contact the Network Administrator to the following will be displayed: determine the cause of the configuration failure. TCP/IP SETTINGS A Manual Configuration of Ethernet Board TCP prot Ensure that DISABLE is selected (Upper 1. Ensure that PROT is selected (Upper Case). 10. Case) for DHCP Protocol. If PROT is not selected (Upper Case), then If DISABLE is not selected (Upper Case), use the Right arrow pushbutton to select then use the Left arrow pushbutton to select PROT. DISABLE. 11. , depending on the Ethernet ENTER Press , the following will be 2. ENTER Press board that is installed one of the following displayed: screens will be displayed: B IP ADDRESS SELECT PROTOCOL XX.XX.XX.XX modbus serconv 3. Enter the desired IP Address, then press SELECT PROTOCOL , the following will be displayed: ENTER IEC 61850 NET MASK XX.XX.XX.XX Use the Right/Left arrow pushbuttons to 12. select the desired protocol (Upper Case), Enter the desired Net Mask, then press 4. C ENTER then press , the following will be ENTER , the following will be displayed: displayed: GATEWAY TCP/IP SETTINGS XX.XX.XX.XX tcp PROT 4–5

167 M-3425A Instruction Book Enter the desired Gateway, then press 5. 5. Select the desired protocol. , the following will be displayed: ENTER Save Select 6. , IPSutil will respond with the Advance Setup dialog box stating “ It will TCP/IP SETTINGS take about 15 seconds to reset Ethernet tcp prot board to allow the menu of the unit to 1 reflect the change .” Ensure that PROT is selected (Upper Case). 6. 7. , IPSutil will configure the ethernet Select OK If PROT is not selected (Upper Case), then board, then close the Ethernet Settings use the Right arrow pushbutton to select screen. The ethernet board is now PROT. configured for use and may be accessed 7. ENTER Press , depending on the Ethernet through a network. board that is installed one of the following screens will be displayed: ™ IPSutil Ethernet Port Setup without DHCP SELECT PROTOCOL 1. Connect the appropriate RS232 cable from modbus serconv the PC hosting IPSutil to the target relay. 2. Launch IPSutil, then select Ethernet from SELECT PROTOCOL the menu bar. IPSutil will display the Ethernet IEC 61850 Settings screen Figure 4-43. Use the Right/Left arrow pushbuttons to 8. 3. From the Ethernet Settings screen select select the desired protocol (Upper Case), Ethernet Enable . then press ENTER , the following will be . 4. Select DHCP Protocol Disable displayed: 3 Enter values for IP Address, Net Mask and 5. TCP/IP SETTINGS Gateway. tcp PROT Select the desired protocol. 6. EXIT , the ethernet board will 9. Press 7. Select Save , IPSutil will respond with the reconfigure and the following will be It will Advance Setup dialog box stating “ displayed: take about 15 seconds to reset Ethernet board to allow the menu of the unit to CONFIGURING ETH... .” reflect the change A 8. OK , IPSutil will configure the ethernet Select If the ethernet board is successfully board, then close the Ethernet Settings configured, then the entered IP Address screen. The ethernet board is now will be displayed for approximately configured for use and may be accessed 2 seconds: through a network. ETHERNET IP ADDRESS Installing the Modems XX.XX.XX.XX Using IPScom to interrogate, set or monitor the B The ethernet board is now configured for relay using a modem requires both a remote modem use and may be accessed through a connected at the relay location and a local modem network. connected to the computer with IPScom installed. In order to use IPScom to communicate with the TM IPSutil Ethernet Port Setup with DHCP relay using a modem, the following must be provided with the unit: 1. Connect the appropriate RS232 cable from the PC hosting IPSutil to the target relay. • An external modem (1200 baud or higher), capable of understanding standard AT Ethernet 2. Launch IPSutil, then select from commands. C the menu bar. IPSutil will display the Ethernet Settings screen Figure 4-43. • Serial modem cable with 9-pin connector for the unit and the applicable connector From the Ethernet Settings screen select 3. for the modem. . Enable Ethernet NOTE Q : Any compatible modem may be used; . 4. Select DHCP Protocol Enable however, the unit only communicates at 1200 to 9600 baud. 4–6

168 Remote Operation – 4 QQ NOTE: Q The relay does not issue or understand Similarly, the computer running IPScom must also QQ any modem commands. It will not adjust have access to an internal or external compatible the baud rate and should be considered modem. a “dumb” peripheral. It communicates The local modem can be initialized, using IPScom, with 1 start, 8 data, and 1 stop bit. by connecting the modem to the computer, and 1 a. Connect the unit to an external modem COMM selecting the menu in IPScom. Select by attaching a standard RS-232 modem , enter the required information, and MODEM cable to the appropriate serial INITIALIZE finally select from the expanded communications port on both the unit Communications dialog box. The following steps and the modem. outline the initialized modem setup procedure. b. Connect the modem to the telephone 1. Connecting the modem to the computer: line and power up. If the computer has an external modem, a. The modem attached to the unit must have the use a standard straight-through RS-232 following AT command configuration: modem cable to connect the computer No Echo E0 and modem (M-3933). If the computer has an internal modem, refer to the Don’t return result code Q1 modem’s instruction book to determine On to OFF DTR, hang-up and reset &D3 which communications port should be &S0 DSR always on selected. DCD ON when detected &C1 The modem must be attached to b. (if external) or assigned to (if internal) S0=2 Ans wer on second ring the same serial port as assigned in The following commands may also be required at IPScom. While IPScom can use any of 3 the modem: the four serial ports (COM1 through COM4), most computers support only Constant DTE to DCE &Q6 COM1 and COM2. N0 Answer only at specified speed Connect the modem to the telephone c. Disable serial data rate adjust W line and power up. Bi-directional RTS/CTS relay \Q3 Connecting the Modem to the Relay: 2. Fixed serial port rate &B1 Setup of the modem attached to the relay S37 Desired line connection speed may be slightly complicated. It involves A programming the parameters (using the AT There are some variations in the AT commands command set), and storing this profile in supported by modem manufacturers. Refer to the the modem’s nonvolatile memory. hardware user documentation for a list of supported AT commands and direction on issuing these After programming, the modem will power commands. up in the proper state for communicating with the relay. Programming may be accomplished by using “Hyperterminal” or other terminal software. Refer to your modem manual for further information. B C 4–7

169 M-3425A Instruction Book Unit Address Relay Type 1 User Logo Lines Unit Identifier 3 A B ® Figure 4-2 IPScom Menu Selections : Greyed-out menu items are for future release, and are not currently available. NOTE Q C 4–8

170 Remote Operation – 4 ™ Installing IPSutil Installation and Setup (IPScom) 4.2 IPSutil is utility software used to program system-level parameters for units shipped without ® IPScom runs with the Microsoft Windows 95 the M-3931 HMI Module. The IPSutil.exe file is ® only supports operating system or later. IPScom automatically installed in the Becoware folder, along 1 communication using the BECO 2200 protocol. with the IPScom files, and does not require separate installation. IPScom is available on CD-ROM, or it may be downloaded from our website at www.beckwithelectric.com 4.3 Operation The M-3820D IPScom Communications Software package is not copy-protected and can be copied to Activating Communications a hard disk. For more information on your specific After the relay has been set up, the modems rights and responsibilities, see the licensing initialized, and IPScom installed, communication agreement enclosed with your software or contact is activated as follows: Beckwith Electric. Choose the IPScom icon from the 1. Becoware folder. Hardware Requirements IPScom will run on any IBM PC-compatible computer The IPScom splash screen is displayed 2. that provides at least the following: briefly, providing the software version number and copyright information. This • 8 MB of RAM information is also available by choosing • Microsoft Windows 95 or later Help the About ... command from the menu. • CD-ROM drive 3 3. Choose the COMM menu selection. • one serial (RS-232) communication port Complete the appropriate information on the window for the relay to be addressed. • pointing device (mouse) If communication is through a modem, a. choose the command button Modem Installing IPScom to expand the communications dialog Insert software CD-ROM into your drive. 1. box. Choose the desired relay location An Auto-Install program will establish a button. This action and choose Dial program folder (Becoware) and subdirectory establishes contact and automatically A (IPScom). After installation, the IPScom opens communication to the relay. program item icon (see Figure 4-3) is If computer is connected through the b. located in Becoware. The default location Open COM front port, choose the for the application files is on drive C:, button. This action establishes in the new subdirectory “IPScom” communications. (C:\Becoware\Ipscom). 4. Enter any valid IPScom command(s) as If the Auto-Install program does not launch 2. desired. when the CD-ROM is inserted into the drive To end communication when 5. then proceed as follows: B communicating by modem, choose the a. Select Run from the Start Menu. Hang Up command button from the In the Run dialog box, locate the b. expanded Communication dialog box. To installation file contained on the close the communication channel when installation disk Close COM connected locally, choose the (sfi_m3425Acom_V______.exe). command button. Select Run to start the installation c. Overview process. ® is run, a menu and status bar is When IPScom C displayed, as shown in Figure 4-2. This section describes each IPScom menu selection and explains each IPScom command in the same order as they are displayed in the software program. For Figure 4-3 IPScom Program Icon detailed information regarding each dialog box field (function), refer to Chapter 2 , Application . 4–9

171 M-3425A Instruction Book Save As Save and The ... commands allow re- When starting IPScom, the initial menu choices are saving a file or renaming a file, respectively. The File menu or the Comm menu. The choice the command allows opening a previously created Open specifies whether the operator desires to write to a data file. With an opened data file, use the Relay... data file or to communicate directly with the relay. Setup... menu items to access the setpoint File Menu windows. 1 If communication can be established with a relay, it Read Data From Relay is always safer to use the command to update the PC’s data file with the relay data. This file now contains the proper system type information, eliminating the need to set the information manually. and Print The commands allow user Printer Setup to select printer options and print out all setpoint data from the data file or directly from the relay, if a The File menu enables the user to create a new relay is communicating with the PC. data file, open a previously created data file, close, The Exit command quits the IPScom program. print, and save the file. The IPScom program can also be exited through the File menu. Comm Menu Since IPScom can be used with several Beckwith protection systems in addition to the M-3425A File Window Help Relay Comm Generator Protection Relay, the format and contents of a file must be established depending on which 3 The Communication dialog box (see Figure 4-5) protective system is being addressed. When not allows setup of the IPScom communication data to connected to one of the protection systems, using coordinate with the relay and by choosing the New command, a new file is established with the button, to establish contact for remote Modem the System Type dialog box (see Figure 4-4). locations. When communicating by way of a fiber Choices for Unit Type in the System Type Screen optic loop network, echo cancelling is available by include M-3425, M-3425A, M-3425A(SOE) and checking the Echo Cancel box. This command M-3425A Expanded I/O. The selected Unit Type masks the sender’s returned echo. ensures that the “New” file is consistant with the protective system firmware version (Table 4-2). If the modem was not used to establish A communication (direct connection), press the Open Choosing the command button allows the new OK Save As Save data file to be opened. Selecting or COM button to start. If the relay has a default commands allows the file to be named and saved. communication access code of 9999, a message window will be displayed showing Access Level 3 QQ NOTE Q NEW : By choosing the command, unit QQ was granted. Otherwise, another dialog box will and setpoint configuration values are appear to prompt the user to enter the access code based on factory settings specified for in order to establish the communication. Close the profiled protection system. discontinues communication. COM B Firmware Version Protective System Unit Type XXX.XX.XX D-0070 M-3425 M-3425A D-0114 XXX.XX.XX D-0150 XXX.XX.XX M-3425A (SOE) M-3425A Expanded I/O D-0150 XXX.XX.XX Figure 4-4 System Type Dialog Box Table 4-2 Protective System Path: File menu / New command Firmware Association C COMMAND BUTTONS Allows the selected Unit Type File to be OK opened. Returns you to the IPScom main screen; Cancel any changes to the displayed information is lost. 4–10

172 Remote Operation – 4 Displays the Add/Edit dialog box, Edit allowing you to review and change the user lines (unit identifier), phone number, and communication address of a selected entry. Deletes a selected entry. Delete 1 Save Saves any changes to the displayed information Allows the user to send special setup or Initialize other AT commands directly to the modem. Dials the entry selected from the Dial directory. Ends modem communication, allowing Hang Up the user to dial again. Relay Menu 3 Figure 4-5 Communication Dialog Box Path: Comm menu COMMAND BUTTONS Initiates contact with the protective Open COM system, either by direct serial or modem communication. Close COM Breaks communication with the menu provides access to the windows Relay The A protective system, for both direct serial used to set, monitor, or interrogate the relay. Six or modem communication. Target submenus are provided: Monitor , Setup , , and Profile , Oscillograph Sequence of Events Opens the ethernet applicable TCP_IP and Write File to Relay as well as two commands, , communication screen selections to allow user to enter a TCP_IP address (if . Read Data From Relay necessary), and opening and closing communication with the target relay. Displays the expanded Communication Modem dialog box. B Cancel Returns you to the IPScom main window; any changes to the displayed information are lost. Open TCP_IP Initiates contact with the protective system by ethernet connection. Close TCP_IP Closes Ethernet connection. When selected, following connection to Bring Up submenu provides three commands: Setup The Terminal the target modem, allows the user to . Set Date/Time , and Setup System , Setpoints Window send commands to the modem. C The Setup System command displays the Setup After Dialing System dialog box (Figure 4-6) allowing the input of the pertinent information regarding the system on Add Displays the Add/Edit dialog box, which the protective relay is applied (see Section allowing you to type a protective Configuration , Relay System Setup). 2.1, system’s unit identifier, phone number, and communication address. 4–11

173 M-3425A Instruction Book 1 3 QQ NOTE: Q Pulse/Latched Relay Outputs should be selected in 2 steps. QQ A 1. Deselect Latched/Pulsed Relay Outputs and Save. 2. Select Pulse/Latched Outputs and Save Setup System Dialog Box Figure 4-6 Path: Relay menu / Setup submenu / Setup System command COMMAND BUTTONS B Input Active When the unit is equipped with expanded I/O, this command opens the Expanded Input Active State screen (Figure 4-7), to allow the selection of Expanded Inputs 7 through 14. State Expanded When the unit is equipped with expanded I/O, this command opens the Pulse/Latch Pulse/Latch Relay screen (Figures 4-8 and 4-9) to allow the selection of expanded outputs 9 through 23. Expanded Outputs Save When connected to a protection system, sends the currently displayed information to the unit. Otherwise, saves the currently displayed information. C ® Returns you to the IPScom Cancel main window; any changes to the displayed information are lost. QQ Q NOTE: Checking the inputs for the Active Input Open parameter designates the “operated” state established by QQ an rather than a closing external contact. opening 4–12

174 Remote Operation – 4 1 Figure 4-7 Expanded Input Active State 3 Figure 4-8 Pulse Relay Expanded Output Screen A B C Figure 4-9 Latch Relay Expanded Output Screen 4–13

175 M-3425A Instruction Book feature hotspots which allows the user to jump from The Setpoints command displays the Relay a scrolling dialog box to an individual relay function Setpoints dialog box (see Figure 4-10) from which dialog box and return to the scrolling dialog box the individual relay function dialog boxes can be again. All available parameters can be reviewed or accessed. Choosing a Relay function button will changed when jumping to a relay configuration dialog display the corresponding function dialog box (see box from either scrolling dialog box. 1 Figure 4-11 for example). Figure 4-11 Typical Setpoint Dialog Box Path: Relay menu / Setup submenu / Setpoints window/ 46 command button OR 46 jump hotspot within All Setpoints Table or Configure dialog box 3 COMMAND BUTTONS When connected to a protection system, Save sends the currently displayed information to the unit. Otherwise, saves the currently displayed information and Figure 4-10 Relay Setpoints Dialog Box returns you to the Relay Setpoints, All Setpoints Table, or Configure dialog Path: Relay menu / Setup submenu / Setpoints window box. A Cancel Returns the user to the Relay Setpoints, COMMAND BUTTONS All Setpoints Table, or Configure dialog Functions Opens the All Setpoints Table dialog box box; any changes to the displayed for the specified range of functions. information are lost. Opens the Configure dialog box. Configure When the unit is equipped with expanded Expanded I/O, this selection allows the user to select I/O’s Exit Saves the currently displayed expanded outputs 9–23 and expanded information and returns you to the ® inputs 7–14. main window. IPScom The Relay Setpoints dialog box gives access to two B additional dialog boxes: All Setpoints Table and Configure. Choosing either of the Functions command buttons 59–TC ) displays an All Setpoints (either or 21–51V Table dialog box for the specified range of setpoints (see Fig. 4-13). This dialog box contains a list of settings for each relay within a single window to allow scrolling through all relay setpoint configuration Configure command button values. Choosing the C displays the Configure dialog box (see Fig. 4-14), which contains a chart of programmed input and output contacts, in order to allow scrolling through Figure 4-12 Expanded I/O Dialog Box all relay output and blocking input configurations. Both dialog boxes (All Setpoint Table and Configure), 4–14

176 Remote Operation – 4 1 3 A B Figure 4-13 All Setpoints Table Dialog Box (partial) Path: Relay menu / Setup submenu / Setpoints window/ Display All command button JUMP HOTSPOTS C This window provides you with jump hotspots, identified by the hand icon, that take you to each relay dialog box and the Setup Relay dialog box. Exiting any of these dialog boxes will return you to the All Setpoints Table dialog box. CONTROL MENU Close Returns you to the Relay Setpoints dialog box. Move Allows you to reposition the dialog box. 4–15

177 M-3425A Instruction Book 1 3 A B Figure 4-14 Configure Dialog Box (partial) Path: Relay menu / Setup submenu / Setpoints window/ Configure command button JUMP HOTSPOTS This window provides you with jump hotspots, identified by the hand icon, that take you to each relay dialog box. Exiting any of these dialog boxes will return you to the Configure dialog box. C CONTROL MENU Close Returns you to the Relay Setpoints dialog box. Move Allows you to reposition the dialog box. 4–16

178 Remote Operation – 4 1 3 A Figure 4-15 Configure Dialog Partial (Shown with Expanded Input/Outputs) Relay menu / Setup submenu / Setpoints window/ Configure command button Path: JUMP HOTSPOTS This window provides you with jump hotspots, identified by the hand icon, that take you to each relay dialog box. Exiting any of these dialog boxes will return you to the Configure dialog box. B CONTROL MENU Close Returns you to the Relay Setpoints dialog box. Move Allows you to reposition the dialog box. C 4–17

179 M-3425A Instruction Book Monitor Set Date/Time command (see Figure 4-16) allows submenu provides access for reviewing The The the present status of the relay's measured and the system date and time to be set, or system clock calculated values, other real-time parameters and to be stopped. This dialog box also displays an LED mimic to identify when the Time Sync is in use conditions as well as examining real-time and historical demand metering information (see Section 4.4, (preventing date/time from being changed by user). 1 Checkout Status/Metering). A cascading menu appears, providing several command options as shown below. : Displayed parameters in status screens Q NOTE will vary depending on unit configuration. Figure 4-16 Unit Date/Time Dialog Box : Relay menu/ Setup submenu/ Set Date/Time Command Path There is a blue Time Sync LED mimic in this dialog 3 box (the LED is displayed as different shading on a monochrome monitor). When this LED is blue, the The Targets submenu provides three command relay is synchronized with the IRIG-B signal and the Display options: , Reset LED . Clear History , and Time field is grayed out, indicating that this field command displays the Target Dialog. Display The can’t be changed. But the Date field can be changed This dialog box (see Figure 4-17) provides detailed (by editing and pressing Save ). data on target events, including time, date, function status, phase current values, and IN/OUT contact When the LED is blue, the relay is not not status at the time of trip. Individually recorded events time-synchronized and therefore, both the Date and A may be selected within the dialog box and saved into Time fields can be changed. a text file, or be printed out with optional added The time field in the dialog box is not updated is similar to pushing the Reset LED comments. The continuously. The time at which the dialog box was Target Reset button on the relay’s front panel, opened is the time that is displayed and remains as resetting current target(s) displayed on the relay. such. This is true whether the relay is synchronized This command does not reset any target history. with the IRIG-B signal or not. COMMAND BUTTONS B Stop Clock This toggles between start/stop, the relay clock. ‘Stop’ pauses, ‘Start’ resumes. Save Saves Time and Date settings to the relay when applicable. ® main window. Returns you to the IPScom Cancel Any changes to the displayed information is lost. C The Clear History command clears all stored target data. 4–18

180 Remote Operation – 4 1 Figure 4-17 Target Dialog Box Path: Relay menu / Targets submenu / Display window Time is displayed in milliseconds. 3 COMMAND BUTTONS Opens comment dialog box for annotation. Comment Print Prints out selected target information, with comment. Save Saves selected target information, with comment, as a text file. Close Exits the currently displayed dialog box. Sequence of Events the pararmeters captured at the time of the View A event and the event recorder. Clear The Sequence of Events function provides a time stamped history of the Pickup (PU), Trip (TR) or menu item displays the Event Trigger The Setup Dropout (DR) for each element, input or output Setup screen Figure 4-18. Protective function Pickup, selected in the Event Trigger Setup screen. Trip, Dropout and/or Output/Input Pickup or Dropout are selected to trigger the Sequence of Events During each event the voltage, current, impedance, Recorder. frequency, input and output status and Volts/Hz are recorded. Up to 512 events are logged before the command downloads the events from Retrieve The buffer begins to write over the oldest event. If multiple the currently connected relay (events must be events occur, then the log entries are recorded with B retrieved from the relay and stored in a file in order to one millisecond resolution within each event. view them.) View permits the user to see a detailed list of past events and their corresponding captured parameters (real power, reactive power, differential current, delta voltage, delta frequency, phase angle, 59D ratio, V brush (64B), field insulation resistance (64F), Vstator (20 Hz), and Istator (20 Hz) which are displayed in the Event Log Viewer screen Figure 4-19. C The event log viewer screen includes the commands . Print Detail , and Summary Print , Close , Open Open opens a saved sequence of events file. Close prints an event closes the print file. Print Summary submenu allows the user Sequence of Events The l prints the detailed event Print Detai summary, and Setup the events that trigger the Sequence of to deletes event history from the control. Clear report. events from the relay, Retrieve Events recorder, 4–19

181 M-3425A Instruction Book : When in “File Mode,” selecting “Send” will result in a warning message stating, “To send settings, NOTE Q IPScom needs to be connected to relay.” Elements trigger on Trip, Drop Out and Pickup 1 3 I/O triggers on Pickup, Dropout Figure 4-18 Trigger Events Screen with Expanded I/O Impendance, Sync Information Pickup, Dropout, Trip Event #, Date, Time A B Voltages, Currents and I/O Status C Event Log Viewer Figure 4-19 4–20

182 Remote Operation – 4 1 Figure 4-20 Event Download Screen Retrieve Oscillograph Figure 4-22 Record Dialog Screen The Oscillograph submenu allows storing data on 3 selected parameters for review and plotting at a Setup command allows the user to later time. The Profile submenu provides three command The set the number of partitions and triggering and Switching Method, Active Profile, options: designations to be made (see Table 3-1, Recorder Copy Profile. Retrieve command downloads and Partitions). The stores collected data to a file; Trigger allows the command allows selection of Switching Method manual triggering of the recorder; Clear erases the either Manual or Input contact. Active Profile allows ® existing records. Run the optional M-3801D IPSplot copies user to designate active profile. Copy Profile PLUS Oscillograph Analysis Software program to active profile to one of four profiles (user should A view the downloaded oscillograph files. allow approximately 2 minutes for copying.) Oscillograph records are not retained ▲ CAUTION: CAUTION ▲ : Switching the active profile when the if power to the relay is interrupted. relay is on-line may cause unexpected operation if the wrong profile is selected. : Oscillograph Post Trigger Delay is set Q NOTE to 5% in “File Mode”. B NOTE : When in “File Mode” selecting OK to Q change Profile Switching Method will result in a warning message, “To change C Profile Switching Method, IPScom needs Q NOTE : When in “File Mode,” selecting “Send” to be connected to relay”. will result in a warning message stating, Figure 4-23 Profile Switching Method Dialog “To send settings, IPScom needs to be connected to relay.” : During Profile Switching, relay operation Q NOTE Figure 4-21 Setup Oscillograph Recorder is disabled for approximately 1 second. 4–21

183 M-3425A Instruction Book Window Menu/Help Menu 1 The Window menu enables the positioning and ® arrangement of all IPScom windows so that there is better access to available functions. This feature allows the display of several windows at the same time. Clicking on an inactive window activates that QQ Q : When in “File Mode” selecting OK to select NOTE QQ window. the Active Profile will result in a warning message, “To select the Active Profile, Currently in revision, the Help menu will enable the IPScom needs to be connected to Relay”. user to look up information about any IPScom menus Help or commands. Though displaying (greyed-out) Figure 4-24 Select Active Profile commands, this menu item is currently unavailable. 3 menu provides three commands. The The Help Contents command initiates a link to a PDF (Portable Document File) version of this instruction book for ® QQ selecting OK to copy File Mode” Q : When in “ NOTE QQ reader is required easy reference. An Adobe Acrobat the Active Profile will result in a warning to view this document. message, “To copy the Active Profile, The M-3425A Instruction Book has been indexed to A IPScom needs to be connected to Relay”. its table of contents. By selecting the “Navigator Figure 4-25 Copy Active Profile pane’ in Adobe Acrobat Reader, the user can directly command displays About access selected topics. The The Write File To Relay command is used to write Profile IPScom version and development information. Read Data From Relay the data to the relay. The Info displays user infromation for input and editing. command is used to retrieve the data from the relay to the computer for display. B C About IPScom Dialog Box Figure 4-26 4–22

184 Remote Operation – 4 Checkout Status/Metering 4.4 1 3 Figure 4-27 Primary Status Dialog Box Path : Relay menu/ Monitor submenu/ Primary Status window These are calculated values based on the VT and CT inputs. A B C Figure 4-28 Secondary Status Dialog Box Path: Relay menu/ Monitor submenu/ Secondary Status window 4–23

185 M-3425A Instruction Book 1 3 Figure 4-29 Accumulator Status Screen A B Figure 4-30 Phase Distance Dialog Box Relay menu / Monitor submenu / Phase Distance window Path: C Phase Distance window shows a graphic representation of phase distance settings. Move the scope window to the right CONTROL BUTTONS Zoom In Move up the scope window Zoom Out Move down the scope window Refresh Scope Move the scope window to the left 4–24

186 Remote Operation – 4 1 Loss of Field Dialog Box Figure 4-31 Relay menu / Monitor submenu / Loss of Field window Path: Loss-of-Field window shows a graphic representation of loss-of-field settings, and also displays the positive sequence impedance. Move the scope window to the right CONTROL BUTTONS Zoom In Move up the scope window 3 Zoom Out Move down the scope window Refresh Scope Move the scope window to the left A B Figure 4-32 Out-of-Step Dialog Screen Path: Relay menu / Monitor submenu / Out-of-Step window CONTROL BUTTONS C Move the scope window to the right Move up the scope window Zoom In Move down the scope window Zoom Out Move the scope window to the left Refresh Scope 4–25

187 M-3425A Instruction Book 1 Figure 4-33 Phasor Dialog Box Relay menu / Monitor submenu / Phasor Diagram window Path: 3 CONTROL BUTTONS Toggle & display voltage channel information p Voltage p Currents (A) Toggle & display current channel information. p Toggle & update information Freeze A B C Figure 4-34 Sync Scope Screen 4–26

188 Remote Operation – 4 1 3 A Function Status Screen Figure 4-35 Path: Relay menu / Monitor submenu / Function Status window Function Status window shows the status of various functions, with “T” representing the function which has tripped, and “P” representing the function which has picked up and is timing. B C 4–27

189 M-3425A Instruction Book 4.5 Cautions ® Echo Cancel System and IPScom Compatibility check box, under the Comm Echo Cancel The Every attempt has been made to maintain 1 menu, should only be used when several relays are compatibility with previous software versions. In connected using a fiber optic loop network. some cases (most notably with older protection Otherwise, echo cancel must not be selected or systems), compatibility cannot be maintained. If communication will be prevented. there is any question about compatibility, contact the factory. Serial Port Connections System Priority If the serial port is connected to something other than a modem, and an IPScom modem command System conflicts will not occur, as local commands is executed, the results are unpredictable. In some initiated from the front panel receive priority recognition. cases, the computer may have to be reset. When the unit is in local mode, communication using the serial ports is suspended. IPScom displays an error message to indicate this fact. Oscillograph records are not retained ▲ CAUTION: if power to the relay is interrupted. Time and Date Stamping Time and date stamping of events is only as useful as the validity of the unit’s internal clock. Under the menu, the Relay command allows Set Date/TIme 3 you to manually set the unit’s clock. A B C 4–28

190 Remote Operation – 4 4.6 Keyboard Shortcuts 1 Keyboard Shortcuts SYSTEM KEYS ® ® These keys can be used within Microsoft Windows and IPScom . switch between applications. Alt-Tab To Ctrl-Esc To open Task List dialog box. Opens Start Menu (Win 95/98). switch between windows within an application. Ctrl-Tab To Arrow Keys To select an application or group icon. First Character of Name To select application or group icon. open selected group or run selected application. Enter To MENU KEYS These keys enable you to select menus and choose commands. 3 To select or cancel selection of the Setup menu on the menu bar. Alt or F10 To move between menus. Left Arrow, Right Arrow Up Arrow, Down Arrow To move between commands. To choose the menu or command. The underlined character matches A character key the one you type. Enter To choose the selected menu name or command. A Esc To cancel the selected menu name, or to close the open menu. DIALOG BOX KEYS These keys are useful when working in a dialog box. Alt-a character key To move to the option or group whose underlined letter or number matches the one you type. Arrow Keys To move highlighted selections within list boxes. B Alt-Down Arrow To open a list. Spacebar To select an item or cancel a selection in a list. Also to select or clear a check box. Enter To carry out a command. To close a dialog box without completing the command. Esc or Alt-F4 C Microsoft Windows Keyboard Shortcuts Table 4-3 4–29

191 M-3425A Instruction Book 4.7 IPSutil™ Communications Software 1 3 A B Figure 4-36 IPSutil Main Menu Flow Installation and Setup M-3890 IPSutil ® IPSutil runs with the Microsoft The M-3890 IPSutil Communication software package Windows 95 operating system or above. Hardware requirements are the provides communication with the Beckwith Integrated ® ® . (IPS) for setting up the relays. same as those stated for IPScom Protection System Its main purpose is to aid in setting up IPS relays C that are ordered without the optional front panel HMI interface. 4–30

192 Remote Operation – 4 Installation The following message window will be displayed showing COM opened. Now, the title bar will display An installation utility has been provided as a part of ® the relay model and the software version. IPScom and IPSutil™ programs. After installation, IPSutil can be run from the hard drive by choosing IPSUTIL.EXE. 1 System Setup Connect a null modem cable from COM1 of the relay to the PC serial port. IPSutil supports COM1 port direct connection only. Modem connection is not supported. IPSutil is not supported through submenu allows you to quit IPSutil. If the Exit The COM2 or COM3 ports of the relay. relay was connected, this submenu disconnects the relay. When the relay was connected, if you Overview have made any changes for some parameters (for IPSutil helps in setting up IPS relays which were example, baud rate, phase rotation) the following ordered without the optional front panel HMI interface. message window appears. Units delivered without HMI’s are shipped with a set of factory default settings for various parameters that the end user may wish to change. While the utility program is directed to users that do not have HMI, users of HMI-provided relays can also use IPSutil to set various parameters. When IPSutil is started, a warning window appears: Figure 4-38 IPSutility Reset Relay Message 3 Relay Comm Command When command is selected, the Relay Comm Relay Comm Port Settings dialog box appears (See Figure 4-42). It allows you to set the relay Figure 4-37 Warning Message communication ports COM1 or COM2/COM3 baud rate. For COM2/COM3, it allows you to set the After the user accepts the warning, the user can protocol and dead synch time. Additionally, for access the IPSutil main menu. The following sections COM2 and COM3, if you select MODBUS protocol, A describe each IPSutil menu items. the dialog box allows you to enable the parity option. Comm Menu If COM1 baud rate is changed and the NOTE: Q relay is reset, the new baud rate must be used to communicate with COM1 Ethernet Command When the Ethernet command is selected, the The Comm menu allows the user to make B Ethernet Settings dialog box appears (see Figure connections to the relay. This is the first command 4-43.) This command allows the user to enable or the user must use to access the unit. After the user disable the ethernet connection and enable/set selects the submenu item, the Connect protocols. Communications dialog box appears (See Figure 4-41). Clock Command • Select the correct PC communication port When the Clock command is selected, the where the null modem cable is connected “Set Unit Date/Time” dialog box appears (See for the relay. Figure 4-44). Date and Time can be changed and C • Select the baud rate of the relay. Factory sent to the relay. This dialog box allows you to start default is 9600 baud. or stop the clock in the relay. • Select the access code resident in the relay. Factory default is 9999. • Select “Open com”. 4–31

193 M-3425A Instruction Book Security Menu 1 Security The Menu allows you to set the communication access code and the level access codes for the relay. The Change Comm Access Code allows you to assign new communication access code to the relay. The range of the access code is 1 to 9999. Note that the access code 9999 is a factory default (See Figure 4-45). Q NOTE: Setting the access code to 9999 disables security. The Change User Access Code allows you to assign three different levels of access code for the relay functions accessibility. The range of the level Figure 4-39 Monitor Status Screen access code is 1 to 9999 (See Figure 4-46). 3 ▲▲ : This submenu allows you to change ▲ CAUTION ▲▲ The Calibration command provides the user with the relay level access codes. instructions to recalibrate Nominal Frequency, Third Harmonic, (64F) Field Ground, and (64S) Stator Protection. Miscellaneous Menu A menu allows you to set and Miscellaneous The monitor some of the relay parameters. The Setup command allows you to change the users Logo information, test outputs, assign Calibration Dialog Figure 4-40 communication address and user control number, LED flash mode in the relay. OK phase rotation, Note that the highest number used for the COMMAND BUTTONS B communication address is 255 and the highest Sends the currently displayed Calibrate control number allowed is 9999 (See Figure 4-47). information to the relay. command allows you to monitor Monitor Status The Cancel Returns you to the IPSutil main window. and clear the error code counters, monitor the check sums, and to view inputs test status. Note that powerloss counter cannot be cleared. C 4–32

194 Remote Operation – 4 Help Menu Under Help , the About... submenu provides you 1 the information on the IPSUtil™ version numbers. Figure 4-41 Communication Dialog COMMAND BUTTONS Figure 4-43 Ethernet Settings Open COM Initiates communication with the protective system by direct serial 3 communication. COMMAND BUTTONS Close COM Discontinues communication with the Ethernet Enable/Disable : Allows user to enable protective system. and disable the Ehternet Port. Cancel Returns you to the IPSutil main window. Any changes to the displayed DHCP Protocol Enable/Disable : Allows the user information are lost. to enable or disable the DHCP protocol. When DHCP protocol is enabled the the IP Address portion of the screen is grayed out. When DHCP protocol is disabled the IP Address can be manually entered. A EGD Protocol Enable/Disable : Not available. Protocol Selection MODBUS/Serconv : Provides the user with the ability to select either MODBUS over TCP/IP or Serconv (BECO2200 over TCP\IP) protocol. Saves values to the relay. Save Returns you to the IPSutil main window. Cancel B Any changes to the displayed Figure 4-42 Relay Comm Port Settings information are lost. COMMAND BUTTONS OK Sends the currently displayed information to the relay. Returns you to the IPSutil main window. Cancel Any changes to the displayed information are lost. C Figure 4-44 Set Unit Date/Time Dialog Box 4–33

195 M-3425A Instruction Book COMMAND BUTTONS Stop Clock This toggles between start/stop the clock of the relay. The ‘Stop’ stops the clock in the relay. The ‘Start’ resumes the clock in the relay. 1 Save When connected to the protection system, the date and time information on the display is sent to the relay. Cancel Returns you to the IPSutil™ main window. Any changes to the displayed information are lost. Change User Figure 4-46 There is a blue Time Sync LED mimic on the Set Date/ Access Code Dialog Box Time dialog box (the LED is displayed as different shading on a monochrome monitor). When this LED is blue, the relay is synchronized with the IRIG-B signal COMMAND BUTTONS and the Time field is grayed out, indicating that this field Sends the currently displayed OK can’t be changed. But the Date field can be changed information to the relay. not ). When the LED is Save (by editing and pressing blue, the relay is not time-synchronized and therefore, Returns you to the IPSutil main window. Cancel both the Date and Time fields can be changed. The Any changes to the displayed time field in the dialog box is not updated continuously. information are lost. The time at which the dialog box was opened is the time that is displayed and remains as such. This is true whether the relay is synchronized with the IRIG-B signal or not. 3 A Change Communication Figure 4-45 Access Code Dialog Box Figure 4-47 Setup Dialog Box COMMAND BUTTONS B Sends the currently displayed COMMAND BUTTONS OK information to the relay. OK Sends the currently displayed Cancel Returns you to the IPSutil™ main information to the relay. window. Any changes to the displayed Cancel Returns you to the IPSutil main window. information are lost. Any changes to the displayed information are lost. : Output Test is not available on some Q NOTE versions of the M-3425A Relay. C 4–34

196 Installation – 5 Installation 5 5.1 ormation ... 5–1 General Inf ... 5–2 5.2 Mechanical/Physical Dimensions External Connections ... 5.3 5–8 5.4 Commissioning Check out ... 5–14 5.5 Circuit Board Switches and Jumpers ... 5–19 Low Frequency Signal Injection Equipment ... 5–23 5.6 This equipment will function properly, and at stated 5.1 General Information accuracies beyond the limits of this CE Standard, as per the equipment's specifications, stated in this Prior to installation of the equipment,  NOTE : Instruction Book. it is essential to review the contents of this manual to locate data which may be It is suggested the terminal connections illustrated of importance during installation proce‑ one station ‑ line wiring and here be transferred to dures. The following is a quick review panel draw ‑ station line connection diagrams, three ‑ of the contents in the chapters of this DC wiring schematics. station ings and manual. If during the commissioning of the M‑3425A The person or group responsible for the installation Generator Protection Relay, additional tests are ‑ of the relay will find herein all mechanical informa Testing , may be consulted. desired, Chapter 6 , tion required for physical installation, equipment ratings, and all external connections in this chapter. The operation of the relay, including the initial For reference, the Three‑Line Connection Diagrams ‑ setup procedure, is described in Chapter 3 , Opera Chapter 2 are repeated from . Further, Application , , Chapter 4 , for HMI front panel users and in tion a commissioning checkout procedure is outlined ‑ Remote Operation , when using a personal com using the HMI option to check the external CT and puter. Section 3.1, Front Panel Controls, details the VT connections. Additional tests which may be front panel controls. desirable at the time of installation are described in Chapter 6 , Testing . Section 3.2, Initial Setup Procedure/Settings, details ‑ the HMI setup procedure. This includes details neces sary for input of the communications data, unit setup Service Conditions and Conformity to CE data, configure relays data, the individual setpoints Standard and time settings for each function, and oscillograph Stating conformance to CE Standard EN 61010 1 ‑ ‑ recorder setup information. Section 3.5, Status/Me 2001, operation of this equipment within the follow ‑ tering, guides the operator through the status and ing service conditions does not present any known metering screens, including monitoring the status. personnel hazards outside of those stated herein: Section 3.6 includes information on viewing the 40° Centigrade • 5° to target history. ‑ relative humidity • Maximum 80% for tem peratures up a in decreasing C, 31° to 50% relative manner to linear humidity at 40° C. 5–1

197 M‑3425A Instruction Book - Mechanical/Physical Dimen 5.2 sions 1 through 5‑6 contain physical dimensions ‑ Figures 5 of the relay that may be required for mounting the unit on a rack. 17.50 [44.45] ACTUAL 5.21 [13.23] ACTUAL 17.50 [44.45] 10.20 [25.91] 19.00 [48.26] 19.00 [48.26] 18.31 0.35 [46.51] [0.89] 0.40 [1.02] X 0.27 [0.68] Slot (4X) 2.25 [5.72] 1.48 [3.76] Standard 19" Horizontal Mount Chassis NOTE : Dimensions in brackets are in centimeters. NOTE  : Dimensions in brackets are in centimeters. ‑ Figure 5‑1 Horizontal Chassis Mounting Dimensions Without Expanded I/O (H1) 3425A M 5–2

198 Installation – 5 5.65 [14.40] 5.59 0.03 [14.20] [0.076] Actual 2.25 1.67 2.25 1.67 0.35 [5.72] [4.24] [5.72] [4.24] [0.89] 0.28 [0.71] Dia. (4X) TARGETS 19.00 [48.26] OUTPUTS OUT 7 OUT 3 OUT 5 OUT 1 OUT 8 OUT 4 OUT 6 OUT 2 18.31 [46.51] 17.5 [44.45] ACTUAL 17.68 [44.91] ENTER EXIT TARGET RESET PS 2 PS 1 DIAG TARGET OSC. BRKR TRIG CLOSED TIME RELAY SYNC OK COM 1 Recommended cutout when relay is not used as standard rack mount and is panel cut out mounted. 17.50 [44.45] 10.20 [25.91] 19.00 [48.26] NOTE : Dimensions in brackets are in centimeters. NOTE  : Dimensions in brackets are in centimeters. Vertical Chassis Mounting Dimensions Without Expanded I/O (H2) Figure 5‑2 M ‑ 3425A 5–3

199 M‑3425A Instruction Book 0.35 18.31 [0.89] [46.51] Mounting Dimensions Horizontal and Vertical Chassis With Expanded I/O 3425A M ‑ Figure 5‑3 5–4

200 Installation – 5 18.31 [ 46.51 ] 0.32 [ 0.81 ] 18.31 46.51 [ ] 0.32 [ 0.81 ] Figure 5‑4 Panel Mount Cutout Dimensions M ‑ 3425A 5–5

201 M‑3425A Instruction Book Figure 5‑5 Mounting Dimensions for GE L ‑ 2 Cabinet H3 and H4 5–6

202 Installation – 5 External Connections 5.3 I S PS 2 P1 PS2 PS1 c - - ++ F1 F2 WARNING: The protective grounding termi 8 ‑ 3AMP,250V(3AB) 3AMP,250V(3AB) 61 62 60 58 59 63 nal must be connected to an earthed ground 6 18 1-85 65- 6 5 5 85 2 5268 F4 F3 anytime external connections have been made to the unit. ONLY DRY CONTACTS WARNING 8 must be : - + connected to inputs (terminals 5 through 10 with 11 common and terminals 68 through 75 with 66 and 67 common) because these contact inputs Expanded I/O Power Supply Figure 5‑7 are internally wetted. Application of external voltage on these inputs may result in damage Grounding Requirements to the units. The M‑3425A is designed to be mounted in an adequately grounded metal panel, using grounding WARNING: Do not open live CT circuits. Live 8 metal mounting) and hardware ‑ to techniques (metal ‑ ‑ CT circuits should be shorted prior to discon that assures a low impedance ground. necting CT wiring to the M‑3425A. Death or severe electrical shock may result. Unit Isolation : Mis ‑ operation or permanent dam ‑ CAUTION ▲ ‑ Sensing inputs should be equipped with test switch age may result to the unit if a voltage is applied to es and shorting devices where necessary to isolate Terminals 1 and 2 (aux) that does not match the the unit from external potential or current sources. configured Trip Circuit Monitoring input voltage. A switch or circuit breaker for the M‑3425A's power To fulfill requirements for UL and CSA listings, ter ‑ shall be included in the building installation, and shall minal block connections must be made with No. 12 be in close proximity to the relay and within easy reach AWG solid or stranded copper wire inserted in an of the operator, and shall be plainly marked as being AMP #324915 (or equivalent) connector, and wire the power disconnect device for the relay. must used insulation minimum. C 60° at rated be Insulation Coordination Power Supply Sensing Inputs: 60 V to 140 V, Installation Category When the M‑3425A without expanded I/O is IV, Transient Voltages not to exceed 5,000 V. equipped with the optional second power supply (Figure 5‑6) , the power source may be the same Torque Requirements or two different sources. Terminals 1–34 & 66–105 : 7.5 in ‑ lbs, • I 2 PS S P1 PS2 PS1 c minimum, and 8.0 in ‑ lbs, maximum - - ++ F1 F2 • : 8.5 in Terminals 35–65 ‑ lbs, minimum, ‑ and 9.0 in lbs, maximum 3AMP,250V(3AB) 3AMP,250V(3AB) 61 60 62 58 59 63 18 1-85 6 65- 85 2 6 5268 5 5 F4 F3 Relay Outputs ‑ All outputs are shown in the de energized state for standard reference. Relay standard reference is - ‑ ‑ trip, recon defined as protective elements in the non - + + ‑ nection and sync logic in the non asserted state, or power to the relay is removed. Output contacts #1 Figure 5‑6 Optional Dual Power Supply through #4 are high speed operation contacts. The power supply relay (P/S) is energized when the power When the M‑3425A with expanded I/O is equipped supply is OK. The self ‑ test relay is energized when with two (not redundant) power supplies, the power tests successfully. the relay has performed all self ‑ supplies must be powered from the same source. Replacement Fuses F1–F4 replacement fuses must be fast ‑ acting 3 Amp, 250 V (3AB) Beckwith Electric Part Number 420‑00885. 5–7

203 M‑3425A Instruction Book  ‡ ‡       … …                                            „„              Š            ‰   Š       ­ ‹€  €€€€€€€€€€€€€€€€€€€€€€€ ‹€­        †               ˆ                                  ­                                      ‚      External Connections             €€ €€  €€                   ‡       †   …    , subsection for 64B/F Field Ground Protection.  Figure 5‑8          ƒ must be connected to inputs (terminals 5 through 10 with 11 common and terminals 68               Trip Circuit Monitoring input, see Section 5.5, Circuit Board Switches and Jumpers, for the information        „          Š           ‚     „          ƒ      ­                                        ONLY DRY CONTACTS The protective grounding terminal must be connected to an earthed ground any time external connections have  :               ­              ­   ­          operation or permanent damage to the unit.  ‑   ! ­    WARNING  WARNING:   regarding setting Trip Circuit Monitoring input voltage. Connecting a voltage other than the voltage that the unit is configured to may result been made to the unit. 8 See Section 2.3, Setpoints and Time Settings Before making connections to the in mis 8 inputs may result in damage to the units. through 75 with 66 and 67 common) because these contact inputs are internally wetted. Application of external voltage on these :    3. 1. 4. 2. NOTES  5–8

204 Installation – 5 1 Alarm output can be grouped to a single alarm Wire to split phase differential CTs for 4 use with 50DT split phase function. at the discretion of user. A B C 2 Available control output to service other relays Required generator breaker status input 5 (52b). Contact is closed when generator for VT Fuse Loss can be designated. Other M-3425A Relays breaker is open. Use unit breaker Input contact number is designated by user. 6 1 50 51 contact if no generator breaker present. 3 Output contact pairs designated by user. 1 49 48 WARNING: ONLY dry contact inputs must be M-3425A connected because these contact inputs are 1 internally wetted. Application of external 47 46 voltage on these inputs may result in 38 41 43 42 40 39 damage to the units. NOTE: M-3425A current terminal polarity marks ( . ) indicate "entering" current direction when M-3425A C A B primary current is "from" the generator to the Three VT Wye-Wye 10 52 system. If CT connections differ from those Alternate Connection 52b shown, adjust input terminals. Gen 11 A A B B C C 41 39 42 40 38 43 38 43 41 39 42 40 Two Vt Open-Delta Three VT Wye-Wye Connection Connection M-3425A M-3425A Generator M-3921 a b c b c a Field Ground Other Other Coupler Module M-3425A M-3425A Relays Relays Other M-3425A 59 58 58 59 b c a Relays 59 58 56 57 57 56 OR OR 56 57 54 55 54 55 54 55 M-3425A M-3425A 44 45 53 52 OR R R High Impedance Grounding Low Impedance Grounding Example of Control/Output Connections + DC: 24V M-3425A + 3 3 6 3 12 16 60 62 48V Power 61 63 11 10 Supply - 13 15 OR 2 DC: 110V 5 125V 52G 220V TRIP 60FL VT POWER SELF- 52b ALARM FUSE OK TEST 250V BREAKER OSCILLOGRAPH LOSS STATUS FAILURE AC: 110V FAILURE RECORDER 52Ga ALARM ALARM INITIATE INITIATE 120V - 230V 240V TRIP EXTERNAL ALARM CONTROL 4 OUTPUTS OUTPUT INPUTS OUTPUTS Figure 5‑9 Three ‑ Line Connection Diagram 5–9

205 M‑3425A Instruction Book M-3425A 65 Used when Generator Side VTs are connected V X Line-Ground. 64 OR Used for Sync Check (25) V X M-3425A 65 V Used when Generator Side VTs X are connected Line-Line 64 M-3425A A B C 10 52 52b Gen 11 A B C M-3425A 39 Three VT Wye-Wye 38 Connection 41 40 43 42 OR M-3425A 42 A B C Two VT Open-Delta 43 Connection 40 41 38 39 Generator Figure 5‑10 Function 25 Sync Check Three ‑ Line Connection Diagram 5–10

206 Installation – 5 M-3425A A B C 10 52 52b Gen 11 B C A M-3425A V X 65 R 64 V used for turn-to-turn X fault protection (59X) Generator a c b Line to Neutral Voltage Rated Cable M-3425A M-3425A 52 53 45 44 OR R R Low Impedance Grounding High Impedance Grounding Figure 5‑11 Function 59X Turn to T urn Fault Protection Three ‑ Line Connection Diagram 5–11

207 M‑3425A Instruction Book Bus Section A B C M-3425A 53 I input can be connected N R Residual CT either at Neutral or as Residual. 52 M-3425A 67N Connection 65 64 A B C M-3425A 59X Bus Ground 10 52 52b Gen 11 B A C M-3425A V X 65 R 64 67N, 59D Connection can be used for both 67N and V X Generator 59D if connected in this manner. c b a M-3425A input can be connected I N 53 52 either at Neutral or as Residual. R Low Impedance Grounding OR M-3425A 44 45 R High Impedance Grounding Line Connection Diagram ‑ Function 67N, 59D, 59X (Bus Ground) Thr ee Figure 5‑12 5–12

208 Installation – 5 7. ENTER to display Third Harmonic Press Commissioning Checkout 5.4 Differential Ratio: During field commissioning, check the following to 3RD HARMONIC DIFF RATIO ensure that the CT and VT connections are correct. ___________ Press ENTER once more to display the . After a short delay, the 1. Press ENTER line side Third Harmonic Voltage: unit should display 3RD HARMONIC 3V0 VOLT VOLTAGE RELAY ___________  VOLT curr freq v/hz pwr 8. P ress ENTER to display Stator Low 2. Press the right arro w button until the unit Frequency Injection (20 Hz) Voltage: displays: STATOR FREQUENCY INJECT. LOW STATUS Volts ______ _  config sys STAT ‑ e, negative and zero se Display positiv 9. . The unit should display: 3. Press ENTER quence voltages. Press until the ENTER unit displays: VOLTAGE STATUS VOLT curr freq v/hz  POS SEQUENCE VOLTAGE Volts ______ Press ENTER . The unit should display 4. (line either V , V ground con , V ‑ to ‑ ‑ A C B Th e positive sequence voltage should be , V ‑ to , V nections) or V (line line or ‑ AB BC CA or V y V y V . V y V y y V V line‑ground to line ‑ line connections). POS A AB B C BC CA Press 10. until the unit displays: ENTER PHASE VOLTAGE C= A= B= NEG SEQUENCE VOLTAGE Volts _____ these voltages with actual mea ‑ Compare oltage should The negative sequence v surements using a voltmeter. If there is a be V 0. y discrepancy, check for loose connections NEG to the rear terminal block of the unit. If line‑ground to line‑line voltage selection until the unit displays: ENTER Press 11. 3 S is used, the voltages displayed are times of the line‑ground voltages applied. ZERO SEQUENCE VOLTAGE Volts _____ ‑ ENTER Press 5. to display the Neutral Volt age: oltage should be The zero sequence v y V 0. ZERO NEUTRAL VOLTAGE negative sequence voltage shows a If the Volts ______ ‑ high value and the positive sequence volt age is close to zero, the phase sequence oltage should be near zero The neutral v is incorrect and proper phases must be volts. reversed to obtain correct phase se ‑ quence. If the phase sequence is incorrect, and power related functions will frequency ‑ ‑ ENTER Voltage: to display V 6. Press X not operate properly and the Frequency DISABLE Status . menu will read VX VOLTAGE Volts ______ If positive, negative and zero sequence voltages are all present, check the po ‑ larities of the VT connections and change connections to obtain proper polarities. 5–13

209 M‑3425A Instruction Book 12. Press ENTER until the unit displays: 19. Press ENTER for the unit to display: NEUTRAL CURRENT 3RD HARMONIC NTRL VOLT _______ Amps ______ Volts 20. 13. Press ENTER until the unit displays: for the unit to display: ENTER Press FIELD GND MEAS. CIRCUIT GND DIFFERENTIAL CURRENT Amps mV ________ _______ ENTER Press 21. for the unit to display: 14. Press EXIT until the unit displays: STATOR LOW FREQ INJECT. VOLTAGE STATUS ____ mAmps I= VOLT curr freq v/hz  to display: 22. Press ENTER Press the right arro w to display: 15. POS SEQUENCE CURRENT Amps CURRENT STATUS _______  volt CURR freq v/hz The positive sequence current should be y I y I . I y I b a POS c 16. , Press ENTER to display line currents (I A ENTER Press 23. to display: ). The unit should display: , I I C B NEQ SEQUENCE CURRENT PHASE CURRENT Amps _______ A= C= B= Negative sequence current should near ‑ Compare these currents with the mea zero amperes. sured values using a meter. If there is a discrepancy, check the CT connections to the rear terminal block of the unit. 24. Press ENTER to display: 17. for the unit to display: ENTER Press ZERO SEQUENCE CURRENT Amps _______ PHASE CURRENT a= b= c= The zero sequence current should be ‑ 0 A. If a significant amount of nega y I ZERO tive or zero sequence current (greater ‑ Compare these currents with the mea than ,) then either the , I , I I of 25% sured values using a meter. If there is a C B A phase sequence or the polarities are discrepancy, check the CT connections incorrect. Modify connections to obtain to the rear terminal block of the unit. proper phase sequence and polarities. 18. Press for the unit to display: ENTER 25. Press ENTER to display: DIFFERENTIAL CURRENT F49 THERMAL CURRENT #1 A= B= C= _______ Amps Differential current should be near z ero ENTER once more to display: Press ‑ amps. If a significant amount of differ ential current is present, check the CT polarities. F49 THERMAL CURRENT #2 Amps _______ 5–14

210 Installation – 5 35. 26. Press EXIT, then the Right arrow to dis ‑ to display: ENTER Press play: POWER FACTOR FREQUENCY STATUS ___ Lag/Lead volt curr FREQ v/hz  36. Press EXIT and then right arrow to dis ‑ play: to display: Press ENTER 27. IMPEDANCE STATUS FREQUENCY powr IMPED sync brkr   _________ Hz ENTER Press 37. to display: Press ENTER 28. to display: IMPEDANCE ab (Ohms) Z RATE OF CHANGE FREQUENCY R= X= ____ Hz/Sec , then right arrow to display: EXIT 29. Press once more to display: ENTER Press V/HZ STATUS Z IMPEDANCE bc (Ohms) V/HZ volt curr freq  X= R= Press ENTER once more to display: 30. to display: ENTER Press IMPEDANCE Z ca (Ohms) VOLTS PER HERTZ R= X= % __________ EXIT Press 31. , then right arrow to display: Press 38. to display: ENTER POWER STATUS hms) IMPEDANCE POS SEQ (O   POWR imped sync brkr R= X= 39. to display: ENTER Press 32. to display real power and ENTER Press check its sign. The unit should display: FIELD GND RESISTANCE _______ Ohms REAL POWER _______ W _________ PU ‑ and then right arrow to dis EXIT Press 40. The sign should be positive f or forward play: power and negative for reverse power. If the sign does not agree with actual SYNC CHECK STATUS conditions, check the polarities of the ‑ three neutral end CTs and/or the PTs.  powr imped SYNC brkr  33. Press ENTER for the unit to display: to display: 41. Press ENTER REACTIVE POWER PHASE ANGLE _________ PU VAr _____ DEGREES ____ ENTER 34. to display: Press 42. Press ENTER for the unit to display: APPARENT POWER DELTA VOLTAGE ______ ______ Volts LO _________ PU VA 5–15

211 M‑3425A Instruction Book ENTER Press 43. 50. Press ENTER to display: to display: DELTA FREQUENCY FL I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1 ______ Hz HI again to view outputs: Press ENTER 44. EXIT , then right arrow until unit Press displays: O8 O7 O6 O5 O4 O3 O2 O1 BREAKER MON ACC. STATUS  power imped sync BRKR  51. EXIT Press , then arrow button to display: 45. to display: ENTER Press TIMER STATUS  TIMER freq_acc i/o  BREAKER MON ACC. STATUS A-cycles A= Press 52. to display: ENTER Press to cycle through Acc. ENTER Status screens for B and C. 51V DELAY TIMER B= C= A= 46. , then right arrow until unit EXIT Press displays: Press to display: 53. ENTER 81A ACCUMULATORS STATUS 51N DELAY TIMER timer  i/o FREQ_ACC  % __________ Press to display: 54. ENTER ENTER Press 47. to display: 46IT DELAY TIMER 81A #1 ACCUMULATORS STAT __________ % _____ Cycles 55. to display: ENTER Press will display a status ENTER Pressing screen for each of the six elements. 24IT DELAY TIMER __________ % to display: Press ENTER 48. 81A #1 ACC. STARTUP TIME 56. , then right arrow until unit EXIT Press 00-20XX 00:00:00:000 displays: will display a status Pressing ENTER RELAY TEMPERATURE screen for each of the six elements.  TEMP count powerup  49. Press EXIT , then right arrow until unit Press ENTER to display: 57. displays: RELAY TEMPERATURE IN/OUT STATUS _________ C  freq_acc I/O timer  5–16

212 Installation – 5 , then right arrow until unit 58. 66. Press Press ENTER to display: EXIT displays: COMM ERROR CODE (LAST) COUNTERS ___________  temp COUNT powerup  67. Press to display: ENTER 59. Press ENTER to display: COMM PACKET COUNTER ___________ OUTPUT COUNTER 1 ___________ to display: ENTER Press 68. will display a status Pressing ENTER COMM RX ERROR COUNTER screen for each of the 23 outputs. ___________ 60. to display: ENTER Press 69. ENTER to display: Press ALARM COUNTER SELFTEST COUNTER ___________ ___________ ENTER 70. to display: Press , then right arrow until the EXIT Press 61. unit displays: RESET COUNTER ___________ TIME OF LAST POWER UP  temp count POWERUP  71. ENTER Press to display: POWERLOSS COUNTER Press 62. ENTER to display: ___________ TIME OF LAST POWER UP 05-Jan-2003 20:39:29 , then right arrow until the 72. Press EXIT unit displays:  NOTE: ities can be easily The CT and VT polar CHECKSUMS verified by looking at the oscillographic ®  CHECK error ‑ 3801D IPSplot waveforms, using M PLUS analysis software. 73. to display: Press ENTER Press 63. , then right arrow until the EXIT unit displays: SETPOINTS CHECKSUM BBCS= EECS= CAL= ERROR CODES check  ERROR 74. to display: ENTER Press CALIBRATION CHECKSUM 64. to display: ENTER Press EECS= BBCS= CAL= ERROR CODES (LAST) ___________ 75. to display: ENTER Press will display a status ENTER Pressing ROM CHECKSUM screen for three previous error codes. ___________ ENTER 65. Press to display: ___________ RST LOCATION BBR=___ CBR=___ 0000 5–17

213 M‑3425A Instruction Book 1. De ‑ energiz e the M‑3425A. Circuit Board Switches and 5.5 Remov e the screws that retain the front 2. Jumpers cover. See Figure 5‑13, M‑3425A Circuit Board for Jumper 3. Remov e the "J" connectors from the cor ‑ responding plugs, P4, 5, 6, 7, 9 and 11. and Switch locations. Loosen the two circuit board retention 4. Accessing Switches and Jumpers screws (captured). WARNING: Operating personnel must not 8 Remov ‑ e the circuit board from the chas 5. remove the cover or expose the printed circuit sis. IN NO CASE may board while power is applied. Jumpers J5, J18, J20, J21, J22, J46, 6. the circuit ‑ ba sed jumpers or switches be moved J60, and J61 are now accessible. See with power applied. Figure 5‑13, M‑3425A Circuit Board for locations. 8 WARNING: The protective grounding terminal must be connected to an earthed ground any w accessible. See Dipswitch SW1 is no 7. time external connections have been made to Figure 5‑13 for location. the unit. See Figure 5‑8, Note #4. Insert circuit board into chassis guides 8. ▲ : This unit contains MOS circuitry, CAUTION and seat firmly. which can be damaged by static discharge. Care . 9. Tighten circuit board retention screws should be taken to avoid static discharge on work surfaces and service personnel. 10. Reconnect "J" connectors to correspond ‑ ing plugs. 11. er plate. Reinstall cov Descripton Jumper Position Demodulated IRIG-B TTL signal on Pin 6 COM2 A to B J5 Modulated IRIG-B signal BNC (Default) B to C A to B COM3 200 ohm termination resistor inserted J18 B to C COM3 no termination (Default) A to B COM3 shares Baud Rate with COM1 J46 B to C COM3 shared Baud Rate with COM2 (Default) Connects DCD signal to Pin 1 of COM2 (Default) A to B J60 A to C Connects +15V to Pin 1 of COM2 Connects -15V to Pin 9 of COM2 B to C J61 A to B COM2 Pin 9 float (Default)  NOTE: Short circuit protection (100 ma limit) is incorporated on pins 1 and 9 when used for +/ ‑ 15V. Jumpers Table 5‑1 5–18

214 Installation – 5 Dipswitch SW1 3 4 2 1 Switches should not be changed while unit is energized. X X X Open (Up) X Closed (Down) Run Mode 3 Up 4 Up 3 Up Initialize EEPROM to default* See Caution Below 4 Down 4 Up Initialize Access Codes and Communication* 3 Down Factory Use 3 Down 4 Down 2 Up Flash Update Disable (Factory Default) 2 Down Flash Update Enable 1 Up Dual Power Supply Unit 1 Down Single Power Supply Unit * After power up, the OK LED light remains off and the Diagnostic LED will illuminate when operation has been satisfactorily completed. CAUTION : A loss of calibration, setpoints, and configuration will occur when the EEPROM is initialized ▲ to default. 1 Table 5‑2 ‑ Dip Switch SW TRIP CIRCUIT MONITOR INPUT VOLTAGE SELECT Jumper J20 Position Jumper J21 Position Jumper J22 Position Input Voltage 24 V dc A to B A to B A to B A to B A to B B to C 48 V dc B to C 125 V dc B to C A to B B to C B to C B to C 250 V dc* * Default as shipped from factory. Table 5‑3 Trip Cir cuit Monitor Input Voltage Select Jumper Configuration 5–19

215 M‑3425A Instruction Book                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 Circuit Board                       3425A ‑      M                           13    ‑                                                                          Figure 5                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              5–20

216 Installation – 5                                                                                                                                                                                                Circuit Board (Expanded I/O)             3425A   ‑ M  14  ‑             Figure 5                                                                           5–21

217 M‑3425A Instruction Book 5.6 Low Frequency Signal Injec - tion Equipment ‑ Figure 5 15 represents typical connections for the Low Frequency Signal Injection Equipment. Figures 5 20 illustrate equipment mounting ‑ 16 through 5 ‑ dimensions. 100-230 VAC** L1 L2 DC UH+ Supply Voltage UH- External Device Operative L3 Block 1 3 6 8 2 9 7 5 N N I V 20 Hz 53 45 Generator Bl 44 52 M-3425A Model A00/EE shown. Connection terminals for 12 11 * Wiring 1B4 Max. 200 V Shielded 1A4 High Voltage 59N 1A3 Filter 20 Hz Band Pass 1A2 1A1 1B1 N R 400/5 A 20 Hz CT 5A 400A L K l k Neutral Grounding Transformer ** If 20 Hz Signal Generator is prior to Model EE a step down transformer is necessary for voltages >120 VAC. >200 V ac, use the "High Voltage" connection for the 59N Function. * For applications with a transformer secondary rating that will result in 50/60 Hz phase ground fault voltages 15 ‑ Figure 5 ypical Connections Low Frequency Signal Injection Equipment T 5–22

218 Installation – 5 Figure 5 ‑ 16 20 Hz Frequency Generator Housing Panel Surface Mount 5–23

219 M‑3425A Instruction Book Figure 5 ‑ 17 20 Hz Frequency Generator Housing Panel Flush Mount 5–24

220 Installation – 5 Figure 5 ‑ 18 20 Hz Band Pass Filter Housing Panel Surface Mount 5–25

221 M‑3425A Instruction Book Figure 5 ‑ 19 20 Hz Band Pass Filter Housing Panel Flush Mount 5–26

222 Installation – 5 A CT Figure 5 ‑ 20 5 20 Hz Measuring Current T ransformer 400 ‑ 5–27

223 M‑3425A Instruction Book This Page Left Intentionally Blank 5–28

224 Testing – 6 6 Testing 6.1 ... 6–2 Equipment/T est Setup Functional T ... 6–6 est Procedures 6.2 ower On Self Tests 6–7 P ... 21 Phase Distance ... 6–8 24 Volts per Hertz 6–9 ... k ... 6–12 25D/25S Sync Chec 27 Phase Under ... 6–16 voltage 27TN Third-Harmonic Undervoltage, Neutral 6–17 ... 32 Directional P ower, 3-Phase ... 6–21 40 Loss of Field ... 6–24 ... 6–26 46 Negativ e Sequence Overcurrent Definite Time 46 Negativ ... 6–27 e Sequence Overcurrent Inverse Time 49 Stator Ov erload 6–28 ... 50 Instantaneous Phase Ov ercurrent ... 6–30 50BF/50BF-N Breaker Failure ... 6–31 ... 6–33 50/27 Inadv ertent Energizing 50DT Definite Time Overcurrent for Split-Phase Differential ... 6–34 50N Instantaneous Neutral Overcurrent ... 6–35 Inverse Time Neutral Overcurrent ... 6–36 51N 51V In verse Time Phase Overcurrent with V oltage Control/Restraint ... 6–37 ervoltage ... 6–39 59 Phase Ov 59D Third ... 6–40 Harmonic Voltage Differential 59N ... 6–41 Overvoltage, Neutral Circuit or Zero Sequence pose Overvoltage ... 6–42 59X Multipur 60FL VT Fuse Loss Detection ... 6–43 ... 6–44 64F Field Ground Protection ush Lift Off Detection ... 6–46 64B Br 64S 100% Stator Ground Protection b y Injection ... 6–47 67N Residual Directional Overcurrent ... 6–50 78 Out of Step ... 6–54 requency ... 6–56 81 F requency Accumulator ... 6–57 81A F 81R Rate of Change of Frequency ... 6–58 87 Phase Diff erential ... 6–60 87GD Ground Diff erential ... 6–62 er Monitoring ... 6–64 Break T rip Circuit Monitoring ... 6–66 IPSLogic ... 6–67 6.3 Diagnostic T est Procedures ... 6–68 6–77 6.4 Auto-Calibration ... 6–1

225 M‑3425A Instruction Book 6.1 Equipment/T est Setup No calibration is necessary, as the M - 3425A Genera - or relays with the 64F/B option: F 6. tor Protection Relay is calibrated and fully tested at Resistor decade bo a . x capable of the factory. If calibration is necessary because of a 500 ohms to 150 kOhms, able to step component replacement, follow the auto calibration in 100 ohm increments. procedure detailed in Section 6.4, Auto Calibration anging from 0.15 mf to 10 Capacitors r b . (or see Section 4.7, Calibration subsection for units mf. without an HMI). These test procedures are based on the prerequisite that the functions are enabled 7. F or relays with the 64S option: , Chapter 2 and have settings as described in Ap‑ 20 Hz a. Voltage Generator (variable) , and that the unit is fitted with the optional plication 0 to 40 V. HMI module. b 20 Hz Current Gener ator (variable) . 0 to 40 mA. Equipment Required Setup The following equipment is required to carry out the wer to the power input 1. Connect system po test procedures: terminals 62 (hot) and 63 (neutral). The relay can be ordered with a nominal input 1 wo Digital Multimeters (DMM) with T . power supply of 110/120/230/240 Vac, 10 A current range. or 24/48 Vdc. An 110/125/220/250 Vdc - optional redundant power supply is avail V ac or 0 to 125 V dc variable supply 2. 120 able. for system power. oltage sources Three-phase independent v . 3 oltage for the relay is clearly  The proper v : NOTE (0 to 250 V) variable phase to simulate VT marked on the power supply label affixed inputs. to the rear panel. 4 . Three-phase independent current sources (0 to 25 A) variable phase to simulate CT 2. F or each test procedure, connect the volt - inputs. age and current sources according to the configuration listed in the test procedure ate to at least Electronic timer accur . 5 and follow the steps outlined. 8 ms. 6–2

226 qwertyuiop[]asdfghjkl;’ zxcvbnm,./ Testing – 6 wn here use leading angles as positive and lagging angles as NOTE The phase angles sho ■ : negative. Some manufacturers of test equipment have used lagging angles as positive, in which =120 V =120 V s 240°. Similarly other voltages and currents phase angles s case V 120° and V C B should be adjusted. These test configurations are for ABC phase rotation. They must be adjusted appropriately for ACB phase rotation.                                                     Figure 6-1 V oltage Inputs: Configuration V1                                                      Figure 6-2 V oltage Inputs: Configuration V2 6–3

227 M‑3425A Instruction Book Polarity 55 I 0° ∠ a Current Input 1 54 57 2 Current Input I ∠ –120° b 56 59 I ∠ 120° c Current Input 3 58 Figure 6-3 C urrent Inputs: Configuration C1 Polarity 47 I ∠ 0° A Current Input 1 46 49 2 Current Input I –120° ∠ B 48 51 120° ∠ I C 50 3 Current Input 53 I N 52 ent Inputs: Configuration C2 Figure 6-4 Curr 6–4

228 Testing – 6                        Polarity 47 • 0° I AØ Current Input 2 46 A 49 • o I BØ 120 48 B 51 • o I CØ 240 50 C - Figure 6 ent Configuration C3 Curr 5              Figure 6 64S T est Configuration 6 - 6–5

229 M‑3425A Instruction Book The tests are described in this section in ascending est Procedures 6.2 Functional T function number order as used in Chapter 2 Ap‑ , . plication - This section details test quantities, inputs and proce dures for testing each relay function. The purpose is NOTE - le all functions not cur User should disab :  to confirm the functions’ designated output operation, rently being tested before beginning any the accuracy of the magnitude pickup settings, and function test. the accuracy of time delay settings. Whereas the first test described, “Power On Self Test”, does not require During the lifetime of the relay, testing of individual electrical quantity inputs, all other functional tests do functions due to changes in application settings will require inputs, and the necessary connection configu - be more likely than an overall testing routine. An index rations are noted. of the individual test procedures is illustrated at the In all test descriptions, a process for calculating input beginning of this chapter. quantities to test the actual settings of the function will be given if needed. Disable all other functions not : Care m  ust be taken to reset or enable any NOTE being tested at the time. This action is to prevent the functions that have been changed from operation of multiple functions with one set of input their intended application settings when quantities, which could cause confusion of operation the test procedures are complete. of outputs or timers. The complete description of the method to disable/enable functions may be found - in detail in Section 3.2, Initial Setup Procedure/Set Many options for test sequences and methods are tings, Configure Relay Data subsection or Chapter possible. As an example, the operation of the output 4 , Remote Operation . The complete description of contacts can be tested along with the operation of the the method to install setting quantities may be found LEDs in the Diagnostic Test Procedures. The opera - in Section 3.4, System Data, Setpoints and Time tion of the output contacts may also be confirmed with Settings subsection. the LED and function operation during Functional Test Procedures, if desired. the actual set- record and confirm It is desirable to tings of the individual functions before beginning test If timer quantities are to be checked, the timer 3, Functional Configuration - procedures. Use Figure A - must be activated by the appropriate output con - 4, Setpoint & Timing Re Record Form and Figure A - tacts. The contact pin numbers are enumerated in Appendix A , Configuration Re ‑ cord Form, found in Output Contacts. 1, Table 6 - , to record settings. It is also possible to cord Forms ® It is suggested that copies of the following be made . download the relay settings into a file using IPScom for easy referral during test procedures: It may be desirable to program all test settings in Input Configurations – pg 6–3 to 6-5 an alternate profile, or to save the relay settings in Output Contact Numbers – pg 6–68 IPScom to preserve desired setup. Relay Configuration Table – pg A–2 pg A–20 Setpoint & Timing Record Form – 6–6

230 Testing – 6 Power On Self Tests VOLTAGE INPUTS none : none CURRENT INPUTS : Apply proper po wer to the power input terminals (60 HOT and 61 NEUTRAL). 1. ollowing sequence of actions will take place in the following order: 2. The f The unit will displa y the following: a. POWER ON SELFTESTS XXXXXXxxxxxxxxxxx b . All LEDs will illuminate f or approximately 1 second. The POWER and RELAY OK LEDs will remain illuminated, all other LEDs will extinguish. c. d. The unit will displa y the following: POWER ON SELFTESTS PASS y the model number: . The unit will displa e BECKWITH ELECTRIC CO. M-3425A Expanded . The unit will displa y the firmware version. f BECKWITH ELECTRIC D-0150xx.xx.xx g. The unit will displa y the serial number. BECKWITH ELECTRIC CO. SERIAL NUMBER xxx h. The POWER LED(s) will illuminate. The RELAY OK LED will flash (or stay on as programmed in the diagnostic menu). i. j. The BREAKER CLOSED LED will remain illuminated. If the relay breaker position contact IN1 is connected to a breaker position contact (52b) and the breaker is open the LED will be extinguished. 3. tests end with the unit displaying the system date, time and default logo. wer - on self - The po y recorded targets they are then displayed. 4. If there are an 6–7

231 M‑3425A Instruction Book 21 Phase Distance (#1, #2 or #3) ation V1 VOLTAGE INPUTS: Configur ation C1 Configur CURRENT INPUTS: Diameter P Ohms TEST SETTINGS: (0.1 to 100) 1 Amp CT Rating (0.5 to 500.0) Offset O Ohms (–100 to 100) (–500.0 to 500.0) 1 Amp CT Rating Impedance Angle rees A Deg (0 to 90) y D Cycles (1 to 8160) Time Dela Prog rammed Outputs Z Output (1 to 8) (9 to 23) Expanded I/O ation Line-Ground or Line-Line VT Configur NOTE: It would be efficient to disable the element with the higher “reach” (Diameter plus Offset) setting  lower current ), and test the lower reach setting operation, since the higher reach setting first ( operation can be tested without disabling the lower setting. Test Setup: 1. Deter mine the Function 21 Phase Distance settings to be tested. ® 2. Enter the Function 21 Phase Distance settings to be tested utilizing either the HMI or IPScom Communications Software. Disab le all other functions prior to testing. Refer to Section 3.2, Initial Setup Procedure/Settings, 3. Configure Relay Data subsection, for details that describe disabling/enabling functions. 4. Connect test v oltage inputs as shown in Figure 6-1, Voltage Inputs: Configuration V1. 5. Connect test current inputs as sho wn in Figure 6-3, Current Inputs: Configuration C1. 6 . The le vel of current at which pickup operation is to be expected for an individual setting is determined as follows: a. , usually set at zero ohms]. Define “reach” as R ohms = ( P ohms + O ohms) [ O I or Line-Ground configuration, define “current” as I = ((Selected Voltage) F R ohms). The voltage b . level may be selected based on the desired test current level. For Line-Line configuration, define = ((Selected Voltage/ S 3) I R ohms). “current” as I : Pickup Test Set the three - phase voltages to the Selected Voltage value from Step 6b above. 1. 2. Set the phase angle betw een the voltage and current inputs at ( A ) degrees from settings above (for Line-Line configuration, set the phase angle at ( A –30°). 3 . P ress and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then slowly increase the three - p hase input currents 21 PHASE DISTANCE LED illuminates, or the pickup indicator illuminates on the IPScom until the Function Status screen. The le vel at which the 21 PHASE DISTANCE actuates should be equal to I calculated in Step 6 with the resulting impedance  0.1 ohms or 5%. 4. Release the pushbutton, then decrease the three - phase input currents. The as - TARGET RESET signed OUTPUT LEDs will extinguish. Press the TARGET RESET pushbutton to reset targets. 5. Time Test : 1. Connect a timer to output contacts (Z) so that the timer stops timing when the contacts (Z) close. 2. Apply appro ximately 110% of the current ( I ) found in Step 6, and start timing. The contacts will close 1%. after D cycles within  1 cycle or  6–8

232 Testing – 6 24 Volts/Hz Definite Time (#1 or #2) VOLTAGE INPUTS: Configur ation V1 None CURRENT INPUTS: Time Pickup P TEST SETTINGS: % (100 to 200) Definite y D Cycles (30 to 8160) Time Dela Prog rammed Outputs Z Output (1 to 8) Expanded I/O (9 to 23) ■ It w ould be efficient to disable the 24 Definite Time element with the lower pickup setting first and : NOTE test the higher setting operation, since the lower setting operation can be tested without disabling the higher setting. Test Setup: 1. Deter mine the Function 24 Volts/Hz Definite Time settings to be tested. ® 2. Enter the Function 24 Volts/Hz Definite Time settings to be tested utilizing either the HMI or IPScom Communications Software. 3. Disab le all other functions prior to testing. Refer to Section 3.2, Initial Setup Procedure/Settings, Configure Relay Data subsection, for details that describe disabling/enabling functions. 4. Connect test v oltage inputs as shown in Figure 6-1, Voltage Inputs: Configuration V1. 5. The Volts per Hertz pickup level at a percentage setting at Nominal Frequency (50 or 60 Hz) is: P % ÷ 100) x ( ) where the Nominal Values have been programmed Nominal Voltage Pickup voltage = ( 3, - in the system setup data described in Section 2.1, Configuration and are recorded on Figure A Functional Configuration Record Form. Pickup Test: 1. Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then slowly increase the voltage on Phase A until 24 VOLTS/Hz the LED illuminates, or the pickup indicator illuminates on the IPScom Function Status screen. The voltage level of operation will equal to P volts ±1%. 2. Release the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then decrease the Phase A voltage. The assigned OUT ‑ PUT LED(s) will extinguish. 3. Press the pushbutton to reset targets. TARGET RESET Time Test : 1. Connect a timer to output contacts (Z) so that the timer stops timing when the contacts (Z) close. 2. Apply appro ximately ( P + 10 volts) volts, and start timing. The contacts will close after D cycles ± 25 cycles. kup Test and Time Test for Phase B and C. 3. Repeat Pic 6–9

233 M‑3425A Instruction Book 24 Volts/Hz Inverse Time Configur VOLTAGE INPUTS: ation V1 None CURRENT INPUTS: In verse Time Pickup TEST SETTINGS: P % (100 to 200) In verse Time Curve C (1 to 4) ve 1) K (1 to 100) Time Dial (Cur Time Dial (Cur ves 2-4) (0.0 to 9.0) Reset Rate R Seconds (1 to 999) Prog Z OUT (1 to 8) rammed Outputs Expanded I/O (9 to 23) Test Setup: 1. Deter mine the Function 24 Volts/Hz Inverse Time settings to be tested. ® Enter the Function 24 Volts/Hz Inverse Time settings to be tested utilizing either the HMI or IPScom 2. Communications Software. 3 . Enter a Function 24 Volts/Hz Definite Time Pickup #1 setting of 140%, with a Delay of 1200 cycles. Disab 4. le all other functions prior to testing. Refer to Section 3.2, Initial Setup Procedure/Settings, Configure Relay Data subsection, for details that describe disabling/enabling functions. Connect test v oltage inputs as shown in Figure 6-1, Voltage Inputs: Configuration V1. 5. Volts/Hz pickup level of a percentage setting at nominal frequency (50 or 60 Hz) is: Pickup 6. The % ÷ 100) x ( Nominal Voltage voltage = ( P ) where the Nominal Values have been programmed in - 3, the system setup data described in Section 2.1, Configuration and are recorded on Figure A Functional Configuration Record Form. 7 . T est levels may be chosen at any percentages of Nominal Voltage which are a minimum of 5% higher P% 6.) . (Suggest 4 or 5 test levels chosen and calculated in Step than the pickup percentage, Pickup Test : 1. Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then slowly increase the voltage on Phase A until 24 VOLTS/Hz LED light illuminates, or the pickup indicator illuminates on the IPScom Function the P volts ±1%. Status screen. The voltage level of operation will equal 2. Release the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then decrease the Phase A voltage. The assigned OUT ‑ LED(s) will extinguish. PUT 3. Press the pushbutton to reset targets. TARGET RESET Time Test : 1. Connect a timer to output contacts (Z) so that the timer stops timing when the contacts (Z) close. Apply a v oltage equal to the chosen test level calculated in Step 6 to Phase A and start timing. 2. The oper ating time will be as read from the appropriate Inverse Curve Family and K (Time Dial) setting (refer to Appendix D , Inverse Time Curves ). The measured time should be within the time 1% of the pickup value. corresponding to  6–10

234 Testing – 6 Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton. 3. Reduce the applied v oltage and start timing when the voltage drops below the pickup value, stop 4. timing when the TARGET LED extinguishes. The time should be the reset time within ±1%. 5. Repeat Pic kup Test and Time Test for all chosen test levels. The curve portion extending to lower than % V/Hz values are inactive and can be ignored. The tested points verify the operating times P of the function. ■ ve power from the unit or wait for the programmed reset time period NOTE : If retesting is required, remo before the next test to assure resetting of the timer. 6–11

235 M‑3425A Instruction Book 25D Dead Check : VOLTAGE INPUTS Configuration V1 : None CURRENT INPUTS Dead V1 See Below TEST SETTINGS: See Belo w Dead V X Dead V1 w See Belo & V X (1 to 6) Dead Input Enab DIN Input le Expanded I/O (7 to 14) Dead Time Delay DD Cycles (1 to 8160) Dead D VL V olts (0 to 60) Voltage Limit Prog rammed Outputs Z Output (1 to 8) Expanded I/O (9 to 23) Test Setup: 1. Deter mine the Function 25D Dead Check settings to be tested. ® 2. Enter the Function 25D Dead Chec k settings to be tested utilizing either the HMI or IPScom Com- munications Software. 3. le all other functions prior to testing. Refer to Section 3.2, Initial Setup Procedure/Settings, Disab Configure Relay Data subsection, for details that describe disabling/enabling functions. The 25D function requires positive sequence voltage and V 4. for testing. The following tests will refer - X ence the positive sequence voltage as V1. Connect test v oltage inputs as shown in Figure 6-1, Voltage Inputs: Configuration V1. 5. 6. and V to the Nominal Voltage . Set V1 X The Nominal Voltage value previously input to the relay is described in Section 2.1 and should be - 3, Functional Configuration Record Form. recorded on Figure A Dead V1 Hot V Test : X 1. Enab le Dead V1 Hot V and disable Dead V Hot V1 (if enabled) utilizing either the HMI or IPScom X X Communications Software.. 2. Set V1 to DVL +5 V. 3. Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then slowly decrease the voltage applied to V1 until Output Z LED illuminates, or the pickup indicator illuminates on the IPScom Function Status screen. The voltage level should be equal to DVL  0.5 V or  0.5 %. Release the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then increase the voltage applied to V1. The OUTPUT 4. LED will extinguish. 5. Set V1 to the Nominal Voltage . , verify that the function does not operate. 6. Decrease V DVL to less than X 6–12

236 Testing – 6 Dead V Hot V1 Test: X 1. le Dead V Hot V1 and disable Dead V1 Hot V (if enabled) utilizing either the HMI or IPScom Enab X X Communications Software. V1 to the Nominal Voltage . 2. Set Nominal Voltage value previously input to the relay is described in Section 2.1 and should be The 3, Functional Configuration Record Form. recorded on Figure A - 3. to DVL +5 V. Set V X 4. Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then slowly decrease the voltage applied to V X Z until Output LED illuminates, or the pickup indicator illuminates on the IPScom Function Status screen. The voltage level should be equal to DVL  0.5 V or  0.5 %. 5. Release the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then increase the voltage applied to V . The OUTPUT X LED will extinguish. to the Nominal Voltage . Set V 6. X Decrease V1 to less than DVL , verify that the function does not operate. 7. V Test : Dead V1 Dead X 1. Enab le Dead V1 Dead V utilizing either the HMI or IPScom Communications Software. X 2. Disab le Dead V Hot V1 and Dead V1 Hot V (if enabled). X X Set V1 and V 3. to DVL +5 V. X 4. Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then slowly decrease the voltage applied to V1 and V until Output Z LED illuminates, or the pickup indicator illuminates on the IPScom Function X Status screen. The voltage level should be equal to DVL  0.5 V or  0.5 %. 5. Release the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then increase the voltage applied to V1 and V . X The OUTPUT LED will extinguish. 6. V1 to Nominal Voltage . Set 7. Decrease V , then verify that the function does not operate. to less than DVL X Set V 8. to Nominal Voltage . X Decrease V1 to less than DVL , then verify that the function does not operate. 9. : Dead Input Enable Test 1. Select one of the Dead Inputs ( DIN ) and activate it. 2. Repeat the Dead V Test, verify that the function operates as in Hot V1 Test and Dead V1 Hot V X X Testing. Dead V Hot V1 Test and Dead V1 Hot V X X 3. Deactiv ate the DIN and repeat the Dead V Hot V1 Test and Dead V1 Hot V Test once more. Verify X X that the function does not operate. 4. Disab le Dead Input feature. Dead Timer Test: Connect a timer to output contacts (Z) so that the timer stops timing when the contacts (Z) close. 1. 2. Enab le Dead V1 Dead V , utilizing either the HMI or IPScom Communications Software. X 3. Set V1 and V to DVL +5 V. X 1%. 4. Remo ve V1 and V  and start timing. The contacts will close within –1 to +3 cycles or X 6–13

237 M‑3425A Instruction Book 25S Sync Check : Configuration V1 VOLTAGE INPUTS CURRENT INPUTS : None Phase Angle Limit P A Deg rees TEST SETTINGS: (0 to 90) oltage Limits V Upper Limit UL V olts (60 to 140) Lo wer Limit LL V olts (40 to 120) Sync Chec SD Cycles (1 to 8160) k Time Delay Delta D V V olts (1.0 to 50.0) Voltage Limit Delta F requency Limit DF Hz (0.001 to 0.500) (AB , BC, CA) Phase Select (1 to 8) rammed Outputs Z Output Prog Expanded I/O (9 to 23) Test Setup: Deter mine the Function 25S Sync Check settings to be tested. 1. ® k settings to be tested utilizing either the HMI or IPScom Com- 2. Enter the Function 25S Sync Chec munications Software. Disab le all other functions prior to testing. Refer to Section 3.2, Initial Setup Procedure/Settings, 3. Configure Relay Data subsection, for details that describe disabling/enabling functions. The 25 function requires only one phase v oltage and V for testing in the Line-to-Ground con - 4. X figuration. The phase voltage used for reference may be selected through the System Setup menu. The following tests will reference the phase voltage as V1, although any phase may be used for testing. Line-to-Line testing will follow the same procedures, with V1 representing the proper Line- to-Line phase input. Each test below can be performed using any of the three phases as a reference. 5. Connect test v oltage inputs as shown in Figure 6-1, Voltage Inputs: Configuration V1. 6. Set V1 and V to the Nominal Voltage . X Nominal Voltage value previously input to the relay is described in Section 2.1 and should be The - recorded on Figure A 3, Functional Configuration Record Form. Phase Angle Limit Test: 1. Estab lish a phase angle difference of more than PA +5°. 2. Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then slowly decrease the phase angle difference ® until Output LED illuminates, or the pickup indicator illuminates on the IPScom Function Status Z screen. The phase angle difference should be equal to PA ±1°. 3 . Release the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then increase the phase angle difference. LED will extinguish. The OUTPUT 6–14

238 Testing – 6 Voltage Limit Test: Upper Apply a v UL to V1. 1. oltage 5 V greater than Ensure V voltage is less than UL but greater than LL. Slowly decrease the voltage applied to V1 2. X until Output Z LED illuminates, or the pickup indicator illuminates on the IPScom Function Status  0.5 V or ±0.5 %. screen. The voltage should be equal to UL 3. oltage applied to V1. The OUTPUT LED will extinguish. If desired, repeat this test Increase the v . using V X : Lower Voltage Limit Test 1. Apply a v oltage 5 V less than LL to V1. 2. Ensure V voltage is greater than LL but less than UL. Slowly increase the voltage applied to V1 X until Output Z LED illuminates, or the pickup indicator illuminates on the IPScom Function Status ±0.5 V or ±0.5 %. LL screen. The voltage level should be equal to Decrease the v oltage applied to V1. The OUTPUT LED will extinguish. If desired, repeat this test 3. . using V X Sync Check Time Delay Test : 1. Set V1 and V to the Nominal Voltage . The Nominal Voltage value previously input to the relay is X described in Section 2.1 and should be recorded on Figure A 3, Functional Configuration Record - Form. 2. Estab lish a phase angle difference of more than PA +5°. so that the timer stops timing when the contacts 3. Connect a timer to output contacts (Z) (Z) close. 4. ve the phase angle difference and start timing. The contacts will close after SD cycles within Remo 1 %.  –1 to +3 cycles or : Delta Voltage Test Set the Upper and Lo wer Voltage limits to their maximum and minimum values, respectively. 1. 2. Set V to 140 V and V1 to 40 V. X Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then slowly increase the voltage applied to V1 3. Z until Output LED illuminates, or the pickup indicator illuminates on the IPScom Function Status DV  0.5 V. screen. The voltage difference should be equal to 4. Release the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then decrease the voltage applied to V1. The OUTPUT LED will extinguish. If desired, repeat the test using V with V1 at 140 volts. X Delta Frequency Test: Nominal Voltage 1. Set V1 and V value previously input to the relay is to the . The Nominal Voltage X described in Section 2.1 and should be recorded on Figure A - 3, Functional Configuration Record Form. 2. Set the frequency of V1 to 0.05 less than Nominal Frequency – DF . 3. Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then slowly increase the frequency of V1 until ® Z LED illuminates, or the pickup indicator illuminates on the IPScom Function Status screen. Output The frequency difference value should be equal to DF  0.0007 Hz or 5 %. 4. Release the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then decrease the frequency of V1. The OUTPUT LED with V1 at Nominal Frequency. will extinguish. If desired, repeat the test using V X 6–15

239 M‑3425A Instruction Book 27 Phase Undervoltage, 3 Phase (#1, #2, #3) ation V1 VOLTAGE INPUTS: Configur CURRENT INPUTS: None Pic kup P TEST SETTINGS: olts (5 to 180) V Time Dela y D Cycles (1 to 8160) Prog rammed Outputs Z OUT (1 to 8) (9 to 23) Expanded I/O  If NOTE 27 #1 and 27 #2 have different pickup settings, it would be efficient to disable the one with the : higher setting first and test the lower setting operation. The higher setting operation could then be tested without disabling the lower setting. Test Setup: 1. Deter mine the Function 27 Phase Undervoltage settings to be tested. ® Enter the Function 27 Phase Under voltage settings to be tested utilizing either the HMI or IPScom 2. Communications Software. 3. Disab le all other functions prior to testing. Refer to Section 3.2, Initial Setup Procedure/Settings, Configure Relay Data subsection, for details that describe disabling/enabling functions. Connect test v 4. oltage inputs as shown in Figure 6-1, Voltage Inputs: Configuration V1. Pickup Test : pushbutton, then slowly decrease the Phase A input voltage the TARGET RESET Press and hold 1. LED illuminates, or the pickup indicator illuminates on the 27 PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE until the IPScom Function Status screen. The v oltage level should be equal to P volts ±0.5 V or ± 0.5%. When both RMS and Line-Ground to   0.75%. 0.8V or Line-Line is selected, the accuracy is 2. Release the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then increase the Phase A input voltage to the nominal OUTPUT LEDs will extinguish. voltage, the 3. TARGET RESET Press the pushbutton to reset targets. Time Test : 1. (Z) so that the timer stops timing when the contacts (Z) close. Connect a timer to output contacts 2. Apply appro ximately ( P – 1) volts and start timing.  The contacts will close after D cycles O 20 cycles or 1%(RMS), or  1 cycle or  0.5% (DFT), whichever is greater. kup Test and Time Test for Phase B and C. 3. Repeat Pic 6–16

240 Testing – 6 27TN Third-Harmonic Undervoltage, Neutral (#1 or #2) VOLTAGE INPUTS: Configuration V2 w See Belo CURRENT INPUTS: kup P TEST SETTINGS: V olts (0.10 to 14.0) Pic ositive Sequence Volt Block PSV olts (5 to 180) P V F FP PU (0.01 to 1.00) orward Power Block verse Power Block RP PU (–1.00 to –0.01) Re Lead VAR Block –V AR PU (–1.00 to –0.01) Lag +V AR PU (0.01 to 1.00) VAR Block ower Factor Block PFLead PU (0.01 to 1.00) Lead P Lag P ower Factor Block PFLag PU (0.01 to 1.00) High Band F HFP PU (0.01 to 1.00) orward Power Block Lo w Band Forward Power Block LFP PU (0.01 to 1.00) Time Dela y D Cycles (1 to 8160) Prog Z OUT ( 1 to 8) rammed Outputs Expanded I/O (9 to 23) NOTE : If 27TN #1 and 27 #2 ha ve different pickup settings, it would be efficient to disable the one with the ■ higher setting first and test the lower setting operation. The higher setting operation could then be tested without disabling the lower setting. Test Setup: 1. Deter mine the Function 27TN Third-Harmonic Undervoltage, Neutral settings to be tested. 2. Enter the Function 27TN Third-Harmonic Undervoltage, Neutral settings to be tested utilizing either ® the HMI or IPScom Communications Software. 3. Disab le all other functions prior to testing. Refer to Section 3.2, Initial Setup Procedure/Settings, Configure Relay Data subsection, for details that describe disabling/enabling functions. 4. Connect test v oltage inputs as shown in Figure 6-2, Voltage Inputs: Configuration V2. Pickup Test : 1. Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then slowly decrease the neutral voltage input 27TN/59D 100% STATOR GND until the LED illuminates, or the pickup indicator illuminates on the P volts ±0.1 V or ±1%. IPScom Function Status screen. The voltage level should be equal to 2. Release the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then increase the neutral voltage to nominal voltage. The OUTPUT LED(s) will extinguish. 3. Press TARGET RESET pushbutton to reset targets. Time Test : 1. (Z) so that the timer stops timing when the contacts (Z) close. Connect a timer to output contacts 1 2. Apply appro ximately ( P –1) volts and start timing. The contacts will close after D cycles within  1%. cycle or  6–17

241 M‑3425A Instruction Book Positive Sequence Voltage Block Test: 1. al voltage input to less than P volts. Decrease the neutr 2. Apply a three phase v oltage input greater than PSV volts. The 27TN/59D 100% STATOR GND LED will illuminate, then the LED will illuminate when OUTPUT the delay setting has timed out. ® 3. Enab le the Positive Sequence Voltage Block utilizing either the HMI or IPScom Communications Software. 4. Decrease the applied three phase v oltage until the OUTPUT LED(s) extinguishes. The v oltage level should be equal to PSV volts ±0.5 V or ±0.5%. 5. Disab le the Positive Sequence Voltage Block utilizing either the HMI or IPScom Communications Software. Forward/Reverse Power Block Test: 1. Apply a three phase nominal v oltage input. The Nominal Voltage value previously input to the relay is described in Section 2.1 and should be recorded on Figure A - 3, Functional Configuration Record Form. Apply a nominal current input consistent with Figure 6-3, Current Inputs: Configuration C1. 2. The Nominal Current value is described in Section 2.1, Configuration and should be recorded on Figure A - 3, Functional Configuration Record Form.  NOTE : The POWER Real p.u. value can be obtained utilizing either the HMI (Status/ ® Power Status) or IPScom Communications Software (Relay/Monitor/Secondary Status). 3. Adjust three phase v oltage and current inputs to obtain a Power Real p.u. value greater than FP . 4. Enab le the Forward Power Block utilizing either the HMI or IPScom Communications Software. 5. Decrease the applied three phase current until the OUTPUT LED(s) extinguishes. The Power Real p.u. value should be equal to FP ±0.01 PU or ±2%. Utilizing either the HMI or IPScom Comm unications Software disable the Forward Power Block and 6. then enable the Reverse Power Block. . Adjust three phase v oltage and current inputs to obtain a Power Real p.u. value greater than RP 7. LED(s) extinguishes. 8. Decrease the applied three phase current until the OUTPUT Power Real p.u. value should be equal to RP ±0.01 PU or ±2%. The 9. Enab le the Reverse Power Block utilizing either the HMI or IPScom Communications Software. Lead/Lag VAr Block Test: 1. Apply a three phase nominal v oltage input. The Nominal Voltage value previously input to the relay is described in Section 2.1 and should be recorded on Figure A 3, Functional Configuration Record Form. - 2. Apply a nominal current input consistent with Figure 6-3, Current Inputs: Configuration C1. The Nominal Current value is described in Section 2.1, Configuration and should be recorded on 3, Functional Configuration Record Form. Figure A - 6–18

242 Testing – 6 ■ : The PO WER Reactive var value can be obtained utilizing either the HMI (Status/Power Status) or NOTE ® Communications Software (Relay/Monitor/Secondary Status). IPScom Adjust three phase v oltage and current inputs to obtain a Power Reactive VAr 3. value greater than –VAR . The 27TN/59D 100% STATOR GND LED will illuminate, then the OUTPUT LED will illuminate when the delay setting has timed out. ® Enab le the Lead VAR Block utilizing either the HMI or IPScom Communications Software. 4. Adjust the applied three phase current phase angles until the OUTPUT LED(s) extinguishes. 5. The Power Reactive var value should be equal to –VAR ±0.01 PU or ±2%. ® 6. Communications Software disable the Lead VAR Block and then Utilizing either the HMI or IPScom enable the Lag VAR Block. 7. Adjust three phase v oltage and current inputs to obtain a Power Reactive var value greater than . +VAR 8. Adjust the applied three phase current phase angles until the OUTPUT LED(s) extinguishes. The Power Reactive var value should be equal to +VAR ±0.01 PU or ±2%. 9. Disab le the Lag VAR Block utilizing either the HMI or IPScom Communications Software. Lead/Lag Power Factor Block Test: 1. Apply a three phase nominal v oltage input. The Nominal Voltage value previously input to the relay is described in Section 2.1 and should be recorded on Figure A - 3, Functional Configuration Record Form. 2. Apply a nominal current input consistent with Figure 6-3, Current Inputs: Configuration C1. The value is described in Section 2.1, Configuration and should be recorded on Nominal Current 3, Functional Configuration Record Form. - Figure A Adjust three phase v oltages and currents to obtain a Lead Power Factor Block value greater than 3. PFLead . The LED will illuminate, then the OUTPUT LED will illuminate when 27TN/59D 100% STATOR GND the delay setting has timed out. 4. Enab le the Power Factor Lead Block utilizing either the HMI or IPScom Communications Software. 5. Adjust three phase v oltage phase angles until the OUTPUT LED(s) extinguishes. The Power Factor Lead Block value should be equal to PFLead ± 0.03 or ± 3%. 6. Disab le the Power Factor Lead Block. 7. le the Power Factor Lag Block. Enab 8. Adjust three phase v oltages and currents to obtain a Lag Power Factor Block value greater than PFLag . The 27TN/59D 100% STATOR GND LED will illuminate, then the OUTPUT LED will illuminate when the delay setting has timed out. 9. Enab le the Power Factor Lag Block utilizing either the HMI or IPScom Communications Software. 10. Adjust three phase v oltage phase angles until the OUTPUT LED(s) extinguishes. The Power Factor Lag Block value should be equal to PFLag ± 0.03 PU or ± 3%. le the Power Factor Lag Block. 11. Disab 6–19

243 M‑3425A Instruction Book Forward Power Block (Band) Test: 1. Apply a three phase nominal v oltage input. Nominal Voltage value previously input to the relay is described in Section 2.1 and should be The recorded on Figure A - 3, Functional Configuration Record Form. 2. Apply a nominal current input consistent with Figure 6-3, Current Inputs: Configuration C1. The Nominal Current value is described in Section 2.1, Configuration and should be recorded on Figure A - 3, Functional Configuration Record Form. 3 . Enab le the High/Low Band Forward Power Block utilizing either the HMI or IPScom Communications Software. Adjust three phase v oltages and currents to obtain a High/Low Forward Power Block value either 4. LFP , or less than the High Band Forward Power greater than the Low Band Forward Power Block HFP Block LED will illuminate, then the The 27TN/59D 100% STATOR GND LED will illuminate when OUTPUT the delay setting has timed out. LED(s) extinguishes. 5. Adjust the three phase current until the OUTPUT The Power Real p.u. value should be within the High Band and Low Band setpoint band ±0.1 PU or ±2%. le the High/Low Band Forward Power Block. 6. Disab 6–20

244 Testing – 6 32 Directional Power, 3 Phase (#1, #2, #3) Configur VOLTAGE INPUTS: ation V1 ation C1 CURRENT INPUTS: Configur kup P TEST SETTINGS: PU (–3.000 to +3.000) Pic y D Cycles (1 to 8160) Time Dela Prog Z OUT (1 to 8) rammed Outputs Expanded I/O (9 to 23) VT Configur ation Line-Ground P (Ov er/Under) ower Sensing #3 Directional P (Real/Reactiv e) ower Sensing NOTE : It would be efficient to disable the element with the lower pickup setting first and test the higher setting ■ operation, since the lower setting operation can be tested without disabling the higher setting. Test Setup: 1. Deter mine the Function 32 Directional Power settings to be tested. ® Enter the Function 32 Directional P ower settings to be tested utilizing either the HMI or IPScom 2. Communications Software. 3. Disab le all other functions prior to testing. Refer to Section 3.2, Initial Setup Procedure/Settings, Configure Relay Data subsection, for details that describe disabling/enabling functions. Connect test v oltage inputs as shown in Figure 6-1, Voltage Inputs: Configuration V1. 4. 5. Connect test current inputs as sho wn in Figure 6-3, Current Inputs: Configuration C1. 6. The le vel of current at which operation is to be expected for an individual power setting is given by P above) by the Nominal Current value previously input to the multiplying the PU pickup value ( relay. The Nominal Current value is described in Section 2.1, Configuration and should be recorded - on Figure A 3, Functional Configuration Record Form. 7. Set the three phase v Nominal Voltage . The Nominal Voltage value previously input oltages to the to the relay is described in Section 2.1 and should be recorded on Figure A - 3, Functional Configura - tion Record Form. Pickup Test , Positive/Forward Over Power Flow: TARGET RESET 1 Press and hold the pushbutton, then slowly increase the three phase currents until . the 32 DIRECTIONAL POWER LED illuminates, or the pickup indicator illuminates on the IPScom Function Status screen. The le vel of operation will be equal to that calculated in Step 6, ±2% or ±0.002 PU, whichever is greater. 2. Release the TARGET RESET pushbutton. 3. Decrease the currents . The OUTPUT LED(s) will extinguish. pushbutton to reset targets. 4. Press TARGET RESET 6–21

245 M‑3425A Instruction Book Pickup Test , Negative/Reverse Over Power Flow: 1. rees from the respective phase voltages. Set the phase currents at 180 deg . 2 Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then slowly increase the three phase currents until ® LED illuminates, or the pickup indicator illuminates on the IPScom the 32 DIRECTIONAL POWER Function Status screen. The level of operation will be equal to that calculated in Step 6, ±2% or ±0.002 PU, whichever is greater. Release the TARGET RESET pushbutton. 3. Decrease the three phase currents . The OUTPUT LED(s) will extinguish. 4. 5. Press the TARGET RESET pushbutton to reset targets. , Positive Forward Under Power Flow: Pickup Test 1. e phase voltages. Set the phase currents in phase with the respectiv 2. Select Under power sensing utilizing either the HMI or IPScom Communications Software. 3. Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then slowly decrease the three phase currents until the LED illuminates, or the pickup indicator illuminates on the IP - 32 DIRECTIONAL POWER Scom Function Status screen. The level of operation will be equal to that calculated in Step 6, ±2% or ±0.002 PU, whichever is greater. 4. Release the TARGET RESET pushbutton. 4. Increase the three phase currents . The OUTPUT LED(s) will extinguish. 5. pushbutton to reset targets. Press the TARGET RESET Negative/Reverse Under Power Flow: Pickup Test , rees from the respective phase voltages. 1. Set the phase currents at 180 deg Press and hold the TARGET RESET 2. pushbutton, then slowly decrease the three phase currents 32 DIRECTIONAL POWER LED illuminates, or the pickup indicator illuminates on the IP - until the Scom Function Status screen. The level of operation will be equal to that calculated in Step 6, ±2% or ±0.002 PU, whichever is greater. 3. Release the TARGET RESET pushbutton. 4. Increase the three phase currents . The OUTPUT LED(s) will extinguish. 5. TARGET RESET pushbutton to reset targets. Press the Pickup Test , Reactive Over Power (Element #3 Only): 1. Set the Three phase voltages, current magnitudes and phase angles to less than the Reactive p.u. pickup level. 2. Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then slowly swing current angles until the 32 DIRECTIONAL POWER LED illuminates, or the pickup indicator illuminates on the IPScom Function Status screen. The level of operation will be equal to the Reactive Pickup ±2% or ±0.002 PU, whichever is greater. 3. Release the TARGET RESET pushbutton. 4. Adjust phase angles until the OUTPUT LED(s) extinguish. pushbutton to reset targets. 5. Press the TARGET RESET 6–22

246 Testing – 6 Pickup Test , Reactive Under Power (Element #3 Only): 1. Set the Three phase voltages, current magnitudes and phase angles to greater than the Reactive p.u. pickup level. 2. TARGET RESET pushbutton, then slowly swing current angles until the Press and hold the ® 32 DIRECTIONAL POWER LED illuminates, or the pickup indicator illuminates on the IPScom Function Status screen. The level of operation will be equal to the Reactive Pickup ±2% or ±0.002 PU, whichever is greater. 3. Release the TARGET RESET pushbutton. 4. Adjust phase angles until the OUTPUT LED(s) extinguish. 5. Press the TARGET RESET pushbutton to reset targets. Time Test : 1. Connect a timer to output contacts (Z) so that the timer stops timing when the contacts (Z) close. 2. Apply approximately 110% of the pickup current and start timing. The contacts will close after D cycles within +16 cycles or ±1%. 6–23

247 M‑3425A Instruction Book 40 Loss of Field (#1 or #2, VC #1 or #2) Configur VOLTAGE INPUTS: ation V1 Configur ation C1 CURRENT INPUTS: Circle Diameter TEST SETTINGS: Ohms (0.1 to 100) P 1 Amp CT Rating (0.5 to 500) O Ohms Offset (–50 to 50) 1 Amp CT Rating (–250 to 250) Time Dela y D Cycles (1 to 8160) V V V olts (5 to 180) oltage Control Dela y with VC Cycles (1 to 8160) Directional Element E Deg rees (0 to 20) rammed Outputs Z OUT (1 to 8) Prog Expanded I/O (9 to 23) VT Configur ation Line-Ground ■ NOTE : ould be efficient to disable the function with the higher “reach” (diameter minus offset) setting It w first (lower current) and test the lower “reach” setting operation. Since the higher setting operation can be tested without disabling the lower setting, the 40 functions will be enabled when the tests are complete. Test Setup: Deter mine the Function 40 Loss of Field settings to be tested. 1. ® Function 40 Loss of Field settings to be tested utilizing either the HMI or IPScom 2. Com - Enter the munications Software. 3. Disab le all other functions prior to testing. Refer to Section 3.2, Initial Setup Procedure/Settings, Configure Relay Data subsection, for details that describe disabling/enabling functions. 4. Connect test v oltage inputs as shown in Figure 6-1, Voltage Inputs: Configuration V1. 5. Connect test current inputs as sho wn in Figure 6-3, Current Inputs: Configuration C1. NOTE :  F or proper testing, use I O 3 x CT rating. 6. The le vel of current at which operation is to be expected for an individual setting is as follows: a. Define “reach” as R ohms = (P ‑ O ohms) where O is usually negative. b . Define “trip current” as I = (Selected Voltage ÷ R ohms) . The voltage level may be selected based on the desired test current level. c. Define “offset current” as IO = (Selected Voltage ÷ O ohms). et Set the three-phase v oltages V s , V , and V 7. to the Selected Voltage value from Step 6, and B A C the phase angle between the voltage and current inputs to 90° (current leading voltage). 6–24

248 Testing – 6 Pickup Test : . Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then slowly increase the three-phase currents until 1 LED illuminates, or the pickup indicator illuminates on the IPScom Function 40 LOSS OF FIELD the ” calculated in Step 6 with the resulting impedance within Status screen. The level will be equal to “ I  0.1 ohms or  5%. If the offset setting is negativ e, continue to increase the three-phase currents until the 2. 40 LOSS OF ® FIELD LED light extinguishes, or the pickup indicator extinguishes on the IPScom Function Status IO ” calculated in Step 6 with the resulting offset impedance within screen. The level will be equal to “ ±0.1 ohms or ±5%. Release the TARGET RESET pushbutton. 3. 4. Decrease the three-phase currents . The OUTPUT LED( s) will extinguish. 5. Press the TARGET RESET pushbutton to reset targets. : Time Test 1. Connect a timer to output contacts (Z) (Z) close. so that the timer stops timing when the contacts 2. Set the three-phase v oltages V value from Step 6, and set the , V Voltage , and V to the Selected C B A phase angle between the voltage and current inputs to 90° (current leading voltage). cycles 3. Apply I D  1 cycle or  1%. + 10% Amps and start timing. Contacts will close after Time Test With Voltage Control : 1. Connect a timer to output contacts (Z) so that the timer stops timing when the contacts (Z) close. Enab le the Voltage Control setting utilizing either the HMI or IPScom Communications Software. 2. 3. Set the three-phase v oltages V to a voltage where the positive sequence voltage is less , V , and V B C A than the Voltage Control setting. 4. Set phase currents and phase angles to estab lish the impedance value within the mho pickup and 1%. start timing. Contacts will close after D cycles  1 cycle or  6–25

249 M‑3425A Instruction Book 46 Negative Sequence Overcurrent Definite Time None VOLTAGE INPUTS: Configur CURRENT INPUTS: ation C1 (MODIFIED) Pic kup Def Time TEST SETTINGS: % (3 to 100) P y D Cycles (1 to 8160) Time Dela Prog rammed Outputs Z OUT (1 to 8) Expanded I/O (9 to 23) ■ Although no voltage input is required for the testing of the 46 function, it is suggested that Nominal NOTE: Voltage be applied to restrain the functions which use both voltage and current inputs for operation. Test Setup: 1. Deter mine the Function 46 Negative Sequence Overcurrent Definite Time settings to be tested. 2. Enter the Function 46 Negativ e Sequence Overcurrent Definite Time settings to be tested utilizing ® either the HMI or IPScom Communications Software. 3. Disab le all other functions prior to testing. Refer to Section 3.2, Initial Setup Procedure/Settings, Configure Relay Data subsection, for details that describe disabling/enabling functions. 4. Connect test current inputs as sho wn in Figure 6-3, Current Inputs: Configuration C1 (Modified). Modify Configuration C1 by exchanging Current Input 2 and 3 (Phase B current = Input 3 and Phase C current = Input 2).  NOTE : 3 x CT rating. F or proper testing, use I ≤ 5. vel of current at which operation is to be expected for an individual setting is given by; Pickup The le % ÷ 100) x Nominal Current previously input to the relay. The P value current = ( Nominal Current 3, Functional Con - is described in Section 2.1, Configuration and should be recorded on Figure A - figuration Record Form. Pickup Test : 1. Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then slowly increase the three-phase currents NEG SEQ OVERCURRENT 46 LED illuminates, or the pickup indicator illuminates on the until the IPScom Function Status screen. The level will be equal to pickup current calculated in Step 5, ±0.5% of 5 A. Release the 2. pushbutton. TARGET RESET 3. Decrease the three-phase currents . The OUTPUT LED(s) will extinguish. 4. Press TARGET RESET pushbutton to reset targets. Time Test : 1. Connect a timer to output contacts (Z) so that the timer stops timing when the contacts (Z) close. 2. Apply current of at least ( 1.1 x pickup ) amps and start timing. The contacts will close after D cycles 1%. within  1 cycle or  6–26

250 Testing – 6 46 Negative Sequence Overcurrent Inverse Time None VOLTAGE INPUTS: Configur ation C1 (MODIFIED) CURRENT INPUTS: kup Inv Time P TEST SETTINGS: % (3 to 100) Pic K (1 to 95) Time Dial Setting um Trip Time Maxim D Cycles (600 to 65,500) Time R Seconds (1 to 600) Reset Prog rammed Outputs OUT (1 to 8) Z Expanded I/O (9 to 23) NOTE: Although no v oltage input is required for the testing of the 46 function, it is suggested that Nominal ■ Volts be applied to restrain the functions which use both voltage and current inputs for operation. Test Setup: 1. Deter mine the Function 46 Negative Sequence Overcurrent Inverse Time settings to be tested. 2. Enter the Function 46 Negativ e Sequence Overcurrent Inverse Time settings to be tested utilizing ® either the HMI or IPScom Communications Software. 3. Disab le all other functions prior to testing. Refer to Section 3.2, Initial Setup Procedure/Settings, Configure Relay Data subsection, for details that describe disabling/enabling functions. Connect test current inputs as sho wn in Figure 6-3, Current Inputs: Configuration C1 (Modified). 4. Modify Configuration C1 by exchanging Current Input 2 and 3 (Phase B current = Input 3 and Phase C current = Input 2).  NOTE : F or proper testing, use I ≤ 3 x CT rating. 5. The current pic kup level at a percentage setting is: Pickup current = ( P % ÷ 100) x Nominal Current previously input to the relay. T est levels may be chosen at any percentages of Nominal Current which are a minimum of 5% a. higher than the pickup percentage, P% . (Suggest 4 or 5 test levels chosen and calculated in amps.) b . The Nominal Current value is described in Section 2.1, Configuration and should be recorded - on Figure A 3, Functional Configuration Record Form. Time Test : 1. (Z) Connect a timer to output contacts (Z) so that the timer stops timing when the contacts close. Apply currents equal to the chosen test le vels calculated in Step 5 and start timing. The operating 2. time will be as read from Figure 2 - 31, Negative Sequence Inverse Time Curves, negative sequence current in % of Nominal Current and appropriate K (Time Dial) setting, or the maximum trip time (whichever is faster).  NOTE : If retesting is required, power should be removed from the unit or wait R seconds before the next test to assure resetting of the timer. 3. Repeat Step 2 f or all test levels chosen. Reset Time Test : 1. Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton. Reduce the applied v oltage and start timing when the voltage decreases to less than the pickup 2. value, stop timing when the TARGET LED extinguishes, or the pickup indicator extinguishes on the IPScom Function Status screen. The time should be approximately equal to the reset time setting R .  NOTE : If retesting is required, po wer should be removed from the unit or wait for the reset time before the next test to assure resetting of the timer. 6–27

251 M‑3425A Instruction Book 49 Stator Overload Protection (#1, #2) None VOLTAGE INPUTS: CURRENT INPUTS: Configur ation C1 Time Constant τ Min utes TEST SETTINGS: (1.0 to 999.9) erload Current I (1 to 10) Amps Max Ov max 1 Amp CT Rating (.2 to 2) Prog rammed Outputs Z OUT (1 to 8) (9 to 23) Expanded I/O Test Setup: Deter mine the Function 49 Stator Overload settings to be tested. This test requires that the values 1. Chapter 2 for the following elements (described in detail in Application ) be determined: , • τ = time constant • I = pre-load current 0 • I = maximum allowed continuous overload current max ® 2. Enter the Function 49 Stator Ov erload settings to be tested utilizing either the HMI or IPScom Communications Software. Disab le all other functions prior to testing. Refer to Section 3.2, Initial Setup Procedure/Settings, 3. Configure Relay Data subsection, for details that describe disabling/enabling functions. 4. Connect test current inputs as sho wn in Figure 6-3, Current Inputs: Configuration C1. 5. (time to trip in minutes) for the desired test settings as follows: Calculate t Where:                        t = time to trip in minutes Where: τ = time constant = relay current (applied) I L I = pre-load current PL I = maximum allowed continuous overload current max Pickup Test : STATOR and hold the TARGET RESET Press 1. pushbutton, then slowly increase the current until the LED illuminates or the pickup indicator illuminates on the IPScom Function Status OVERLOAD 49 screen. The current le vel of operation will be ( I 3%. ) Amps  0.1 A (  0.02 Amp for 1 A CT) or  max TARGET RESET Release the 2. pushbutton, then decrease the current. The OUTPUT LED will extin - guish. button to remove targets. 3. Press TARGET RESET 6–28

252 Testing – 6 Time Test (Cold Start) : (Z) so that the timer stops timing when the contacts (Z) close. 1. Connect a timer to output contacts NOTE The 49 Stator Ov erload 49 #1 and 49 #2 current values can be obtained utilizing either the HMI  : ® (Status/Current Status) or IPScom Communications Software (Relay/Monitor/Secondary Status). 2. Deter mine the 49 Stator Overload 49 #1 and 49 #2 current values. If the either value is greater than 0.00 A, then remove power from the relay and then reapply power to reset the current values. Apply a three phase current (I) to the relay greater than ( I ) Amps and start timing. 3. max The time to tr ip should be t minutes  5 %. Time Test (Preload) : 1. Connect a timer to output contacts (Z) so that the timer stops timing when the contacts (Z) close.  NOTE : The 49 Stator Ov erload 49 #1 and 49 #2 current values can be obtained utilizing either the HMI (Status/Current Status) or IPScom Communications Software (Relay/Monitor/Secondary Status). 2. Deter mine the 49 Stator Overload 49 #1 and 49 #2 current values. If the either value is greater than 0.00 A, then remove power from the relay and then reapply power to reset the current values. 3. Apply a three phase preload current to the rela y equal to ( I ) Amps and allow current readings to O stabilize. 4. Apply a three phase current (I) to the relay greater than ( I ) Amps and start timing. max 5 %. The time to tr ip should be t minutes  6–29

253 M‑3425A Instruction Book 50 Instantaneous Phase Overcurrent (#1, #2) VOLTAGE INPUTS: None CURRENT INPUTS: Configur ation C1 Pic kup P Amps TEST SETTINGS: (0.1 to 240.0) (0.1 to 48.0) 1 Amp CT Rating y Cycles (1 to 8160) Dela Prog rammed Outputs Z OUT (1 to 8) (9 to 23) Expanded I/O NOTE : Although no v oltage input is required for the testing of the 50 function, it is suggested that Nominal  Volts be applied to restrain the functions which use both voltage and current inputs for operation. Test Setup : 1. Deter mine the Function 50 Instantaneous Phase Overcurrent settings to be tested. 2. Enter the Function 50 Instantaneous Phase Ov ercurrent settings to be tested utilizing either the HMI ® or IPScom Communications Software. 3. le all other functions prior to testing. Refer to Section 3.2, Initial Setup Procedure/Settings, Disab Configure Relay Data subsection, for details that describe disabling/enabling functions. Connect test current inputs as sho wn in Figure 6-3, Current Inputs: Configuration C1. 4. : Pickup Test 1 Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then slowly increase Current Input 3 (Phase C) PHASE OVERCURRENT 50 LED illuminates, or the pickup indicator illuminates on the until the IPScom Function Status screen. The current le vel of operation will be ( P ) amps ±0.1 amps or ±3%. 2. Release the TARGET RESET pushbutton. Decrease the current input. 3. OUTPUT The LED(s) will extinguish. Press the TARGET RESET pushbutton to reset targets. 4. Time Test : 1. Connect a timer to output contacts (Z) so that the timer stops timing when the contacts (Z) close.  Apply appro ximately 110% of P amps and start timing. The operating time will be 2. 1 cycle or 1%. 3. Reduce Current Input 3, to 0 amps . est may be repeated using Current Inputs 1 (Phase A) and 2 (Phase B) individually. 4. T 6–30

254 Testing – 6 50BF/50BF-N Breaker Failure None VOLTAGE INPUTS: ation C3 CURRENT INPUTS: Configur kup P Amps TEST SETTINGS: 50BF-Ph Pic (0.10 to 10.00) (0.02 to 2.00) 1 Amp CT Rating N Amps (0.10 to 10.00) 50BF-N Pic kup 1 Amp CT Rating (.02 to 2.00) y Time Dela D Cycles (1 to 8160) Break er Failure Initiate B OUT (1 to 8) Input Initiate IN (1 to 6) I Expanded I/O (7 to 14) rammed Outputs Prog Z OUT (1 to 8) Expanded I/O (9 to 23) Test Setup: 1. Disab le all other functions prior to testing. Refer to Section 3.2, Initial Setup Procedure/Settings, Configure Relay Data subsection, for details that describe disabling/enabling functions. 2. Connect test current inputs as sho wn in Figure 6-5, Current Inputs: Configuration C3. Current Input #2 only. Test Setup for 50BF-Ph Generator Breaker Failure Operation: 1. Deter mine the Function 50BF-Ph Generator Breaker Failure settings to be tested. ® Utilizing either the HMI or IPScom 2. Communications Software enter the following settings: a. le the 50BF-Phase Element and disable the 50BF-Neutral Element Enab D . 50BF-Ph Pic kup Setting > b amps, Time delay setting = cycles. P Testing 50BF-Ph Generator Breaker Failure Operation : 1. Exter nally short any ONE set of contacts (I) IN shown above. Shor t IN1 (connect contacts 10 & 11) to simulate 52b contact closure (breaker open). Alternatively, 2. the external contact may be operated if all connections are made. pushbutton, then slowly increase Current Input 3 until the . Press and hold the TARGET RESET 3 50BF BREAKER FAILURE LED illuminates, or the pickup indicator illuminates on the IPScom Function Status screen. The current le vel of operation will be ( P ) amps ±0.1 amps or ±2%. 4. Release the TARGET RESET pushbutton. 5. The Decrease the current input. OUTPUT LED(s) extinguish. 6. Press the TARGET RESET pushbutton to reset targets. Time Test 50BF-Ph Generator Breaker Failure Operation : Connect a timer to output contacts (Z) so that the timer stops timing when the contacts (Z) close. 1. 2. Apply appro ximately 110% of P amps and start timing. The operating time will be D cycles within  1 cycle or  1%. . 3. Reduce Current Input 3, to 0 amps 6–31

255 M‑3425A Instruction Book Test Setup for 50BF-N Generator Breaker Failure Operation: 1. mine the Function 50BF-Ph Generator Breaker Failure settings to be tested. Deter ® Communications Software enter the following settings: 2. Utilizing either the HMI or IPScom Enab le the 50BF-Neutral Element and the 50BF-Phase Element a. b 50BF-N Pic kup Setting > N amps, 50BF-Ph Pickup Setting < P amps, Time delay . setting = D cycles. Testing 50BF-N Generator Breaker Failure Operation :, 1. Shor t IN1 (connect contacts 10 & 11) to simulate 52b contact closure (breaker open). 50BF . Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then slowly increase Current Input 3 until the 3 BREAKER FAILURE LED illuminates, or the pickup indicator illuminates on the IPScom Function Status screen. The current le vel of operation will be ( N ) amps ±0.1 amps or ±2%. Release the TARGET RESET pushbutton. 4. 5. Decrease the current input. The OUTPUT LED(s) extinguish. 6. Press the TARGET RESET pushbutton to reset targets. : Time Test 50BF-N Generator Breaker Failure Operation 1. (Z) so that the timer stops timing when the contacts (Z) close. Connect a timer to output contacts 2. Apply appro ximately 110% of N amps and start timing. The operating time will be D cycles within 1 cycle or  1%.  3. Reduce Current Input 3, to 0 amps . Test Setup for HV Breaker Failure Operation: 1. Utilizing either the HMI or IPScom Comm unications Software enter the following settings: a. Disab le the 50BF-Neutral Element and 50BF-Phase Element. b . Select 1 input initiate from #2 to #6, utilizing either the HMI or IPScom Comm unications Software. c. Time dela y setting = D cycles Input 1 IN breaker closed state. d. Testing HV Breaker Failure Operation : 1. Connect a timer to output contacts (Z) so that the timer stops timing when the contacts (Z) close. 2. Initiate oper ation by externally shorting any ONE set of contacts ( I ) IN except Input 1 above. Remove 1%. short from Input (1) IN. The operating time will be D cycles within  1 cycle or  6–32

256 Testing – 6 50/27 Inadvertent Energizing VOLTAGE INPUTS: Configur ation V1 Configur ation C1 CURRENT INPUTS: kup TEST SETTINGS: Amps (0.50 to 15.00) 50 Pic P (.01 to 3.00) 1 Amp CT Rating 27 Pic V V olts (5 to 130) kup kup Delay D Cycles (1 to 8160) Pic Dropout Dela y T Cycles (1 to 8160) Prog Z OUT (1 to 8) rammed Outputs Expanded I/O (9 to 23) Test Setup: Deter mine the Function 50/27 Inadvertent Energizing settings to be tested. 1. 2. Enter the Function 50/27 Inadv ertent Energizing settings to be tested utilizing either the HMI or ® Communications Software. IPScom 3. Disab le all other functions prior to testing. Refer to Section 3.2, Initial Setup Procedure/Settings, Configure Relay Data subsection, for details that describe disabling/enabling functions. 4. Connect test v oltage inputs as shown in Figure 6-1, Voltage Inputs: Configuration V1. 5. Connect test current inputs as sho wn in Figure 6-3, Current Inputs: Configuration C1. 50 Overcurrent Test and 27 Undervoltage Test : 1. Set Voltage inputs to zero volts, then verify the Pickup Time Delay times out after a minimum of D cycles. 2. TARGET RESET pushbutton, then slowly increase the Phase A current (Input Press and hold the LED illuminates, or the pickup indicator illuminates on 50/27 INADVERTENT ENRGNG 1) until the the IPScom Function Status screen. The le vel of operation will be ( P ) amps ±0.1 A or ±2%. 3. If desired, set the dropout time delay ( T ) to minimum setting. Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then slowly increase the voltage input in stages 4. T 50/27 INADVERTENT ENRGNG (waiting at least cycles between each voltage change) until the LED extinguishes, or the pickup indicator extinguishes on the IPScom Function Status screen. The le vel of operation will be V volts ±0.5 Volts. 27 Pickup Delay and Dropout Delay Test : 1. Connect a timer to output contacts (Z) so that the timer stops timing when the contacts (Z) close. 2. Input appro ximately 110% of P amps (pickup setting). 3. Reduce voltage to 20% below D setting and start timing. The operating time to close will be D cycles within 1 cycle or  1%.  4. Input appro ximately 110% of V volts (pickup setting) and start timing. The operating time to open will be T cycles within  1 cycle or  1%.  20 cycles or ±1%. NOTE : When RMS (total w aveform) is selected, timing accuracy is O 6–33

257 M‑3425A Instruction Book 50DT Definite Time Overcurrent (for split-phase differential), #1 or #2 VOLTAGE INPUTS: None ation C2 Configur CURRENT INPUTS: Pic kup A Phase TEST SETTINGS: A Amps (0.20 to 240.00) 1 Amp CT Rating (0.04 to 48.00) Pic B Amps (0.20 to 240.00) kup B Phase 1 Amp CT Rating (0.04 to 48.00) Pic C Amps (0.20 to 240.00) kup C Phase 1 Amp CT Rating (0.04 to 48.00) Dela Cycles (1 to 8160) y (1 to 8) Prog OUT rammed Outputs Z Expanded I/O (9 to 23)  : A NOTE lthough no voltage input is required for the testing of the 50DT function, it is suggested that Nominal Volts be applied to restrain the functions which use both voltage and current inputs for operation. If other functions operate during these tests they will need to also be disabled for the test and enabled after the tests are complete. Test Setup: Deter mine the Function 50DT Definite Time Overcurrent settings to be tested. 1. 2. Enter the Function 50DT Definite Time Overcurrent settings to be tested utilizing either the HMI or ® IPScom Communications Software. 3. le the functions listed above. Refer to Section 3.2, Initial Setup Procedure/Settings, Configure Disab Relay Data subsection, for details that describe disabling/enabling functions. 4. Connect test current inputs as sho wn in Figure 6-4, Current Inputs: Configuration C2. Set the three-phase v oltages V 5. value , and V Nominal Voltage to the Nominal Voltage. The , V C B A - 3, previously input to the relay is described in Section 2.1 and should be recorded on Figure A Functional Configuration Record Form. : Pickup Test 1. Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then slowly increase the Phase A Current Input PHASE OVERCURRENT 50 LED illuminates, or the pickup indicator illuminates on the until the IPScom Function Status screen. The current le vel of operation will be ( A ) amps ±0.1 amps or ±3%. 2. Release the TARGET RESET pushbutton. 3. Decrease the Phase A Current Input. The OUTPUT LED(s) will extinguish. 4. Press the TARGET RESET pushbutton to reset targets. Time Test : 1. Connect a timer to output contacts (Z) so that the timer stops timing when the contacts (Z) close. amps and start timing. The operating time will be Apply appro ximately 110% of A  1 cycle or  1%, 2. whichever is greater. 3. Reduce Phase A Current Input to 0 amps . 4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 f or Phase B & C. , enable any functions disabled for this test. 5. If testing is complete 6–34

258 Testing – 6 50N Instantaneous Neutral Overcurrent None VOLTAGE INPUTS: CURRENT INPUTS: As descr ibed Pic kup P Amps (0.1 to 240.0) TEST SETTINGS: (0.1 to 48.0) 1 Amp CT Rating y Time Dela D Cycles (1 to 8160) Prog rammed Outputs Z OUT (1 to 8) (9 to 23) Expanded I/O NOTE : Although no voltage input is required for the testing of the 50N function, it is suggested that Nominal  Volts be applied to restrain the functions which use both voltage and current inputs for operation. Test Setup: 1. Deter mine the Function 50N Instantaneous Neutral Overcurrent settings to be tested. 2. Enter the Function 50N Instantaneous Neutr al Overcurrent settings to be tested utilizing either the ® Communications Software. HMI or IPScom 3. Disab le all other functions prior to testing. Refer to Section 3.2, Initial Setup Procedure/Settings, Configure Relay Data subsection, for details that describe disabling/enabling functions. Pickup Test : Press and hold the pushbutton, then slowly increase Current Input I (terminals 1. TARGET RESET N NEUTRAL O/C 50N/51N LED illuminates, or the pickup indicator illuminates on 53 and 52) until the the IPScom Function Status screen. The current le vel of operation will be ( P ) amps ±0.1 amps or ±3%. 2. Release the TARGET RESET pushbutton. 3. Decrease Current Input I LED(s) will extinguish. . The OUTPUT N 4. Press the TARGET RESET pushbutton to reset targets. Time Test : 1. Connect a timer to output contacts (Z) so that the timer stops timing when the contacts (Z) close. amps to Current Input I Apply appro ximately 110% of P 2. (terminals 53 and 52) and start timing. The N operating time will be D cycles ±1 Cycle or ±1%. to 0 amps. 3. Reduce Current Input I N 6–35

259 M‑3425A Instruction Book 51N Inverse Time Neutral Overcurrent None VOLTAGE INPUTS: CURRENT INPUTS: As descr ibed Pic kup P Amps TEST SETTINGS: (0.25 to 12.00) (0.05 to 2.40) 1 Amp CT Rating Curves BECO Time (definite time/in verse/very inverse/extremely inverse) Time Dial Setting K (0.5 to 11.0) 1 IEC In verse Time Curves: (in verse/very inverse/extremely inverse/long time inverse) ves IEE Cur (moder ately inverse/very inverse/extremely inverse) Time Dial Setting K (0.5 to 15.0) Prog rammed Outputs Z OUT (1 to 8) Expanded I/O (9 to 23) 1 Either a standard curve or an IEC curve must be selected. NOTE: Although no voltage input is required for the testing of the 51N function, it is suggested that Nominal  Volts be applied to restrain the functions which use both voltage and current inputs for operation. Test Setup: 1. Deter mine the Function 51N Inverse Time Neutral Overcurrent settings to be tested. Enter the Function 51N In verse Time Neutral Overcurrent settings to be tested utilizing either the 2. ® HMI or IPScom Communications Software. 3. Disab le all other functions prior to testing. Refer to Section 3.2, Initial Setup Procedure/Settings, Configure Relay Data subsection, for details that describe disabling/enabling functions. 4. Ref er to Appendix D, Figures D5–D12, or Tables D - 1A and D - 1B. Test levels may be chosen in terms of multiples of pickup value and associated time in seconds. (Suggest 4 or 5 test levels chosen and calculated in amps.) Time Test : 1. (Z) so that the timer stops timing when the contacts (Z) close. Connect a timer to output contacts 2. Apply current equal to the chosen test le vel calculated in Step 6 to Current Input I (Terminals 53 N and 52) and start timing. Oper ating time will be within ±3 cycles or ±3% whichever is greater. 3. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 f or all test levels chosen. The tested points verify the operating times of the function. 6–36

260 Testing – 6 51V Inverse Time Phase Overcurrent with Voltage Control/Restraint ation V1 VOLTAGE INPUTS: Configur ation C1 Configur CURRENT INPUTS: Pic kup TEST SETTINGS: P Amps (0.50 to 12.00) 1 Amp CT Rating (0.10 to 2.40) Curves BECO Time (definite time/in verse/very inverse/extremely inverse) Time Dial Setting K (0.5 to 11.0) 1 IEC In verse Time Curves: (in verse/very inverse/extremely inverse/long time inverse) IEE Cur ves (moder ately inverse/very inverse/extremely inverse) K (0.5 to 15.0) Time Dial Setting Prog rammed Outputs Z OUT (1 to 8) (9 to 23) Expanded I/O 1 Either a standard curve or an IEC curve must be selected. Test Setup: Deter mine the Function 51V Inverse Time Phase Overcurrent settings to be tested. 1. Enter the Function 51V In verse Time Phase Overcurrent settings to be tested utilizing either the 2. ® Communications Software. HMI or IPScom Disab 3. le all other functions prior to testing. Refer to Section 3.2, Initial Setup Procedure/Settings, Configure Relay Data subsection, for details that describe disabling/enabling functions. oltage inputs as shown in Figure 6-1, Voltage Inputs: Configuration V1. 4. Connect test v Connect test current inputs as sho wn in Figure 6-3, Current Inputs: Configuration C1 5. T est levels may be chosen at any ampere values which are a minimum of 50% higher than the 6. . It is suggested that the user select 4 or 5 test levels to verify curve. pickup amps, P Amps : Pickup Test Voltage Control or Voltage Restraint is enabled, then disable 51V Voltage Control/Restraint If 1. utilizing either the HMI or IPScom Communications Software. . TARGET RESET pushbutton, then slowly increase the Phase A Current Input 2 Press and hold the PHASE OVERCURRENT 51V LED illuminates, or the pickup indicator illuminates on until the the IPScom Function Status screen. The current le vel of operation will equal P Amps ±0.1A or ±1%. 3. TARGET RESET pushbutton. Release the OUTPUT . The assigned 4. LED(s) will extinguish. Reduce the Phase A Current Input to 0 amps Press the TARGET RESET pushbutton to reset targets. 5. Time Test : 1. Connect a timer to output contacts (Z) so that the timer stops timing when the contacts (Z) close. 2. If Voltage Control or Voltage Restraint is enabled, then disable 51V Voltage Control/Restraint utilizing either the HMI or IPScom Communications Software. 6–37

261 M‑3425A Instruction Book Apply current equal to the chosen test le vel calculated in Step 6 to Phase A Current Input and 3. start timing. The operating time will be as read from the appropriate Inverse Curve Family and - 5 through D - 8, or Tables D (Time Dial) setting in Appendix D, Figures D 1A through D - 1B. The K - accuracy specified is valid for currents above 1.5 times the pickup current. 4. . The OUTPUT LED(s) will extinguish. Reduce Phase A Current Input to 0 amps Press the TARGET RESET pushbutton to reset targets. 5. 6. Repeat Steps 3, 4 and 5 f or all test levels chosen. Voltage Control Test : ® If Voltage Control is disabled, then enable 51V Voltage Control utilizing either the HMI or IPScom 1. Communications Software. TARGET RESET Press and hold the 2. pushbutton, then slowly increase the Phase A (B,C) Current Input until the PHASE OVERCURRENT 51V LED illuminates, or the pickup indicator illuminates on the IPScom Function Status screen. Release the TARGET RESET pushbutton. 3. 4. When the assigned OUTPUT LED(s) illuminates, then increase the Phase A(B ,C) Input Voltage to at least 0.5 Volts greater than V Volts . ±0.5 V or ±0.5%. The assigned OUTPUT LED(s) will extinguish at V Volts 5. TARGET RESET pushbutton to reset targets. Press the ,C) Current Input to 0 amps. 6. Reduce Phase A (B 7. Decrease the Phase A (B ,C) Input Voltage to Nominal Voltage. The Nominal Voltage value previously input to the relay is described in Section 2.1 and should be - 3, Functional Configuration Record Form. recorded on Figure A Voltage Restraint Test: 1. If Voltage Restraint is disabled, then enable 51V Voltage Restraint utilizing either the HMI or IPScom Communications Software. 2. Set P Amps equal to 2 Amps utilizing either the HMI or IPScom Communications Software. 3. Apply current equal to 1.5 Amps to the Phase Current Input. 4. ,C) Input Voltage to 75% of Nominal Voltage. The Nominal Voltage value Increase the Phase A (B previously input to the relay is described in Section 2.1 and should be recorded on Figure A - 3, Functional Configuration Record Form . The PHASE OVERCURRENT 51V LED will illuminate, or the pickup indicator illuminates on the IPScom Function Status screen. 5. Repeat Steps 2, 3 and 4 with reduced input v oltage values and current reduced by the same per - 44). centage as value (see Figure 2 - 6–38

262 Testing – 6 59 Phase Overvoltage, 3-Phase (#1, #2, #3) Configur VOLTAGE INPUTS: ation V1 CURRENT INPUTS: None Volts (5 to 180) Pickup TEST SETTINGS: P D (1 to 8160) Time Dela y Cycles Voltage Select (Phase , Positive or Negative Sequence) Input rammed Outputs Z OUT (1 to 8) Prog Expanded I/O (9 to 23) NOTE : If 59 #1 and 59 #2 have different pickup settings, it would be efficient to disable the one with the  lower setting first and test the higher setting operation. The lower setting operation could then be tested without disabling the higher setting. Test Setup: 1. Deter mine the Function 59 RMS Overvoltage settings to be tested. ® Enter the Function 59 RMS Ov ervoltage settings to be tested utilizing either the HMI or IPScom 2. Communications Software. 3. Disab le all other functions prior to testing. Refer to Section 3.2, Initial Setup Procedure/Settings, Configure Relay Data subsection, for details that describe disabling/enabling functions. Connect test v oltage inputs as shown in Figure 6-1, Voltage Inputs: Configuration V1. 4. 5. Set the three-phase v oltages V , V Nominal Voltage. , and V to the B C A Nominal Voltage value previously input to the relay is described in Section 2.1 and should be The - 3, Functional Configuration Record Form. recorded on Figure A Pickup Test : Press and hold the pushbutton, then slowly increase the Phase A Voltage Input 1. TARGET RESET 59 PHASE OVERVOLTAGE LED illuminates, or the pickup indicator illuminates on the until the IPScom Function Status screen. The v oltage level of operation should be equal to P Volts ±0.5 V or ±0.5%. When both RMS and  0.8V or  0.75% Line-Ground to Line-Line is selected, the accuracy is Release the TARGET RESET pushbutton. 2. 3. Decrease the Phase A Voltage Input to Nominal Voltage . The OUTPUT LED(s) will extinguish. 4. Press the TARGET RESET pushbutton to reset targets. Time Test : 1. (Z) so that the timer stops timing when the contacts (Z) close. Connect a timer to output contacts 2. Apply ( P +1) Volts to the Phase A (B,C) Voltage Input and start timing. The contacts will close after  D  1 cycle or  1% (DFT) or within O 20 cycles or cycles 1% (RMS). 3. Reduce Phase A (B ,C) Voltage Input to Nominal Voltage . or Phase B & C. 4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 f 6–39

263 M‑3425A Instruction Book 59D Third-Harmonic Voltage Differential ibed VOLTAGE INPUTS: As descr None CURRENT INPUTS: Ratio TEST SETTINGS: (0.1 to 5.0) Time Dela y D Cycles (1 to 8160) Side Voltage LSV Line (V Calculated) or 3V O X Prog rammed Outputs Z OUT (1 to 8) (9 to 23) Expanded I/O Test Setup: Deter mine the Function 59D Third-Harmonic Voltage Differential settings to be tested. 1. 2. Enter the Function 59D Third-Harmonic Voltage Differential settings to be tested utilizing either the ® HMI or IPScom Communications Software. 3. Disab le all other functions prior to testing. Refer to Section 3.2, Initial Setup Procedure/Settings, Configure Relay Data subsection, for details that describe disabling/enabling functions. 4. Connect a v oltage input to V at 180 Hz (150 Hz for 50 Hz unit) terminal numbers 44 and 45. N Pickup Test :  NOTE: is being used, then use anyone of the phase voltages or all three at zero sequence. If 3V O Apply a v oltage less than V to the selected line side voltage (V 1. or 3V ) at 180 Hz (150 Hz for O N X 50 Hz unit). Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then slowly increase Voltage to the selected line 2. side Input (V LED illuminates, or the pickup indicator or 3V ) until the 59D THIRD HARM VOLT DIFF 0 X illuminates on the IPScom Function Status screen. 2. Release the TARGET RESET pushbutton. OUTPUT 3. Decrease the Voltage Input (V or 3V LED(s) will ) to less than the ratio pickup level. The 0 X extinguish. Press the TARGET RESET pushbutton to reset targets. 4. Time Test : 1. Connect a timer to output contacts (Z) so that the timer stops timing when the contacts (Z) close. 2. Apply a v oltage greater than the ratio pickup level and start timing. The contacts will close after D cycles within  1 cycle or  1%.  20 cycles or ±1%. NOTE : When RMS (total w aveform) is selected, timing accuracy is O 6–40

264 Testing – 6 59N Overvoltage, Neutral Circuit or Zero Sequence (#1, #2, #3) ibed VOLTAGE INPUTS: As descr CURRENT INPUTS: None P TEST SETTINGS: Volts (5.0 to 180) Pickup y Cycles (1 to 8160) Time Dela D Prog rammed Outputs Z OUT (1 to 8) Expanded I/O (9 to 23)  NOTE: If 59N #1 and 59N #2 have different pickup settings, it would be efficient to disable the one with the lower setting first and test the higher setting operation. The lower setting operation could then be tested without disabling the higher setting. Test Setup: 1. Deter mine the Function 59N RMS Overvoltage settings to be tested. ® 2. Enter the Function 59N RMS Ov ervoltage settings to be tested utilizing either the HMI or IPScom Communications Software. 3. Disab le all other functions prior to testing. Refer to Section 3.2, Initial Setup Procedure/Settings, Configure Relay Data subsection, for details that describe disabling/enabling functions. 4. Connect a v oltage input to V terminal numbers 44 and 45. N Pickup Test : until the 1. TARGET RESET pushbutton, then slowly increase Voltage Input V Press and hold the N 59N NEUT/GND OVERVOLT LED illuminates, or the pickup indicator illuminates on the IPScom Function Status screen. oltage level of operation should be equal to P Volts ±0.5 V or ±0.5%. The v 2. Release the TARGET RESET pushbutton. 3. Decrease the Voltage Input V LED(s) will extinguish. to 0 volts. The OUTPUT N 4. Press the TARGET RESET pushbutton to reset targets. Time Test : 1. Connect a timer to output contacts (Z) so that the timer stops timing when the contacts (Z) close. D Apply ( P +1) Volts and start timing. The contacts will close after 2. cycles within  1 cycle or  1%. When 64S is purchased, the time delay accuracy is –1 to +5 cycles. 6–41

265 M‑3425A Instruction Book 59X Multi-purpose Overvoltage (#1 or #2) As descr ibed VOLTAGE INPUTS: CURRENT INPUTS: None Pickup P TEST SETTINGS: Volts (5.0 to 180.0) Time Dela y D Cycles (1 to 8160) Prog rammed Outputs Z OUT (1 to 8) (9 to 23) Expanded I/O NOTE:  If 59X #1 and 59X #2 ha ve different pickup settings, it would be efficient to disable the one with the lower setting first and test the higher setting operation. The lower setting operation could then be tested without disabling the higher setting. Test Setup: 1. Deter mine the Function 59X Overvoltage settings to be tested. ® Enter the Function 59X Overvoltage settings to be tested utilizing either the HMI or IPScom Com- 2. munications Software. 3. Disab le all other functions prior to testing. Refer to Section 3.2, Initial Setup Procedure/Settings, Configure Relay Data subsection, for details that describe disabling/enabling functions. 4. terminal numbers 64 and 65. Connect a v oltage input to V X Pickup Test : 1. TARGET RESET pushbutton, then slowly increase Voltage Input V until the 59N Press and hold the X NEUT/GND OVERVOLT LED illuminates, or the pickup indicator illuminates on the IPScom Function Status screen. Volts The v oltage level of operation should be equal to P ±0.5 V or ±0.5%. 2. Release the TARGET RESET pushbutton. 3. LED(s) will extinguish. Decrease the Voltage Input V OUTPUT to 0 volts. The X 4. Press the TARGET RESET pushbutton to reset targets. Time Test : (Z) 1. Connect a timer to output contacts close. so that the timer stops timing when the contacts (Z) +1) Volts and start timing. The contacts will close after 1%. 2. Apply ( P D cycles within  1 cycle or  6–42

266 Testing – 6 60FL VT Fuse Loss Detection VOLTAGE INPUTS: Configur ation V1 Configur ation C1 CURRENT INPUTS: y TEST SETTINGS: Cycles (1 to 8160) Time Dela D rammed Outputs Z OUT (1 to 8) Prog (9 to 23) Expanded I/O  NOTE: It is necessar y for “FL” to be designated as an initiating input (see Section 2.3, Setpoints and Time Settings) before this function can be tested. NOTE: Ref er to Figure 2-52, Fuse Loss (60FL) Function Logic, for single phase and three phase fuse loss.  Test Setup: Deter mine the Function 60FL VT Fuse Loss Detection settings to be tested. 1. VT Fuse Loss Detection settings to be tested utilizing either the HMI or 2. Enter the Function 60FL ® Communications Software. (FL initiate must be selected for this test.) IPScom Disab le all other functions prior to testing. Refer to Section 3.2, Initial Setup Procedure/Settings, 3. Configure Relay Data subsection, for details that describe disabling/enabling functions. 4. Connect test v oltage inputs as shown in Figure 6-1, Voltage Inputs: Configuration V1. 5. Connect test current inputs as sho wn in Figure 6-3, Current Inputs: Configuration C1. 6. Set the three-phase v oltages V value The Nominal Voltage , and V to the Nominal Voltage. , V C B A previously input to the relay is described in Section 2.1 and should be recorded on Figure A - 3, Functional Configuration Record Form. : Time Test 1. (Z) so that the timer stops timing when the contacts (Z) close. Connect a timer to output contacts Disconnect the Phase A (B ,C) Voltage Input and start timing. The 60FL V.T. FUSE LOSS LED and 2. LEDs will illuminate, or the pickup indicator illuminates on the IPScom Function Status Z Output screen. ating time will be D cycles within  1 cycle or  1%. The oper Reconnect the Phase A (B ,C) Voltage Input. 3. Press the TARGET RESET pushbutton to reset targets. 4. 5. Repeat Steps 2, 3 and 4 f or Phase B and C. Time Test - Three Phase Fuse Loss : 1. close. Connect a timer to output contacts (Z) so that the timer stops timing when the contacts (Z) 2. Enab le Three Phase Fuse Loss Detection utilizing either the HMI or IPScom Communications Soft - ware. 3. Disconnect Phase A, B and C Voltage Inputs and start timing. The 60FL V.T. FUSE LOSS LED and Output LEDs will illuminate, or the pickup indicator illuminates on the IPScom Function Status Z screen. The operating time will be D cycles within  1 cycle or  1%. 4. Reconnect the Phase A, B and C Voltage Inputs. pushbutton to reset targets. 5. Press the TARGET RESET 6–43

267 M‑3425A Instruction Book 64F Field Ground Protection (#1 or #2) None VOLTAGE INPUTS: CURRENT INPUTS: None Pic kup P TEST SETTINGS: (5 to 100) kOhms y D Time Dela Cycles (1 to 8160) Injection F requency IF Hz (0.10 to 1.00) Prog Z OUT (1 to 8) rammed Outputs Expanded I/O (9 to 23) Test Setup: 1. Deter mine the Function 64F Field Ground Protection settings to be tested. Enter the Function 64F Field Ground Protection settings to be tested utilizing either the HMI or 2. ® Communications Software. IPScom 3. Disab le all other functions prior to testing. Refer to Section 3.2, Initial Setup Procedure/Settings, Configure Relay Data subsection, for details that describe disabling/enabling functions. 4. 7, Field Ground Connect an M-3921 Field Ground Coupler and decade bo x as described in Figure 6 - Coupler. Set decade bo x resistance to 10% greater than pickup P 5. kOhms. Pickup Test : 1 . Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then slowly decrease the resistance on the decade FIELD GND/BRUSH LIFT 64F/B LED illuminates or the pickup indicator on the IPScom box until the Function Status screen illuminates. The le vel of operation will be P kOhms ±1 kOhms or ±10%. TARGET RESET 2. Release the pushbutton. 3. Increase the resistance on the decade bo x. The OUTPUT LED(s) will extinguish. 4. Press the TARGET RESET pushbutton to reset targets. Time Test : 1. Connect a timer to output contacts (Z) so that the timer stops timing when the contacts (Z) close. 2. Set the resistance on the decade bo x to 90% of P and start timing. The operating time will be after + 1). D cycles, within ±(2/ IF 6–44

268 Testing – 6 When the capacitance value and the operating fre- quency have been determined, the actual insulation resistance can be verified by installing a variable resistor (5 to 100 K ) and a discrete capacitor to the Ω coupler module (M - 3921). WARNING : When auto ‑ calibrating, the jumper 8 must be removed when used to short pins 2 & 3 calibration is complete. Placing the M‑3921 in service with this jumper installed will result in serious damage.  ˆ‹  …‹‹        ‰  ƒƒ†      ƒƒ†            ‡     ƒ  € ­    „…        *    … … ˆ   ƒ     Š ƒ     ­  € ‚  ‰          *The value of Cf should approximate the rotor capacitance. Figure 6‑7 Field Gr ound Coupler 6–45

269 M‑3425A Instruction Book 64B Brush Lift-Off Detection None VOLTAGE INPUTS: CURRENT INPUTS: None Pic kup P TEST SETTINGS: mV (0 to 5000) Time Dela y D Cycles (1 to 8160) Injection F requency IF Hz (0.10 to 1.00) Prog Z OUT (1 to 8) rammed Outputs Expanded I/O (9 to 23) Test Setup: 1. Deter mine the Function 64F Field Ground Protection settings to be tested. Enter the Function 64F Field Ground Protection settings to be tested utilizing either the HMI or 2. ® Communications Software. IPScom 3. Disab le all other functions prior to testing. Refer to Section 3.2, Initial Setup Procedure/Settings, Configure Relay Data subsection, for details that describe disabling/enabling functions. - 4. Connect a M-3921 Field Ground Coupler and the test equipment descr ibed in Figure 6 7, Field Ground Coupler. Set Rf to open (infinity) and Cf to 1 μ F. 5. Pickup Test : 1. Access the FIELD GND MEAS. CIRCUIT display under the VO LTAG E menu in STATUS . Set the P ) to 110% of the displayed value. pickup ( Ref er to Section 3.3, Status/Metering, for details that describe how to access the STATUS MENU FIELD GND MEAS. CIRCUIT value in mV. which contains the . 2 Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then Open the Test Switch. The FIELD GND/BRUSH LIFT 64F/B LED will illuminate or the pickup indicator on the IPScom Function Status screen will illuminate. 3. Close FIELD GND/BRUSH LIFT 64F/B LED will extinguish or the pickup indi - the Test Switch. The cator on the IPScom Function Status screen will extinguish. Time Test : (Z) Connect a timer to output contacts (Z) so that the timer stops timing when the contacts 1. close. 2. Remo ve the capacitance connected to the decade box and start timing. The operating time will be + 1) sec. after D cycles, within ±(2/ IF 6–46

270 Testing – 6 64S 100% Stator Ground Protection by Low Frequency Injection le 20 Hz Voltage Source (0 to 40 V) Adjustab VOLTAGE INPUTS: CURRENT INPUTS: Adjustab le 20 Hz Current Source (0 to 100 mA) T otal Current Pickup P mA (2 to 75) TEST SETTINGS: kup P/2 mA (2 to 75) Real Component Pic Time Dela D Cycles (1 to 8160) y V oltage Restraint (Enab led/Disabled) Under F (Enab led/Disabled) requency Inhibit rammed Outputs Z Prog OUT (1 to 8) Expanded I/O (9 to 23) Test Setup: 1. mine settings for F64S to be tested. Deter 2. Enter the settings f or F64S into the relay to be tested using either the HMI or IPScom Communica - tions software. 3. Disab le all other functions prior to testing. Refer to Section 3.2, Initial Setup Procedure/Settings, Configure Relay Data subsection, for details that describe disabling/enabling functions. : Pickup Test (Voltage Restraint Disabled and Under Frequency Inhibit Disabled) 1. Enab le the Total Current Pickup. 2. Disab le the Real Component of Current Pickup. 3. oltage generator to apply 25 s 0° volts across terminals 44 and 45. Adjust the 20 Hz v 4. TARGET RESET pushbutton in, then slowly increase the 20 Hz current applied Press and hold the to terminals 52 and 53 until the 27TN/59D/64S STATOR GND LED illuminates, or the function status Monitor Function Status indicator on the screen indicates that the function has picked up. The 20 Hz current le vel should be equal to P mA  2 mA or 10%.  5 Release the TARGET RESET pushbutton. 6. Disab le the Total Current Pickup. 7. Enab le the Real Component of Current Pickup. 8. 0° Volts across terminals 44 and 45. Adjust the 20 Hz Voltage Generator to apply 25 s Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton in, then slowly increase the 20 Hz current at an 9. angle of 60 degrees leading the 20 Hz voltage applied to terminals 52 and 53 until the 27TN/59D/64S STATOR GND LED illuminates, or the function status indicator on the Monitor Function Status screen indicates that the function has picked up. 2 mA or The 20 Hz current le vel should be equal to P mA   10%. 10. Release the TARGET RESET pushbutton. oltage to 0 Volts. 11. Decrease the applied 20 Hz current to 0 mA and the applied 20 Hz v 6–47

271 M‑3425A Instruction Book : Pickup Test (Voltage Restraint Enabled and Under Frequency Inhibit Disabled) 1. le the Total Current Pickup. Enab le the Real Component of Current Pickup. 2. Disab oltage generator to apply 25 s 0° volts across terminals 44 and 45. 3. Adjust the 20 Hz v 4. TARGET RESET pushbutton in, then slowly increase the 20 Hz current applied Press and hold the to terminals 52 and 53 until the LED illuminates, or the function status 27TN/59D/64S STATOR GND Monitor Function Status indicator on the screen indicates that the function has picked up. The 20 Hz current le vel should be equal to mA  2 mA or  10%. P 5 Release the TARGET RESET pushbutton. 6. Adjust the 20 Hz Voltage Generator to apply 35 s 0° Volts across terminals 44 and 45. 7. Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton in, then slowly increase the 20 Hz current at an angle of 60 degrees leading the 20 Hz voltage applied to terminals 52 and 53 until the 27TN/59D/64S STATOR GND LED illuminates, or the function status indicator on the Monitor Func‑ tion Status screen indicates that the function has picked up. The 20 Hz current le vel should be equal to 1.4 P mA  2 mA or  10%. 8. Release the TARGET RESET pushbutton. 9. le the Total Current Pickup. Disab 10. le the Real Component of Current Pickup. Enab 0° volts across terminals 44 and 45. oltage generator to apply 25 s 11. Adjust the 20 Hz v 12. Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton in, then slowly increase the 20 Hz current at an angle of 60 degrees leading the 20 Hz voltage applied to terminals 52 and 53 until the LED illuminates, or the function status indicator on the Monitor Func‑ 27TN/59D/64S STATOR GND tion Status screen indicates that the function has picked up. The 20 Hz current le vel should be equal to P mA  2 mA or  10%. Release the 13. pushbutton. TARGET RESET 14. Adjust the 20 Hz Voltage Generator to apply 35 s 0° Volts across terminals 44 and 45. 15. Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton in, then slowly increase the 20 Hz current at an angle of 60 degrees leading the 20 Hz voltage applied to terminals 52 and 53 until the 27TN/59D/64S STATOR GND LED illuminates, or the function status indicator on the Monitor Func‑ tion Status screen indicates that the function has picked up. The 20 Hz current le vel should be equal to 1.4( P ) mA  2 mA or  10%. 16. Release the TARGET RESET pushbutton. oltage and current to zero. 17. Decrease the applied 20 Hz test v 6–48

272 Testing – 6 : Pickup Test (Voltage Restraint Disabled and Under Frequency Inhibit Enabled) 1. oltage to V (V Apply balanced nominal three-phase v ), V ) at nominal frequency (V (V ), and V C CA B AB A BC (that is, 50 or 60 Hz). Enab le the Total Current Pickup. 2. 3. le the Real Component of Current Pickup. Disab 4. oltage generator to apply 25 s 0° volts across terminals 44 and 45. Adjust the 20 Hz v 5. TARGET RESET pushbutton in, then slowly increase the 20 Hz current applied Press and hold the to terminals 52 and 53 until the LED illuminates, or the function status 27TN/59D/64S STATOR GND Monitor Function Status screen indicates that the function has picked up. indicator on the 2 mA or The 20 Hz current le P mA vel should be equal to  10%. The functions should pickup  and close the trip contact output. 6. Release the TARGET RESET pushbutton. Decrease the applied 20 Hz test v oltage and current to zero. 7. 8. Enab le under frequency inhibit. 9. Decrease the frequency of the balanced nominal three-phase v oltage to V (V ), and ), V (V B BC A AB (V ) to 30 Hz. V C CA 10. Voltage Generator to apply 25 s 0° Volts across terminals 44 and 45. Adjust the 20 Hz 11. Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton in, then slowly increase the 20 Hz current applied to terminals 52 and 53 until the 20 Hz current level is equal to P mA. This function should not pick up. Release the TARGET RESET pushbutton. 12. Decrease the applied 20 Hz test v oltage and current to zero. 13. Timer Test : 1. Connect a timer to output contacts (Z) so that the timer stops timing when the contacts (Z) close. 2. Enab le the Total Current Pickup. 3. Disab le the Real Component of Current Pickup. 4. le Voltage Restraint. Disab 5. Disab le Under Frequency Inhibit. 6. Adjust the 20 Hz Voltage Generator to apply 25 s 0° Volts across terminals 44 and 45. Step the 20 Hz current applied to ter minals 52 and 53 to a value greater than P and start timing. The 7. 1%. Time delay accuracy in cycles is based D cycles within  1 cycle or  contacts will close after on 20 Hz frequency. 6–49

273 M‑3425A Instruction Book 67N Residual Directional Overcurrent, Definite Time See Below VOLTAGE INPUTS: See Below CURRENT INPUTS: Pickup P TEST SETTINGS: Amps (0.50 to 240.0) 1 Amp (0.1 to 48.0) See Belo w Directional Element Time Dela D Cycles (1 to 8160) y Max Sensitivity Angle MSA Deg rees (0 to 359) Oper 3I ating Current or I N O P olarization Type* V , 3V (Calculated) , V O X N Prog rammed Outputs Z Output (1 to 8) Expanded I/O (9 to 23) * V can only be used with Line-Ground VT. cannot be selected if Function 25 (Sync) is enabled. 3V O X Test Setup: 1 mine the Function 67NDT Residual Directional Overcurrent, Definite Time settings to be tested. . Deter 2 . Enter the Function 67N Residual Directional Ov ercurrent, Definite Time settings to be tested utilizing ® either the HMI or IPScom Communications Software. 3. Disab le all other functions prior to testing. Refer to Section 3.2, Initial Setup Procedure/Settings, Configure Relay Data subsection, for details that describe disabling/enabling functions. 4. Disab le the Directional Element. 5. Connect inputs f or the polarization type and operating current selected for testing. Pickup Test (non-directional) : 1. Apply current 10% less than pic kup P to the operating current. If 3 I , or , use any one of I I , I , or B A 0 C all three in zero sequence. Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton in, then slowly increase the current applied to the 2. GND DIFF/DIR O/C 87GD/67N LED illuminates, or the function selected operating current until the status indicator on the Monitor Function Status screen indicates that the function has picked up. The le vel should be equal to PI3 Amps  0.1A or  3%. Release the TARGET RESET pushbutton. 3 LED will 4. Decrease the current applied to all phases of the selected oper ating current. The OUTPUT extinguish. 6–50

274 Testing – 6 Directional Test : le the Directional Element utilizing either the HMI or IPScom Communications Software. 1. Enab Press the TARGET RESET pushbutton to reset targets. 2. Set the v oltage of the selected polarization type to the Nominal Voltage (If 3V is selected, use any 3. 0 . ) The Nominal Voltage value previously one of the phase voltages, or all three in zero sequence - input to the relay is described in Section 2.1 and should be recorded on Figure A 3, Functional Configuration Record Form. 4. reater than 100° from MSA . Set the current angle to an angle g 5. Apply current 10% g reater than P to the input of the selected operating current. 6. Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then slowly swing the angle of the selected op - erating current applied towards the MSA until the GND DIFF/DIR O/C 87GD/67N LED illuminates, or the function status indicator on the Monitor Function Status screen indicates that the function has picked up. The angle should be equal to A –90° or +90°, depending to which side of MSA the current has been set. 7. Release the TARGET RESET pushbutton. 8. Swing the current angle a way from the MSA . The OUTPUT LED will extinguish. Timer Test : 1. (Z) so that the timer stops timing when the contacts (Z) close. Connect a timer to output contacts 2. Disab le the Directional Element utilizing either the HMI or IPScom Communications Software. 3. Apply P +10% Amps to the input of the selected operating current, and start timing. The contacts 1%. will close after D cycles within –1 to +3 cycles or  6–51

275 M‑3425A Instruction Book 67N Residual Directional Overcurrent, Inverse Time See Below VOLTAGE INPUTS: See Below CURRENT INPUTS: Pickup P Amps TEST SETTINGS: (0.25 to 12.0) 1 Amp CT Rating (0.05 to 2.40) Directional See Belo w verse Time Curves BECO In Definite Time\Inverse\Very Inverse\Extremely Inverse Time Dial TD (0.5 to 11.0) IEC In verse Time Curves IECI / IECVI / IECEI / IECL TI Time Dial TD (0.05 to 1.10) IEEE In verse Time Curves IEEEI/IEEEVI/IEEEEI TD (0.5 to 15) Time Dial Oper ating Current 3 I I or O N Max Sensitivity Angle MSA Output (0 to 359) (Calculated) P olarization Type V , 3V , V X N O Prog rammed Outputs Z (1 to 8) Output (9 to 23) Expanded I/O cannot be selected if Function 25 (Sync) is enabled. 3V * V can only be used with Line-Ground VT. X O Test Setup: 1. Deter mine the Function 67N Residual Directional Overcurrent, Inverse Time settings to be tested. the Function 67N Residual Directional Overcurrent, Inverse Time settings to be tested utilizing 2. Enter ® Communications Software. either the HMI or IPScom 3. Disab le all other functions prior to testing. Refer to Section 3.2, Initial Setup Procedure/Settings, Configure Relay Data subsection, for details that describe disabling/enabling functions. 4. Disab le Directional Element. 5. er to Appendix D, Inverse Time Curves , and IEC equations below to calculate test times for Ref levels represented on the graphs. It is suggested that 4 or 5 test levels be chosen. IEC Class B IEC Class D IEC Class C IEC Class A Long Time Inverse Extremely Inverse Very Inverse Standard Inverse                         Curve 5 Curve 7 Curve 8 Curve 6 t = time in seconds TD = Time Dial setting M = current in multiples of pickup Time Delay Test : Connect a timer to output contacts (Z) so that the timer stops timing when the contacts (Z) close. 1. 2. Apply the input current used in the calculations from Step 5 to the input of the selected oper ating current, and start timing. The oper ating time will be ±3 cycles or ±5% of the calculated time. Repeat this step for each test level chosen. The points tested verify the operation of this function. 6–52

276 Testing – 6 Directional Test : le Directional Element. 1. Enab Press the TARGET RESET pushbutton to reset targets. 2. Apply Nominal Voltage to the input of the selected Polarization Type. If 3V 3. , use any one of the 0 phase voltages, or all three at zero sequence. The Nominal Voltage value previously input to the relay is described in Section 2.1 and should be - 3, Functional Configuration Record Form. recorded on Figure A 4. Set the current angle to an angle g reater than 100° from . MSA 5. Apply current 10% g reater than P I3, ( for type 3, use P ) to all three phases. 6. Press and hold the Target Reset pushbutton, then slowly swing the angle of the selected operating MSA current towards the GND DIFF/DIR O/C 87GD/67N LED illuminates, or the function until the status indicator on the Monitor Function Status screen indicates that the function has picked up. The angle should be equal to A –90° or +90°, depending to which side of MSA the current has been set. 7. Release the TARGET RESET pushbutton. LED will extinguish. 8. Swing the current angle a way from the MSA . The OUTPUT 6–53

277 M‑3425A Instruction Book 78 Out of Step ation V1 VOLTAGE INPUTS: Configur ation C1 Configur CURRENT INPUTS: Circle Diameter TEST SETTINGS: Ohms (0.1 to 100) P 1 Amp CT Rating (0.5 to 500) Offset O Ohms (–100 to 100) 1 Amp CT Rating (–500 to 500) Impedance Angle A Deg rees (0 to 90) Time Dela y D Cycles (1 to 8160) Blinder Impedance B Ohms (0.1 to 50.0) 1 Amp CT Rating (0.5 to 250.0) ole Slip Counter (1 to 20) P P ole Slip Reset Cycles (1 to 8160) rip on MHO Exit See Belo w T (1 to 8) rammed Output Z OUT Prog Expanded I/O (9 to 23) Test Setup: An accur ate stopwatch is required for this test. 1. 2. mine the Function 78 Out of Step settings to be tested. Deter ® Communications Software. 3. Establish communications with the relay utilizing IPScom Enter the Function 78 Out of Step settings to be tested utilizing IPScom Comm unications Software. 4. 5. Disab le all other functions prior to testing. Refer to Section 3.2, Initial Setup Procedure/Settings, Configure Relay Data subsection, for details that describe disabling/enabling functions. Connect test v oltage inputs as shown in Figure 6-1, Voltage Inputs: Configuration V1. 6. 7. Connect test current inputs as sho wn in Figure 6-4, Current Inputs: Configuration C1. 8. Set the three-phase v Nominal Voltage. , V to the , and V oltages V C B A The Nominal Voltage value previously input to the relay is described in Section 2.1 and should be recorded on Figure A - 3, Functional Configuration Record Form. Pickup Test: 1. Disab le the Function 78 Out of Step TRIP ON MHO EXIT setting, then set the delay, D , to a minimal setting (2–3 cycles). 2. Open the IPScom Out-of-Step Dialog Bo x, Figure 4-32 (Relay/Monitor/Out of Step Dialog Box). 3 . While monitor ing the Positive Sequence Impedance, set the magnitude and phase angle of the Input Currents to a point similar to point in Figure 2 - 61. Z 0 4. . Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then sweep the current angle towards point Z 1 , verify that the When the impedance passes through point Z LED illuminates, 78 OUT OF STEP 1 or the function status indicator on the Monitor Function Status screen indicates that the function has picked up. 6–54

278 Testing – 6 P ause testing until the delay timer has time to expire, then continue to sweep the current angle to 5. , and verify output operates as point Z is crossed, and resets after the seal - in time delay. Z point Z 2 2 If testing is complete , then reduce voltages and currents to zero. 6. Blocking on Stable Swing Test: 1. While monitoring the Positive Sequence Impedance, set the magnitude and phase angle of the Input Currents to a point outside of the mho circle. 2 . While monitor ing the Positive Sequence Impedance, set the magnitude and phase angle of the Input in Figure 2 - 61. Currents to point Z 0 3. Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then sweep past point Z . 1 Z , verify that the 78 OUT OF STEP When the impedance passes through point LED illuminates, 1 or the function status indicator on the Monitor Function Status screen indicates that the function has picked up. 4. P ause testing until the delay timer has time to expire, then reverse the sweep direction and sweep Z the current angle to point . 1 As point Z is crossed, verify output Z does not operate and the 78 OUT OF STEP LED extinguishes 1 or the function status indicator on the Monitor Function Status screen indicates that the function has reset. If testing is complete , then reduce voltages and currents to zero. 6. Pickup Test (Trip on mho Exit): 1. Enab le the TRIP ON MHO EXIT setting. 2 . While monitor ing the Positive Sequence Impedance, set the magnitude and phase angle of the Input Z Currents to point in Figure 2 - 61. 0 3. Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then sweep the current angle towards point Z . 1 When the impedance passes through point Z LED illuminates or , verify that the 78 OUT OF STEP 1 screen indicates that the function has Monitor Function Status the function status indicator on the picked up. 4. P ause testing until the delay timer has time to expire, then continue to sweep the current angle to Z . Verify that output Z does not operate as point Z beyond point is crossed. 2 2 Z Sw eep the impedance further towards point Z is crossed, and . Verify output 5. operates as point Z 3 3 resets after the seal - in time delay has timed out. , then reduce voltages and currents to zero. 6. If testing is complete 6–55

279 M‑3425A Instruction Book 81 Frequency (#1, #2, #3, #4) ation V1 VOLTAGE INPUTS: Configur None CURRENT INPUTS: Pic kup TEST SETTINGS: Hz (50.00 to 67.00) P 50 Hz Rela (40.00 to 57.00) y y D Cycles Time Dela (3 to 65,500) 50 Hz Rela y Prog rammed Outputs Z OUT (1 to 8) (9 to 23) Expanded I/O  It w NOTE ould be efficient to disable the elements with the settings nearest to nominal frequency first (test - : ing over or underfrequency functions). Test Setup: 1. Deter mine the Function 81 Frequency settings to be tested. ® Enter the Function 81 F requency settings to be tested utilizing either the HMI or IPScom Commu- 2. nications Software. 3. Disab le all other functions prior to testing. Refer to Section 3.2, Initial Setup Procedure/Settings, Configure Relay Data subsection, for details that describe disabling/enabling functions. 4. Connect test v oltage inputs as shown in Figure 6-1, Voltage Inputs: Configuration V1. 5. Nomi‑ Set the three-phase v oltages V (nominal frequency). The , V Nominal Voltage , and V to the C B A value previously input to the relay is described in Section 2.1 and should be recorded nal Voltage 3, Functional Configuration Record Form. - on Figure A Pickup Test : Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then slowly increase/decrease the Input Voltage 1. LED illuminates or the function , V FREQUENCY/ROCOF 81/81R , and V (V ) Frequency until the B C A Monitor Function Status status indicator on the screen indicates that the function has picked up. The frequency le vel will be equal to P Hz ±0.02 Hz only if is within 3 Hz of F Hz. , otherwise,  0.1 P nom ) Frequency to nominal input frequency. The 2. Increase/decrease the Input Voltage (V , and V , V B A C LED(s) will extinguish. OUTPUT 3. Press pushbutton to reset targets. TARGET RESET Time Test : Connect a timer to output contacts 1. close. (Z) so that the timer stops timing when the contacts (Z) D Apply ( P + or – 0.5) Hz and start timing. The contacts will close after 2. cycles within  2 cycles or  1%, whichever is greater. 6–56

280 Testing – 6 81A Frequency Accumulator (Band #1, #2, #3, #4, #5, #6) VOLTAGE INPUTS: V1 None CURRENT INPUTS: kup (#1 only) P TEST SETTINGS: Hz (50.00 to 67.00) High Pic y (40.00 to 57.00) 50 Hz Rela Lo w Pickup P Hz (50.00 to 67.00) 50 Hz Rela y (40.00 to 57.00) Dela D Cycles (3 to 360,000) y Cycles (0 to 360,000) Acc Status Prog rammed Outputs Z OUT (1 to 8) Expanded I/O (9 to 23) Test Setup: 1. Deter mine the Function 81A Frequency Accumulator settings to be tested. 2. Enter the Function 81A F requency Accumulator settings to be tested utilizing either the HMI or ® IPScom Communications Software. 3. Disab le all other functions prior to testing. Refer to Section 3.2, Initial Setup Procedure/Settings, Configure Relay Data subsection, for details that describe disabling/enabling functions. 4. Connect test v oltage inputs as shown in Figure 6-1, Voltage Inputs: Configuration V1. 5. Set the three-phase v oltages V Nomi‑ , V (nominal frequency). The , and V to the Nominal Voltage B A C nal Voltage value previously input to the relay is described in Section 2.1 and should be recorded on Figure A - 3, Functional Configuration Record Form. Output Test : 1. (Z) Connect a timer to output contacts (Z) so that the timer stops timing when the contacts close. 2. Set the frequency to a v alue between the upper and lower limits of the selected band under test and start timing. 3. Utilizing either the HMI (Status/81A Accum ulator Status) or IPScom Communications Software (Relay/Monitor/Accumulator Status), verify that the Accumulator Status value for the band under test is incrementing. Output Contacts Z D cycles within  2 cycles or 1%. will close after or the remaining bands if desired. 4. Repeat Steps 1 to 3 f 6–57

281 M‑3425A Instruction Book 81R Rate of Change of Frequency (#1, #2) ation V1 VOLTAGE INPUTS: Configur None CURRENT INPUTS: Pic kup TEST SETTINGS: Hz/Sec (0.10 to 20.00) P Time Dela D Cycles (3 to 8160) y e Sequence Negativ V oltage Inhibit N % (0 to 99) Prog rammed Outputs Z OUT (1 to 8) (9 to 23) Expanded I/O Test Setup: It is recommended that the 81 Function be used to estab lish a window of operation for the 1. 81R Function which is smaller than the actual sweep range of the frequency applied. This is ac - complished as follows:  NOTE : The frequencies given are suggested for testing rates below 10 Hz/Sec. Higher rates will require consideration of the capabilities of the test equipment involved. with a unique Output assigned, a Pickup Setting of 1 Hz greater than the a. Enab le the 81#1 minimum frequency of the ramp and a time delay and seal - in time setting at minimum (This will result in an operational window that is free of erroneous Hz/Sec measurements when the volt - age source begins or ends the sweep.). le the b . Enab with a unique Output assigned, a Pickup Setting of 1 Hz less than the maximum 81#2 frequency of the ramp and a time delay and seal in time setting at minimum (This will result in - an operational window that is free of erroneous Hz/Sec measurements when the voltage source begins or ends the sweep.). - : Using  NOTE this setup, it is important to remember that the 81 elements being used will be operat ing in the 81R blocking regions, and the 81R contact operation must be distinguished from the 81 contacts. 81R Active Region F81#2 Block F81#1 Block 57.5 Hz 60 Hz 62.5 Hz 63.5 Hz 56.5 Hz Utilizing a jumper , connect the 81#1 and 81#2 assigned Outputs to a unique Input. c. d. Set the 81R Function to b lock on this input. 2. Deter mine the Function 81R Rate of Change of Frequency settings to be tested. 3. Enter the Function 81R Rate of Change of Frequency settings to be tested utilizing either the HMI or IPScom Communications Software. Disab le all other functions prior to testing with the exception of Function 81. Refer to Section 3.2, 4. Initial Setup Procedure/Settings, Configure Relay Data subsection, for details that describe disabling/ enabling functions. NOTE :  esting of the 81R function requires a 3 - phase voltage source capable of smoothly sweeping the T frequency of all voltages at a variable rate, continuously. 5. Connect test v oltage inputs as shown in Figure 6-1, Voltage Inputs: Configuration V1. Set the three-phase v oltages V , V , and V 6. to the Nominal Voltage (nominal frequency). B A C The Nominal Voltage value previously input to the relay is described in Section 2.1 and should be 3, Functional Configuration Record Form. recorded on Figure A - 6–58

282 Testing – 6 : Pickup Test 1. or the pickup setting, then apply a sweep rate of 25% less than the Pickup ( P ) Calculate the time f to all three phases. 2. TARGET RESET pushbutton, then slowly decrease the sweep time until the Press and hold the Monitor FREQUENCY/ROCOF 81/81R LED illuminates, or the function status indicator on the Function Status screen indicates that the function has picked up. The le vel should be equal to P  0.05 Hz/Sec. or  5 %. 3. Release the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then increase the sweep time. The OUTPUT LED will extinguish. Negative Sequence Voltage Inhibit Test : 1. Press the TARGET RESET pushbutton to reset targets. 2. Apply Nominal Voltage to all three phases at a sweep rate 25% above P . The Nominal Voltage value previously input to the relay is described in Section 2.1 and should be recorded on Figure A - 3, Functional Configuration Record Form. V erify that the FREQUENCY/ROCOF 81/81R LED illuminates, or the function status indicator on Monitor Function Status the screen indicates that the function has picked up. 3. Swing the phase angle of a Phase Voltage and monitor the Positive and Negative Sequence Voltage 0.5% of the 81R OUTPUT N %,  levels. The should reset when the negative sequence voltage is positive sequence voltage. Timer Test : 1. Press the TARGET RESET pushbutton to reset targets. Nominal Voltage Apply Nominal Voltage to all three phases at a sweep rate 25% below P . The 2. value previously input to the relay is described in Section 2.1 and should be recorded on Figure A - 3, Functional Configuration Record Form. 3. Connect a timer to output contacts (Z) so that the timer stops timing when the contacts (Z) close. 4. Apply a s weep rate 25% above P and start timing. The contacts will close after D cycles within +20 cycles. 6–59

283 M‑3425A Instruction Book 87 Phase Differential (#1 or #2) None VOLTAGE INPUTS: CURRENT INPUTS: Configur ation C3 Minim um Pickup P Amps TEST SETTINGS: (0.20 to 3.00) (0.04 to 0.60) 1 Amp CT Rating P S % (1 to 100) ercent Slope Time Dela y D Cycles (1 to 8160) CT Correction (0.5 to 2.0) (1 to 8) Prog Z OUT rammed Outputs Expanded I/O (9 to 23)  NOTE : Although a voltage input is not required for the testing of the 87 function, it is suggested that Nominal Voltage be applied to restrain the functions which use both voltage and current inputs for operation. Test Setup: 1. Deter mine the Function 87 Phase Differential settings to be tested. ® 2. Enter the Function 87 Phase Diff erential settings to be tested utilizing either the HMI or IPScom Communications Software. 3. le all other functions prior to testing. Refer to Section 3.2, Initial Setup Procedure/Settings, Disab Configure Relay Data subsection, for details that describe disabling/enabling functions. 4. wn in Figure 6-5, Current Inputs: Configuration C3. Connect test current inputs as sho : Minimum Pickup Test Set Current Input 1(I ) to 0 Amps. 1. a Press and hold the ) until the pushbutton, then slowly increase Current Input 2 (I 2. TARGET RESET A LED illuminates, or the function status indicator on the Monitor Func‑ PHASE DIFF CURRENT 87 screen indicates that the function has picked up. tion Status The current le vel of operation will be equal to P amps ±0.1 A or ±5%. 3. Release the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then decrease the Current Input 2 (I ). The OUTPUT A LED(s) will extinguish. Press TARGET RESET pushbutton to reset targets. 4. 5. Repeat Steps 1,2,3 and 4 f or each remaining phase exchanging I as appropriate. and I A(B,C) a(b,c) Timer Test : 1. Connect a timer to output contacts (Z) so that the timer stops timing when the contacts (Z) close. ) at least 10% greater than the minimum current pickup Apply a current le vel to Current Input 2 (I 2. A level and start timing. The contacts will close after D cycles within  1 cycle or ±1%. When the Time 1/2 cycles. Delay is set to 1 cycle, the relay operation is less than 1 - 6–60

284 Testing – 6 Slope Test : e number of testing points to verify the trip curve. 1. Define a representativ . F 2 (Current Input 1) test point defined in Step 1, calculate the expected or each I a operating current I (Current Input 2) as follows: A (I > ‑ I 2 ) (I ÷ +I ) x Slope/100 a a A A Diff erence in currents is g reater than sum of the currents times the per unit slope ÷2 ‑ or I is % slope input above. = [(1+K) ÷ (1 x K)] I S where K = S /200 and where a A )/2} value of 2X Nominal Current; use a slope % value F or tests above the restraint current {(I NOTE: +I  a A equal to 4 times the input slope value (S) for these computations. 3. Set Current Input 1 (I ) and Current Input 2 (I ) to the values chosen in Step 1 and calculated in Step A a 2 respectively. 4. Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then slowly increase either Current Input 1 or 2 until the LED illuminates, or the function status indicator on the Monitor PHASE DIFF CURRENT 87 Function Status screen indicates that the function has picked up. The current le vel of operation will be equal to I ±2% slope calculation. The difference in ±0.1 A or A current must be greater than minimum pickup current for proper operation. 5. Release the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then decrease the larger CURRENT . The OUTPUT LED(s) will extinguish. pushbutton to reset targets. 6. Press TARGET RESET 6–61

285 M‑3425A Instruction Book 87GD Ground Differential VOLTAGE INPUTS: None ibed As descr CURRENT INPUTS: Pic kup TEST SETTINGS: P Amps (0.20 to 10.00) 1 Amp CT Rating (0.04 to 2.00) CAUTION: Do NOT set the delay to less than 2 Cycles ▲ (1 to 8160) Time Dela D y Cycles CT Ratio Correction (0.10 to 7.99) Prog rammed Outputs Z OUT (1 to 8) (9 to 23) Expanded I/O Test Setup: 1. Deter mine the Function 87GD Ground Differential settings to be tested. ® 2 . Enter the Function 87GD Ground Diff erential settings to be tested utilizing either the HMI or IPScom Communications Software. 3. Disab le all other functions prior to testing. Refer to Section 3.2, Initial Setup Procedure/Settings, Configure Relay Data subsection, for details that describe disabling/enabling functions. 4. Connect a current input to I terminals 53 and 52. N 5. Connect a current input to I terminals 48 and 49. terminals 46 and 47, or I B A Non–Directional Pickup Test : TARGET RESET 1. Press and hold the (terminals pushbutton, then slowly increase Current Input I N 53 and 52) until the LED illuminates, or the function status indicator GND DIFF/DIR O/C 87GD/67N Monitor Function Status on the screen indicates that the function has picked up. The current le vel of operation will be equal to P amps ±0.1 A or  5%. 2. Release the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then decrease the Current Input I to 0 Amps. The OUT ‑ N PUT LED(s) will extinguish. Press TARGET RESET pushbutton to reset targets. 3. Timer Test : 1. Connect a timer to output contacts (Z) so that the timer stops timing when the contacts (Z) close. 2. Apply a current le vel to Current Input I at least 10% greater than the minimum current pickup level N and start timing. The contacts will close after cycles within +1 to -2 cycles or ±1%. D Decrease the Current Input I to 0 Amps. 3. N Directional Time Test : 1. Connect a timer to output contacts (Z) so that the timer stops timing when the contacts (Z) close. 2. Apply a current of 1.0 Amp with a phase angle of 0 deg rees to Current Input I (terminals 53 N and 52). Apply a current of P – 0.9 amps with a phase angle of 180 degrees to either Current Input I or I 3. A B and start timing. The contacts will close after D cycles within  1 cycle or  1%. . 4. Decrease the applied currents to 0 Amps 6–62

286 Testing – 6 Press the TARGET RESET pushbutton to reset targets. 5. 6. Set the phase angle of the Current Input selected in Step 3, to 0 deg rees, the Current Inputs are now in phase. 7. Reapply a current of 1.0 Amp to Current Input I (terminals 53 and 52). N 8. Reapply a current of P – 0.9 Amps to the Current Input selected in Step 3, and start timing. or I The relay will not operate. If the I - current input value is reduced to 140 ma or less and the differ B A ence current exceeds the pickup value, the relay will operate regardless of polarities of the currents. . 9. Decrease the applied currents to 0 Amps 6–63

287 M‑3425A Instruction Book BM Breaker Monitoring None VOLTAGE INPUTS: CURRENT INPUTS: As Descr ibed 2 Pic kup P kAmps (kA (0 to 50,000) )* TEST SETTINGS: Dela D Cycles (0.1 to 4095.9) y 2 I ( T or I Timing Method T) Preset Accum ulators 2 kAmp (kA Phase A, B ) Cycles* (0 to 50,000) , or C Prog rammed Outputs Z OUT (1 to 8) Bloc king Inputs (1 to 6) Expanded I/O (7 to 14) Output Initiate (1 to 8) Expanded I/O (9 to 23) Input Initiate (1 to 6) Expanded I/O (7 to 14) 2 2 /kA * kA/kA cycles or kA cycles is dependent on the Timing Method that is selected. Test Setup: Deter mine the Breaker Monitoring Function settings to be tested (Input Initiate or Output Initiate). 1. ® 2. Enter the Break er Monitoring Function settings to be tested utilizing either the HMI or IPScom Communications Software. 3. Connect a current input to I terminals 46 and 47, I terminals 48 and 49, and I terminals 50 A B C and 51. 4. Connect inputs f or the polarization type selected for testing. Accumulator Test : 1. Apply a current v alue that considers Timing Method and Pickup Setting to current input I . A Place a jumper betw een the designated input and/or energize output contact selected as initiate. 2. 3. Utilizing either the HMI (Status/Break er Monitor Accumulator Status) or IPScom Communications Software (Relay/Monitor/Accumulator Status), verify that the Accumulator Status value for Phase A increments in D cycles 1 cycles or  1%.  4. De-energiz e the output and/or remove the jumper placed in Step 2. 5. Decrease applied I current to 0 amps. A . 6. If desired, repeat test f or I and I B C 6–64

288 Testing – 6 Pickup Test : 1. alue that considers Timing Method and Pickup Setting to current input I . Apply a current v A NOTE: If the target pic kup setting is a large value (0 to 50,000) the Preset Accumulator Settings feature  can be used to pre-set the accumulator values to just below the target setting. Utilizing either the HMI (Status/Break er Monitor Accumulator Status) or IPScom Communications 2. Software (Relay/Monitor/Accumulator Status) to monitor the accumulator value, place a jumper between the designated input or energize the output contact selected as initiate and then remove the jumper and/or de-energize the output. F ollowing the time out of the Delay the accumulator will increment, repeat the placement and re - moval of the jumper as necessary to increment the accumulator to a point where the pickup setting is exceeded. When the accum ulator value exceeds the pickup value the 3. LED(s) will illuminate, or the OUTPUT function status indicator on the Monitor Function Status screen indicates that the function has picked up. D The output contacts Z will operate in cycles  1 cycle or  1% from the last initiate. . 4. If desired, repeat test f or I and I B C 6–65

289 M‑3425A Instruction Book Trip Circuit Monitoring As Descr ibed VOLTAGE INPUTS: CURRENT INPUTS: None Dela y D TEST SETTINGS: Cycles (1 to 8160) Prog rammed Outputs Z OUT (1 to 8) Expanded I/O (9 to 23) Test Setup: Deter mine the Trip Circuit Monitoring function settings to be tested. 1. Disab le all other functions prior to testing. Refer to Section 3.2, Initial Setup Procedure/Settings, 2. Configure Relay Data subsection, for details that describe disabling/enabling functions. 3. Connect a DC v oltage supply capable of supplying 24/48/125/250 V dc (marked on the rear of the relay) to terminals 1 (–) and 2 (+) on the relay. 4. Connect a timer to output contacts (Z) so that the timer stops timing when the contacts (Z) close. : Pickup Test 1. le DC voltage (24/48/125/250 V dc marked on the rear of the relay) to terminals Apply the applicab 1 and 2. 2. Enab le the Trip Circuit Monitoring function and then enter the settings to be tested utilizing either the HMI or IPScom Communications Software. 3. Remo ve the DC voltage applied in Step 1. The OUTPUT LED will illuminate, or the function status Monitor Function Status screen will indicate that the Trip Circuit Monitoring func - indicator on the tion has actuated. D The contacts will close after 1 cycle or 1%. cycles within  Sim ulate a 52b contact open by connecting a jumper between terminal 11 (INRTN) and terminal 10 4. (IN1) which the BRKR CLOSED and OUTPUT LEDs on the front of the relay should extinguish. Also , the function status indicator on the Monitor Function Status screen will indicate that the Trip Circuit Monitoring function has cleared and the Secondary Status screen will indicate that the breaker is closed. 5. Remo ve the jumper installed in Step 4. 1 cycle or 1%. The contacts will close after D cycles within  6–66

290 Testing – 6 TM IPSlogic (#1, #2, #3, #4, #5, #6) As Needed VOLTAGE INPUTS: CURRENT INPUTS: As Needed Time Dela y D Cycles (1 to 8160) TEST SETTINGS: rammed Outputs Z OUT (1 to 8) Prog Expanded I/O (9 to 23) Bloc king Inputs (1 to 6) (7 to 14) Expanded I/O (1 to 8) Output Initiate (9 to 23) Expanded I/O Function Initiate Pic kup (All A vailable Functions) Function Initiate Time Out Initiate b y Communication Input Initiate (1 to 6) Expanded I/O (7 to 14) Bloc k from Communication Test Setup: Ref er to Figure 2 - 75, IPSlogic Function Setup, for logic gate configurations. 1. 2 . ation (AND/OR/NAND/NOR) for Output Initiate, Function Initiate, Blocking Inputs Select gate configur and Inputs Main. or each gate (if AND gate is selected, ensure at least two outputs are chosen). 3 . Select Initiating Inputs f It will be necessary to enable and operate other functions to provide inputs for the Function Initiate and Output Initiate gates. Time Test : 1. Connect a timer to output contacts (Z) so that the timer stops timing when the contacts (Z) close. 2 . Connect a jumper from IN R TN (Terminal 11) to the designated Inputs (Terminals 1–6) for the IPSlogic gates and start timing. The LED and the OUTPUT LED will illuminate, or the function IPS LOGIC status indicator on the Monitor Function Status screen indicates that the function has picked up. The oper ating time will be D cycles ±1 cycle or  1%. : Blocking Input Test 1. Press and hold the TARGET RESET pushbutton, then place a jumper from IN RTN (terminal 11) to the designated Blocking Inputs (terminals 1-6) to be tested. The EXTERNAL #1 EXT 1 LED will extinguish. or each designated external triggering contact. 2. Repeat Step 1 f 6–67

291 M‑3425A Instruction Book 2. Press the r ight arrow pushbutton until the est Procedures 6.3 Diagnostic T following is displayed: SETUP UNIT Overview _ SETUP exit - The diagnostic test procedures perform basic func tional relay tests to verify the operation of the front- panel controls, inputs, outputs, and communication 3. Press - ENTER, the following will be dis ports. played: 8 WARNING: Do not enter DIAGNOSTIC MODE SOFTWARE VERSION when protected equipment is in service. Entering  VERS sn access number DIAGNOSTIC MODE when protected equipment is in service removes all protective functions of the relay. ight arrow pushbutton until the Press the r 4. following is displayed: The diagnostic menu includes the following tests: • OUTPUT (Output est Relay) T DIAGNOSTIC MODE _ time error DIAG Status) est • INPUT (Input T • LED LED est) T (Status T est) (Target LED • TARGET Press 5. , the following warning will ENTER be displayed: Not A est, I/O (Expanded • EX_IO vailable T at this time) PROCESSOR WILL RESET! • BUTTON (Button T est) ENTER KEY TO CONTINUE • DISP T (Display est) est) Loopback T • COM1 (COM1 8 WARNING: Do not enter DIAGNOSTIC MODE (COM2 Loopback T est) • COM2 when protected equipment is in service. Entering DIAGNOSTIC MODE when protected equipment • COM3 (COM3 Echo 2-Wire) est T is in service removes all protective functions of Each test is described individually in this section. the relay. The diagnostic menu also provides access to the following relay feature settings: 6. Press ENTER , the relay will reset and will be temporarily DIAGNOSTIC MODE • CLOCK (Clock On/Off) displayed followed by: Flash/Solid) • LED (Relay OK LED OUTPUT TEST (RELAY) • CAL (Auto Calibration)  input led target OUTPUT (Factory Only) • FACTORY Use button disp _  _ _ _ com1 com2 com3 clock  Auto Calibration is described in detail in Section 6.4, Auto Calibration. _ led cal factory _ Entering Relay Diagnostic Mode This marks the beginning of the diagnostic menu. 8 WARNING: Do not enter DIAGNOSTIC MODE The left arrow and right arrow pushbuttons are used when protected equipment is in service. Entering to navigate within the diagnostic menu. Exiting the DIAGNOSTIC MODE when protected equipment EXIT , diagnostic menu is accomplished by pressing is in service removes all protective functions of PRESS EXIT TO EXIT DIAGNOSTIC MODE - is dis the relay. played, then pressing a second time. EXIT ENTER 1. Press to access the main menu. 6–68

292 Testing – 6 Output Relay Test (Output Relays 1–23 and 25) 3. If the rela y is already in the Diagnostic Mode, then go to Step 4. ower  This test does not include testing of P : NOTE Supply Relay (Output Relay 24). lay is NOT in the Diagnostic Mode, If the re then enter the relay diagnostic mode by Ensure the protected equipment is in a 1. performing the steps described in the configuration/state that can support relay Entering Relay Diagnostic Mode section output testing. 4. of this chapter, then go to Step m the positions of the outputs in 2. Confir 4. - u is se Ensure that the Diagnostic Men position. This can OFF the unoperated or lected to OUTPUT (Upper Case). be accomplished by connecting a DMM (Digital Multimeter) across the appropriate OUTPUT TEST (RELAY) contacts and confirming open or closed.  input led target OUTPUT OFF The de-energized or position for out- _  button disp _ puts 1 through 25 are listed in Table 6 1. - com1 com2 com3 clock  _ _ led cal factory  Normally Open Relay Output Normally Closed Contact Number Contact* If OUTPUT is not selected (Upper Case), -- 33-34 1 then use the Right/Left arrow pushbuttons to select OUTPUT. 31-32 -- 2 , the relay will display the ENTER Press 5. 3 29-30 -- following: -- 4 27-28 RELAY NUMBER 5 25-26 -- 1 6 23-24 -- 7 21-20 21-22 8 17-18 18-19 6. 1) - the Output Relay (from Table 6 Select to be tested, utilizing the Up/Down arrow 9 104-105 -- pushbuttons. 10 102-103 -- . The following will be dis- 7. ENTER Press 11 100-101 -- played for the selected relay: -- 12 98-99 RELAY NUMBER 1 13 -- 96-97 OFF on -- 14 94-95 92-93 -- 15 90-91 16 -- 8 ON . Select (Upper Case) utilizing the Right arrow pushbutton. The relay will respond 17 -- 88-89 as follows: 18 86-87 -- y energizes (On position) Output rela a. 19 84-85 -- . OUTPUT - LED illumi iate red Appropr b -- 82-83 20 nates, if equipped. -- 21 80-81 If testing all output rela ys, then press 22 78-79 -- - to return to the output relay se EXIT lection menu, then repeat Steps 6, -- 23 76-77 7 and 8 for each output relay. Power Supply 12-13 -- w be used to verify that The DMM can no 9. (24) the output relay contact is in the operated 15-16 Self-Test (25) 14-15 position. The readings should be the or ON * “Normal” position of the contact corresponds to the OFF opposite of the initial reading determined (de-energized) state of the realy. in Step 2. 10. When output rela y testing is complete Table 6‑1 Ou tput Contacts then restore all output relays to their de-energized or OFF positions listed in Table 6 - 1 and press EXIT to return to the Diagnostic Menu. 6–69

293 M‑3425A Instruction Book Input Test (Control/Status) 1 1. If all Diagnostic Testing is complete, then exit the diagnostic menu by menu enables the user to determine The INPUT TEST EXIT , PRESS EXIT TO EXIT pressing the status of the individual control/status inputs. Indi - is displayed, then DIAGNOSTIC MODE vidual inputs can be selected by number using the up press EXIT a second time. and down arrow pushbuttons. The status of the input will then be displayed. Output Relay Test (Power Supply Relay 24) Terminal Common Terminal Input Number The power supply output relay can be tested by per - forming the following: 10 11 1 (52b) 2 9 11  NOTE : F or this test the relay is not required to be in the Diagnostic Mode. 3 11 8 11 4 7 1. Ensure the protected equipment is in a 5 11 6 configuration/state that can support relay 5 6 11 output testing. Expanded I/O Inputs m the position of output relay 24 2. Confir position. This in the unoperated or OFF 7 66 or 67 75 can be accomplished by connecting a 74 66 or 67 8 DMM (Digital Multimeter) across the 66 or 67 9 73 appropriate contacts and confirming open or closed. The de-energized or 10 66 or 67 72 position for Output 24 is listed in OFF 11 66 or 67 71 1. Table 6 - 12 70 66 or 67 3. ve power from the relay. The DMM Remo 69 66 or 67 13 can now be used to verify that output relay 66 or 67 14 68 24 contact is in the operated or ON posi- tion. The reading should be the opposite Table 6‑2 Input Contacts of the initial reading determined in Step 2. wer to the relay. 4. Restore po Ensure the protected equipment is in a 1. configuration/state that can support relay input testing. 2. If the rela y is already in the Diagnostic Mode, then go to Step 3. If the re lay is NOT in the Diagnostic Mode, then enter the relay diagnostic mode by performing the steps described in the Entering Relay Diagnostic Mode section of this chapter, then go to Step 3. 3. Ensure that the Diagnostic Men - u is se lected to INPUT (Upper Case). INPUT TEST (RELAY) output INPUT led target  _ button disp  _ _ _ com1 com2 com3 clock   led cal factory If INPUT is not selected (Upper Case), then use the Right/Left arrow pushbuttons to select INPUT. 6–70

294 Testing – 6 Status LED Test ENTER 4. Press . The following is displayed: menu enables the user to STATUS LED TEST The INPUT NUMBER check the front-panel LEDs individually. 1 2) Select the Input Rela y (from Table 6 - 5. to be tested utilizing the Up/Down arrow                       pushbuttons. . The following is displayed ENTER Press 6.             for the selected relay: INPUT NUMBER 1 CIRCUIT OPEN  . If no e 7 - xternal control/status inputs are con  nected to the relay, then place a jumper between the terminal (terminal IN RTN #11 for Inputs 1–6, and either terminal     #66 or #67 for Inputs 7–14) and the IN1     2 for - terminal (terminal #10). See Table 6 terminals for inputs 2 through 14. Alter natively, if this specific input is being Figure 6‑8 Status LED Panel used in this application and the external wiring is complete, the actual external y is already in the Diagnostic If the rela 1. - control/status input contact can be manu Mode, then go to Step 2. ally closed. This will test the input contact the external wiring to the and operation lay is NOT in the Diagnostic Mode, If the re input contacts. then enter the relay diagnostic mode by performing the steps described in the The f ollowing is immediately displayed: Entering Relay Diagnostic Mode section 2. of this chapter, then go to Step INPUT NUMBER 1 CIRCUIT CLOSED u is se Ensure that the Diagnostic Men - 2. lected to LED (Upper Case). Remo ve the jumper between the IN RTN 8. STATUS LED TEST terminal (terminal #11 for Inputs 1–6, and either terminal #66 or #67 for Inputs 7–14)  target LED output input terminal (terminal #10). and the IN1 button disp _ _   com1 com2 com3 clock _ _ ollowing is immediately displayed: The f led cal factory  INPUT NUMBER 1 CIRCUIT OPEN If LED is not selected (Upper Case), then use the Right/Left arrow pushbuttons to to return 9. EXIT If testing all inputs , press select LED. to the input selection menu, then repeat RELAY OK Press ) il- 3. ENTER . LED #1 ( Steps 5, 6, 7 and 8 for each input. luminates and the following is displayed: 0. When input testing is complete then insure 1 STATUS LED TEST all jumpers have been removed and press LED NUMBER 1 = ON EXIT to return to the Diagnostic Menu. If all Diagnostic 1 1. Testing is complete, , press If testing all Status LEDs . 4 then exit the diagnostic menu by the right arrow pushbutton to toggle , EXIT pressing PRESS EXIT TO EXIT through the remaining LEDs illustrated in is displayed, then DIAGNOSTIC MODE Figure 6 - 8, with the exception of the PS1 EXIT a second time. press LEDs. and PS2 6–71

295 M‑3425A Instruction Book . When Status LED testing is complete 3. Press ENTER . Target LED #1 lights and 5 the following is displayed: to return to the Diagnostic EXIT press Menu. TARGET LED TEST 6 . Testing is complete, If all Diagnostic LED NUMBER 1 = ON then exit the diagnostic menu by pressing EXIT , PRESS EXIT TO EXIT Target LEDs, press the right If testing all 4. is displayed, then DIAGNOSTIC MODE arrow pushbutton to toggle through the a second time. EXIT press remaining Target LEDs illustrated in Figure 6 - 9. Target LED Test 5 . Target LED testing is complete When The menu allows the user to TARGET LED TEST to return to the Diagnostic EXIT press 3925A Target Module LEDs individually. - check the M Menu. . Testing is complete, 6 If all Diagnostic then exit the diagnostic menu by TARGETS pressing EXIT , PRESS EXIT TO EXIT 50 PHASE OVERCURRENT 24 VOLTS/Hz is displayed, then DIAGNOSTIC MODE PHASE OVERCURRENT 51V 27 PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE PHASE OVERVOLTAGE 59 50N/51N NEUTRAL O/C press a second time. EXIT OR GND 27TN/59D/64S STAT 50DT SPLIT PHASE DIFF 59N/59X NEUT/GND OVER VOL T OR OVERLOAD STAT 49 32 DIRECTIONAL POWER NEG SEQ OVERCURRENT46 Button Test PHASE DISTANCE 21 FIELD GND/BRUSH LIFT64F/B 40 LOSS OF FIELD 81/81R/81A FREQUENCY The BUTTON TEST menu selection allows the user OUT OF STEP 78 PHASE DIFF CURRENT 87 - to check the M 3931 HMI Module buttons. As each 50BF BREAKER FAILURE GND DIFF/DIR O/C 87GD/67N pushbutton is pressed, its name is displayed. TRIP CIRCUIT MONITOR TC 50/27INADVERTENT ENRGNG LOGIC IPS LOGIC 60FL V.T. FUSE LOSS OUTPUTS OUT 5 OUT 3 OUT 1 OUT 7 OUT 8 OUT 6 OUT 4 OUT 2   Figure 6‑9 M‑3925A Target Module Panel  y is already in the Diagnostic 1. If the rela  Mode, then go to Step 2.  If the re lay is NOT in the Diagnostic Mode,  then enter the relay diagnostic mode by performing the steps described in the   Entering Relay Diagnostic Mode section 2. of this chapter, then go to Step u is se Ensure that the Diagnostic Men 2. - (Upper Case). lected to TARGET Machine Figure 6 10 M‑3931 Human ‑ ‑ Interface Module TARGET LED TEST TARGET output input led  1. y is already in the Diagnostic If the rela _ _  button disp Mode, then go to Step 2. _ _ com1 com2 com3 clock  led cal factory  lay is NOT in the Diagnostic Mode, If the re then enter the relay diagnostic mode by performing the steps described in the TARGET If is not selected (Upper Case), Entering Relay Diagnostic Mode section then use the Right/Left arrow pushbuttons 2. of this chapter, then go to Step to select TARGET. 6–72

296 Testing – 6 - 2. Ensure that the Diagnostic Men 2. Ensure that the Diagnostic Men u is se - u is se DISPLAY Case). lected to lected to BUTTON (Upper Case). TEST (Upper BUTTON TEST DISPLAY TEST output input led target   output input led target DISP disp  _  BUTTON button _ _  _ com1 com2 com3 clock _ com1 com2 com3 clock  _  led cal factory led cal factory  UTTON is not selected (Upper Case), If B If DISP is not selected (Upper Case), then then use the Right/Left arrow pushbuttons use the Right/Left arrow pushbuttons to select DISP. to select BUTTON. . The following is displayed: Press . 3 ENTER 3. Press , the unit will display a ENTER is sequence of test characters until EXIT BUTTON TEST pushed. 0 - After the test has cycled through complete . 4 to return to the EXIT ly, press Diagnostic  NOTE: Pressing the EXIT pushbutton will exit Menu. from this test, and therefore should be last pushbutton tested. If it is pushed before . If all Diagnostic Testing is complete, 5 this test sequence is completed, the test then exit the diagnostic menu by may be restarted by pushing ENTER . EXIT , PRESS EXIT TO EXIT pressing EXIT Notice that the word is displayed DIAGNOSTIC MODE is displayed, then temporarily before the test sequence is a second time. EXIT press exited. COM1/COM2 Loopback Test utton for test. As each 4. Press each pushb button is pressed, the display will briefly menu allows the user LOOPBACK TEST COM1 The show the name for each key (“RIGHT AR- to test the front-panel RS - 232 port. LOOP‑ COM2 ROW”, “UP ARROW”, etc). BACK TEST - 232 port. menu tests the rear panel RS utton testing is complete 5 . When pushb A loopback plug is required for this test. The required to return to the Diagnostic press EXIT loopback plug consists of a DB9P connector (male) Menu. with pin 2 (RX) connected to pin 3 (TX) and pin 7 6 Testing is complete, . If all Diagnostic (RTS) connected to pin 8 (CTS). No other connec - then exit the diagnostic menu by tions are necessary. , EXIT pressing PRESS EXIT TO EXIT DIAGNOSTIC MODE is displayed, then  a second time. EXIT press   Display Test  DISPLAY TEST menu selection enables the user The   to check the display. This test cycles through varying  test patterns until is pressed. EXIT  1. If the rela y is already in the Diagnostic  Mode, then go to Step 2.  If the re lay is NOT in the Diagnostic Mode,   then enter the relay diagnostic mode by  performing the steps described in the Entering Relay Diagnostic Mode section of this chapter, then go to Step 2. COM1/COM2 Loopback Plug Figure 6‑11 6–73

297 M‑3425A Instruction Book y is already in the Diagnostic If the rela 1. 8. Ensure that the Diagnostic Men u is se - lected to COM2 LOOPBACK TEST (Upper Mode, then go to Step 2. Case). If the re lay is NOT in the Diagnostic Mode, then enter the relay diagnostic mode by COM2 LOOPBACK TEST performing the steps described in the output input led target  Entering Relay Diagnostic Mode section _ button disp  2. of this chapter, then go to Step com3 clock COM2  _ _ com1  led cal factory 2. Ensure that the Diagnostic Men u is se - lected to COM1 LOOPBACK TEST (Upper Case). If COM2 is not selected (Upper Case), then use the Right/Left arrow pushbuttons COM1 LOOPBACK TEST to select COM2. output input led target  Press . ENTER , then repeat Steps 3 8  button disp _ through 6 for COM2 .  _ _ com2 com3 clock COM1 led cal factory  COM3 Test (2‑Wire) If COM1 is not selected (Upper Case), The COM3 Echo Test 2-Wire allows the user to test then use the Right/Left arrow pushbuttons the RS - 485 rear terminal connections for proper to select COM1. operation. 3. Press ENTER . The following is displayed: This test requires a PC with an RS : - NOTE 485  COM1 LOOPBACK TEST converter and terminal emulator software installed. CONNECT LOOPBACK PLUG 1. y is already in the Diagnostic If the rela 4. - back plug to COM1 Connect the loop , the Mode, then go to Step 2. - front-panel RS 232C connector. If the re lay is NOT in the Diagnostic Mode, 5. Press ENTER , the relay will initiate the then enter the relay diagnostic mode by loopback test. performing the steps described in the If the COM P ort passes the loopback test Entering Relay Diagnostic Mode section the following will be displayed: of this chapter, then go to Step 2. COM1 LOOPBACK TEST Ensure that the Diagnostic Men u is se - 2. -DONE- lected to COM3 ECHO TEST 2 WIRE (Upper Case). ort fails the loopback test the If the COM P COM3 ECHO TEST 2 WIRE following will be displayed: output input led target  COM1 LOOPBACK TEST button disp  _ RX–TX FAIL _ com1 com2 COM3 clock  _ led cal factory  EXIT Press 6. to return to the DIAGNOSTIC Menu. If COM3 is not selected (Upper Case), then use the Right/Left arrow pushbuttons Testing is complete, 7 If all Diagnostic . to select COM3. then exit the diagnostic menu by PRESS EXIT TO EXIT pressing EXIT , Press ENTER . The following is displayed: 3. DIAGNOSTIC MODE is displayed, then a second time. EXIT press COM3 ECHO TEST 2WIRE IDLING...9600, N, 8, 1 6–74

298 Testing – 6 4. F rom the rear of the unit, connect a PC to Clock ON/OFF the relay at terminals 3(-) and 4(+) using This feature provides the user with the ability to either wire opera an RS - - - 485 converter set for 2 start or stop the clock. - tion. See Figure 6 12 for diagram. 1. y is already in the Diagnostic If the rela   Mode, then go to Step 2.     lay is NOT in the Diagnostic Mode, If the re     then enter the relay diagnostic mode by  performing the steps described in the  Entering Relay Diagnostic Mode section of this chapter, then go to Step 2.   u is se 2. Ensure that the Diagnostic Men - lected to CLOCK ON/OFF (Upper Case). CLOCK START/STOP  output input led target     button disp _ _ _  CLOCK com1 com2 com3 Figure 6‑12 RS‑485 2‑W ire Testing  led cal factory ollowing PC communications Set the f . 5 If CLOCK is not selected (Upper Case), parameters: then use the Right/Left arrow pushbuttons to select CLOCK. Baud Rate 9600  ‘80’ will be displayed in the seconds place NOTE : None Parity when the clock is stopped. Data Bits 8 ENTER Press 3. , the following is displayed: Stop Bits 1 If the clock is already running the a. Half Duplex following will be displayed and will continue to update. 6. minal emulator program on Open the ter the PC, then open the COM port for the CLOCK TEST 485 converter. RS - 01-Jan-2003 01:01:01 Press a k 7. ey on the PC keyboard, then k was NOT running the fol If the cloc - . b verify the following: lowing will be displayed: character pressed is displayed The a. temporarily on the relay display. CLOCK TEST 01-Jan-2003 01:01:80 character pressed is displayed on b . The the PC monitor. ENTER T 4. o start or stop the clock press , unication has been verified, When comm 8. the following is displayed: , the following is displayed: EXIT press a. - k is already running the fol If the cloc COM3 ECHO TEST 2WIRE lowing will be displayed: -DONE- CLOCK TEST CLOCK STOP 9. to return to the DIAGNOSTIC EXIT Press Menu. CLOCK TEST 10. Close the COM por t on the PC, and exit 01-Jan-2003 01:01:80 the terminal program. Testing is complete, If all Diagnostic 1 1. then exit the diagnostic menu by PRESS EXIT TO EXIT , EXIT pressing is displayed, then DIAGNOSTIC MODE a second time. EXIT press 6–75

299 M‑3425A Instruction Book . If the cloc k was NOT running the fol - 3. Press ENTER , the following will be dis - b played: lowing will be displayed: FLASH RELAY OK LED CLOCK TEST CLOCK START OFF on Select (upper case) either ON (to flash) or 4 . CLOCK TEST OFF (to Illuminate) by pressing the right/ 01-Jan-2003 01:01:01 left arrow pushbutton once. , the following will be dis 5. Press ENTER - played:  o preserve battery life the clock T : NOTE should be OFF if the unit is to be left FLASH RELAY OK LED de-energized for a long period of time. -DONE- 5. The cloc k can be toggled ON or OFF by the 6. To - LED e xit Diag FLASH RELA Y OK . pressing any arrow pushbutton or ENTER . nostic Menu press EXIT o exit the Clock ON/OFF mode press T 7 . If all Diagnostic Testing is complete, , the following will be displayed: EXIT then exit the diagnostic menu by CLOCK TEST , PRESS EXIT TO EXIT EXIT pressing -DONE- DIAGNOSTIC MODE is displayed, then press a second time. EXIT o exit the CLOCK ON/OFF Diagnostic 6. T Menu press EXIT . Auto Calibration If all Diagnostic Testing is complete, 7 . Refer to the following Section 6.4, Auto Calibration, then exit the diagnostic menu by for more information on that function. pressing PRESS EXIT TO EXIT , EXIT DIAGNOSTIC MODE is displayed, then AUTO CALIBRATION press EXIT a second time.  clock led CAL factory Relay OK LED Flash/Illuminated Factory Use Only This feature provides the user with the ability to set This function is provided to allow access by factory the relay OK LED to either Flash or be Illuminated personnel. when the relay is working properly. FACTORY USE ONLY 1. If the rela y is already in the Diagnostic Mode, then go to Step 2.  clock led cal FACTORY If the re lay is NOT in the Diagnostic Mode, then enter the relay diagnostic mode by performing the steps described in the Entering Relay Diagnostic Mode section of this chapter, then go to Step 2. - 2. Ensure that the Diagnostic Men u is se LED lected to FLASH RELA Y (Upper OK Case). FLASH RELAY OK LED output input led target  _ button disp  _ _ com1 com2 com3 clock   LED cal factory If LED (to the left of cal) is not selected - (Upper Case), then use the Right/Left ar row pushbuttons to select LED. 6–76

300 Testing – 6 7. Press ENTER , the following will be dis - Auto Calibration 6.4 played: CONNECT REFERENCE INPUTS The M -  3425A Generator Protection Re NOTE: - PRESS ENTER TO CALIBRATE lay has been fully calibrated at the fac - tory. There is no need to recalibrate the = V 8. = V = V Connect V =120.0 = V unit prior to initial installation. However, X N C B A - (±0.01) V at 0° phase. (See Figure 6 14.) in-system calibration of the 64F function may be needed for units purchased with ✢ =I =I =5.00** Amps =I =I =I =I Connect I 9 . a B c N A b C the 64F Field Ground option. Calibration 13). - at 0° (see Figure 6 ™ can be initiated using the HMI or IPSutil program. ** For a 1 A CT rating, use 1 A. ✢ f 64S is purchased, do not put nominal I current in the IN channel. The IN input Phase and Neutral Fundamental Calibration - is calibrated separately (see 64S proce If the rela y is already in the Diagnostic 1. dure.) Mode, then go to Step 2. lay is NOT in the Diagnostic Mode, If the re The calibration can be verified by exiting from the then enter the relay diagnostic mode by Diagnostic menu and reading status: performing the steps described in the Entering Relay Diagnostic Mode section V =V =V =V =120V =V V =V =0 V =120V N C 2 0 B X 1 A of this chapter, then go to Step 2. =I =I =5 A** I I =I I =0 =5 A** 2 A B C 1 0 - Ensure that the Diagnostic Men 2. u is se lected to CAL (upper case). =I =I I =5 A** a b c FLASH RELAY OK LED Real=1 pu Reactive=0.0 pu  output input led target  button disp _ Power Factor = 1.0 _  _ com1 com2 com3 clock = 0 = I = I I CAL led  factory diffa diffc diffb Where subscript 0, 1, and 2 represent zero, positive, If CAL is not selected (Upper Case), then and negative sequence quantities, respectively. use the Right/Left arrow pushbuttons to select CAL. ** For a 1 A CT rating, use 1 A. 3. Press ENTER , the following will be dis - played: NOTE: The phase angle diff erence between  voltage and current input source 60 HZ CALIBRATION should be 0°, ±0.05°, and an accurate 60_HZ field_gnd low-distortion source should be used. (THD less than 1%). ation Menu 4. Ensure that the 60 HZ Calibr selected is Case). (Upper 60_HZ to 10. Press ENTER - , the following will be dis If is not 60_HZ selected (Upper Case), played while the relay is being calibrated: then use the Right/Left arrow pushbuttons CALIBRATING 60_HZ. select to WAIT 5. Press ENTER , the following will be dis - played: - When the calibr ation is complete, the fol lowing will be displayed: 60 HZ CALIBRATION NOM_F 3rdh_F 64s_f CALIBRATING DONE selected is NOM_F (Upper that 6. Ensure Case). ve the calibration source inputs. 11. Remo not Case), (Upper selected is NOM_F If then use the Right/Left arrow pushbuttons select NOM_F. to 6–77

301 M‑3425A Instruction Book Third Harmonic Calibration b . Connect V =V =V =120.0 V, 180 A C B Hz (150 Hz for 50 Hz units). See ate the third har - 1. If it is desired to calibr 16. - Figure 6 monic only and the relay is already in the Diagnostic Mode, then go to Step 2. Press ENTER , the following will be dis - 9. played while the Third Harmonic is cali - If it is desired to calibr ate the third har - brated: monic only and the relay is NOT in the Diagnostic Mode, then enter the relay CALIBRATING diagnostic mode by performing the steps WAIT described in the Entering Relay Diagnostic Mode section of this chapter, then go to ation is complete, the fol When the calibr - Step 2. lowing will be displayed: - 2. u is se Ensure that the Diagnostic Men AUTO CALIBRATION lected to CAL (upper case). DONE FLASH RELAY OK LED  output input led target Remo and V . 10. ve the voltage from V N X  _ button disp ve the calibration source inputs. Remo 11. _ _ com1 com2 com3 clock  factory CAL led  64S 100% Stator Ground by Low Frequency Injection Calibration If CAL is not selected (Upper Case), then use the Right/Left arrow pushbuttons to If it is desired to calibr 1. ate the 64S 100% select CAL. Stator Ground by Low Frequency Injec - tion only and the relay is already in the Press 3. ENTER , the following will be dis - Diagnostic Mode, then go to Step 2. played: If it is desired to calibr ate the 64S 100% 60 HZ CALIBRATION Stator Ground by Low Frequency Injection field_gnd 60_HZ only and the relay is NOT in the Diagnos - tic Mode, then enter the relay diagnostic 4. ation Menu Ensure that the 60 HZ Calibr mode by performing the steps described (Upper is 60_HZ Case). selected to in the Entering Relay Diagnostic Mode section of this chapter, then go to Step 2. is (Upper Case), 60_HZ not selected If then use the Right/Left arrow pushbuttons Ensure that the Diagnostic Men u is se - 2. to select 60_HZ. lected to CAL (upper case). 5. Press ENTER - , the following will be dis FLASH RELAY OK LED played:  output input led target 60 HZ CALIBRATION _  button disp nom_f 3RDH_F 64s_f com1 com2 com3 clock _ _   CAL factory led 6. Ensure that (Upper 3RDH_F is selected Case). If CAL is not selected (Upper Case), then use the Right/Left arrow pushbuttons to If (Upper selected not is 3RDH_F Case), select CAL. then use the Right/Left arrow pushbuttons select 3RDH_F. to , the following will be dis - Press 3. ENTER played: , the following will be dis - 7. Press ENTER played: 60 HZ CALIBRATION field_gnd 60_HZ INPUT 180 HZ PRESS ENTER TO CALIBRATE Ensure that the 60 HZ Calibr ation Menu 4. Case). (Upper 60_HZ selected is to or 50 Hz units) (150 Hz f not (Upper Case), is selected 60_HZ If 8. Connect Voltage Inputs as follows: then use the Right/Left arrow pushbuttons = V a =10.0 V, 180 Hz . Connect V 60_HZ. select to X N (150 Hz for 50 Hz units). See - Figure 6 15. 6–78

302 Testing – 6 Press ENTER , the following will be dis - - u is se Ensure that the Diagnostic Men 3. 5. lected to CAL (upper case). played: FLASH RELAY OK LED 60 HZ CALIBRATION  output input led target 3rdh_f 64S_F nom_f button disp  _ selected is 6. Ensure (Upper 64S_F that _ _ com1 com2 com3 clock  Case). factory  led CAL Case), If 64S_F is not selected (Upper If CAL is not selected (Upper Case), then then use the Right/Left arrow pushbuttons use the Right/Left arrow pushbuttons to to 64S_F. select select CAL. - 7. ENTER , the following will be dis Press 4. ENTER - , the following will be dis Press played: played: INPUT 20 HZ 60 HZ CALIBRATION PRESS ENTER TO CALIBRATE 60_HZ field_gnd 0.01 V) 20 Hz,  =20.0 V ( Connect V 8. N Ensure that the 60 HZ Calibr 5. ation Menu  0.01 mA) 20 Hz. See Figure I =20.0 mA ( N Case). (Upper is selected to FIELD_GND 6. 6 - FIELD_GND (Upper selected not is If - , the following will be dis ENTER Press 9. - Case), then use the Right arrow pushbut played while the 64S is calibrated: select to FIELD_GND. ton CALIBRATING , the following will be dis Press 6. - ENTER WAIT played: ation is complete, the f ol - When the calibr CONNECT 1 KOHM REF. lowing will be displayed: PRESS ENTER TO CALIBRATE CALIBRATING DONE 7. resistance, Ω x for 1 k Set the decade bo , the following will be ENTER then press and I 10. Remo ve the voltage from V N. N displayed: 11. ve the calibration source inputs. Remo CALIBRATING WAIT Field Ground Calibration 8. the calibration is complete the fol - When Field Ground Calibration only applies to units pur - lowing will be displayed: chased with the 64F Field Ground option. Calibration is necessary for long cable lengths (greater than CALIBRATING 100 feet) to compensate for cabling losses from DONE 3425A and the M 3921 Coupler module, and the M - - therefore should be accomplished in system, after all . , the unit will display the next ENTER Press 9 wiring is complete. resistance in the calibration sequence to 1 Connect the M-3921 Field Ground Coupler . be tested. - box as shown in Figure 6 7, Field Ground x to the resistance speci 1 0. Set the decade bo - Coupler. . When fied by the HMI, then press ENTER y is already in the Diagnostic 2. If the rela the display shows DONE press ENTER . Mode, then go to Step 3. ation is 11. Repeat Step 10 until the calibr lay is NOT in the Diagnostic Mode, If the re . complete for 100 k Ω then enter the relay diagnostic mode by Press 12. twice to exit the Diagnostic EXIT performing the steps described in the Mode. Entering Relay Diagnostic Mode section 3. of this chapter, then go to Step 6–79

303 M‑3425A Instruction Book Polarity 55 47 I I A a 54 46 57 49 I I B b 56 48 Current Input 59 51 I I C c 58 50 53 I N 52 Figure 6 - 13 Curr ent Input Configuration                               Figure 6-14 oltage Input Configuration V                oltage Input Configuration Figure 6 - 15 V 6–80

304 Testing – 6 39 Hot Volta ge V A Input 38 Neutral 41 V B 40 43 V C 42 oltage Input Configuration Figure 6 - 16 V 6–81

305 M‑3425A Instruction Book This Page Left Intentionally Blank 6–82

306 Appendix – A A Appendix A – Configuration Record Forms Figure A-3, Functional Configuration Record Form This Appendix contains photocopy–ready forms for reproduces the Configure Relay menus. For each recording the configuration and setting of the function or setpoint, refer to the configuration you M-3425A Generator Protection Relay. The forms have defined using the Relay Configuration Table, can be supplied to field service personnel for and circle whether it should be enabled or disabled, configuring the relay, and kept on file for future the output contacts it will activate, and the inputs reference. that will block its operation. Relay Configuration Table A copy of the (Table Figure A-4, Setpoint & Timing Record Form allows A-1) is provided to define and record the blocking recording of the specific values entered for each inputs and output configuration. For each function; enabled setpoint or function. The form follows the (disabled) column or check the output check the D main menu selections of the relay. contacts o be operated by the function, and check t the inputs designated to block the function operation . Unpurchased or unavailable functions will not be visible within the menus. If a function is DISABLED, Figure A-2, Communication Data & Unit Setup the input/output screens for that function will not be Record Form reproduces the Communication and displayed. Setup unit menus. This form records definition of the parameters necessary for communication with the relay, as well as access codes, user logo lines, date & time setting, and front panel display operation. A–1

307 M-3425A Instruction Book T S T U P N I S U P O U T D NOITCNUF 2 LF 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 1 1 2 12 3 1 42 2 52 1 2 72 3 1 NT72 2 1 2 23 3 1 04 2 FED 64 VNI 94 1 05 2 FB05 N05 1 TD05 2 72/05 N15 V15 1 2 95 3 D95 1 2 N95 3 Check each box applicable : ✓ (See page A-1 for information on using this table.) D Column = Function Disabled. OUTPUTS Columns =Designated function output(s) fl Column = Function blocked by fuse loss. INPUTS Columns =Designated function blocking input(s) Table A-1 Relay Configuration Table (page 1 of 4) A–2

308 Appendix – A D O U T P U T S I N P U T S FUNCTION 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FL 6 5 4 3 2 1 59X 60FL 64B 1 64F 2 DEF 67N INV 64S 78 1 2 81 3 4 1 2 3 81A 4 5 6 1 81R 2 1 87 2 87GD BM TCKT 1 2 3 IPS 4 5 6 Check each box applicable : ✓ (See page A-1 for information on using this table.) D Column = Function Disabled. OUTPUTS Columns =Designated function output(s) fl Column = Function blocked by fuse loss. INPUTS Columns =Designated function blocking input(s) Relay Configuration Table (page 2 of 4) Table A-1 A–3

309 M-3425A Instruction Book EXPANDED OUTPUTS EXPANDED INPUTS D FUN CTION 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 1 21 2 3 1 24 2 25 1 27 2 3 1 27TN 2 1 2 32 3 1 40 2 DEF 46 INV 49 1 50 2 50BF 50N 1 50DT 2 50/27 51N 51V 1 2 59 3 59D 1 2 59N 3 Relay Configuration Table (page 3 of 4) Table A-1 A–4

310 Appendix – A D STUPNIDEDNAPXE STUPTUODEDNAPXE NOITCNUF 12 02 91 81 71 61 51 41 31 21 11 01 32 41 31 21 11 01 9 8 7 22 9 X95 LF06 B46 1 F46 2 FED N76 VNI S46 87 1 2 18 3 4 1 2 3 A18 4 5 6 1 R18 2 1 78 2 DG78 MB TKCT 1 2 3 SPI 4 5 6 Relay Configuration Table - Expanded I/O (page 4 of 4) Table A-1 A–5

311 M-3425A Instruction Book KEY TO INPUT DATA RECORD FORMS screens are either All heavily bordered MENU screens which have horizontal choices A. (made with right - left arrows) or screens displaying a result of a choice previously made. B. enclose screens which bound areas that pushbutton ENTER will Dashed boxes EXIT or move in. In order to move out of one of the dotted boxes it is necessary to either push make a menu choice change using the Right - Left arrow. C. The Up/Down arrows only adjust value or letter (lower/upper case) inputs; they do not move within the menus or between menu displays. D. The Right/Left arrows are used only to make horizontally displayed choices. These can be either menu choices or input value digit choices. The previous choice or location in a menu is highlighted immediately. The ENTER pushbutton records the setting change (whatever is in that screen when ENTER is E. pressed will be installed in memory) and moves down within a menu. The operator will notice that after the last menu item, ENTER moves to the top of the same menu but does not change menu positions. F. Pressing at any time will exit the display screen to the last screen containing a horizontal EXIT choice. (Return to the preceding menu).              Figure A-1 Human-Machine Interface Module G. The symbol J or I in a screen indicates additional horizontal menu choices are available in the indicated direction. As previously described, the Right and Left arrows will move the operator to those additional choices. : Unpurchased or unavailable functions will not be visible within the menus. Q NOTE A–6

312 Appendix – A COMMUNICATION JJ II I J targets osc_rec COMM II JJ COM1 SETUP COM3 SETUP J COM1 com2 com3 com-adr J com1 com2 COM3 com_adr COM1 BAUD RATE COM3 DEAD SYNC TIME J baud_300 baud_600 baud_1200 ________ MS baud_4800 BAUD_9600 I COM3 PROTOCOL beco2200 MODBUS COM2 SETUP com1 COM2 com3 com_adr J COM3 PARITY NONE odd even COM2 BAUD RATE J baud_300 baud_600 baud_1200 COM3 STOP BITS baud_4800 BAUD_9600 I ________ COM2 DEAD SYNC TIME ________ MS COMMUNICATION ADDRESS com1 com2 com3 COM_ADR J COM2 PROTOCOL beco2200 MODBUS COMMUNICATION ADDRESS ________ COM2 PARITY none odd even RESPONSE TIME DELAY DLY accss eth eth_ip I COM2 STOP BITS ________ COMM ACCESS CODE I dly ACCSS eth eth_ip COMM ACCESS CODE ________ Q : Unpurchased or unavailable functions will not be visible within the menus. NOTE Communication Data & Unit Setup Record Form (page 1 of 3) Figure A-2 A–7

313 M-3425A Instruction Book COMMUNICATION JJ II I J targets osc_rec COMM II JJ ETHERNET ETHERNET PROTOCOL dly accss ETH eth_ip I tcp PROT ETHERNET SELECT PROTOCOL disable ENABLE modbus serconv TCP/IP SETTINGS ETHERNET ADDRESS TCP prot I accss eth ETH_IP ETHERNET IP ADDRESS DHCP PROTOCOL XX.XX.XX.XX disable ENABLE After EXIT to Comm menu, DHCP PROTOCOL the following will be dis- DISABLE enable played (if any changes have been made in ETHERNET menu) IP ADDRESS ________ CONFIGURING ETH... NET MASK ________ GATEWAY ETHERNET IP ADDRESS ________ XX.XX.XX.XX NOTE Q : Unpurchased or unavailable functions will not be visible within the menus. Communication Data & Unit Setup Record Form (page 2 of 3) Figure A-2 A–8

314 Appendix – A SETUP UNIT II I SETUP exit II SOFTWARE VERSION CLEAR ALARM COUNTER J VERS sn access number J logo1 logo2 out ALRM I SOFTWARE VERSION CLEAR ALARM COUNTER D-XXXXV__.__.__ PRESS ENTER KEY TO CLEAR SERIAL NUMBER DATE & TIME J vers SN access number TIME error eth_ver I J SERIAL NUMBER DATE & TIME ________ 01-Jan-2001 12:00:00 ALTER ACCESS CODES DATE & TIME J vers sn ACCESS number ________ YEAR ENTER ACCESS CODE DATE & TIME LEVEL#1 level#2 level#3 JAN feb mar apr may J jun jul aug sep oct J I LEVEL #1 I nov dec ________ DATE & TIME ENTER ACCESS CODE ________ DATE level#1 LEVEL#2 level#3 LEVEL #2 DATE & TIME ________ J sun mon tue wed thu I fri sat ENTER ACCESS CODE level#1 level#2 LEVEL#3 DATE & TIME ________ HOUR LEVEL #3 ________ DATE & TIME ________ MINUTES USER CONTROL NUMBER DATE & TIME J vers sn access NUMBER ________ SECONDS USER CONTROL NUMBER ________ CLEAR ERROR CODES time ERROR eth_ver J I USER LOGO LINE 1 I LOGO1 logo2 out alrm J CLEAR ERROR CODES PRESS ENTER KEY TO CLEAR USER LOGO LINE 1 ETHERNET FIRMWARE VER I time error ETH_VER J USER LOGO LINE 2 J I logo1 LOGO2 out alrm ETHERNET FIRMWARE VER D-____V__.__.__ USER LOGO LINE 2 DIAGNOSTIC MODE CLEAR OUTPUT COUNTERS I DIAG logo1 logo2 OUT alrm I J PROCESSOR WILL RESET! CLEAR OUTPUT COUNTERS ENTER KEY TO CONTINUE PRESS ENTER KEY TO CLEAR Communication Data & Unit Setup Record Form (page 3 of 3) Figure A-2 A–9

315 M-3425A Instruction Book CONFIGURE RELAY JJ II I CONFIG sys stat J JJ II CONFIGURE RELAY JJ J VOLTAGE_RELAY JJ 59 #1 PHASE OVERVOLTAGE 27 #1 PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE disable ENABLE disable ENABLE 59 #1 BLOCK INPUT 27 #1 BLOCK INPUT fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 i14 i13 i12 i14 i13 i12 59 #1 RELAY OUTPUT 27 #1 RELAY OUTPUT o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 o14 o13 o12 o11 o10 o9 o14 o13 o12 o11 o10 o9 o19 o18 o17 o16 o15 o19 o18 o17 o16 o15 o23 o22 o21 o20 o23 o22 o21 o20 59 #2 PHASE OVERVOLTAGE 27 #2 PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE disable ENABLE disable ENABLE 59 #2 BLOCK INPUT 27 #2 BLOCK INPUT fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 i14 i13 i12 i14 i13 i12 59 #2 RELAY OUTPUT 27 #2 RELAY OUTPUT o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 o14 o13 o12 o11 o10 o9 o14 o13 o12 o11 o10 o9 o19 o18 o17 o16 o15 o19 o18 o17 o16 o15 o23 o22 o21 o20 o23 o22 o21 o20 59 #3 PHASE OVERVOLTAGE 27 #3 PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE disable ENABLE disable ENABLE 59 #3 BLOCK INPUT 27 #3 BLOCK INPUT fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 i14 i13 i12 i14 i13 i12 59 #3 RELAY OUTPUT 27 #3 RELAY OUTPUT o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 o14 o13 o12 o11 o10 o9 o14 o13 o12 o11 o10 o9 o19 o18 o17 o16 o15 o19 o18 o17 o16 o15 o23 o22 o21 o20 o23 o22 o21 o20 Inputs 7 to 14 and Outputs 9 to 23 must be set through ® . IPScom : Unpurchased or unavailable functions will not be visible within the menus. NOTE Q Functional Configuration Record Form (1 of 18) Figure A-3 A–10

316 Appendix – A CONFIGURE RELAY JJ II I CONFIG sys stat J JJ II CONFIGURE RELAY JJ J VOLTAGE_RELAY JJ 59X #2 OVERVOLTAGE 27TN #1 NEUTRL UNDERVOLT disable ENABLE disable ENABLE 27TN #1 BLOCK INPUT 59X #2 BLOCK INPUT fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 i14 i13 i12 i14 i13 i12 27TN #1 RELAY OUTPUT 59X #2 RELAY OUTPUT o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 o14 o13 o12 o11 o10 o9 o14 o13 o12 o11 o10 o9 o19 o18 o17 o16 o15 o19 o18 o17 o16 o15 o23 o22 o21 o20 o23 o22 o21 o20 27TN #2 NEUTRL UNDERVOLT 59N #1 NEUTRAL OVERVOLT disable ENABLE disable ENABLE 27TN #2 BLOCK INPUT 59N #1 BLOCK INPUT fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 i14 i13 i12 i14 i13 i12 27TN #2 RELAY OUTPUT 59N #1 RELAY OUTPUT o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 o14 o13 o12 o11 o10 o9 o14 o13 o12 o11 o10 o9 o19 o18 o17 o16 o15 o19 o18 o17 o16 o15 o23 o22 o21 o20 o23 o22 o21 o20 59X #1 OVERVOLTAGE disable ENABLE 59X #1 BLOCK INPUT fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 i14 i13 i12 59X #1 RELAY OUTPUT o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 o14 o13 o12 o11 o10 o9 o19 o18 o17 o16 o15 o23 o22 o21 o20 Inputs 7 to 14 and Outputs 9 to 23 must be set through Q NOTE : Unpurchased or unavailable func- ® . IPScom tions will not be visible within the menus. Functional Configuration Record Form (2 of 18) Figure A-3 A–11

317 M-3425A Instruction Book CONFIGURE RELAY JJ II CONFIG sys stat I J II JJ CONFIGURE RELAY JJ VOLTAGE_RELAY J JJ 59N #2 NEUTRAL OVERVOLT 59D VOLTAGE DIFF. disable ENABLE disable ENABLE 59N #2 BLOCK INPUT 59D BLOCK INPUT fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 i14 i13 i12 i14 i13 i12 59N #2 RELAY OUTPUT 59D RELAY OUTPUT o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 o14 o13 o12 o11 o10 o9 o14 o13 o12 o11 o10 o9 o19 o18 o17 o16 o15 o19 o18 o17 o16 o15 o23 o22 o21 o20 o23 o22 o21 o20 59N #3 NEUTRAL OVERVOLT disable ENABLE 59N #3 BLOCK INPUT fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 i14 i13 i12 59N #3 RELAY OUTPUT o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 o14 o13 o12 o11 o10 o9 o19 o18 o17 o16 o15 o23 o22 o21 o20 Inputs 7 to 14 and Outputs 9 to 23 must be set through ® . IPScom NOTE Q : Unpurchased or unavailable functions will not be visible within the menus. Figure A-3 Functional Configuration Record Form (3 of 18) A–12

318 Appendix – A CONFIGURE RELAY II JJ J CONFIG sys stat I II JJ CONFIGURE RELAY II JJ I CURRENT_RELAY J II JJ 50 #2 INST OVERCURRENT 6DT NEG SEQ CURRENT DEF 4 disable enable disable ENABLE 50 #2 BLOCK INPUT 46DT BLOCK INPUT fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 i14 i13 i12 i14 i13 i12 50 #2 RELAY OUTPUT 46DT RELAY OUTPUT o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 o14 o13 o12 o11 o10 o9 o14 o13 o12 o11 o10 o9 o19 o18 o17 o16 o15 o19 o18 o17 o16 o15 o23 o22 o21 o20 o23 o22 o21 o20 50/27 INADVERTANT ENRGNG 46IT NEG SEQ CURRENT INV disable ENABLE disable ENABLE 50/27 BLOCK INPUT 46IT BLOCK INPUT fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 i14 i13 i12 i14 i13 i12 50/27 RELAY OUTPUT 46IT RELAY OUTPUT o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 o14 o13 o12 o11 o10 o9 o14 o13 o12 o11 o10 o9 o19 o18 o17 o16 o15 o19 o18 o17 o16 o15 o23 o22 o21 o20 o23 o22 o21 o20 50BF BREAKER FAILURE 50 #1 INST OVERCURRENT disable ENABLE disable ENABLE 50BF BLOCK INPUT 50 #1 BLOCK INPUT fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 i14 i13 i12 i14 i13 i12 50BF RELAY OUTPUT 50 #1 RELAY OUTPUT o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 o14 o13 o12 o11 o10 o9 o14 o13 o12 o11 o10 o9 o19 o18 o17 o16 o15 o19 o18 o17 o16 o15 o23 o22 o21 o20 o23 o22 o21 o20 Inputs 7 to 14 and Outputs 9 to 23 must be set through NOTE : Unpurchased or unavailable func- Q ® IPScom . tions will not be visible within the menus. Functional Configuration Record Form (4 of 18) Figure A-3 A–13

319 M-3425A Instruction Book CONFIGURE RELAY II JJ I CONFIG sys stat J II JJ CONFIGURE RELAY II JJ I J CURRENT_RELAY II JJ 50DT#1 DEF TIME OVERCURR 51N NTRL OVERCURRNT INV disable ENABLE disable ENABLE 50DT#1 BLOCK INPUT 51N BLOCK INPUT fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 i14 i13 i12 i14 i13 i12 50DT#1 RELAY OUTPUT 51N RELAY OUTPUT o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 o14 o13 o12 o11 o10 o9 o14 o13 o12 o11 o10 o9 o19 o18 o17 o16 o15 o19 o18 o17 o16 o15 o23 o22 o21 o20 o23 o22 o21 o20 50DT#2 DEF TIME OVERCURR 49#1 STATOR OVERLOAD disable ENABLE disable ENABLE 50DT#2 BLOCK INPUT 49#1 BLOCK INPUT fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 i14 i13 i12 i14 i13 i12 50DT#2 RELAY OUTPUT 49#1 RELAY OUTPUT o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 o14 o13 o12 o11 o10 o9 o14 o13 o12 o11 o10 o9 o19 o18 o17 o16 o15 o19 o18 o17 o16 o15 o23 o22 o21 o20 o23 o22 o21 o20 50N NTRL INST OVERCURRNT 49#2 STATOR OVERLOAD disable ENABLE disable ENABLE 50N BLOCK INPUT 49#2 BLOCK INPUT fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 i14 i13 i12 i14 i13 i12 50N RELAY OUTPUT 49#2 RELAY OUTPUT o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 o14 o13 o12 o11 o10 o9 o14 o13 o12 o11 o10 o9 o19 o18 o17 o16 o15 o19 o18 o17 o16 o15 o23 o22 o21 o20 o23 o22 o21 o20 Inputs 7 to 14 and Outputs NOTE : Unpurchased or unavailable func- Q 9 to 23 must be set through tions will not be visible within the menus. ® . IPScom Functional Configuration Record Form (5 of 18) Figure A-3 A–14

320 Appendix – A CONFIGURE RELAY II JJ I CONFIG sys stat J JJ II CONFIGURE RELAY II JJ I CURRENT_RELAY J JJ II 87GD GND DIFFERENTIAL 51V OVERCURRENT INV disable ENABLE disable ENABLE 87GD BLOCK INPUT 51V BLOCK INPUT fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 i14 i13 i12 i14 i13 i12 87GD RELAY OUTPUT 51V RELAY OUTPUT o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 o14 o13 o12 o11 o10 o9 o14 o13 o12 o11 o10 o9 o19 o18 o17 o16 o15 o19 o18 o17 o16 o15 o23 o22 o21 o20 o23 o22 o21 o20 67NDT RES DIR OVERCURR 87 #1 DIFF CURRENT disable ENABLE disable ENABLE 67NDT BLOCK INPUT 87 #1 BLOCK INPUT fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 i14 i13 i12 i14 i13 i12 67NDT RELAY OUTPUT 87 #1 RELAY OUTPUT o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 o14 o13 o12 o11 o10 o9 o14 o13 o12 o11 o10 o9 o19 o18 o17 o16 o15 o19 o18 o17 o16 o15 o23 o22 o21 o20 o23 o22 o21 o20 67NIT RES DIR OVERCURR 87 #2 DIFF CURRENT disable ENABLE disable ENABLE 67NIT BLOCK INPUT 87 #2 BLOCK INPUT fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 i14 i13 i12 i14 i13 i12 67NIT RELAY OUTPUT 87 #2 RELAY OUTPUT o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 o14 o13 o12 o11 o10 o9 o14 o13 o12 o11 o10 o9 o19 o18 o17 o16 o15 o19 o18 o17 o16 o15 o23 o22 o21 o20 o23 o22 o21 o20 Inputs 7 to 14 and Outputs 9 to 23 must be set through NOTE : Unpurchased or unavailable func- Q ® IPScom . tions will not be visible within the menus. Functional Configuration Record Form (6 of 18) Figure A-3 A–15

321 M-3425A Instruction Book CONFIGURE RELAY JJ II I CONFIG sys stat J II JJ CONFIGURE RELAY 81 #4 FREQUENCY JJ II J FREQUENCY_RELAY I II JJ disable ENABLE 81 #1 FREQUENCY 81 #4 BLOCK INPUT disable ENABLE fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 81 #1 BLOCK INPUT i14 i13 i12 fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 81 #4 RELAY OUTPUT i14 i13 i12 o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 o14 o13 o12 o11 o10 o9 81 #1 RELAY OUTPUT o19 o18 o17 o16 o15 o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 o23 o22 o21 o20 o14 o13 o12 o11 o10 o9 o19 o18 o17 o16 o15 o23 o22 o21 o20 81R #1 RATE OF CHNG FREQ disable ENABLE 81 #2 FREQUENCY 81R #1 BLOCK INPUT disable ENABLE fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 81 #2 BLOCK INPUT i14 i13 i12 fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 81R #1 RELAY OUTPUT i14 i13 i12 o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 o14 o13 o12 o11 o10 o9 81 #2 RELAY OUTPUT o19 o18 o17 o16 o15 o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 o23 o22 o21 o20 o14 o13 o12 o11 o10 o9 o19 o18 o17 o16 o15 o23 o22 o21 o20 81R #2 RATE OF CHNG FREQ disable ENABLE 81 #3 FREQUENCY 81R #2 BLOCK INPUT disable ENABLE fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 81 #3 BLOCK INPUT i14 i13 i12 fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 81R #2 RELAY OUTPUT i14 i13 i12 o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 o14 o13 o12 o11 o10 o9 81 #3 RELAY OUTPUT o19 o18 o17 o16 o15 o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 o23 o22 o21 o20 o14 o13 o12 o11 o10 o9 o19 o18 o17 o16 o15 o23 o22 o21 o20 Inputs 7 to 14 and Outputs : Unpurchased or unavailable func- NOTE Q 9 to 23 must be set through ® tions will not be visible within the menus. . IPScom Functional Configuration Record Form (7 of 18) Figure A-3 A–16

322 Appendix – A CONFIGURE RELAY II JJ I J CONFIG sys stat II JJ CONFIGURE RELAY II JJ I FREQUENCY_RELAY J II JJ 81A #4 FREQ ACCUMULATOR disable ENABLE 81A #1 FREQ ACCUMULATOR disable ENABLE 81A #4 BLOCK INPUT fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 81A #1 BLOCK INPUT i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 i14 i13 i12 i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 i14 i13 i12 81A #4 RELAY OUTPUT o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 81A #1 RELAY OUTPUT o14 o13 o12 o11 o10 o9 o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 o19 o18 o17 o16 o15 o14 o13 o12 o11 o10 o9 o23 o22 o21 o20 o19 o18 o17 o16 o15 o23 o22 o21 o20 81A #5 FREQ ACCUMULATOR disable ENABLE 81A #2 FREQ ACCUMULATOR disable ENABLE 81A #5 BLOCK INPUT fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 81A #2 BLOCK INPUT i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 i14 i13 i12 i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 i14 i13 i12 81A #5 RELAY OUTPUT o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 81A #2 RELAY OUTPUT o14 o13 o12 o11 o10 o9 o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 o19 o18 o17 o16 o15 o14 o13 o12 o11 o10 o9 o23 o22 o21 o20 o19 o18 o17 o16 o15 o23 o22 o21 o20 81A #6 FREQ ACCUMULATOR disable ENABLE 81A #3 FREQ ACCUMULATOR disable ENABLE 81A #6 BLOCK INPUT fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 81A #3 BLOCK INPUT i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 i14 i13 i12 i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 i14 i13 i12 81A #6 RELAY OUTPUT o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 81A #3 RELAY OUTPUT o14 o13 o12 o11 o10 o9 o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 o19 o18 o17 o16 o15 o14 o13 o12 o11 o10 o9 o23 o22 o21 o20 o19 o18 o17 o16 o15 o23 o22 o21 o20 Inputs 7 to 14 and Outputs 9 to 23 must be set through NOTE : Unpurchased or unavailable func- Q ® IPScom . tions will not be visible within the menus. Functional Configuration Record Form (8 of 18) Figure A-3 A–17

323 M-3425A Instruction Book CONFIGURE RELAY II JJ CONFIG sys stat J I JJ II CONFIGURE RELAY 24IT VOLTS/HZ INV JJ II J I VOLTS_PER_HERTZ_RELAY II JJ disable ENABLE 24DT #1 VOLTS/HZ DEF 24IT BLOCK INPUT disable ENABLE fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 24DT #1 BLOCK INPUT i14 i13 i12 fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 24IT RELAY OUTPUT i14 i13 i12 o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 o14 o13 o12 o11 o10 o9 24DT #1 RELAY OUTPUT o19 o18 o17 o16 o15 o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 o23 o22 o21 o20 o14 o13 o12 o11 o10 o9 o19 o18 o17 o16 o15 o23 o22 o21 o20 24DT #2 VOLTS/HZ DEF disable ENABLE 24DT #2 BLOCK INPUT fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 i14 i13 i12 24DT #2 RELAY OUTPUT o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 o14 o13 o12 o11 o10 o9 o19 o18 o17 o16 o15 o23 o22 o21 o20 Inputs 7 to 14 and Outputs 9 to 23 must be set through ® IPScom . NOTE Q : Unpurchased or unavailable functions will not be visible within the menus. Functional Configuration Record Form (9 of 18) Figure A-3 A–18

324 Appendix – A CONFIGURE RELAY II JJ CONFIG sys stat I J II JJ CONFIGURE RELAY 32 #2 DIRECTIONAL POWER JJ II POWER_RELAY I J II JJ disable ENABLE 32 #1 DIRECTIONAL POWER 32 #2 BLOCK INPUT disable ENABLE fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 32 #1 BLOCK INPUT i14 i13 i12 fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 32 #2 RELAY OUTPUT i14 i13 i12 o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 o14 o13 o12 o11 o10 o9 32 #1 RELAY OUTPUT o19 o18 o17 o16 o15 o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 o23 o22 o21 o20 o14 o13 o12 o11 o10 o9 o19 o18 o17 o16 o15 o23 o22 o21 o20 32 #3 DIRECTIONAL POWER disable ENABLE 32 #3 BLOCK INPUT fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 i14 i13 i12 32 #3 RELAY OUTPUT o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 o14 o13 o12 o11 o10 o9 o19 o18 o17 o16 o15 o23 o22 o21 o20 Inputs 7 to 14 and Outputs 9 to 23 must be set through ® IPScom . NOTE Q : Unpurchased or unavailable functions will not be visible within the menus. Functional Configuration Record Form (10 of 18) Figure A-3 A–19

325 M-3425A Instruction Book CONFIGURE RELAY JJ II I CONFIG sys stat J II JJ CONFIGURE RELAY 40 #2 LOSS OF FIELD JJ II LOSS_OF_FIELD_RELAY I J JJ II disable ENABLE 40 #1 LOSS OF FIELD 40 #2 BLOCK INPUT disable ENABLE fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 40 #1 BLOCK INPUT i14 i13 i12 fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 40 #2 RELAY OUTPUT i14 i13 i12 o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 o14 o13 o12 o11 o10 o9 40 #1 RELAY OUTPUT o19 o18 o17 o16 o15 o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 o23 o22 o21 o20 o14 o13 o12 o11 o10 o9 o19 o18 o17 o16 o15 o23 o22 o21 o20 40VC #2 LOF WITH VC disable ENABLE 40VC #1 LOF WITH VC 40VC #2 BLOCK INPUT disable ENABLE fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 40VC #1 BLOCK INPUT i14 i13 i12 fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 40VC #2 RELAY OUTPUT i14 i13 i12 o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 o14 o13 o12 o11 o10 o9 40VC #1 RELAY OUTPUT o19 o18 o17 o16 o15 o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 o23 o22 o21 o20 o14 o13 o12 o11 o10 o9 o19 o18 o17 o16 o15 o23 o22 o21 o20 CONFIGURE RELAY JJ II J I V.T._FUSE_LOSS_RELAY JJ II 60FL V.T. FUSE LOSS Inputs 7 to 14 and Outputs disable enable 9 to 23 must be set through ® . IPScom 60FL BLOCK INPUT fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 i14 i13 i12 60FL RELAY OUTPUT o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 o14 o13 o12 o11 o10 o9 o19 o18 o17 o16 o15 NOTE : Unpurchased or unavailable func- Q o23 o22 o21 o20 tions will not be visible within the menus. Functional Configuration Record Form (11 of 18) Figure A-3 A–20

326 Appendix – A CONFIGURE RELAY JJ II I CONFIG sys stat J II JJ CONFIGURE RELAY 21 #3 PHASE DISTANCE JJ II disable ENABLE J PHASE DISTANCE_RELAY I JJ II 21 #3 BLOCK INPUT 21 #1 PHASE DISTANCE fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 disable ENABLE i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 i14 i13 i12 21 #1 BLOCK INPUT fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 21 #3 RELAY OUTPUT i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 i14 i13 i12 o14 o13 o12 o11 o10 o9 o19 o18 o17 o16 o15 21 #1 RELAY OUTPUT o23 o22 o21 o20 o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 o14 o13 o12 o11 o10 o9 o19 o18 o17 o16 o15 78 OUT OF STEP o23 o22 o21 o20 disable ENABLE 78 BLOCK INPUT 21 #2 PHASE DISTANCE fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 disable ENABLE i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 i14 i13 i12 21 #2 BLOCK INPUT fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 78 RELAY OUTPUT i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 i14 i13 i12 o14 o13 o12 o11 o10 o9 o19 o18 o17 o16 o15 21 #2 RELAY OUTPUT o23 o22 o21 o20 o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 o14 o13 o12 o11 o10 o9 o19 o18 o17 o16 o15 o23 o22 o21 o20 Inputs 7 to 14 and Outputs 9 to 23 must be set through ® IPScom . Q : Unpurchased or unavailable functions will not be visible within the menus. NOTE Functional Configuration Record Form (12 of 18) Figure A-3 A–21

327 M-3425A Instruction Book CONFIGURE RELAY JJ II CONFIG sys stat J I II JJ CONFIGURE RELAY II JJ FIELD_GND_RELAY I J II JJ CONFIGURE RELAY 64F#1 FIELD GROUND JJ II STATOR_GND_RELAY I J II JJ disable ENABLE 64S 100% STATOR GROUND 64F #1 BLOCK INPUT disable ENABLE fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 64S BLOCK INPUT i14 i13 i12 fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 64F #1 RELAY OUTPUT i14 i13 i12 o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 o14 o13 o12 o11 o10 o9 64S RELAY OUTPUT o19 o18 o17 o16 o15 o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 o23 o22 o21 o20 o14 o13 o12 o11 o10 o9 o19 o18 o17 o16 o15 o23 o22 o21 o20 64F #2 FIELD GROUND disable ENABLE CONFIGURE RELAY 64F #2 BLOCK INPUT JJ II J SYNC_CHECK_RELAY I JJ II fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 25S SYNC CHECK i14 i13 i12 disable ENABLE 64F #2 RELAY OUTPUT 25S BLOCK INPUT o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 o14 o13 o12 o11 o10 o9 i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 o19 o18 o17 o16 o15 i14 i13 i12 o23 o22 o21 o20 25S RELAY OUTPUT o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 64B BRUSH LIFTOFF o14 o13 o12 o11 o10 o9 disable ENABLE o19 o18 o17 o16 o15 o23 o22 o21 o20 64B BLOCK INPUT fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 25D DEAD CHECK i14 i13 i12 disable ENABLE 64B RELAY OUTPUT 25D BLOCK INPUT o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 o14 o13 o12 o11 o10 o9 i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 o19 o18 o17 o16 o15 i14 i13 i12 o23 o22 o21 o20 25D RELAY OUTPUT o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 o14 o13 o12 o11 o10 o9 o19 o18 o17 o16 o15 : Unpurchased or unavailable func- NOTE Q o23 o22 o21 o20 tions will not be visible within the menus. Functional Configuration Record Form (13 of 18) Figure A-3 A–22

328 Appendix – A CONFIGURE RELAY JJ II J CONFIG sys stat I JJ II CONFIGURE RELAY CONFIGURE RELAY II JJ J TRIP_CKT_MON_RELAY I JJ II II JJ I BREAKER_MON_RELAY J II JJ TCM TRIP CIRCUIT MON BM BREAKER MONITOR disable ENABLE disable ENABLE TCM BLOCK INPUT BM BLOCK INPUT fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 i14 i13 i12 i14 i13 i12 TCM RELAY OUTPUT BM RELAY OUTPUT o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 o14 o13 o12 o11 o10 o9 o14 o13 o12 o11 o10 o9 o19 o18 o17 o16 o15 o19 o18 o17 o16 o15 o23 o22 o21 o20 o23 o22 o21 o20 NOTE : Unpurchased or un- Q available functions will not be visible within the menus. Inputs 7 to 14 and Outputs 9 to 23 must be set through ® IPScom . Q : Unpurchased or unavailable functions will not be visible within the menus. NOTE Functional Configuration Record Form (14 of 18) Figure A-3 A–23

329 M-3425A Instruction Book CONFIGURE RELAY II JJ J I CONFIG sys stat II JJ CONFIGURE RELAY JJ II IPS_LOGIC_RELAY J I II JJ IPSL #4 IPS LOGIC disable ENABLE IPSL #1 IPS LOGIC disable ENABLE IPSL #4 BLOCK INPUT fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 IPSL #1 BLOCK INPUT i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 i14 i13 i12 i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 i14 i13 i12 IPSL #4 RELAY OUTPUT o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 IPSL #1 RELAY OUTPUT o14 o13 o12 o11 o10 o9 o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 o19 o18 o17 o16 o15 o14 o13 o12 o11 o10 o9 o23 o22 o21 o20 o19 o18 o17 o16 o15 o23 o22 o21 o20 IPSL #5 IPS LOGIC disable ENABLE IPSL #2 IPS LOGIC disable ENABLE IPSL #5 BLOCK INPUT fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 IPSL #2 BLOCK INPUT i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 i14 i13 i12 i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 i14 i13 i12 IPSL #5 RELAY OUTPUT o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 IPSL #2 RELAY OUTPUT o14 o13 o12 o11 o10 o9 o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 o19 o18 o17 o16 o15 o14 o13 o12 o11 o10 o9 o23 o22 o21 o20 o19 o18 o17 o16 o15 o23 o22 o21 o20 IPSL #6 IPS LOGIC disable ENABLE IPSL #3 IPS LOGIC disable ENABLE IPSL #6 BLOCK INPUT fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 IPSL #3 BLOCK INPUT i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 i14 i13 i12 i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 i14 i13 i12 IPSL #6 RELAY OUTPUT o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 IPSL #3 RELAY OUTPUT o14 o13 o12 o11 o10 o9 o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 o19 o18 o17 o16 o15 o14 o13 o12 o11 o10 o9 o23 o22 o21 o20 o19 o18 o17 o16 o15 o23 o22 o21 o20 Inputs 7 to 14 and Outputs 9 to 23 must be set through : Unpurchased or unavailable func- Q NOTE ® IPScom . tions will not be visible within the menus. Figure A-3 Functional Configuration Record Form (15 of 18) A–24

330 Appendix – A SETUP SYSTEM II JJ J config SYS stat I II JJ PHASE ROTATION INPUT ACTIVATED PROFILES J d_ytx ROT mag splt I IN ap cpy volt curr vt J PHASE ROTATION INPUT ACTIVATED PROFILES a-c-b a-b-c disable ENABLE 59/27 MAGNITUDE SELECT ACTIVE SETPOINT PROFILE I d_ytx rot MAG splt J J in AP cpy volt curr vt 59/27 MAGNITUDE SELECT ACTIVE SETPOINT PROFILE rms dft ________ 50DT SPLIT-PHASE DIFF COPY ACTIVE PROFILE I d_ytx rot mag SPLT J in ap CPY volt curr vt J 50DT SPLIT-PHASE DIFF COPY ACTIVE PROFILE disable enable J TO_PROFILE_1 PULSE RELAY NOMINAL VOLTAGE J I PLSE latch seal in in ap cpy VOLT curr vt J PULSE RELAY NOMINAL VOLTAGE o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 ________ Volts o14 o13 o12 o11 o10 o9 o19 o18 o17 o16 o15 o23 o22 o21 o20 NOMINAL CURRENT in ap cpy volt CURR vt J LATCHED OUTPUTS NOMINAL CURRENT I J plse LATCH seal in ________ Amps LATCHED OUTPUTS o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 V.T. CONFIGURATION o14 o13 o12 o11 o10 o9 in ap cpy volt curr VT J o19 o18 o17 o16 o15 o23 o22 o21 o20 V.T. CONFIGURATION J line_line line_ground I line_gnd_to_line_line Inputs 7 to 14 and Outputs 9 to 23 must be set through ® IPScom . DELTA-Y TRANSFORM I J D_YTX rot mag splt DELTA-Y TRANSFORM dis delta_ab delta_ac NOTE : Unpurchased or unavailable func- Q tions will not be visible within the menus. Functional Configuration Record Form (16 of 18) Figure A-3 A–25

331 M-3425A Instruction Book SETUP SYSTEM JJ I I J config SYS stat I I I JJ RELAY SEAL-IN TIME RELAY SEAL-IN TIME OUT12 plse latch SEAL in J I ________ Cycles RELAY SEAL-IN TIME OUT1 RELAY SEAL-IN TIME OUT13 ________ Cycles ________ Cycles RELAY SEAL-IN TIME OUT2 RELAY SEAL-IN TIME OUT14 ________ Cycles ________ Cycles RELAY SEAL-IN TIME OUT3 RELAY SEAL-IN TIME OUT15 ________ Cycles ________ Cycles RELAY SEAL-IN TIME OUT4 RELAY SEAL-IN TIME OUT16 ________ Cycles ________ Cycles RELAY SEAL-IN TIME OUT5 RELAY SEAL-IN TIME OUT17 ________ Cycles ________ Cycles RELAY SEAL-IN TIME OUT6 RELAY SEAL-IN TIME OUT18 ________ Cycles ________ Cycles RELAY SEAL-IN TIME OUT7 RELAY SEAL-IN TIME OUT19 ________ Cycles ________ Cycles RELAY SEAL-IN TIME OUT8 RELAY SEAL-IN TIME OUT20 ________ Cycles ________ Cycles RELAY SEAL-IN TIME OUT9 RELAY SEAL-IN TIME OUT21 ________ Cycles ________ Cycles RELAY SEAL-IN TIME OUT10 RELAY SEAL-IN TIME OUT22 ________ Cycles ________ Cycles RELAY SEAL-IN TIME OUT11 RELAY SEAL-IN TIME OUT23 ________ Cycles ________ Cycles Inputs 7 to 14 and Outputs 9 to 23 must be set through ® IPScom . NOTE Q : Unpurchased or unavailable functions will not be visible within the menus. Functional Configuration Record Form (17 of 18) Figure A-3 A–26

332 Appendix – A SETUP SYSTEM JJ I I config SYS stat I J I I JJ ACTIVE INPUT STATE J plse latch seal IN I ACTIVE INPUT OPEN/close fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 i14 i13 i12 V.T. PHASE RATIO I VT vt_n vt_x ct ct_n V.T. PHASE RATIO ________ :1 V.T. NEUTRAL RATIO vt VT_N vt_x ct ct_n I V.T. NEUTRAL RATIO ________ :1 V.T. VX RATIO vt vt_n VT_X ct ct_n I V.T. VX RATIO ________ :1 C.T. PHASE RATIO I vt vt_n vt_x CT ct_n C.T. PHASE RATIO ________ :1 Inputs 7 to 14 and Outputs C.T. NEUTRAL RATIO 9 to 23 must be set through ® VT vt_n vt_x ct CT_N I . IPScom C.T. NEUTRAL RATIO ________ :1 Q : Unpurchased or unavailable functions will not be visible within the menus. NOTE Functional Configuration Record Form (18 of 18) Figure A-3 A–27

333 M-3425A Instruction Book VOLTAGE RELAY JJ J VOLT curr freq v/hz JJ 59 PHASE OVERVOLTAGE 27 PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE JJ II I J PHASE_OVER JJ II JJ J PHASE_UNDER JJ 59 #1 INPUT VOLTAGE SEL 27 #1 PICKUP phase_volt pos_seq_volt ________ Volts 59 #1 PICKUP 27 #1 DELAY ________ Volts ________ Cycles 59 #1 DELAY 27 #2 PICKUP ________ Cycles ________ Volts 59 #2 INPUT VOLTAGE SEL 27 #2 DELAY phase_volt pos_seq_volt ________ Cycles 59 #2 PICKUP 27 #3 PICKUP ________ Volts ________ Volts 59 #2 DELAY 27 #3 DELAY ________ Cycles ________ Cycles 59 #3 INPUT VOLTAGE SEL phase_volt pos_seq_volt 59 #3 PICKUP ________ Volts 59 #3 DELAY ________ Cycles Q : Unpurchased or unavailable functions will not be visible within the menus. NOTE Setpoint & Timing Record Form (1 of 15) Figure A-4 A–28

334 Appendix – A VOLTAGE RELAY JJ VOLT curr freq v/hz J JJ 27TN NEUTRL UNDERVOLT 27TN #2 PICKUP JJ II J I NUTRL_UNDER vx_over II JJ ________ VOLTS 27TN #1 PICKUP 27TN #2 POS SEQ VOLT BLK ________ Volts disable ENABLE 27TN #1 POS SEQ VOLT BLK 27TN #2 POS SEQ VOLT BLK disable ENABLE ________ Volts 27TN #1 POS SEQ VOLT BLK 27TN #2 FWD POWER BLK ________ Volts disable ENABLE 27TN #1 FWD POWER BLK 27TN #2 FWD POWER BLK disable ENABLE ________ PU 27TN #1 FWD POWER BLK 27TN #2 REV POWER BLK ________ PU disable ENABLE 27TN #1 REV POWER BLK 27TN #2 REV POWER BLK disable ENABLE ________ PU 27TN #1 REV POWER BLK 27TN #2 LEAD VAR BLK ________ PU disable ENABLE 27TN #1 LEAD VAR BLK 27TN #2 LEAD VAR BLK disable ENABLE ________ PU 27TN #1 LEAD VAR BLK 27TN #2 LAG VAR BLK ________ PU disable ENABLE 27TN #1 LAG VAR BLK 27TN #2 LAG VAR BLK disable ENABLE ________ PU 27TN #1 LAG VAR BLK 27TN #2 LEAD PF BLK ________ PU disable ENABLE 27TN #1 LEAD PF BLK 27TN #2 LEAD PF BLK disable ENABLE ________ LEAD 27TN #1 LEAD PF BLK 27TN #2 LAG PF BLK ________ LEAD disable ENABLE 27TN #1 LAG PF BLK 27TN #2 LAG PF BLK disable ENABLE ________ LAG 27TN #1 LAG PF BLK 27TN #2 BAND FWD PWR BLK ________ LAG disable ENABLE 27TN #1 BAND FWD PWR BLK 27TN #2 LO B FWD PWR BLK disable ENABLE ________ PU 27TN #1 LO B FWD PWR BLK 27TN #2 HI B FWD PWR BLK ________ PU ________ PU 27TN #1 HI B FWD PWR BLK 27TN #2 DELAY ________ PU ________ CYCLES 27TN #1 DELAY ________ CYCLES Setpoint & Timing Record Form (2 of 15) Figure A-4 A–29

335 M-3425A Instruction Book VOLTAGE RELAY JJ J VOLT curr freq v/hz JJ 59D VOLT DIFF 3RD HAR 59X OVERVOLTAGE II JJ I J nutrl_over VOL_DIFF II JJ II J nutrl_under VX_OVER I II 59D RATIO 59X #1 PICKUP ________ ________ Volts 59D LINE SIDE VOLTAGE 59X #1 DELAY 3vo vx ________ Cycles 59D POS SEQ VOLT BLK 59X #2 PICKUP disable ENABLE ________ Volts 59D POS SEQ VOLT BLK 59X #2 DELAY ________ VOLTS ________ Cycles 59D DELAY ________ Cycles 59N NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE JJ II J NUTRL_OVER vol_diff I JJ II 59N #1 PICKUP ________ Volts 59N #1 DELAY ________ Cycles 59N #2 PICKUP ________ Volts 59N #2 DELAY ________ Cycles 59N #3 PICKUP ________ Volts 59N #3 DELAY ________ Cycles 59N 20HZ INJECTION MODE disable ENABLE Q : Unpurchased or unavailable functions will not be visible within the menus. NOTE Setpoint & Timing Record Form (3 of 15) Figure A-4 A–30

336 Appendix – A CURRENT RELAY JJ volt CURR freq v/hz J JJ 50/27 INADVERTANT ENRGNG 46 NEG SEQ OVERCURRENT JJ II I INADVTNT_ENG brk_fail J JJ II JJ J NEG_SEQ inst JJ 50/27 PICKUP 46DT PICKUP ________ Amps ________ % 50/27 VOLTAGE CONTROL 46DT DELAY ________ Volts ________ Cycles 50/27 PICKUP DELAY 46IT PICKUP ________ Cycles ________ % 50/27 DROPOUT DELAY 46IT MAX DELAY ________ Cycles ________ Cycles 46IT RESET TIME 50BF BREAKER FAILURE ________ Seconds JJ II J inadvtnt_eng BRK_FAIL I JJ II 46IT TIME DIAL 50BF PHASE ELEMENT ________ disable ENABLE 50BF PICKUP PHASE 50 INST OVERCURRENT ________ Amps JJ J neg_seq INST JJ 50BF NEUTRAL ELEMENT 50 #1 PICKUP disable ENABLE ________ Amps 50BF PICKUP NEUTRAL 50 #1 DELAY ________ Amps ________ Cycles 50BF INPUT INITIATE 50 #2 PICKUP fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 ________ Amps i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 i14 i13 i12 50 #2 DELAY ________ Cycles 50BF OUTPUT INITIATE o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 o14 o13 o12 o11 o10 o9 o19 o18 o17 o16 o15 o23 o22 o21 o20 Inputs 7 to 14 and Outputs 50BF DELAY 9 to 23 must be set through ________ Cycles IPScom®. Q : Unpurchased or unavailable functions will not be visible within the menus. NOTE Setpoint & Timing Record Form (4 of 15) Figure A-4 A–31

337 M-3425A Instruction Book CURRENT RELAY JJ J volt CURR freq v/hz JJ 50DT DEF TIME OVERCURR 51N INV TIME OVERCURRENT II JJ P_INST n_inst n_inv I J JJ II JJ II J p_inst n_inst N_INV I JJ II 50DT #1 PICKUP PHASE A 51N PICKUP ________ Amps ________ Amps 50DT #1 PICKUP PHASE B 51N CURVE ________ Amps J bedef beinv bevinv beeinv J ieci iecvi iecei ieclti I 50DT #1 PICKUP PHASE C minv vinv einv I ________ Amps 51N TIME DIAL 50DT #1 DELAY ________ ________ Cycles 50DT #2 PICKUP PHASE A 49 STATOR OVERLOAD ________ Amps JJ II J ST_OVL v_inv diff I JJ II 50DT #2 PICKUP PHASE B 49#1 TIME CONSTANT ________ Amps ________ Min 50DT #2 PICKUP PHASE C 49 #1 MAX OVERLOAD CURR ________ Amps ________ Amps 50DT #2 DELAY 49 #2 TIME CONSTANT ________ Cycles ________ Min 49 #2 MAX OVERLOAD CURR 50N INST OVERCURRENT ________ Amps JJ II J I p_inst N_INST n_inv JJ II 50N PICKUP 51V INV TIME OVERCURRENT ________ Amps JJ II J I st_ovl V_INV diff JJ II 50N DELAY 51V PICKUP ________ Cycles ________ Amps 51V CURVE J bedef beinv bevinv beeinv I ieci iecvi iecei ieclti J I minv vinv einv 51V TIME DIAL ________ 51V VOLTAGE CONTROL disable V_CNTRL v_rstrnt 51V VOLTAGE CONTROL Q NOTE : Unpurchased or unavailable func- ________ Volts tions will not be visible within the menus. Setpoint & Timing Record Form (5 of 15) Figure A-4 A–32

338 Appendix – A CURRENT RELAY JJ J volt CURR freq v/hz JJ 67N RES DIR OVERCURR 87 DIFFERENTIAL OVERCURR II g_diff RES_DIR_OC I II JJ II st_ovl v_inv DIFF J I JJ II 67NDT PICKUP 87 #1 PICKUP ________ Amps ________ Amps 67NDT DIR ELEMENT 87 #1 SLOPE disable ENABLE ________ % 67NDT DELAY 87 #1 DELAY ________ Cycles ________ Cycles 67NIT PICKUP 87 #2 PICKUP ________ Amps ________ Amps 67NIT DIR ELEMENT 87 #2 SLOPE disable ENABLE ________ % 67NIT CURVE 87 #2 DELAY J bedef beinv bevinv beeinv ________ Cycles I ieci iecvi iecei ieclti J minv vinv einv I 87 PHASE CT CORRECTION ________ 67NIT TIME DIAL ________ 87GD GND DIFF OVERCURR 67N MAX SENSITIVITY ANGL II I G_DIFF res_dir_oc II ________ Degrees 87GD PICKUP 67N OPERATING CURRENT ________ Amps 3io in 87GD DELAY 67N POLARIZING QUANTITY ________ Cycles 3vo vn vx 87GD C.T. RATIO CORRECT ________ Q : Unpurchased or unavailable functions will not be visible within the menus. NOTE Setpoint & Timing Record Form (6 of 15) Figure A-4 A–33

339 M-3425A Instruction Book FREQUENCY RELAY JJ J volt curr FREQ v/hz JJ 81 FREQUENCY 81A FREQUENCY ACCUM. FREQ rcfreq freq_acc freq rcfreq FREQ_ACC 81 #1 PICKUP 81A SET FREQUENCY ACC. ________ Hz SET reset 81 #1 DELAY 81A #1 HIGH BAND PICKUP ________ Cycles ________ Hz 81 #2 PICKUP 81A #1 LOW BAND PICKUP ________ Hz ________ Hz 81 #2 DELAY 81 #1 DELAY ________ Cycles ________ Cycles 81 #3 PICKUP 81A #2 LOW BAND PICKUP ________ Hz ________ Hz 81 #3 DELAY 81 #2 DELAY ________ Cycles ________ Cycles 81 #4 PICKUP 81A #3 LOW BAND PICKUP ________ Hz ________ Hz 81 #4 DELAY 81 #3 DELAY ________ Cycles ________ Cycles 81A #4 LOW BAND PICKUP 81R RATE OF CHANGE FREQ ________ Hz freq RCFREQ freq_acc 81 #4 DELAY 81R #1 PICKUP ________ Cycles ________ Hz/s 81A #5 LOW BAND PICKUP 81R #1 DELAY ________ Hz ________ Cycles 81 #5 DELAY 81R #2 PICKUP ________ Cycles ________ Hz/s 81A #6 LOW BAND PICKUP 81R #2 DELAY ________ Hz ________ Cycles 81 #6 DELAY 81R NEG SEG VOLT INHIBIT ________ Cycles ________ % Q : Unpurchased or unavailable functions will not be visible within the menus. NOTE Setpoint & Timing Record Form (7 of 15) Figure A-4 A–34

340 Appendix – A FREQUENCY RELAY JJ J volt curr FREQ v/hz JJ 81A RESET ACCUMULATORS set RESET 81A #1 ACCUMULATOR RESET yes no 81A #2 ACCUMULATOR RESET yes no 81A #3 ACCUMULATOR RESET yes no 81A #4 ACCUMULATOR RESET yes no 81A #5 ACCUMULATOR RESET yes no 81A #6 ACCUMULATOR RESET yes no : Unpurchased or unavailable functions will not be visible within the menus. NOTE Q Setpoint & Timing Record Form (8 of 15) Figure A-4 A–35

341 M-3425A Instruction Book VOLTS PER HERTZ RELAY JJ J volt curr freq V/HZ JJ 24 INV TIME VOLTS/HERTZ 24 DEF TIME VOLTS/HERTZ def_v/hz INV_V/HZ DEF_V/HZ inv_v/hz 24IT #1 PICKUP 24DT #1 PICKUP ________ % ________ % 24IT CURVE 24DT #1 DELAY crv#1 crv#2 crv#3 crv#4 ________ Cycles 24IT TIME DIAL 24DT #2 PICKUP ________ ________ % 24IT RESET RATE 24DT #2 DELAY ________ Seconds ________ Cycles POWER RELAY JJ II J I PWR lof fuse dist JJ II 32 DIRECTIONAL POWER 32 #3 PICKUP PWR ________ PU 32 #1 PICKUP 32 #3 DELAY ________ PU ________ Cycles 32 #1 DELAY 32 # 3 TARGET LED ________ Cycles disable ENABLE 32 # 1 TARGET LED 32 #3 UNDER/OVER POWER disable enable over under 32 #1 UNDER/OVER POWER 32#3 DIR POWER SENSING over under real reactive 32 #2 PICKUP ________ PU 32 #2 DELAY ________ Cycles 32 # 2 TARGET LED disable ENABLE Q : Unpurchased or unavailable func- NOTE tions will not be visible within the menus. 32 #2 UNDER/OVER POWER over under Setpoint & Timing Record Form (9 of 15) Figure A-4 A–36

342 Appendix – A LOSS OF FIELD RELAY JJ II J pwr LOF fuse dist I II JJ 40 LOSS OF FIELD LOF 40 #2 DELAY 40 #1 DIAMETER ________ Ohms ________ Cycles 40 #1 OFFSET 40VC #2 DELAY WITH VC ________ Ohms ________ Cycles 40 #1 DELAY 40 VOLTAGE CONTROL ________ Cycles ________ Volts 40VC #1 DELAY WITH VC 40 DIRECTIONAL ELEMENT ________ Cycles ________ Degrees 40 #2 DIAMETER ________ Ohms 40 #2 OFFSET ________ Ohms V.T. FUSE LOSS RELAY JJ II J I pwr lof FUSE dist JJ II 60FL V.T. FUSE LOSS FUSE 60FL INPUT INITIATE fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 i14 i13 i12 IPSCOM INPUT INIT Inputs 7 to 14 and Outputs 9 to 23 must be set through ® . IPScom 60FL 3 PHASE DETECT disable enable 60FL DELAY ________ Cycles NOTE Q : Unpurchased or unavailable functions will not be visible within the menus. Setpoint & Timing Record Form (10 of 15) Figure A-4 A–37

343 M-3425A Instruction Book PHASE DISTANCE RELAY II JJ I pwr lof fuse DIST J JJ II 21 PHASE DISTANCE 21#2 OC SUPERVISION DIST ostp disable ENABLE 21#1 DIAMETER 21#2 OC SUPERVISION ________ Ohms ________ Amps 21#1 OFFSET 21#2 OUT OF STEP BLOCK ________ Ohms disable enable 21#1 IMPEDANCE ANGLE 21#2 DELAY ________ Degrees ________ Cycles 21#1 LOAD ENCROACHMENT 21#3 DIAMETER disable ENABLE ________ Ohms 21#1 LOAD ENCR ANGLE 21#3 OFFSET ________ Degrees ________ Ohms 21#1 LOAD ENCR R REACH 21#3 IMPEDANCE ANGLE ________ Ohms ________ Degrees 21#1 OC SUPERVISION 21#3 LOAD ENCROACHMENT disable ENABLE disable ENABLE 21#1 OC SUPERVISION 21#3 LOAD ENCR ANGLE ________ Amps ________ Degrees 21#1 OUT OF STEP BLOCK 21#3 LOAD ENCR R REACH disable enable ________ Ohms 21#1 DELAY 21#3 OC SUPERVISION ________ Cycles disable ENABLE 21#2 DIAMETER 21#3 OC SUPERVISION ________ Ohms ________ Amps 21#2 OFFSET 21#3 DELAY ________ Ohms ________ Cycles 21#2 IMPEDANCE ANGLE 21#3 OUT OF STEP DELAY ________ Degrees ________ Cycles 21#2 LOAD ENCROACHMENT disable ENABLE 21#2 LOAD ENCR ANGLE ________ Degrees 21#2 LOAD ENCR R REACH ________ Ohms Q : Unpurchased or unavailable functions will not be visible within the menus. NOTE Setpoint & Timing Record Form (11 of 15) Figure A-4 A–38

344 Appendix – A PHASE DISTANCE RELAY II JJ J pwr lof fuse DIST I JJ II 78 OUT OF STEP dist OSTP 78 TRIP ON MHO EXIT 78 DIAMETER disable ENABLE ________ Ohms 78 POLE SLIP COUNT 78 OFFSET ________ Slips ________ Ohms 78 POLE SLIP RESET TIME 78 BLINDER IMPEDANCE ________ Cycles ________ Ohms 78 IMPEDANCE ANGLE ________ Degrees 78 DELAY ________ CYCLES FIELD GROUND RELAY JJ I I J I FIELD stator sync JJ I I 64B/F FIELD GROUND FIELD 64F #1 PICKUP 64B PICKUP ________ kOhm ________ mV 64F #1 DELAY 64B DELAY ________ Cycles ________ Cycles 64F # 2 PICKUP 64B/F FREQUENCY ________ Hz ________ kOhm 64F # 2 DELAY ________ Cycles : Unpurchased or unavailable functions will not be visible within the menus. NOTE Q Setpoint & Timing Record Form (12 of 15) Figure A-4 A–39

345 M-3425A Instruction Book STATOR GROUND RELAY JJ II J I field STATOR sync II JJ 64S 100% STATOR GROUND STATOR 64S PICKUP mAmps 64S VOLT INHIBIT disable ENABLE : Unpurchased or un- Q NOTE available functions will not be 64S VOLT INHIBIT visible within the menus. ________ Volts 64S DELAY ________ Cycles SYNC CHECK RELAY JJ II J I field stator SYNC JJ II 25S SYNC CHECK SYNC dead 25D DEAD VOLT 25S PHASE LIMIT sync DEAD ________ Degrees 25D DEAD VOLT LIMIT 25S UPPER VOLT LIMIT ________ VOLTS ________ Volts 25D DEAD V1 HOT VX 25S LOWER VOLT LIMIT disable ENABLE ________ Volts 25D DEAD VX HOT V1 25S SYNC CHECK DELAY disable ENABLE ________ Cycles 25D DEAD V1 & VX 25S DELTA VOLT disable ENABLE disable ENABLE 25D DEAD INPUT ENABLE 25S DELTA VOLT LIMIT fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 ________ Volts i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 i14 i13 i12 25S DELTA FREQUENCY disable ENABLE 25D DEAD DELAY ________ Cycles 25S DELTA FREQ LIMIT ________ Hz Inputs 7 to 14 and Outputs 25S SYNC-CHECK PHASE 9 to 23 must be set through ab bc ca ® IPScom . : Unpurchased or unavailable functions will not be visible within the menus. NOTE Q Setpoint & Timing Record Form (13 of 15) Figure A-4 A–40

346 Appendix – A BREAKER MONITOR II JJ I BRKR trpckt ipslog J II JJ PRESET ACCUMULATORS SET BREAKER MONITORING brkr PRST clr BRKR prst clr ACC. PHASE A SET BM PICKUP PH_A ph_b ph_c ________ kA-cycles BRKR. ACCUMULATOR BM INPUT INITIATE ________ kA-cycles fl i6 i5 i4 i3 i2 i1 i11 i10 i9 i8 i7 ACC. PHASE B SET i14 i13 i12 ph_A PH_B ph_c BM OUTPUT INITIATE BRKR. ACCUMULATOR o8 o7 o6 o5 o4 o3 o2 o1 ________ kA-cycles o14 o13 o12 o11 o10 o9 o19 o18 o17 o16 o15 ACC. PHASE C SET o23 o22 o21 o20 ph_A ph_b PH_C BM DELAY BRKR. ACCUMULATOR ________ Cycles ________ kA-cycles BM TIMING METHOD it i2t CLEAR ACCUMULATORS brkr prst CLR ACC. PHASE A CLEAR PH_A ph_b ph_c ACC. PHASE B CLEAR Inputs 7 to 14 and Outputs ph_a PH_B ph_c 9 to 23 must be set through ® . IPScom ACC. PHASE C CLEAR ph_a ph_b PH_C TRIP CIRCUIT MONITOR JJ II brkr TRPCKT ipslog J I JJ II TRIP CIRCUIT MONITOR TRIPCKT TCM DELAY ________ Cycles NOTE Q : Unpurchased or unavailable functions will not be visible within the menus. Setpoint & Timing Record Form (14 of 15) Figure A-4 A–41

347 M-3425A Instruction Book IPS LOGIC II JJ I J brkr trpckt IPSLOG JJ II IPS LOGIC USE IPSCOM TO CONFIGURE NOTE Q : Unpurchased or unavailable functions will not be visible within the menus. Setpoint & Timing Record Form (15 of 15) Figure A-4 A–42

348 Communications: Appendix – B B Appendix B–Communications The M-3425A Generator Protection Relay For detailed information on IPScom communications, incorporates three serial ports and an optional RJ45 refer to . Chapter 4, Remote Operation Ethernet port for intelligent, digital communication with external devices. Equipment such as RTU's, Serial Ports data concentrators, modems, or computers can be The relay has both front and rear panel RS-232 ports interfaced for direct, on-line, real time data acquisition and a rear RS-485 port. The front and rear panel and control. Generally, all data available to the RS-232 ports are 9-pin (DB9S) connector configured operator through the front panel of the relay with the as DTE (Data Terminal Equipment) per the EIA- optional M-3931 Human-Machine Interface module 232D standard. Signals are defined in Table B-1, is accessible remotely through the BECO 2200 or Communication Port Signals . MODBUS data exchange protocol. These protocol documents and the database-specific protocol The 2-wire RS-485 port is assigned to the rear panel document are available from the factory or from our terminal block pins 3 (–) and 4 (+). website at www.beckwithelectric.com. Each communication port may be configured to ® The M-3820D IPScom Communication Software operate at any of the standard baud rates (300, package has been supplied for communication to 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, and 9600). The RS-485 any IBM compatible computer running under port shares the same baud rate with COM 2 (for ® Microsoft Windows 95 or higher. COM1 see Section 5.4, Circuit Board Switches and Jumpers). The communication protocols implement serial, byte oriented, asynchronous communication and can be A null modem cable is also shown in Figure B-1, Null used to fulfill the following communications functions: Modem Cable: M-0423, if direct connection to a PC • Real time monitoring of line status. (personal computer) is desired. • Interrogation and modification of setpoints. Optional Ethernet Port • Downloading of recorded oscillograph data. The M-3425A, when equipped with the optional • Reconfiguration of relay functions. Ethernet port can be accessed from a local network. When the ethernet port is enabled, the COM2 serial ■■ : The following restrictions apply for ■ NOTE ■■ port (RS-232) is unavailable for communications. MODBUS protocol use: The demodulated IRIG-B may still be used via the 1. MODBUS protocol is not supported on COM2 Port when ethernet is enabled. Although the COM1. ethernet connection speed is faster than the RS-232 Parity is supported on COM2 and COM3; 2. port (can be up to 10 Mbps), the ethernet module valid selections are 8,N,2; 8,O,1; 8,E,1; connects internally through the COM2 serial 8,N,1; 8,O,2 or 8,E,2. connection and is therefore limited to connection speeds up to 9600 bps. ASCII mode is not supported (RTU only). 3. Standard baud rates from 300 to 9600 4. Either port COM2 (Ethernet) or COM3 may be used are supported. to remotely set and interrogate the relay using a 5. Only the following MODBUS commands local area network, modem or other direct serial are supported: connection. a. read holding register (function 03) b. read input register (function 04) c. force single coil (function 05) d. preset single register (function 06) B–1

349 M-3425A Instruction Book Signal COM1 COM2 Pin 2 Receive Data RX Pin 2 P in 3 P in 3 TX Transmit Da ta Pin 7 Pin 7 RTS Request to Send CTS Clear to Send Pin 8 Data Terminal Ready Pin 4 Pin 4 DTR Data Carrier Detect Pin 1* DCD GN D Signal Ground Pin 5 Pin 5 +15 V Pin 1* Pin 9* -15 V Pin 6* TTL IRIG-B (+) * Optional: See Section 5.5, Circuit Board Switches and Jumpers, & 15V ( & 15%) @100 mA maximum. Table B-1 Communication Port Signals ■ NOTE : Also see Tables 5-1, 5-2 and Figure 5-12.                                   Null Modem Cable: M-0423 Figure B-1 B–2

350 Communications: Appendix – B PC Master Echo Cancel On 25 pin or 9-25 pin Straight-Through Cable DYMEC Fiber Optic Link / Repeater DCE DTE REP OFF TR FOC FOC FOC FOC R T R T R T DCE DCE DCE DTE DTE DTE REP REP REP OFF OFF OFF Slave #3 Slave #2 Slave #1 Address 3 Address 2 Address 1 RS-232 RS-232 RS-232 9-25 pin "Straight-Through" Cables Figure B-2 RS-232 Fiber Optic Network B–3

351 M-3425A Instruction Book RS-485 2-Wire Network Slave #3 Slave #2 Slave #1 Address 1 Address 8 Address 6 - + - + PC Master B(-) 200 Ω * A(+) Twisted RS-232 to RS-485 2-wire converter or RS-485 PC Card ▲▲ CAUTION: Due to the possibility of ground potential difference between units, all units should be mounted ▲ ▲▲ in the same rack. If this is not possible, fiber optics with the appropriate converters should be used for isolation. ■■ : Each address on the network must be unique. Only the last physical slave on the network should ■ NOTE ■■ have the termination resistor installed. This may be completed externally or using a jumper internal to the unit. See Section 5.5, Circuit Board Switches and Jumpers. Figure B-3 RS-485 Network         Figure B-4 COM Pinout for Demodulated TTL Level Signal B–4

352 Self-Test Error Codes Appendix – C C Appendix C–Self-test Error Codes 1 31 Unrecognized INT1 code Battery backed RAM test fail 2 Values update watchdog fail 32 3 EEPROM write power-up fail Abort Error 33 4 EEPROM read back power-up fail Restart Error 34 5 Dual port RAM test fail Interrupt Error 35 6 EEPROM write calibration checksum fail Trap Error 36 7 EEPROM write setpoint checksum fail 37 Calibration running check fail loss of power Ethernet Board not running (Warning) 38 EEPROM write setpoint checksum fail 8 Not used 39 loss of battery backed RAM 40 Interrupt noise INT2 9 DMA checksum/physical block fail 41 Interrupt noise INT1 Oscillograph Memory Test fail 10 42 Not used DSP external program RAM fail 11 Not used 43 DSP A/D convert fail 12 44 Oscillograph buffer overflow 13 DSP ground channel fail Oscillograph buffer underflow 45 14 DSP reference channel fail Failure of DSP to calculate calibration 46 15 DSP PGA gain fail phasors 16 DSP DSP<-> HOST interrupt 1 fail 47 Unable to calibrate input (gain) 17 DSP DSP -> HOST interrupt 2 set fail 48 Unable to calibrate input (phase) 18 DSP DSP -> HOST interrupt 2 reset fail Not used 49 19 DSP program load fail Stack Overflow 50 DSP not running run mode code 20 51 Setpoint Write Overflow 21 DSP not running primary boot code Field Ground Error 52 22 DSP DPRAM pattern test fail 23 EEPROM write verify error 26 WARNING calibration checksum mis- match warning WARNING setpoint checksum mismatch 27 warning 28 WARNING low battery (BBRAM) warning Supply/mux PGA running test fail 29 External DSP RAM test fail 30 Self-Test Error Codes Table C-1 C–1

353 M-3425A Instruction Book noitpircseD edoCrorrE sihtnitluserlliwlortnocehtotdeilppusdrowssaptcerrocninA kcoLlennahCmmoC .egassem yllacoldetarepogniebsilortnocehttahtsetacidniegassemsihT edoMlacoLnil ortnoC .dednepsussinoitacinummoclairesdna noitacinummocehthtiwsmelborperaerehtfistluserrorresihT tuoemiTohcE .yltcerrocnidesusinoitcnuflecnacohceehtfiroknil .deretnesiatadegnar-fo-tuorotcerrocnifistluserrorresihT ataDdilavnI itpmettanehwdeyalpsidsiegassemsihT ahtiwetacinummocotgn DIdilavnI .seires5243-Mehtnahtrehtoecived sierawtfosmocSPIfonoisrevelbitapmocninafistluserrorresihT forebmuNdilavnI htiwkceBatcatnoC.rorrelocotorpnoitacinummocasisihT.desu stnioP .evitatneserperyrotcaf.oCcirtcelE sierawtfosmocSPIfonoisrevelbitapmocninafistluserrorresihT htiwkceBatcatnoC.rorrelocotorpnoitacinummocasisihT.desu rebmuNtnioPdilavnI .evitatneserperyrotcaf.oCcirtcelE noitacinummocehthtiwsmelborperaerehtfistluserrorresihT muskcehCdilavnIdaeR .yltcerrocnidesusinoitcnuflecnacohceehtfiroknil tsolsilortnocehthtiwnoitacinummocnehwstluserrorresihT tuoemiTtekcaPdaeR .lortnocehtotataddaerotgnitpmettaelihw tsolsilortnocehthtiwnoitacinummocnehwstluserrorresihT tuoemiTesnopseR .lortnocehtmorfataddaerotgnitpmettaelihw lortnocehtfonoitcnuflamaybdesuacebdluocrorresihT rorrEmetsySnwonkn U. .desserpsiyek)CSE(epacseehtnehwsyalpsidegassemsihT lecnaCresU noitacinummocehthtiwsmelborperaer ehtfistluserrorresihT muskcehCdilavnIetirW .yltcerrocnidesusinoitcnuflecnacohceehtfiroknil tsolsilortnocehthtiwnoitacinummocnehwstluserrorresihT tuoemiTtekcaPetirW .lortnocehtotatadetirwotgnitpmettaelihw ® Table C-2 IPScom Error Messages C–2

354 Inverse Time Curves: Appendix– D Appendix D – Inverse Time Curves D This Appendix contains two sets of Inverse Time Curve Families. The first set is used for Volts per Hertz functions (Figures D-1 through D-4), and the second set is for the M-3425A functions which utilize the Inverse Time Overcurrent curves (Figures D-5 through D-12). QQ Q : Table D-1A and D-1B on pages D–6 and D–7 contains a list of the data that characterizes Definite NOTE QQ Time, Inverse Time, Very Inverse Time, and Extremely Inverse Time Overcurrent Curves. Expression for Time Delay Setting Operating time defined by IEC and ANSI/IEEE: A A t = TD t = TD + B P P 5 M - 1 M - 1 IEEE Equation IEC Equation (IEEE equation constants are defined at TD of 5) where = Relay operating time in seconds t = Time dial, or time multiplier setting TD = Fault current level in secondary amps I = Tap or pickup current selected I p = Constant B = Slope constant p = Slope constant A I M = I p Setting Time Delay on Overcurrent Relays ANSI/ IEEE and IEC constants for overcurrent relays A p B IDMT Curve Description Standard 0.0515 IEEE Moderately Inverse 0.02 0.114 Very Inverse IEEE 19.61 0.491 2 2 0.1217 Extremely Inverse IEEE 28.2 IEC 0.02 Standard Inverse 0.14 - 13.5 1.0 - Very Inverse IEC - 2.0 80.0 Extremely Inverse IEC D–1

355 M-3425A Instruction Book Figure D-1 Volts/Hz (24) Inverse Curve Family #1 (Inverse Square) D–2

356 Inverse Time Curves: Appendix– D Figure D-2 Volts/Hz (24) Inverse Family Curve #2 D–3

357 M-3425A Instruction Book Figure D-3 Volts/Hz (24IT) Inverse Curve Family #3 D–4

358 Inverse Time Curves: Appendix– D Figure D-4 Volts/Hz (24IT) Inverse Curve Family #4 D–5

359 M-3425A Instruction Book gnitteSpaTfoelpitluM emiTesrevnI emiTesrevnIyreV emiTesrevnIylemertxE emiTetinifeD 19 04 5935. 48 7564. 30 2538.4 05. 9896. 12 6846. 03 3551. 55. 0211. 37 4782.4 43 06. 19 3506. 03 0918. 38 2218. 22 6538.3 56. 13 0865. 05 6225. 34 5655. 26 0754.3 07. 5535. 07 8952. 37 0633. 23 7531.3 18 57. 15 2705. 08 5520. 31 3441. 24 9958.2 08. 15 4284. 06 6518 . 20 2679. 14 9026.2 18 0214.2 58. 18 6064. 03 7626. 29 7728. 09. 16 09 9554. 27 9596. 12 2822.2 5144. 59. 7424. 01 1103. 23 2875. 19 2560.2 17 00. 26 0014. 03 1061. 24 5274. 16 0029.1 50. 21 2793. 09 3130. 23 2773. 14 9987.1 08 01. 26 0683. 4319. 13 9092. 18 7276.1 51. 4673. 09 1508. 19 4212 . 16 8665.1 28 02. 24 5563. 07 5227. 12 1821. 10 2874.1 03. 23 9253. 04 9045. 16 2610. 18 6223.1 5291.1 00 04. 25 1143. 04 0193. 17 0229. 1033. 28 05. 2280.1 01 9148. 10 6562. 01 06. 05 4951. 11 0377. 00 8789.0 9913. 29 27 5013. 01 7860. 14 3317. 06 2609.0 07. 2166. 29 09 4099. 07 8103. 07 2538 .0 08. 5229. 22 9392. 08 03 04 5516. 09. 0377.0 00. 6682. 05 2368. 05 1575. 01 1817.0 36 01. 37 0082. 03 1118. 00 3935. 09 3966.0 02. 35 1472. 04 1567. 03 3705. 03 9526.0 0785.0 03. 39 8862. 09 3427. 00 7874. 00 08 9155.0 06 9254. 07 1886. 2462. 37 04. 30 3062. 01 9556. 07 7924. 02 3025.0 05. 00 06. 37 6194.0 9652. 1726. 09 7804. 03 5564.0 07. 39 2452. 05 3106. 07 7983. 04 7144.0 39 05 4273. 08 08. 3875. 2252. 02 QQ Q : The above NOTE QQ 04 2104.0 00. 45 7942. 09 0935. 02 0143. times are in seconds 7542. 6563.0 2513. 02. 42 04 01 4605. 08 and are given for a 9142. 6433.0 04. 47 00 06 4774. 02 3392. time dial of 1.0. For other time dial values, 06. 42 5832. 06 7154. 03 5472. 01 4703.0 multiply the above by 4382.0 08. 41 4532. 04 9824. 01 4852. 06 the time dial value. M-3425A Inverse Time Overcurrent Relay Characteristic Curves (1 of 2) Table D-1A D–6

360 Inverse Time Curves: Appendix– D gnitteSpaTfoelpitluM emiTesrevnI emiTesrevnIyreV emiTesrevnIylemertxE emiTetinifeD 56 6232. 7804. 06 5442. 07 2262.0 00. 01 2032. 7093. 09 6232. 03 4342.0 59 08 02. 3822. 05 9473. 04 5222. 04. 662 2.0 54 00 54 8622. 02 0163. 04 9312. 01 5112.0 06. 53 8522. 04 8843. 03 7602. 03 9791.0 08. 64 00. 08 2833. 01 8002. 07 6581.0 3522. 66 01 7723. 01 1591. 01 3571.0 02. 2522. 62 9422. 09 3913. 04 4091. 06 8561.0 04. 06. 60 00 5113. 02 0681. 01 3751.0 6322. 08. 3222. 02 0403. 07 8181. 07 5941.0 60 00. 72 0122. 05 9692. 07 9771. 03 5241.0 02. 77 07 2092. 01 3471. 01 1631.0 7912. 75 08 9382. 00 9071. 07 2031.0 04. 5812. 76 3712. 07 0872. 03 7761. 02 9421.0 06. 08. 71 03 5272. 09 7461. 03 0021.0 2612. 00. 1512. 04 3762. 09 0261. 05 5511.0 80 02. 83 0412. 01 5262. 01 6951. 04 4111.0 04. 80 03 0852. 06 3751. 08 6701.0 0312. 06. 0212. 08 8352. 04 3551. 02 2401.0 83 08. 81 1112. 07 0052. 04 5351. 05 0101.0 00. 95 2012. 00 6642. 07 9151. 04 1890.0 00 05. 93 1802. 05 3932. 00 7741. 7090.0 00.0 10 2432. 03 7441. 04 7480.0 4702. 02 6602. 2922. 00 8141. 03 4970.0 17 05.0 03 9502. 02 4422. 04 9831. 09 6470.0 00.1 14 11 2502. 7912. 05 1631. 06 4070.0 05.1 09 19 06 3512. 05 4331. 07 6660.0 00.2 4402. 18 7302. 05 1112. 04 8031. 09 2360.0 05.2 10 00.3 1702. 03 3821. 06 2060.0 1302. 06 13 01 4302. 03 9521. 05 5750.0 05.3 4202. 19 7102. 01 9991. 04 6321. 03 1550.0 00.4 19 06 6691. 06 4121. 07 9250.0 1102. 05.4 01 6002. 07 6391. 00.5 4911. 04 0150.0 12 05.5 19 0002. 05 9091. 07 4711. 04 3940.0 00.6 11 01 5881. 06 6511. 04 8740.0 6991. 18 02 05 3681. 08 9311. 05.6 5640.0 1991. 09 11 00.7 4481. 03 4211. 8891. 3540.0 09 QQ Q NOTE : The above QQ 02 02 4440.0 9281. 05.7 11 5891. 04 0111. times are in seconds 7901. 02 6340.0 00.8 17 2891. 01 7181. 04 and are given for a 08 01 05.8 11 1891. 9240.0 02 8081. 6801. time dial of 1.0. For other time dial values, 00.9 13 0891. 09 2081. 02 6701. 00 5240.0 multiply the above by 1240.0 09 7601. 09 1081. 0891. 13 05.9 04 the time dial value. 1081. 0240.0 05 1601. 01 04 0891. 23 00.0 M-3425A Inverse Time Overcurrent Relay Characteristic Curves (2 of 2) Table D-1B D–7

361 M-3425A Instruction Book Figure D-5 BECO Definite Time Overcurrent Curve D–8

362 Inverse Time Curves: Appendix– D Figure D-6 BECO Inverse Time Overcurrent Curve D–9

363 M-3425A Instruction Book Figure D-7 BECO Very Inverse Time Overcurrent Curve D–10

364 Inverse Time Curves: Appendix– D Figure D-8 BECO Extremely Inverse Time Overcurrent Curve D–11

365 M-3425A Instruction Book                                Figure D-9 IEC Curve #1 Inverse D–12

366 Inverse Time Curves: Appendix– D                               Figure D-10 IEC Curve #2 Very Inverse D–13

367 M-3425A Instruction Book                              Figure D-11 IEC Curve #3 Extremely Inverse D–14

368 Inverse Time Curves: Appendix– D                              Figure D-12 IEC Curve #4 Long-Time Inverse D–15

369 M-3425A Instruction Book                                Figure D-13 IEEE (Moderately) Inverse Time Overcurrent Curves D–16

370 Inverse Time Curves: Appendix– D                                      Figure D-14 IEEE Very Inverse Time Overcurrent Curves D–17

371 M-3425A Instruction Book                                       Figure D-15 IEEE Extremely Inverse Time Overcurrent Curves D–18

372 Appendix E – Layup and Storage E Appendix – Layup and Storage Appendix E includes the recommended storage Layup of the M-3425A requires verifying that the parameters, periodic surveillance activities and layup system clock is stopped. The steps necessary to configuration for the M-3425A Generator Protection verify system clock status are as follows: Relay. ▲▲ Do not use the diagnostic mode in CAUTION: ▲ ▲▲ relays that are installed in an active protection Storage Requirements (Environment) scheme. The recommended storage environment parameters for the M-3425A are: For units the optional HMI panel with : • The ambient temperature where the Verify that the Power Supply (PS) fuses 1. M-3425A is stored is within a range of 5° are installed. C to 40° C Determine the unit power supply rating 2. • The maximum relative humidity is less by observing the check box below the than or equal to 80% for temperatures up PS terminals on the rear of the unit. to 31° C, decreasing to 31° C linearly to 3. Apply power to the unit consistent with 50% for relative humidity at 40° C. the rating determined in Step 2 (see • The storage area environment is free of Section 5.3 , External Connections). The dust, corrosive gases, flammable unit will enter the selftest mode. materials, dew, percolating water, rain and When the selftests are complete, then 4. solar radiation. press ENTER to begin main menu. 5. Press the right arrow pushbutton until Storage Requirements (Periodic Surveillance is displayed. SETUP UNIT During Storage) 6. Press ENTER to access the SETUP The M-3425A power supply contains electrolytic UNIT menu. capacitors. It is recommended that power be applied to the relay (PS1 and optional PS2 redundant power Press the right arrow pushbutton until 7. supply when installed and PS2 on extended output is displayed. DIAGNOSTIC MODE units) every three to five years for a period of not . A reset warning will be ENTER 8. Press less than one hour to help prevent the electrolytic displayed: capacitors from drying out. PROCESSOR WILL RESET! ENTER KEY TO CONTINUE Layup Configuration The M-3425A includes a removable lithium battery ® WARNING: All relay functions and protection backed TIMEKEEPER module (Beckwith Electric will be inoperative while the relay is in diagnostic component U25, Figure 5-17). The TIMEKEEPER mode. module is the M-3425A real-time clock and also provides power to the unit’s nonvolatile memory . Unit will now reset and 9. Press ENTER when power is not applied to the unit. DIAGNOSTIC MODE will be temporarily displayed, followed by OUTPUT TEST (RELAY). This is the beginning of the diagnostic menu. E–1

373 M-3425A Instruction Book TM 4. Install IPScom 10. Communications Press the right arrow pushbutton until the following is displayed: Software (see Section 4.2, Installation and Setup) on a PC that includes the CLOCK TEST following: I com1 com2 com3 CLOCK TM Microsoft Windows • 95 Operating System or above 11. . The following is ENTER Press displayed: Equipped with a serial port • 5. Connect a null modem cable from COM1 CLOCK TEST of the relay to the PC serial port. 03-JAN-1998 09:00:00.000 Open communications with the relay (see 6. 12. If the clock is running, press to ENTER Section 4.3 Operation, Activating stop the clock. The following is Connections). displayed: 7. Select “Relay/Setup/Set Date/Time” from CLOCK TEST the menu bar. IPScom will display the “Unit -CLOCK STOP- Date/Time Dialog Screen” Figure 4-16. 8. Verify that “Start Clock” is displayed, When the relay clock is stopped, the NOTE: then proceed as follows: seconds will be displayed as 80. a. If “Start Clock” is displayed, then select “Save” and go to Step 9. and verify the relay clock 13. Press ENTER is stopped. A display similar to the b. If “Stop Clock” is displayed, then following is shown with the seconds select “Stop Clock” and then select stopped: “Save”. CLOCK TEST 9. Close communications with the unit by 03-JAN-09:01:80.000 selecting “Comm” from the menu bar and then select “Exit”. When the clock has been verified to be 14. 10. Disconnect the null modem cable and stopped, then press EXIT until the then remove power from the unit. The following message appears: unit can now be placed in storage. PRESS EXIT TO EXIT DIAGNOSTIC MODE Storage of the M-3425A greater than five years may require replacement of the lithium battery prior DIAGNOSTIC again to exit EXIT Press 15. to placing the unit in service. Contact Beckwith MODE . The relay will reset and normal Electric Customer Service for replacement running mode will resume. procedure. NOTE : Pressing any button other than EXIT will return the user to DIAGNOSTIC MODE. 16. Remove power from the unit. The unit can now be placed in storage. the optional HMI panel without : For units 1. Verify that the Power Supply (PS) fuses are installed. 2. Determine the unit power supply rating by observing the check box(s) below the PS terminals on the rear of the unit. 3. Apply power to the unit consistent with the rating determined in Step 2 (see Section 5.3 , External Connections). The unit will enter the selftest mode. E–2

374 Appendix – F Appendix F – Index F 2 7 21 Phase Distance, 2-14, 3-4, 6-8, A-38 78 Out of Step, 3-4, 6-53:6-54, A-21, A-39 25 Sync Check, 2-11, 2-21, 5-13 8 27 Phase Undervoltage, 2-25, 3-4, 6-16, A-28 27TN Third Harmonic Undervoltage, Neutral, 2-26 81 Frequency, 2-75, 3-4, 6-55, A-34 81R Rate of Change of Frequency, 2-80, 6-57 3 87 Phase Differential, 2-81, 6-59 32 Directional Power, 3-4, 6-21:6-23, A-36 A 4 Accessories, 1-1 40 Loss of Field, 3-4, 6-24:6-25, A-37 Activating Communications, 4-9 46 Negative Sequence Overcurrent, 2-37, Alphanumeric Display, 3-1 6-26:6-27 Arrow Pushbuttons, 3-1, 6-71 49 Stator Overload Protection, 2-39, 6-28 Auto Calibration, 6-75:6-77 5 B 50/50N Instantaneous Overcurrent,Phase & Breaker Closed LED, 3-2 Neutral Circuits, 2-42 Breaker Monitoring, 3-4, 6-63:6-64, A-41, SP-2, 50BF Generator Breaker Failure/HV Breaker SP-10 Flashover, 2-44 Button Test, 6-71 51N Inverse Time Neutral Overcurrent, 2-49, 6-36 C 59 Phase Overvoltage, 2-52, 3-4, 6-39, A-28 59D Third Harmonic Voltage Differential, 2-53, Cautions, 4-1, 4-28 SP-2 Checkout Status/Metering, 4-1, 4-18, 4-23 59N Overvoltage, Neutral Circuit or Zero Circuit Board Switches and Jumpers, 2-85, 3-6, Sequence, 2-55, 6-41 3-9, 4-3, 5-1:5-30, B-1, B-4, SP-18:SP-19 6 Clock Command, 4-31 Clock ON/OFF, 6-67, 6-74:6-75 60FL VT Fuse Loss, 2-59, 6-43 COM1/COM2 Loopback Test, 6-72 64B Brush Lift-Off Detection, 2-64, 6-46 COM Port Security, 4-3 64B/F Field Ground Protection, 2-62, 5-11, Comm Menu, 4-7, 4-9:4-11, 4-28, 4-31, A-8 SP-This Page Left Intentionally Blank18:SP-19 Commissioning Checkout, 1-1, 5-1:5-30 64F Field Ground Protection, 6-44, 6-46 Communications Settings, 3-8:3-9 64S 100% Stator Ground by Low Frequency Injection Calibration, 6-77 Configuration, 1-1, 2-1:2-4, 3-7, A1:A-5, A-10:A-27 64S 100% Stator Ground Protection by Low Frequency signal Injection, 2-66, SP-29 Configuration Record Forms, A-1 67N Residual Directional Overcurrent, 2-21, 2-69, Configure Relay Data, 3-1:3-12 6-49, 6-51 F–1

375 M-3425A Instruction Book K D Keyboard Shortcuts, 4-1, 4-29 Declaration of Conformity, 1-2, G-1 Default Message Screens, 3-2 L DHCP Protocol, 1-3, 4-4:4-7, 4-33, A-8 Layup and Storage, 1-2, E-1:E-2, SP-17 Diagnostic LED, 3-2 Low Frequency Signal Injection Equipment, 2-65: Diagnostic Test Procedures, 6-67:6-75 2-66, 5-25:5-30 Direct Connection, 4-2, 4-10, 4-31, B-1 Display Test, 6-72 M Dropout Delay Timer, 2-90 M-3890 IPSutil, 4-30 E Manual Configuration of Ethernet Board, 4-4:4-5 Mechanical/Physical Dimensions, 5-1:5-30 Enter Pushbutton, 3-1 Miscellaneous Menu, 4-32 Equipment/Test Setup, 6-2 Ethernet Command, 4-31 O Ethernet Communication Settings, 4-3 Operation, 4-3:4-26 Ethernet Port, 4-1, 4-3:4-7, B-1:B-4, SP-2, SP-14 Oscillograph Recorder Data, 3-8:3-9 Ethernet Port Setup with DHCP, 4-7 Output Relay Test, 6-68:6-69 Ethernet Port Setup without DHCP, 4-7 Ethernet Protocols, 4-3 P Exit Pushbutton, 3-1 Phase and Neutral Fundamental Calibration, 6-76 External Connections, 5-10:5-15, SP-17:SP-19 Power On Self Tests, 6-7 F Profiles, 2-3:2-4, 4-21, A-25, SP-12, SP-14 Field Ground Calibration, 6-78 R File Menu, 4-10 Relay Comm Command, 4-31 Front Panel Controls, 1-4, 3-1:3-3 Relay Setup Menu, 2-6, 4-10:4-11 H Relay OK LED, 3-2, SP-14 Relay OK LED Flash/Illuminated, 6-75 Help Menu, 4-9, 4-22, 4-33 Relay System Setup, 2-3, 2-14, 2-25, 2-29, 2-46, I 2-50, 2-52, 3-6, 4-11 Remote Operation, 4-1 Initial Setup Procedure/Settings, 3-5 Reset Delay Timer, 2-90 Input Test, 6-66:6-67, 6-69:6-70 Installation, 1-1, 5-1:5-30 Installation and Setup (IPScom), 4-8 Installing the Modems, 4-6 Inverse Time Curves, 2-38, D-1:D18 IPSlogic, 2-86:2-88, 2-90, 3-4, 6-66, SP-2, SP-10, SP-13:SP-15 IPSutil Communications Software, 4-1, 4-30 IPSutil Installation and Setup, 4-30 F–2

376 Appendix – F S Screen Blanking, 3-1 Security Menu, 4-32 Self Test Error Codes, 1-2, C-1:C-2 Serial Communication Settings, 4-3 Serial Port, 4-1:4-4, 4-7:4-8, 4-28, 4-31, B-1, E-2 Setpoints and Time Settings, 2-14:2-15, Setup System Data, 3-6:3-9 Setup Unit Data, 3-5:3-6 Status LED Test, 6-70:6-71 Status/Metering, 3-9, 4-22 System Diagrams, 2-1, 2-8:2-9, SP-20:SP-21 System Setup, 3-6:3-9, 4-11 T Target & Status Indicators and Controls, 3-1:3-12 Target History, 3-10:3-11, 4-19 Target Indicators, 3-2 Target LED Test, 6-71 Target Reset, 3-2, 4-17, SP-14 Test Procedures, 6-6, 6-73 Third Harmonic Calibration, 6-77 Time Sync LED, 3-2, 4-18, 4-34, SP-14 Trip Circuit Monitoring, 2-85, 5-10:5-11, 6-65, SP-2, SP-10, SP-18:SP-19 W Window Menu/Help Menu, 4-22 F–3

377 M-3425A Instruction Book This Page Left Intentionally Blank F–4

378 Declaration of Conformity: Appendix – G G Appendix G–Declaration of Conformity G–1

379 DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY in accordanc e to ISO/IEC 17050-1:2004 ) ( Beckwith Electric CO, INC. Manufacturer’s Name: No. M-3425A 6190 118th Avenue North Manufacturer’s Address: Largo, FL 33773-3724 e M-3425A product confor ms to the following product stand ard that th The manufacturer hereby declares under our sole responsibility th as of January 14 , 2004 in accordance to Directive 2004/108/EC for equi pment incorporated into stationary installations: BS EN 50263:2000 Electromagnetic compatibility ( EMC ) Product standard for measuring relays and protection equipment Electromagnetic Emissions: EN 60255-25:2000 Conducted 150 kHz to 30MHz Radiated 30MHz to 1000MHz Class A Limits Electromagnetic Immunity 1 MHz Disturbance EN 60255-22-1:1988 ( ANSI C37.90.1:2002 ) Electrostatic Discharg e 8kV Contact; 15kV Air :1997 EN 60255-22-2 Radiated RF 80MHz to 1000MHz 10V/m, 80% AM ( 1kHz ) EN 60255-22-3:2001 Fast Transients 5ns/50ns Bursts @ 5kHz for 15ms 300ms for 1 min. ontrol lines 2kV power supply lines and earth 2kV signal data and c EN 60255-22-4:2002 th coupling power supply lines 12 Ω source impedance ne to Ear Surge 1Kv Line to Line coupling, 2Kv Li EN 61000-4-5:1995 Conducted RF 150KHz to 80MHz 10V emf EN 60255-22-6:2001 Power frequency magnetic field immunity test 30 A/m continuous EN 61000-4-8:1994 Voltage dips, short interruptions a nd voltage variations immunit y tests EN 61000-4-11:1994 afety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement, control, and S EN 61010-1: 2001 laboratory use Part 1. General requirements European Safety Directive Manufacturers Contact : Engineering Manager th 6190 118 Ave North Largo, FL 33773-3724 Tel ( 727 ) 544-2326

380 Legal Information Indemnification Patent The Seller shall not be liable for any property The units described in this manual are covered by damages whatsoever or for any loss or damage U.S. Patents, with other patents pending. arising out of, connected with, or resulting from this contract, or from the performance or breach Buyer shall hold harmless and indemnify the Seller, thereof, or from all services covered by or furnished its directors, officers, agents, and employees from under this contract. any and all costs and expense, damage or loss, resulting from any alleged infringementof United In no event shall the Seller be liable for special, States Letters Patent or rights accruing thereform or incidental, exemplary, or consequential damages, trademarks, whether federal, state, or common law, including but not limited to, loss of profits or arising from the Seller’s compliance with Buyer’s revenue, loss of use of the equipment or any designs, specifications, or instructions. associated equipment, cost of capital, cost of purchased power, cost of substitute equipment, facilities or services, downtime costs, or claims or damages of customers or employees of the Buyer Warranty for such damages, regardless of whether said claim or damages is based on contract, warranty, tort including negligence, or otherwise. Seller hereby warrants that the goods which are the subject matter of this contract will be manufactured Under no circumstances shall the Seller be liable in a good workmanlike manner and all materials for any personal injury whatsoever. used herein will be new and reasonably suitable for the equipment. Seller warrants that if, during a It is agreed that when the equipment furnished period of five years from date of shipment of the hereunder are to be used or performed in connec- equipment, the equipment rendered shall be found tion with any nuclear installation, facility, or by the Buyer to be faulty or shall fail to peform in activity, Seller shall have no liability for any accordance with Seller’s specifications of the nuclear damage, personal injury, property damage, product, Seller shall at his expense correct the or nuclear contamination to any property located at same, provided, however, that Buyers shall ship the or near the site of the nuclear facility. Buyer agrees equipment prepaid to Seller’s facility. The Seller’s to indemnify and hold harmless the Seller against responsibility hereunder shall be limited to replace- any and all liability associated therewith whatso- ment value of the equipment furnished under this ever whether based on contract, tort, or otherwise. contract. Nuclear installation or facility means any nuclear reactor and includes the site on which any of the Seller makes no warranties expressed or implied foregoing is located, all operations conducted on other than those set out above. Seller specifically such site, and all premises used for such opera- excludes the implied warranties of merchantibility tions. and fitness for a particular purpose. There are no warranties which extend beyond the description contained herein. In no event shall Seller be liable for Notice: consequential, exemplary, or punitive damages of whatever nature. Any illustrations and descriptions by Beckwith Electric Co., Inc. are for the sole purpose of Any equipment returned for repair must be sent identification. with transportation charges prepaid. The equipment must remain the property of the Buyer. The afore- The drawings and/or specifications enclosed herein mentioned warranties are void if the value of the are the proprietary property of Beckwith Electric unit is invoiced to the Seller at the time of return. Co., Inc., and are issued in strict confidence; therefore, shall not be used as a basis of reproduc- tion of the apparatus described therein without written permission of Beckwith Electric Co., Inc. No illustration or description contained herein shall be construed as an express warranty of affirmation, promise, description, or sample, and any and all such express warranties are specifically excluded nor shall such illustration or description imply a warranty that the product is merchantable or fit for a particular purpose. There shall be no warranties which extend beyond those contained in the Beckwith Electric Co., Inc. terms of sale. All rights reserved by Beckwith Electric Co., Inc. No reproduction may be made without prior written approval of the Company.

381 This Page Left Intentionally Blank

382 BECKWITH ELECTRIC CO., INC. 6190 - 118th Avenue North • Largo, Florida 33773-3724 U.S.A. (727) 544-2326 • FAX (727) 546-0121 PHONE - MAIL [email protected] E WEB PAGE www.bec kwithelectric.com ISO 9001:2008 10/11 800 - 3425A © 2004 Beckwith Electric Co. All Rights Reserved. IB - 08MC2 - Printed in USA

Related documents

625137

625137

2018-19 Nebraska All-Sports Record Book - Nebraska Communications Office -

More info »
ayout 1

ayout 1

0465039146-FM:FM 12/5/06 12:25 AM Page i C O D E

More info »
MFT user manual.book

MFT user manual.book

Mellanox Firmware Tools (MFT) User Manual Rev 3.2 Software ver. 4.9.0 Mellanox Technologies www.mellanox.com

More info »
NFA Regulatory Requirements: For FCMs, IBs, CPOs, and CTAs

NFA Regulatory Requirements: For FCMs, IBs, CPOs, and CTAs

NFA Regulatory Requirements For FCMs, IBs, CPOs, and CTAs October 2018 Revisions: Updated to incorporate the amendments to NFA Compliance Rule 2- 9 and its related Interpretive Notice to incorporate t...

More info »
pypguidetoschoolauthorization

pypguidetoschoolauthorization

Primary Years Programme Guide to school authorization: Primary Years Programme

More info »
more algebra

more algebra

MORE ON ALGEBRA 05E3 Contents 1. Introduction 3 2. Advice for the reader 3 3. Stably free modules 3 4. A comment on the Artin-Rees property 5 5. Fibre products of rings, I 6 6. Fibre products of rings...

More info »
ED594053

ED594053

This e -mail message has been approved for distribution by Dr. Henry R. Johnson, Jr., chief of staff. No hard copy will be provided. INFORMATION Office of Shared Accountability MONTGOMERY COUNTY PUBLI...

More info »
doj final opinion

doj final opinion

UNITED STAT ES DIS TRICT COURT IC F OR THE D ISTR T OF CO LU M BIA UNITED STAT F AMERICA, : ES O : : la in t if f, P 99 No. on cti l A vi Ci : 96 (GK) -24 : and : TOBACCO-F UND, : REE KIDS ACTION F : ...

More info »
2019 HS Planning Guide

2019 HS Planning Guide

2019-2020 HIGH SCHOOL PLANNING GUIDE

More info »
Functional Gastrointestinal Disorders: History, Pathophysiology, Clinical Features, and Rome IV

Functional Gastrointestinal Disorders: History, Pathophysiology, Clinical Features, and Rome IV

1279 – Gastroenterology 2016;150:1262 FUNCTIONAL GI OVERVIEW SECTION I: FGIDs: BACKGROUND INFORMATION Functional Gastrointestinal Disorders: History, Pathophysiology, Clinical Features, and Rome IV Do...

More info »
Surprise response as a probe for compressed memory states

Surprise response as a probe for compressed memory states

bioRxiv preprint first posted online May. 3, 2019; doi: http://dx.doi.org/10.1101/627133 . The copyright holder for this preprint (which was not peer-reviewed) is the author/funder, who has granted bi...

More info »
WIAIBE ENGLISH.PDF

WIAIBE ENGLISH.PDF

What is an IB education?

More info »
corporate brochure en

corporate brochure en

EDUCATION FOR A BETTER WORLD

More info »
MER United States 2016

MER United States 2016

Anti-money laundering and counter-terrorist financing measures United States Mutual Evaluation Report December 2016

More info »
2017 Q4 Single Source Project

2017 Q4 Single Source Project

The New York Times Company 2017 Annual Report The truth is hard. The truth is hidden. The truth must be pursued. The truth is hard to hear. The truth is rarely simple. The truth isn’t so obvious. The ...

More info »
The history of the IB

The history of the IB

The history of the IB © International Baccalaureate Organization 2017 ® ® ® | Baccalauréat International International Baccalaureate | Bachillerato Internacional

More info »
Within Our Reach

Within Our Reach

WITHIN OUR REACH An agenda for ensuring all New York students are prepared for college, careers, and active citizenship THE NEW YORK EQUITY COALITION

More info »
Allergen immunotherapy: A&nbsp;practice parameter third update

Allergen immunotherapy: A&nbsp;practice parameter third update

Task force report Allergen immunotherapy: A practice parameter third update s: Linda Cox, MD, Harold Nelson, MD, and Richard Lockey, MD Chief Editor Workgroup Contributor s: Christopher Calabria, MD, ...

More info »
City 2018 2019

City 2018 2019

2018–2019 CATALOG Fall 2018, Spring 2019, Summer 2019 1313 Park Blvd., San Diego, CA 92101 619-388-3400 www.sdcity.edu Ricky Shabazz, Ed.D. President San Diego City College is accredited by the Accred...

More info »